JP2019058264A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing generation of a disadvantage of a player.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: first control means 103 which controls progress of a game and can execute restoration processing of a game state when receiving power supply after stop of power supply; display means 5 capable of displaying a promotion display to promote shooting of game media in such a manner that the game media will flow down through a specific route 10R of flow-down routes 10R, 10L through which the game media flow down and restoration display concerning the restoration processing; notification means 30 which is means different from the display means 5 and can execute promotion notification to promote shooting of the game media in such a manner that the game media will flow down through the specific route 10R; and second control means 120 which controls display in the display means 5 on the basis of information transmitted from the first control means 103. The second control means 120 can control to display the promotion display as well as the restoration display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when power is again supplied after the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, the variable display device (display means) is restored from the state where power is not supplied (restoration of gaming state) There is an indication that it has done. Further, among such gaming machines, there is a variable display device that displays that the gaming state is a specific gaming state, as well as indicating that the state has been restored from the state where power is not supplied (for example, a patent Reference 1).

JP 2002-143523 A

  However, in Patent Document 1, the variable display device (display means) does not display which one of a plurality of paths through which the game medium can flow the game medium should be discharged when the gaming state is restored. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may suffer disadvantages.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player.

In order to solve the above-mentioned subject, a game machine according to claim 1 of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can execute a game using a game medium (for example, game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, big hit game state, positive change state, short time state etc.) Machines, slot machines, etc.)
A launcher capable of launching game media based on a player's operation (eg, a hit operating handle or a hit launching device);
The first control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing the game state recovery process (for example, Sa41 to Sa48 in the game control main process) when controlling the progress of the game and receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply. When,
A promotion display (for example, a right-handed notification image) for promoting firing of a game medium so as to flow down a specific channel (for example, the right game area 10R) of the flow-down paths for game media to flow down, and the recovery Display means (for example, effect display device 5) capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) regarding processing;
Notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 30) capable of promoting notification for promoting the emission of game media to flow down the specific path, which is a means different from the display means;
A second control for controlling display on the display unit based on information transmitted from the first control unit (for example, a right-handed notification LED lighting specification command in the embodiment and a game state specification command in the modification 1) Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
A detection unit (for example, an out-of-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 140, etc.) capable of detecting a game medium (eg, game area 9010 etc.) used for the game;
A signal line (for example, a signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136) to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, and the like);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 which executes the error notification process of FIG. 137);
The predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which becomes the first start winning opening, the normal variable winning ball device 906B which becomes the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D which becomes the general winning area, and the big winning opening Payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media on the basis of winning on a special variable winning ball device 907
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state etc. Specifically, a state of a probability change flag, a short time flag, and a round game in progress flag all off) For example, predetermined information (such as the number of hit balls) and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls awarded by winning on each winning opening etc.) For example, information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc. in FIG. 140) capable of displaying the performance information in FIG.
Equipped with
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is limited (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIG. 138 or 139, a performance display is restricted, etc.)
The second control means can perform control to display the prompt display together with the recovery display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 27, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed notification process and a power failure recovery screen display) A part that displays a power failure recovery screen and a right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 by executing processing
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced when the gaming state is restored.

A gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The second control unit can control the notification by the notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of S 705 and S 708 to turn on the LED 30 for right-handed notification) Part, or the part that performs the processing of S711 and turns off the LED 30 for right-handed notification),
Control is performed to display the promotion display on the display unit together with the recovery display based on the reception of the specific route notification execution command for executing the promotion notification by the notification unit from the first control unit (for example, As shown in FIG. 25, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command has been received in the processing of S704 and S707, the processing of S705 and S706 or S708 and S709 is executed, and the right-handed driving is performed. A part to start the lighting of the notification LED 30 and the display of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the prompting display on the display means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands.

A game machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the game machine according to claim 1 or means 1, wherein
The first control means can transmit a command to the second control means at transmission timings at predetermined time intervals (e.g., the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 10 by the CPU 103 every 2 ms) Execute command control process (S20) and send command to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control), it is a command different from the specific route notification execution command and notifies that the gaming state is restored Send a recovery command (for example, a power failure recovery specification command) at the transmission timing at the same predetermined time interval as the specific route notification execution command (for example, right The transmission setting of the notification LED lighting specification command and the power failure recovery specification command is performed, and the game control timer interrupt process of the same interrupt is performed. By executing the command control processing at the portion to transmit the right-handed informing LED lighting specified command and the power interruption recovery designated command)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the display start time of the recovery display and the display start time of the promotion display are different, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the promotion display being missed.

A gaming machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, means 1 and means 2, wherein
A specific route corresponding light emitting unit (for example, a right-handed display unit 25D), which is a unit different from the display unit and the notification unit and can notify by light that the route where the game medium should be fired is the specific route. Light emitting means (for example, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C) Equipped
The first control means is capable of controlling light emission and extinguishment of the light emitting means, and a specific route notification execution command for starting the promotion notification in the notification means in conjunction with the light emission control of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit While performing control to transmit (for example, the right-handed LED lighting specification is specified in processing of Sa46 and Sa47 of the game control main processing which CPU103 shows in Figure 9 and processing of S302 and S303 of big hit opening pretreatment which is shown in Figure 18 The command transmission setting is performed, and the right-handed display unit 25D is turned on, and the specific route notification execution command for ending the promotion notification in the notification unit is transmitted along with the turn-off control of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit. Control (for example, the CPU 103 executes S196 and S197 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 17 or FIG. In the process of S316a and S316b of the big hit end process shown, and the process of S251 and S252 of the small hit end process shown in FIG. 22, the transmission setting of the right-handed LED turning-off designation command is performed and the right-handed display unit 25D is turned off. Part to do)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission state of the specific route corresponding light emitting unit and the promotion notification in the notification unit become interlocked, the promotion notification in the notification unit can be appropriately performed.

A gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
Control is performed to display the promotion display on the display unit together with the recovery display based on the reception of the recovery command notifying that the gaming state has been restored from the first control unit (for example, in the first modification) As shown, the part for which the effect control CPU 120 displays the power failure recovery screen or the right-handed notification image on the effect display device based on the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery designation command received by the CPU 103)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the prompting display on the display means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands.

A gaming machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 and means 1 to 4,
The game medium can be changed to a first state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium can not win or difficult to win and a second state (for example, open state) in which the game medium is easier to win than the first state. Variable winning devices (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B) provided in the specific route;
A game value giving unit capable of giving a predetermined game value based on that the game medium has won the variable winning device (for example, in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 by the CPU 103, the prize ball process (S12) Part to run),
Equipped with
The first control means is capable of controlling the variable winning device to the second state in the advantageous state, and the variable winning is achieved when the gaming state recovered by the first control means is the advantageous state. A display to the effect that the device changes to the second state can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of S625 of the power failure recovery screen display process shown in FIG. The part that displays the image while the big winning opening is open)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable winning device changes to the second state in which the game medium can be won when the gaming state is restored, thereby reducing the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can do.

A gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 and means 1 to 5,
And an abnormality determination unit capable of determining an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities (for example, a portion that executes abnormality determination processing in which the CPU 103 determines the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 12) ,
When the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, the notification is ended when the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified, and the notification about the determined abnormality is performed. Abnormality notification means (for example, when an error having a higher priority than an error being notified is determined in S407 of the main side error processing, if a game stop flag is not set, an error with a high priority error By transmitting a designated command to the effect control board 12, the error informing process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 executes the error informing of an error with a high priority, which has already been executed. A part to execute instead of
The state control means (for example, the CPU 103 prohibits the firing of the gaming ball in S411 and controls the game to stop) in accordance with the judgment of abnormality by the abnormality judgment means, based on the judgment of abnormality. Part),
Equipped with
When a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state (for example, a game stop state in which a game stop flag is set), the abnormality notification means Continues the notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, an error with higher priority than the error in the notification) If it is determined that the game stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 does not transmit the error designation command of the high priority error to the effect control board 12. Part that continues to notify the already running error without executing the error notification of the high priority error)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent that the event that is triggered to be controlled to the predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm.

A gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 and 1 to 6, wherein
The second control means can display a plurality of options (for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (B) as the second modification, the effect display device 5 can be outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R during a big hit game) A part that displays multiple options for each BGM),
When any one of the plurality of options is selected, the display of the plurality of options is ended, and control execution means for executing control according to the selected options is provided (for example, a modification) As shown in Example 2, when the player or the like selects any one of the options by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A and performs the determination operation, the display of the image shown in FIG. 33B ends. , Display of an image as a big hit game effect on the effect display device 5, and a portion where BGM corresponding to the determined option is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The control execution means executes control according to a predetermined one of the plurality of options when power supply is resumed when power supply is stopped while displaying the plurality of options (for example, As shown in the second modification, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in a state where it is not determined which BGM to output yet, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reactivated. Of the options displayed in FIG. 33B, the BGM of 1 (the song C in this modification 2) is determined as the BGM to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the speakers 8L and 8R of the determined BGM are selected. To start output of)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when power supply is stopped in a state where a plurality of options are displayed, regardless of which of the plurality of options is selected, when power supply is resumed, Since the control according to the predetermined option is executed, the processing can be reduced.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means C1-means C4 is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a gaming machine that displays information (base value) on the number of hit balls (number of hit balls, number of out balls) and the number of winning balls as disclosed in JP-A-10-118314. Are known. However, for example, there is a risk that incorrect information may be displayed if the out-of-sphere detection is not accurately performed. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing display of incorrect information.

The game machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine, slot machine, etc.) capable of executing a game and capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state, positive change state, time reduction state, etc.) advantageous to the player
A detection unit (for example, an out-of-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 140, etc.) capable of detecting a game medium (eg, game area 9010 etc.) used for the game;
A signal line (for example, a signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136) to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, and the like);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 which executes the error notification process of FIG. 137);
The predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which becomes the first start winning opening, the normal variable winning ball device 906B which becomes the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D which becomes the general winning area, and the big winning opening Payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media on the basis of winning on a special variable winning ball device 907
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state etc. Specifically, a state of a probability change flag, a short time flag, and a round game in progress flag all off) For example, predetermined information (such as the number of hit balls) and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls awarded by winning on each winning opening etc.) For example, the information display unit (eg, display monitor 901130 of FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying (eg, performance display etc.) of FIG.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is limited (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, a performance display is restricted, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing an incorrect display.

The game machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display mode by the information display means is changed that the abnormality in the reception state is detected (for example, as shown in FIG. 138 or FIG. 139) To notify by changing etc.).
According to this, it can confirm without providing a new display means.

The game machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or C2;
The abnormality detection unit can detect a break in the signal line (for example, it can be detected by monitoring a signal input from the out-of-ball detector 90710).
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, the game effect lamp 909, the speakers 908L, 908R, the display unit of the card unit, the calling lamp device, the hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected.
According to this, it can be recognized without performing the door opening operation.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3;
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-of-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit which can be disposed on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 140 (B)).
This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to means B1 to B9 described below.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
In a specific period (one minute, two minutes, or five minutes from general winning) after the game medium has entered the general winning area, predetermined starting conditions (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening, effective starting winning, reach) Providing an effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (prediction advance effect), specific effect G (variation result advance effect)) when the establishment of the state is established. It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 901 of the 47th to 49th effects modes) which is characterized by the present invention.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is It can enhance the interest until it is implemented.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Informing enabling to identify that it is a state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (in which one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning in the general winning opening) notification effect execution to execute notification effect It is a game machine characterized by further having a means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
It should be noted that, as a notification effect that informs in a distinguishable manner that it is in a state after the game medium has entered, the player whether the predetermined period set in advance has passed since the game medium entered the general winning area There are both effects that are difficult to grasp, and effects that the player can easily grasp whether a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect that a sound effect is output for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area, and as the latter effect, the general winning area There is an effect that the character is continuously displayed on the image display device from immediately after the game medium enters until the predetermined specific period (for example, one minute) elapses.

The game machine of means B3 is
It is a game machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect for specifying whether or not the specific period is specified (specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed.

The game machine of means B4 is
It is a game machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs according to the mode of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears The period is 5 minutes)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, the interest can be improved by focusing attention on the form of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the fact that game media has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) is within a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). Select one of the specific periods, determine the effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 905) based on the selected specific period, and notify the effect according to the determined effect mode (character specific period Execute the effect to be displayed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, one minute) is selected, in the first effect mode (for example, the display of the character A) than when the second specific period (for example, two minutes) is selected. It is good to make the ratio to be determined high. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, the display of the character B) is more than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is good to make the ratio to be determined high.
In the case where the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond one to one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, 3 minutes for character C) ), The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, and It is preferable to execute notification effect (effect to display the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any game machine selected from means B1 to B4;
The variable display means is a starting condition based on the game medium entering the starting winning area (when the number of first reserved memories has not reached the upper limit, the gaming ball wins at the first starting winning opening (effective starting winning) ) The start condition (controlled by the big hit gaming state) after the game ball has won (effective start winning) in the second starting winning opening when the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value The variable display is performed based on the fact that the variable display of the special drawing game is not executed) and
The effect executing means is an advance notice effect for notifying a display result of the variable display that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (in the start winning memory display area 905H, it corresponds to a variable display game to be a notice target) It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the forty-fifth effect mode and the forty-fifth effect mode) according to the present invention, characterized by executing as the specific effect the on-hold change effect of changing the display part from the normal mode to the special mode.
According to this, the game medium enters the general winning area by creating an interest of giving notice of the display result of the variable display whose start condition is not established, triggered by the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is performed.

The game machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) And a holding information display control unit (effect control CPU 90120) for displaying the displayed portion on the display unit (image display unit 905),
The advance notice is for giving a notice of the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the mode of the hold information (if the start winning determination result specification command is a command for designating a "big hit", the concerned) It is characterized in that the display area corresponding to the command is a hold change effect that changes from the normal mode (for example, blue or red) to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for specifying “off”. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of giving notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, triggered by the entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means informs in an identifiable manner that the game medium has entered the general winning area by displaying objects (characters A to C) on the display device. Immediately after winning, one of the characters A to C appears)
The preview effect is an effect that can be recognized by the player when the object changes the mode of the hold information (a mode of a display portion corresponding to the special figure game in which the character being displayed performs some action It is an effect of changing the mode from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of game media into the general winning area and the notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not established by the common object, and the game to the general winning area It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific effect.
Specifically, the player can recognize that the object changes the mode of the hold information by setting that the mode of the hold information also changes with the change of the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The game machine of means B8 is
Any game machine selected from means B1 to B7,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F or the specific effect G is not executed if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the character display period). is there.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested as to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The game machine of means B9 is
Any game machine selected from means B1 to B8,
There are a plurality (four of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) of the general winning area, and
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when one wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, one minute, two minutes, or five minutes are specified from the general winning combination If it is possible to become a period (characters A to C can appear), but win a third general prize 50C or a fourth general prize port 9050D, only a five-minute period after the general prize can be a specific period (only character C Is a game machine characterized by being capable of appearing)).
According to this, the interest can be improved by focusing attention on which general winning area the game medium enters.

  Further, the embodiments for implementing the invention described later include the invention relating to the following means B10 to B21.

The game machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Motion detection means (operation button 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
After the game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-run, simulated run) is detected when the action detection means detects the player's action (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 50th effect mode to the 53rd effect mode) comprising an effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing an advance notice effect and a chance eye advance notice effect). .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the special effect is executed triggered by the operation of the player, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered into the general winning area is notified so as to be identifiable (the button icon 904000 is increased for each winning in the general winning opening in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode, 52nd In the effect form and the 53rd effect form, the notice effect (“cut in”, “pseudo ream”, “chance eye”) that can be executed for each winning on the general winning opening is determined, and characters 904000a according to the determination result It is a game machine characterized by further including notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing notification effects (displayed through ~ 904000c).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The game machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine of means B11,
According to the type of operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling the specific effect, the mode of the notification effect ("cut in" character 904000a, "simulated link") This gaming machine is characterized in that the characters 904000b and the characters 904000c of "chance eye" are different.
According to this, it is possible for the player to recognize which type of operation makes it possible to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The ratio at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A of the left gaming area 9010A or In the case of winning in the second general winning opening 9050B, notification is performed at a higher rate than in the case of winning in the third general winning opening 9050 C or the fourth general winning opening 9050 D of the right gaming area 9010 B) It is a gaming machine.
According to this, the interest can be improved by focusing attention on which general winning area the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B14 is
Any game machine selected from means B11 to B13,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won In the case where either of the character 904000a of "cut in" and the character 904000b of "pseudo ream" can be displayed, and the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, " It is a game machine characterized by being able to display either the character 904000a of "cut in" and the character 904000c of "the chance eye".
According to this, the interest can be improved by focusing attention on which general winning area the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B15 is
Any game machine selected from means B11 to B14,
The ratio at which the informing effect is executed is different according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the normal winning opening is achieved in the normal state) In the case (when winning in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A), when winning in the general winning opening in the probability change state or time reduction state (the right of the right gaming area 9010B 3) Notification will be made at a higher rate than when winning in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately change the interest according to the state of the game.

The game machine of means B16 is
Any game machine selected from means B11 to B15,
The mode of the notification effect differs according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the When the character 904000b of "run" can be displayed, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the character 904000c of "chance of an eye" become displayable in the definite variation state or the short time state, it becomes possible.)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately change the interest according to the state of the game.

The game machine of means B17 is
Any game machine selected from means B10 to B16,
The effect executing means is capable of executing the specific effect when the predetermined operation is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode, the general effect) The pseudo-announcement effect can be executed when the winning opening is won more than twice, and the chance eye preview effect can be executed when the normal winning opening is won three times or more)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to make the number of game media entering the general winning area interesting.

The game machine of means B18 is
Any game machine selected from means B10 to B17,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B In the case of winning, the notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, the interest can be improved by focusing attention on which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any game machine selected from means B10 to B18,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening When winning in 9050B, it is possible to execute either the cut-in notice effect or the pseudo continuous notice effect, and when winning in the third general prize port 9050C or the fourth general prize port 9050D, the cut-in advance effect And one of the chance eye announcement effects can be performed)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, the interest can be improved by focusing attention on which general winning area the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B20 is
Any game machine selected from means B10 to B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when the general winning opening is won in the normal state ( In the case of winning in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A) when winning in the general winning opening in the probability change state or time reduction state (third general in the right gaming area 9010B In the case of winning in the winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is notified that it is possible to execute the specific effect at a higher rate))
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately change the interest according to the state of the game.

The game machine of means B21 is
Any game machine selected from means B10 to B20,
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st and 53rd effect modes and in the normal state, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-series) It is possible to execute any of the advance notice effects, and in the case of a definite change state or a short time state, it is possible to execute either the cut-in advance notice effect or the chance eye advance notice effect)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it becomes possible to appropriately change the interest according to the state of the game.

  In addition, the embodiments of the invention described later include the invention according to means B22 to means B28 described below.

The game machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point addition effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result advance effect, specific effect B: prefetched advance effect);
When the variable display is being carried out (within a period when the variable display of the special symbol is being carried out, within a period when the variable display of the special symbol is being carried out or decided to be carried out) When the game media has entered and when the variable display is not being executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed and it is also decided to be executed The ratio at which the specific effect is executed is different when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period in which the game is not performed (the pachinko machine according to the twenty-seventh embodiment to the thirty-second embodiment). It is a gaming machine 901).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can.

The game machine of means B23 is
The gaming machine of means B22,
It further comprises an advantageous state control means (microcomputer control computer 90100 for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect (specific effect C: point addition effect) not related to the display result of the variable display. A gaming machine characterized by the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the 27th and 29th effect modes. is there.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B24 is
The gaming machine of means B22,
It further comprises an advantageous state control means (microcomputer control computer 90100 for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result advance effect, specific effect B: prefetched advance effect), and the general winning area is performed when the variable display is not executed. This game machine is not executed when a game medium enters the game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of the 28th effect mode and the 30th effect mode).
According to this, when the variable display is being performed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point addition effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result advance effect, specific effect B: prefetched advance effect);
When the variable display is being carried out (within a period when the variable display of the special symbol is being carried out, within a period when the variable display of the special symbol is being carried out or decided to be carried out) When the game media has entered and when the variable display is not being executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed and it is also decided to be executed Different specific effects are executed when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period when the game is not being performed (the 31st effect mode and the 32nd effect mode pachinko gaming machine 901) ).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and the variable display is not executed, the different specific effects are different, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The game machine of means B26 is
The gaming machine of means B25,
It further comprises an advantageous state control means (microcomputer control computer 90100 for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is being performed, effects related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variation result advance effect, specific effect B: prefetched effect) As the specific effect,
When the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect (specific effect C: point addition effect) not related to the display result of the variable display is executed as the specific effect. It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 901 of the 31st effect mode and the 32nd effect mode) which is characterized by the present invention.
According to this, when variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when game media enter the general winning region, and also when the variable display is not executed, the general winning region It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when game media enter.

The game machine of means B27 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B26 (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the twenty-seventh producing mode to the 32nd producing mode),
The ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is being executed (for example, the special figure game at the time of winning on the general winning opening) Of whether or not is executed, the classification of the number of reserved memories at the time of winning to the general winning opening, and further, the gaming state at the time of winning to the general winning opening is a normal state, or a definite change state or a short time state To perform specific effects at different rates depending on the division, etc.)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to give an interest in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B28 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B27 (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the twenty-seventh presentation mode to the thirty-second presentation mode),
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is being executed, different specific effects are executed (for example, a special figure game is executed when winning a general winning opening) Whether the game status is normal or whether it is a definite change state or a time-saving state when winning a prize at a general winning entry To perform different types of specific effects according to the division etc.)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to give an interest in the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the means B29-the means B39 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 66), a winning percentage for a starting winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and characters wearing different color clothes are selected according to the calculated winning percentage. A gaming machine has been proposed which executes effect display to be displayed. However, it is necessary not only to display on the information display means information on the number of game media having entered the entry area such as the start winning opening, but also to make the information more visible. The invention according to means B29 to means B39 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information on the number of game media that has entered the entry area.

The invention relating to the means B29 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (game balls) can enter. ,
Information capable of displaying entry information (for example, the number of winnings on the general winning opening, the number of winnings on the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings on the second starting winning opening, etc.) regarding the number of gaming media having entered the entry area Display means (image display device 905);
The information display means is configured to display effect information (for example, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, etc.) different from the entry information in an area where the visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as shown in FIG. It is a game machine characterized by displaying in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winning prizes is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that has entered the entry area.

The invention relating to the means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the entry information regardless of the form of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 75, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the fourth symbol) Whether or not the variable display is displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α The number of displayed winnings can be updated according to the winnings on each winning opening)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized regardless of the aspect of the effect information.

The invention concerning means B31 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (game balls) can enter. ,
Error detection means (error detection sensor group 9026) for detecting errors (eg, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.);
Information capable of displaying entry information (for example, the number of winnings on the general winning opening, the number of winnings on the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings on the second starting winning opening, etc.) regarding the number of gaming media having entered the entry area Display means (image display device 905);
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) notifying the occurrence of the error to each winning opening as exemplified in the area where the visibility of the entry information is not impeded (see FIGS. 75 and 76). The game machine is characterized by displaying in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that has entered the entry area.

The invention concerning means B32 is
The gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as shown in FIG. 76, whether or not an error message is displayed, a general winning opening) The number of winnings to, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings for the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings for each winning opening. The number of winnings can be updated)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, even when the error information is displayed, the entry information can be visually recognized.

The invention relating to the means B33 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (game balls) can enter. ,
Information capable of displaying entry information (for example, the number of winnings on the general winning opening, the number of winnings on the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings on the second starting winning opening, etc.) regarding the number of gaming media having entered the entry area Display means (image display device 905);
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display (for example, the display result of the finalized symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) executed based on the game medium entering the start area, the entry information The game machine is characterized in that it is displayed in an area where the visibility of the character is not impeded (the second area β different from the first area α where the number of winnings to each winning opening is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 75). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the entry information regarding the number of game media that has entered the entry area.

The invention relating to the means B34 is
The gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the variable display is being performed (regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed as exemplified in FIG. 75, and Regardless of whether or not the fourth symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc. You can display it, and it is possible to update the displayed number of winnings according to the winnings to each winning opening)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, even when the variable display is being performed, the entry information can be visually recognized.

The invention concerning means B35 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to B34,
Operation means (operation button 9030) which can be operated;
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the entry information on the information display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 38, based on the setting by the operation button 9030, each winning opening And an effect control CPU 90120) for setting whether or not to display, in the first area α, winning information related to the number of winnings.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any game machine selected from means B29 to B35, wherein
Operation means (operation button 9030) operable by the player;
Aggregation period setting means for setting the aggregation period of the entry information according to the operation of the operation means (the effect control CPU 90120 for setting the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030 as exemplified in FIG. 79); It is a game machine characterized by further having.
According to this, it is possible to set the aggregation period according to the determination of the player.

The invention concerning means B37 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to B36,
It further comprises gaming state control means (microcomputer 90100 for gaming control) capable of controlling the gaming state (big hit gaming state, positive changing state, and time saving state, or low base state and high base state, etc.),
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as exemplified in FIG. 78, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately) Is)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to grasp entry information according to the game state.

The invention relating to the means B38 is
The gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special view, variable display of the second special view) based on the game medium entering the start area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (The first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B) further,
The gaming state control means is in a low frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (the second state) (2) It can be controlled to the high base state in which the high opening control for the start start winning opening is executed,
The information display means is configured to enter the entry information related to the period controlled to the low frequency state (general winning number in low base state exemplified in FIG. 78) and the entry related to the period controlled to the high frequency state It is a game machine characterized by being capable of displaying information (general winning number in high base state illustrated in FIG. 78, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention relating to the means B39 is
Any game machine selected from means B29 to means B38, wherein
An alert is issued when the entry information satisfies the predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 79, an alert is issued when the set number of winnings per counting period does not meet a predetermined reference value) The gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises notification means (image display device 905) for displaying a message.
According to this, it can be easily grasped that the entry information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  Further, the embodiments of the invention described later include the invention relating to the means B40 and the means B41 described below. Conventionally, as shown in JP-A-2015-139628 (FIG. 65, FIG. 66), when the player accepts the start of the game by inputting a password, the winning percentage to the start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. There has been proposed a gaming machine which executes effect display for displaying characters wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning percentage. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game arcade) to confirm information about the game medium entering the entry area such as the start winning hole. The invention relating to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above situation, and is to allow only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk at the game arcade) to confirm the information.

The invention pertaining to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which game media (for example, game balls) can enter A gaming machine 901),
Granting means (eg, a microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a game value (for example, winning balls) based on the game medium passing through the entry area;
Specific operation means (for example, mode switching switch 9031, reset button) whose operation by the player has been disabled;
Notification means (not shown) for reporting accumulated value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening shown in FIG. 50, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening and the total number of payouts) related to the cumulative value of gaming value awarded by the granting means For example, an image display device 905),
The notification means notifies the accumulated value information on the basis of the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the mode switching switch 9031 is operated to be in the maintenance mode to display information on the number-of-winnings management table as an image display device Displayed on 905)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, only the person other than the player (for example, a store clerk at the game arcade) can confirm the information.

  The “specific operation means in which the operation by the player is disabled” may be, for example, a means that can be operated by a store clerk in the game arcade or an inspector / inspector of the game machine.

The invention according to means B41 is
The gaming machine of means B40,
It has effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) which executes the effect regarding the game,
The notification means notifies the accumulated value information according to an aspect according to the aspect of the effect to be executed by the effect execution means (for example, the character appearing during the advance effect or the reach effect performs the information of the winning number management table Display aloud and output sound)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to make it easy to recognize which type of game machine information is from the notification mode.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the means B42-the means B51 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 100), when the game ball enters the normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a player is notified that occurrence of a memory connection will occur when the counted number counted up reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, the number of balls is counted up and displayed one by one by uniformly entering the game balls into the normal winning opening. Therefore, in the gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is a room to further increase the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. The invention relating to the means B42 to the means B51 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

The game machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start entrance), (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
The specific effect (the specific effect D for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 stepwise from at least 0 stages to the maximum 10 stages in a stepwise manner according to the entry of game media into the general winning area) A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) that can be executed;
Depending on the state (when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed and the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, etc.) when the game medium enters the general winning area, the specification The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect to increase the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different) is different.
It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 901 of the 33rd effect mode-the 37th effect mode) characterized by the above.
According to this, according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the interest rate when the game medium enters the general winning area is enhanced by changing the ratio at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Can.

The game machine of means B43 is
The gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of a decorative pattern) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To be
Depending on the remaining period of variable display (when the remaining time to derive and display the finalized design symbol is 10 seconds or more and when it is less than 10 seconds) when the game medium enters the general winning area The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 34th presentation mode) is characterized in that the proportions in which the presentation mode changes in the specific presentation are different.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect by changing the ratio at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
Remaining period of variable display being executed when game media enters the general winning area (the remaining time until the derivation display of the finalized decorative symbol is 10 seconds or more, and the case of being less than 10 seconds ) And the display mode (big hit symbol, missing symbol) of the variable display being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different It is good. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect may be different (for example, it may change at a high rate if it is a big hit symbol, and it may change at a lower rate if it is an off symbol) .

The game machine of means B44 is
It is a game machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). And the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot and the big hit gaming state are not controlled). ,
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 90100 for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol);
The advance notice effect (pre-reading advance notice effect) for giving notice that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display serving as a target of pre-reading notice effect is executed Further includes a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) to be executed prior to
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display to be the target of the preliminary announcement is executed (target of preview preliminary announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command The gaming machine characterized by the fact that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different according to the classification of the variable display frequency until the variable display being executed is executed (a pachinko gaming machine of the 35th effect mode) 901).
According to this, according to the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display to be the object of the notice effect is executed, the rate of change of the effect mode in the specific effect is different. It can further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display to be the target of the preliminary announcement is executed (target of preview preliminary announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command According to the classification of the number of times of variable display until the variable display being executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, off symbol) of the variable display to be targeted for the advance notice effect, in the specific effect The rate at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the number of times of variable display until the variable display (variable display which is the target of the advance notice) is executed is a predetermined range. When it is inside (for example, 2 times or less), the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different according to the display result of the variable display which is the object of the advance effect (high in the case of big hit symbol) It changes at a rate, and may change at a rate lower than that in the case of an out pattern.

The game machine of means B45 is
Any game machine selected from means B42 to means B44, wherein
It further comprises reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing reach effect along with the variable display (variable display of the first special view, variable display of the second special view, variable display of the decorative symbol),
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach change) and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing when the gaming ball wins the general winning opening is after the reach state establishment in reach fluctuation is established), the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. Game machine (pachinko game machine 901 of the 36th effect mode).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect The different proportions can further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means B46 is
Any game machine selected from means B42 to B45,
It has a plurality of the general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D The gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a thirty-seventh aspect of the present invention, characterized in that the ratio at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on whether the game ball has won any of the above.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect by changing the proportion of the effect mode changing in the specific effect according to the general winning area in which the game medium has entered.

The game machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start entrance), (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
The specific effect (the specific effect D for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 stepwise from at least 0 stages to the maximum 10 stages in a stepwise manner according to the entry of game media into the general winning area) A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) that can be executed;
Depending on the state (when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed and the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, etc.) when the game medium enters the general winning area, the specification The stage at which the rendering mode changes in the stage is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) at which the filling area 902100 a in the gauge image 902100 is increased is different)
It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 901 of the 38th effect mode-the 42nd effect mode) characterized by the above.
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can.

The game machine of means B48 is
The gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of a decorative pattern) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To be
Depending on the remaining period of variable display (when the remaining time to derive and display the finalized design symbol is 10 seconds or more and when it is less than 10 seconds) when the game medium enters the general winning area The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 39th presentation mode) is characterized in that the stage of the presentation mode changes in the specific presentation.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, whereby the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
Remaining period of variable display being executed when game media enters the general winning area (the remaining time until the derivation display of the finalized decorative symbol is 10 seconds or more, and the case of being less than 10 seconds And the step of changing the effect mode in the specific effect depending on the display result (big hit symbol, off symbol) of the variable display being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. It is good. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol being executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, even if the stage in which the presentation mode changes in the specific effect is different (for example, the number of stages changes when it becomes the big hit symbol, the number of stages changes less than it when it becomes the missing symbol) good.

The game machine of means B49 is
It is a game machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening). And the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot and the big hit gaming state are not controlled). ,
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 90100 for game control) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol);
The advance notice effect (pre-reading advance notice effect) for giving notice that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display serving as a target of pre-reading notice effect is executed Further includes a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) to be executed prior to
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display to be the target of the preliminary announcement is executed (target of preview preliminary announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command A game machine (a pachinko gaming machine according to a forty-fifth embodiment mode), wherein the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different according to the classification of the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed. 901).
According to this, according to the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display to be the object of the notice effect is executed, the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It can further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area to the time when the variable display to be the target of the preliminary announcement is executed (target of preview preliminary announcement effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command According to the classification of the number of times of variable display until the variable display being executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, off symbol) of the variable display to be targeted for the advance notice effect, in the specific effect The stages at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, when the game medium enters the general winning area, the number of times of variable display until the variable display (variable display which is the target of the advance notice) is executed is a predetermined range. When it is inside (for example, 2 times or less), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different according to the display result of the variable display which is the object of the advance effect (for example, when it becomes the big hit symbol) The number of steps may be changed, and the number of steps may be changed less than that in the case of a lost pattern.

The game machine of means B50 is
Any game machine selected from means B47 to B49,
It further comprises reach effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing reach effect along with the variable display (variable display of the first special view, variable display of the second special view, variable display of the decorative symbol),
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach change) and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing when the gaming ball wins the general winning opening is after the reach state establishment in reach fluctuation is established), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. Game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of the forty first effect mode).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after the execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect The different stages can further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means B51 is
Any game machine selected from means B47 to B50,
It has a plurality of the general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
Depending on the general winning area where the game medium has entered (when the game ball has won in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the forty-second effect mode) is characterized in that the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on whether the game ball has won any of the above.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect by changing the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect according to the general winning area in which the game medium has entered.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the means B52-the means B56 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 100), when the game ball enters the normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a player is notified that occurrence of a memory connection will occur when the counted number counted up reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery. In the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, an effect (count-up display) is executed each time the gaming ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, when game media do not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not taken into consideration in the prior art. The invention according to means B52 to means B56 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and is to make it possible to grasp that a game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The game machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (variable display of first special figure, variable display of second special figure, variable display of decorative symbol) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) for executing
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
If the number of entry of gaming media into the general winning area during the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in 10 minutes during which it is detected that the game is detected is 0, If the number of winning prizes to the general winning prize opening in 30 minutes in which it is detected being medium is less than 3, etc., a specific effect (an image imitating the form of the general winning prize mouth and “general winnings not found. And a specific effect execution unit (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying the notification image 902200 and the like including characters on the image display device 905.
According to this, the player or the game arcade can grasp that the number of entering game media into the general winning area is smaller than the predetermined number.

The game machine of means B53 is
The gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means (determination as to whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game setting and player setting in the display setting table Control CPU 90120),
A store clerk operation accepting unit (display changeover switch 9032) for accepting setting operation by the store clerk;
The setting means performs setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means (a specific effect E (informing of no general winning based on the setting of the display switching switch 9032) , Informing that the number of general winnings is small)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game arcade as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
It further comprises storage means (winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of game media entered into the general winning area (number of winnings for 30 minutes),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entry stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power interruption (the value of the winning number counter area is erased by power interruption).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for holding the memory of the number of entries at the time of power interruption.

The game machine of means B55 is
Any game machine selected from means B52 to B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the ratio at which the specific effect is performed is different (for example, the specific effect E is performed at a different ratio in the case of the normal state and in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

The game machine of means B56 is
Any game machine selected from means B52 to means B55, wherein
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in different modes in the case of the normal state and in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the means B57-the means B64 shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as shown in JP-A-2015-80531 (FIG. 116), the number of award balls (value given) obtained by the game medium entering the big winning opening during the execution of the big hit game, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes it from the number of prize balls (granted value) obtained by the game medium entering the regular winning opening (general winning area). In the gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game arcade or the player is not reflected as to whether or not the effect is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. The invention relating to the means B57 to the means B64 is made in view of the above situation, and reflects the intention of the game arcade or the player regarding whether to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. Intended to be possible.

The game machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information of the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, by the setting of the display switching switch 9032 and by the operation button 9030 Based on the setting, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, which increases the object each time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the specific effect A: variation result notice effect, the specific effect B: pre-reading Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing notice effect);
It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising setting means (a mode changeover switch 901, a display changeover switch 9032 and an operation button 9030) for setting whether or not the execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect execution means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game arcade or the player as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B58 is
The gaming machine of means B57,
The system further comprises a store clerk operation acceptance unit (mode switch switch 901, display switch 9032) for receiving setting operation by a store clerk,
The setting means performs setting for permitting execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the store clerk operation receiving means (when the maintenance mode is in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, the winning number management table The information is displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed based on the setting of the display switching switch 9032 to increase the object every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the specific effect A : Fluctuation result notice effect can be executed, specific effect B: Preread notice effect can be executed)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game arcade as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B59 is
It is a game machine of means B57 or means B58,
It further comprises a player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player,
When the setting operation is accepted by the player operation accepting means, the setting means performs setting for permitting execution of the specific effect (based on the setting by the operation button 9030 during display of the demonstration screen, the general winning opening). Display the number of winning on the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state based on the setting by the operation button 9030 during display of the demonstration screen, which increases the object each time the game ball enters, to the special effect A: variation result notice effect To make it possible to execute, specific effect B: to make it possible to carry out advance notice announcement effect)
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention as to whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The game machine of means B60 is
Any game machine selected from means B57 to B59, wherein
The specific effect notifies the number of entry of gaming media into the general winning area in a predetermined period (period controlled to the big hit gaming state) so as to allow identification (the number of winning balls to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is an effect of displaying separately the number of winning balls according to the number of winning balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning balls.
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in a predetermined period.

The game machine of means B61 is
It is any game machine selected from means B57 to means B60,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number (executes the effects of the 25th effect mode and the 26th effect mode). It is a game machine characterized by the above.
According to this, it is possible to make the number of game media entering the general winning area interesting.

The game machine of means B62 is
Any game machine selected from means B57 to B61,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes effects of the 25th effect mode and the 26th effect mode). It is.
According to this, it is possible to make the number of game media entering the general winning area interesting.

The game machine of means B63 is
Any game machine selected from means B57 to B62, wherein
The specific effect is an effect that allows the number of game media entering the general winning area to be specified in an identifiable manner (increasing the number of objects at each entry of the game ball into the general winning opening),
When the game in the gaming machine is not performed (the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period) It is reported that it is possible to specify that the number of game media entering the general winning area in the specific effect is 0 in the specific effect (the game completion determination is performed. Delete all objects corresponding to the number of winnings on the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905).
It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to prevent another player from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The game machine of means B64 is
Any game machine selected from means B57 to B63,
The specific effect is a game machine characterized by displaying display information (an object equivalent to the number of winnings to a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area.
According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the number of entering game media into the general winning area.

  In addition, the embodiments of the invention described later include the invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 described below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 92), when the gaming ball wins the general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the starting memory display changes, and the starting memory is stored. There has been proposed a gaming machine which reports whether the special view variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "out". In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is a room to further enhance the interest when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening. The invention according to means B65 to means B77 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and it is an object of the invention to increase the interest of the game in the gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The game machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
And a specific effect execution unit (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result advance notification effect);
In the first game state (normal state) when the game medium enters the general winning area, and when in the second game state (probability change or time reduction state) when the game medium enters the general winning area The rate at which the specific effect is performed is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the time saving state)
Game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 of the first to fourth effects modes).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result advance effect, specific effect B: pre-read effect)
In the first game state (normal state) when the game medium enters the general winning area, and when in the second game state (probability change or time reduction state) when the game medium enters the general winning area Execute different specific effects (in the normal state, execute the specific effect A, in the definite change or in the short time state, execute the specific effect B)
Game machine (a pachinko game machine 901 according to the fifth to twelfth effects modes).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B67 is
The gaming machine of the means B 65 or the means B 66 (a pachinko game machine 901 of the second to fourth effects and the tenth to twelfth effects)
In the first gaming state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches the first number of entry,
The special effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second number of entry different from the first number of entry when in the second gaming state (certain change or time saving state) It is a game machine characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to make the number of game media entering the general winning area interesting.

The game machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
And a specific effect execution unit (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result advance notification effect);
In the first period (after reaching the reach condition of reach change), when the game medium enters the general winning area, and in the second period (before the period other than reach change or before the reach condition of reach change is established) The rate at which the specific effect is executed is different depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area (specified after the reach change state establishment is higher than the period other than the reach change state or before the reach change state establishment) Production is performed)
It is a game machine (pachinko game machine 901 of the 13th effect form-the 16th effect form) characterized by the above.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) to which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning ports 9050A to 9050D) Machine 901),
Variable display means for performing variable display of identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative symbol) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning port, second start winning port) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
Granting means (microcomputer for game control 90100) for giving a special value (a prize ball, a score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result advance effect, specific effect B: pre-read effect)
In the first period (after reaching the reach condition of reach change), when the game medium enters the general winning area, and in the second period (before the period other than reach change or before the reach condition of reach change is established) A different specific effect is executed when game media enters the general winning area (The specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the reach effect of executing the specific effect B is achieved after the reach state is established. Execute specified effect A, and execute specified effect B before reach condition is established for a period other than reach change or reach change)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the seventeenth effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect mode) characterized in that.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The game machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of the means B 68 or the means B 69 (the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fourteenth to sixteenth effects and the twenty-second to twenty-fourth effects, respectively);
During the first period (after reaching the reach condition of reach change), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches the first number of entry,
During the second period (period other than reach change or before reach establishment of reach change), the number of entering game media into the general winning area is the second entering number different from the first entering number In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed.
According to this, it is possible to make the number of game media entering the general winning area interesting.

The game machine of means B71 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B70 (second effect mode, sixth effect mode, tenth effect mode to twelfth effect mode, fourteenth effect mode, eighteenth effect mode, twenty-second effect mode Pachinko gaming machine 901),
It has a plurality of the general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a gaming medium enters each of a plurality of the general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to give an interest as to which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The game machine of means B72 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fifth to twelfth effects and the seventeenth to twenty-fourth effects)
After the game medium enters the start winning area (the first start winning opening, the second start winning opening), the variable display means starts the start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning ends and the big hit gaming state) Variable display of the identification information (the first special figure, the second special figure, the decorative pattern) based on the fact that the control is not established.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (microcomputer for game control 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. )When,
Before start determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is established (pre-start determination means for determining whether to be controlled based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the start winning) A game control microcomputer 90100) to determine whether or not to
The specific effect execution means is
Based on the determination before the start, an effect (predictive announcement effect) for giving notice of being controlled to the advantageous state (predictive announcement effect), the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition of the variable display to be targeted is satisfied It is a game machine characterized by performing as.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by being notified that the advantageous display state is controlled before the start condition of the variable display is established.

The game machine of means B73 is
One of the gaming machines (the pachinko gaming machines 901 in the first to twenty-fourth playing modes) selected from the means B65 to the means B72,
After the game medium enters the start winning area (the first start winning opening, the second start winning opening), the variable display means starts the start condition (variable display based on the previous start winning ends and the big hit gaming state) Variable display of the identification information (the first special figure, the second special figure, the decorative pattern) based on the fact that the control is not established.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), advantageous state control means (microcomputer for game control 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. )When,
Start time determination means for making a start time determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (for big hit determination stored when variable display of special symbols is started A game control microcomputer 90100) which determines whether or not to control to a big hit game state based on random numbers;
The specific effect execution means is
It is a game machine characterized by executing, as the specific effect, an effect (prediction result of fluctuation result) for giving notice of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the start determination.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by being notified of being controlled to the advantageous state.

The game machine of means B74 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B73 (the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the third effect mode and the fifteenth effect mode),
According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine, wherein an execution ratio of the specific effect varies in accordance with a frequency of entry of gaming media into the general winning area (number of winnings within 120 seconds after a first winning at a general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to interest the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B75 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B74 (the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the eleventh effect mode and the 23rd effect mode),
It is a gaming machine characterized by performing different specific effects according to the frequency of entry of gaming media into the general winning area (number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning into the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to interest the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area.

The game machine of means B76 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B75 (the fourth effect mode, the eighth effect mode, the twelfth effect mode, the sixteenth effect mode, the twentieth effect mode, the twentieth effect mode, the twenty-fourth effect mode pachinko game machine 901) And
It has a plurality of the general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The specific effect execution means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order of entry of gaming media into a plurality of the general winning areas becoming a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to make the order of entry of game media into the general winning area interesting.

The game machine of means B77 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B76 (the fourth effect mode, the eighth effect mode, the twelfth effect mode, the sixteenth effect mode, the twentieth effect mode, the twentieth effect mode, the twenty-fourth effect mode pachinko game machine 901) And
It has another winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area,
The specific effect execution means is
The specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of the entry of gaming media into the general winning area and the entry of gaming media into the other prize areas is a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to make an interest in the order of entry of game media into the general winning area and the other winning areas.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the invention according to means A1 to A9 described below. Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a windmill or a large number of gaming nails are provided on the surface of a gaming board to change the flow direction and speed of gaming balls. In this type of gaming machine, the passing ratio of the winning opening and the passing gate fluctuates due to the adjustment of the game nails provided on the game board, etc., and the payout rate is designed by adjusting the game nails etc. Sometimes. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what adjustment was made to the game nail or the like, it was difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate would be as designed. The invention according to means A1 to A9 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A1 (eg, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.)
A predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the normally variable winning ball device 906B serving as the second starting winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 907 serving as the large winning opening, the normal winning ball device 906A serving as the first starting winning opening, and the general winning area A game value (eg, a game ball, a slot machine medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize in a general winning opening 9050A to 9050D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on an effective line of a slot machine, etc.). Predetermined information related to the game value to be paid out (for example, combination ratio, combination ratio, machine ratio, etc.) provided on the main substrate (for example, the main substrate 9011, the main substrate of the slot machine, etc.) for controlling the game. Door display (for example, a display monitor 9029, a display monitor of a slot machine, etc.), and a door frame (for In response to the occurrence of an error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98) which can be released by opening the door frame of machine It is characterized in that the display of the combination ratio is stopped.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made. In addition, in the case where the error is canceled with the opening of the door frame, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing predetermined information.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
When the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98 or the like) occurs, the restriction (for example, the display of the ratio (combination ratio) combination ratio is canceled) is performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing predetermined information.

The game machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.),
When the door frame (for example, a slot for a gaming machine, a door frame for a slot machine, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98) occurs. And the above restriction (for example, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio is discontinued).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing predetermined information.

The game machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) selected from means A1 to A3;
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor for slot machine, etc.) has a condition that the error (for example, an error such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. As the above, the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine ratio, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing predetermined information.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) selected from the means A1 to A4;
After canceling the error (for example, the door opening error such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 98), a predetermined time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display limit confirmation process The above predetermined information (e.g., combination ratio, combination ratio, machine ratio, etc.) is displayed after e.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing predetermined information.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) selected from means A1 to A5,
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor for slot machine, etc.) has a plurality of pieces of predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine ratio, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) It can be switched and displayed every time.
According to the above configuration, an increase in the number of members can be suppressed.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) selected from means A1 to A6,
The information display unit (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor for slot machine, etc.) has predetermined units (for example, number of winning balls) as the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine ratio, etc.) Shows 60000 pieces of information.
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) selected from means A1 to A7,
The information display unit (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor for slot machine, etc.) is information (for example, for each predetermined unit) as the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine split, etc.) The short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), short-term combination ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative combination (continuous ratio), cumulative combination ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to compare information for each predetermined unit and accumulated information.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.) selected from means A1 to A8,
The information display unit (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor for slot machine, etc.) is provided with the main substrate (for example, main substrate 9011, main substrate for slot machine, etc.), and a crimped substrate case (for example, substrate case) 90201, 202).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view showing a game machine in an example. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), (C) is a big hit type determination table (second special symbol (D) is an explanatory view showing a small hit classification determination table, and (E) is an explanatory view showing contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning prize ball device. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main side error process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the priority of various errors and error, cancellation | release conditions, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right-handed notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a power failure restoration screen display process. It is a figure which shows the display mode at the time of restoring from vibration detection 1 error detection in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the display mode when it recovers from vibration detection 1 error detection in a small hit gaming state. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process according to Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of right-handed notice processing in modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows an example of electric power failure restoration screen display processing in modification 1. It is a figure which shows the display mode and the output mode of BGM when it recovers from the power failure in BGM selection of a big hit game. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) A diagram showing winning number information managed by the winning number management table, and (b) a diagram showing winning number information managed by the display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a game arcade setting and a player setting. It is an explanatory view in a case of performing display setting by an operation button which a player can operate. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram of displaying an object corresponding to a winning on the general winning opening. It is an explanatory view in a case of displaying a number of winning to a general winning a prize mouth in big hit game state. It is an explanatory view showing each production performed according to a change pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of change result notice presentation effect and pre-reading notice presentation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st presentation form-a 4th presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th presentation form-the 8th presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 9th presentation form-the 12th presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 13th presentation form-the 16th presentation form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form-the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st presentation form-the 24th presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of the 25th effect mode and the 26th effect mode. It is a figure showing winning number information managed by a winning number management table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of point grant production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form-the 30th effect form. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a 31st effect mode and a 32nd effect mode. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of gauge update production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect mode-the 36th effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of the 38th to 41st effect modes. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of the forty-second effect form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of non winning notification information production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd presentation form-the 46th presentation form. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the appearance ratio of characters A to C in the forty-fifth to 49th effect modes. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a display period of characters A to C in the forty-fifth to forty-fifth effect modes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th presentation form-the 49th presentation form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the pending change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation result preliminary announcement production in the 48th production | presentation form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production in the 47th production form and the 48th production form. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of continuous hit operation alerting | reporting and a cut-in notice production | presentation. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and a pseudo consecutive notice effect. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and a pseudo consecutive notice effect. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of all the symbols stop operation notice and chance eye notice production. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of all the symbols stop operation notice and chance eye notice production. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each advance notice production for every general winning a prize opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a display area of each piece of effect information in a setting for displaying winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a display field of each performance information in a setting which does not display winning a prize information. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an item of winning a prize information which can be displayed on the 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a total period. It is an explanatory view showing other examples of a display area of each effect information in a setting for displaying winning number information and a setting for not displaying winning number information. It is an explanatory view showing other examples of a display area of each effect information in a setting for displaying winning number information and a setting for not displaying winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in detail various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is a figure showing a memory map of CPU in a main board. It is a figure showing a memory map of a built-in ROM area in CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the use area program area in a built-in ROM area, and a non-use area program area. It is a table showing a call instruction used in the built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other structure of the use area program area in a built-in ROM area, and a non-use area program area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing It is a figure which shows notionally. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is an explanatory view explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of combination run (combination ratio) and part ratio related processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of combination continuation (combination ratio) and combination ratio display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display restriction confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of display change control processing. 5 is a table showing types of errors in the gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the flow of signals when executing the third interrupt process and the display state of a monitor etc., (B) is the flow of signals and monitors when the first interrupt process is executed It is a time chart which shows a relation with a display state such as. It is a figure which shows arrangement | positioning of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board in which a display monitor is arranged in the 1st display monitor arrangement mode. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for game machines with which the main board | substrate was attached was open | released from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of a game machine provided with a feather type variable winning ball device. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning a prize ball device provided in the game board from the front. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a counter of a total acquisition number of balls, a character acquisition number of balls, and a continuous character acquisition number of balls. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer type as totaling of the information regarding the winning of a game, and a calculation method. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer type as totaling of the information regarding the winning of a game, and a calculation method. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer type as totaling of the information regarding the winning of a game, and a calculation method. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer type as totaling of the information regarding the winning of a game, and a calculation method. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer type as totaling of the information regarding the winning of a game, and a calculation method. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is explanatory drawing regarding performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special drawing processing (special drawing process processing). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under big hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special winning opening judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening post process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is an explanatory view explaining state change switching waiting time etc. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view explaining state change switching waiting time etc. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a state control process. It is an explanatory view explaining state change switching waiting time etc. It is an example of composition of an out sphere detector. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is an example of a display mode which reports an error. It is an example of a display mode which reports an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a performance information update process. It is an example of the arrangement position of an out sphere detector.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment. In the following embodiments, in the description of each step of the flowchart, for example, a portion described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1".

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device. The front surface of the game board 2 is covered by a frame 3 (a frame for a gaming machine) and a glass door frame 3a provided so as to be openable and closable. The glass door frame 3a can be opened by a player in the game arcade by inserting an open key into the open lock K and unlocking it, and a general player or the like can not open the glass door frame 3a. It is supposed to be.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of segments or dot matrix, etc., and includes plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") is displayed variably (variation display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type is It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99". . In addition, although the form which made the 1st special symbol display 4A and the 2nd special symbol display 4B square shape was illustrated in the present Example, this invention is not limited to this, These 1st special symbols Each segment which comprises indicator 4A and the 2nd special symbol indicator 4B may be arranged irregularly.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 2, an effect display device 5 is provided. The effect display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (effect display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. In the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, a effect pattern (also referred to as a decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, is displayed in a variable manner.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the effect symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special view game, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the variation display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A or the variation display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B In synchronization with this, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols that become the variable display result are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols etc (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuation display until the finalized design pattern is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started until the finalized design pattern that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0". For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the effect pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Han) are displayed on the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, nine character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to nine types, but may be any number (for example, eight types, ten types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  After the fluctuation display of the production design is started, until the fixed production design that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, each of the production design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the one with the largest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number (for example, "9"). The effect symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the effect symbol display area 5L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol, When the effect pattern having the smallest number is displayed, subsequently, the effect pattern having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 5, a first hold storage display area 5D and a second hold storage display area 5U are arranged. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, a hold storage display is performed to display the number of pending variable displays (the number of special map hold storages) corresponding to each special symbol. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol is satisfied, the variation display based on the start condition established earlier is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine When the start condition for permitting the start of the variable display is not established because 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed. The pending storage display in the first pending storage display area 5D is a pending storage display generated based on the starting winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and in the second pending storage display area 5U The hold storage display is a hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, a circular white display (a suspension displayed on the first suspension storage display area 5D) of the suspension storage display generated based on the startup winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first startup winning opening Memory display), and a round white display (Hold on the second hold storage display area 5U) for the hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening Memory display). In addition, based on the start storage by the game ball passing (enter) the second start winning opening by the holding memory display generated based on the starting winning combination by the gaming ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode of the pending storage display generated may be a different display mode.

  In the upper right of the effect display device 5, the game ball is turned to the right game area 10R described later by the operation of the bat operating handle by lighting in the small hit game after the big hit game or after the end of the specific big hit game. A right-handed notification LED 30 is provided to notify the player to launch. The right-handed notification LED 30 of the present embodiment is controlled to be turned on / off by the effect control CPU 120 via the LED control board 14.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first reserve storage display area 5D and the second reserve storage display area 5U, the special figure reserve memory number is emitted above the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B. A first hold display unit 25A and a second hold display unit 25B are provided to display the information so as to be identifiable. The first hold display unit 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in a distinguishable manner. The second hold display unit 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the first special view is suspended. The second special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Furthermore, by turning on (emitting) a small hit game in the upper part of the first hold display unit 25A during the big hit game or after the end of a specific big hit game, the game ball will be described later by operating the bat operating handle right A right-handed display unit 25D is provided to notify the player to launch in the game area 10R. The right-handed display unit 25D of the present embodiment is controlled to be turned on / off by the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103).

  That is, the right-handed display unit 25D includes the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display unit 25A, the second hold display unit 25B, and the general drawing hold display unit It is a part of the light emission means which can notify the information about a game by light emission like 25C. In addition, the right-handed notification LED 30 and the right-handed display unit 25D in the present embodiment are both arranged closer to the right gaming area 10R than the left gaming area 10L. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the right-handed notification LED 30 and the right-handed display portion 25D without moving the viewpoint when the gaming state is the short time state, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. It has become.

  General winning openings 50A and 50D are provided on the left and right of the effect display device 5, and general winning openings 50B and 50C are provided in the lower area of the general winning opening 50A. Further, below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B has a normally open state (refer to the solid line position in FIG. 1) and a tilted position (refer to the dotted line position in FIG. 1) in the vertical position by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized part shown in FIG. And a second electric motor-operated part having a movable wing-piece that changes to the second state.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It will be in the open state where it is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the game ball may enter more than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  The game balls having passed through (entered) the general winning openings 50A, 50B, 50C, 50D are the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, and the third general winning opening switch 26C, shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, which are detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D and based on the detection.

  The special variable winning ball unit 7 in which the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B are integrated is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. There is.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning prize unit 7 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the special variable winning winning ball unit 7, the left side constitutes a first special variable winning winning ball device 7A, and the right side constitutes a second special variable winning winning ball device 7B. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a synthetic resin material having translucency is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 7, and the player can select the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. The game ball flowing through the inside of 7, especially the inside of the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B can be visually recognized.

  The first special variable winning ball device 7A includes a first large winning opening door 701 driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and is changed to an open state and a closed state by the first large winning opening door 701 Form the first big winning opening. The first big winning opening is formed to open upward at the left of the special variable winning ball unit 7. The first large winning opening door 701 can slide in the longitudinal direction between the closed position where the first large winning opening is closed by driving the solenoid 82 and the opening position where the first large winning opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 is on, the first large winning opening door 701 opens the first large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the first large winning opening (enter) Make it easy. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 701 closes the first large winning opening so that the game ball can not pass (enter) the first large winning opening. As described above, the first large winning opening changes into an open state advantageous for the player who easily passes (enters) the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition to the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball having passed (entered) the first winning opening is detected by the first counting switch 23 by passing through the first count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first winning opening. . The game ball having passed the first count switch 23 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening that is in the open state in the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous second state for the player. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the first large winning opening This is a disadvantageous first state for the player.

  In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first big winning opening are guided to the normally variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like not shown, and if the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the enlarged open state 2 Start winning prize mouth is supposed to win.

  The second special variable winning ball device 7B shown in FIG. 8 is formed to project upward than the first special variable winning ball device 7A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 2). A winning opening door 711 is provided, and the second winning opening door 711 forms a second winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second big winning opening is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B. The second large winning opening door 711 is between the second state (opening state) in which the second large winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 83 and the first state (closing state) in which the second large winning opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 is in the on state, the second large winning opening door 711 makes the second large winning opening open state, the gaming ball is the second 2 Make it easy to pass (enter) the big winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening door 711 closes the second large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the second large winning opening. (Do not enter) As described above, the second large winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball passing (entering) the second large winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 24A by passing through the second counting switch 24A installed in the second large winning opening shown in FIG. . A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 24A. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened in the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B, other ordinary winnings, such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example More balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, when the second large winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second large winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the second large winning opening This is a disadvantageous first state for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B, a gaming ball flow channel 750 is formed in which gaming balls having passed through the second big winning opening can flow down. The game ball channel 750 is a main path 740 (area along the solid line in FIG. 8) through which the game ball having passed the second big winning opening can pass and a branch path 741 branched from the main path 740 (dotted line in FIG. Region). A backflow prevention member 730 described later is disposed between the main path 740 and the branch path 741. Further, on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740, a first branch portion 742 where the branch path 741 branches from the main path 740 is provided, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740 A second branch portion 743 is provided where the branch path 741 branches from the main path 740. That is, the gaming ball flowing down the main path 740 is movable from the first branch 742 or the second branch 743 to the branch path 741 side.

  A third count switch 24B through which game balls can pass is installed at the most downstream part of the main path 740, and the game balls pass the third count switch 24B to be operated by the third count switch 24B. It is detected. The game ball having passed through the third count switch 24B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Also, the gaming ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the diverging path 741 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the gaming board 2 and passes the fourth count switch 24C. , And detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the small hitting game is controlled to the big hitting gaming state based on the fact that the third counting switch 24B detects the gaming ball during the small hitting game to be described later. . Therefore, during the small hit game, while the second large winning opening door 711 is open, the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration etc. and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B. Also, since it becomes possible for the player to be illegitimate to be controlled to a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is arranged to stop the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 742 in the main path 740, a restriction member 721 is provided which restricts and allows the flow of the gaming ball toward the third count switch 24B. The restricting member 721 protrudes into the main path 740 by driving the solenoid 85 (see FIG. 2), thereby restricting the flow toward the third count switch 24B in the main path 740 of the gaming ball. By retracting from the main path 740, it is provided slidably in the front-rear direction between the gaming ball in the main path 740 of the main path 740 and a permission state that allows the flow toward the third count switch 24B.

  The upper portion of the restriction member 721 is formed to be a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 740 so as to form a predetermined angle downward toward the branch path 741 in a front view. . Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the main path 740 while the regulating member 721 is in the regulating state, the gaming ball runs along the second branch portion 743 along the flat surface formed on the upper portion of the regulating member 721. It is induced to flow down toward the branch path 741 via the route.

  Between the main path 740 and the branch path 741, the backflow prevention member 730 is pivotally supported by a pivot directed in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 730 is a plate-like member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot and branched from the main path 740 side when the gaming ball guided by the flat surface of the restriction member 721 contacts from the main path 740 side. It can be moved (turned) so that it can pass to the side 741. Specifically, it is pivotable between a permitted position inclined to open between main path 740 and branch path 741 and a restricted position closed between main path 740 and branch path 741. It is provided. A rib 801 protruding forward is provided above the regulating member 721, and the backflow preventing member 730 abuts against the rib 801 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view at the regulating position.

  In addition, the backflow prevention member 730 is normally disposed at the restricted position by its own weight, and in this restricted position, the gaming ball guided by the flat surface abuts from the main path 740 side (right side in front view) The game ball is pushed by the game ball and pivots clockwise in front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width between the tip of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch 743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 24B Movement of the gaming ball from the 740 side to the branch path 741 side where the fourth count switch 24C is provided is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 730 is in the restricted position, the backflow prevention member 730 is in contact with the rib 801 even if the game ball abuts from the side of the branch path 741 (left side in front view) The counterclockwise rotation of the member 730 is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch 743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, so the fourth count switch 24C is provided. The movement of the gaming ball from the branch path 741 side to the main path 740 side where the third count switch 24B is provided is surely restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 1, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a common view reserve display unit 25C is provided. The common drawing reservation display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the common drawing reservation storage number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41 by light emission. The passing gate 41 is disposed between the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the special variable winning ball unit 7. In the passing gate 41, a gate switch 21 described later is incorporated.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, winning openings other than the above-described winning openings may be provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 7 and the like) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing.

  The upper tray member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. Is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming area is divided into a left gaming area 10L on the left side of the center decoration frame surrounding the periphery of the effect display device 5 disposed substantially at the center of the gaming area and a right gaming area 10R on the right side. The game ball shot down weakly with the bat operating handle (left-handed) flows down the left gaming area 10L, and the game ball struck hard with the ball operating handle (right-handed) flows down the right gaming area 10R It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the gaming ball which has flowed down the left gaming area 10L can win the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the general winning openings 50A to 50C, and the gaming ball which has flowed down the right gaming area 10R is normally A large number of obstacle nails are arranged to be able to win the variable winning ball device 6B, the first special variable winning ball device 7A, the second special variable winning ball device 7B and the general winning hole 50D, and to be able to pass through the passing gate 41. It is set up. That is, in the case of a left-handed strike, the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A and the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B can not win, and can not pass through the passing gate 41.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, for example, the fluctuation display of the previous common drawing is finished after the common drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied. The variable display of the common drawing by the container 20 is started.

  In the fluctuation display of this common figure, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when the predetermined time which becomes the common fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which becomes the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, for example, as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variation display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting the gaming ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the regular winning ball device 6A by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The variation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is established because the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the previous special variation display or the end of the big hit gaming state, the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, after starting the variation display of the special symbol, when the variation display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the special symbol The finalized special symbol (variation display result) to be the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special view becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in variation display of special figure by 1st special symbol display 4A is different from each symbol in variation display of special figure by 2nd special symbol display 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special views.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol in the variation display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 7A In a period 701 until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the first big winning opening is opened. As a result, a round is performed in which the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A is brought into the second state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first large winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round is ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the first large winning opening etc.) It is also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special view and becomes the "small hit" as the specific display result, in the small hit gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 7B of the second The 2 big winning opening door 711 opens the 2nd big winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. It will be in the state. As a result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B is in the second state (opened state) which is advantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the small hit gaming state, the second large winning opening door 711 is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, but the present invention It is not limited and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit gaming state.

  In the small hit gaming state, when the game ball that has won the second large winning opening passes the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 24B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch 24C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 24C of the gaming ball.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, the second large winning opening door 711 of the second special variable winning ball device 7B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) The second big winning opening is opened in the period until the lapse of a) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B is brought into the second state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled to be in the second state when it is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B. The invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A may be controlled to the second state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the second big winning opening etc.). Good.

  In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state in the present embodiment, time saving control and time saving control are not performed in the time shortening control (time saving control) in the range of the predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 times or 20 times) It is controlled to either of the normal state. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special drawing fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, variation display of a special figure is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, that the variation display result is "big hit", in the small hit gaming state It may be ended when any of the conditions for the game ball to pass through the third count switch 24B is established first.

  When time saving control is performed, control to make the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B shorter than that in the normal state, or ordinary Control to shorten the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the common drawing by the symbol display 20 (general drawing fluctuation time) shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of each common drawing is "per common drawing" Control to improve the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, and the tilt control time for performing tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the fluctuation display result becoming "per common place" The game ball is likely to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to be longer than when, and control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state, thereby increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. By the player Advantageous to become control is performed taking. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Thereby, the second start condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the variable display of the special drawing can be frequently performed. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various control boards such as a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14 and a terminal board (information output board) 16 as shown in FIG. ing. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various substrates such as, for example, a payout control substrate, a launch control substrate, and an interface substrate are disposed on the back of the gaming board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Also, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is provided with a magnetic sensor 60 for detecting fraud by a magnet, a radio wave sensor 70 for detecting fraud due to an electromagnetic wave, and vibration to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The vibration sensor 80 for detecting frauds such as changing the course of the door, the door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front of the game board 2 in an openable / closable manner, the opening of the first big winning opening door 701 The first large winning opening door sensor 91 for detecting the second large winning opening door sensor 92 for detecting the opening of the second large winning opening door 711, provided on the path where the game ball flows down to the lower plate Various sensors such as a full tank sensor 93 for detecting that the gaming balls are full on the lower plate, and a ball breakage sensor 94 for detecting that the number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls is less than or equal to a predetermined number Are connected and these Based on the detection signal output from the sensor, also has function of determining the occurrence of various abnormal (error). Although the ball breakage sensor 94 is described as being directly connected to the main substrate 11 in FIG. 2, it is actually connected to the payout substrate and is connected via the payout substrate. There is.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control An output circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 to 83 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal substrate 16 are mounted.

  The output circuit 111 is also connected to a controller 84 for driving the solenoid 85. The controller 84 starts driving control of the solenoid 85 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 111 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. When the controller 84 drives the solenoid 85, the restricting member 721 repeats the restricting state and the permitting state every one second regardless of the gaming state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the effect display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect LED 9 or The LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the right-handed notification LED 30 or the like is included.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the special figure game using the second special view in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable symbol display of the special symbol game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a change display result such as a special symbol or an effect pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “off” or “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) or Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is “off”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command which designates the fluctuation stop (decision) of the effect pattern in the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specifying command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the generated error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 13, it is determined that any error (abnormality) has occurred on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process (see FIG. 26) described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that a first starting condition for executing a special drawing game using a first special drawing in first special symbol display 4A is established. The command ball 200H is that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol indicator 4B was satisfied based on it.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage count notification command for notifying the first special view storage limit in order to display the special view storage limit in an identifiable manner in the first storage limit display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second pending storage display area 5U or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D100H is a V-winner notification designating command for notifying that the third count switch 24B has been turned on by the fact that the V winning is achieved, that is, that the gaming ball has passed the third count switch 24B.

  The command D200H is a power failure recovery designation command for specifying that the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  The command D301H is a right turn notification LED lighting specification command to specify lighting of the right turn notification LED 30.

  The command D302H is a right-turning notification LED turn-off designation command that specifies turn-off of the right-turning notification LED 30.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 The random number circuit 104 is configured to include an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 and a real time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for special image display result determination, a random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR4 for determining the common drawing display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variation display result is “off”, the variation display is also corresponding to each of the case where the variation display mode of the rendering symbol is “non reach” and the case where the variation display mode is “reach”. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit". In addition, one fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the like. In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the rendering pattern is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern"), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the rendering pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... You may provide a normal reach variation pattern of In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. . In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined in advance, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, random number values for variation pattern type determination are provided, and these variation pattern types are determined. A fluctuation pattern to be executed from a fluctuation pattern belonging to a fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type since the kind of fluctuation pattern is first determined from a random value It is also possible to determine the emissions.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 6 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11 in the ROM 101, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6A, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 6B (for the first special symbol), and the big hit type shown in FIG. In addition to the judgment table (for the second special symbol), the small hit classification judgment table shown in FIG. 6 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the out of line fluctuation pattern judgment A table (not shown), a common drawing display result determination table (not shown), a common drawing variation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

  FIG. 6A is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In the display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is targeted for fluctuation display and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, only the big hit can be won and the small hit is not generated.

  Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the subject is subject to variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values correspond to a small hit By being set as a judgment value, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, it will win a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 50% (100/200) .

  That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C) when the value of the MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit shown in FIG. 6A. Also, if MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 6A, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 6A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6A, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination A table is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the fluctuation special view designation buffer In this way, the determination of the small hit may be made using separate tables for the case where the variation special feature designation buffer is the first and the case where it is the second.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not won. However, a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit may be won.

  FIGS. 6B and 6C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among these, FIG. 6 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) Table. Also, FIG. 6 (C) shows the case of determining the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (ie when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) It is a table.

  The jackpot type determination table is one of the jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (MR2) when it is judged that the variable display result is to be the jackpot symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C), three types of big hit from big hit A to big hit C are provided in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) On the other hand, in the big hit classification determination table (for the second special symbol), only one big hit of big hit C is provided. That is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the big hit that occurs when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed while being one of three types of big hits from the big hit A to the big hit C As a big hit that occurs in, it becomes only big hit C.

  FIG. 6D is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. The small hit type judgment table is based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type judgment when the variable display result is judged to be a small hit symbol, the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit B. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit D is executed If the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, if a V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit E is executed It has become so. That is, the big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit types determined by the random number value MR2 for the hit type determination extracted at the start winning, but the game ball during the small hit game of any of the small hits A and B Is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the third count switch 24B is passed.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 6E. In the present embodiment, jackpot A and jackpot D in which time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state as the jackpot type. A big hit B, a big hit C and a big hit E are set in which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Among the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit A is a big hit repeated five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the first big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, time saving control is not executed.

  The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed twenty times or until a special hit game is executed twenty times, a big hit occurs again.

  The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is executed 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  The big hit D is a big hit repeated four times (so-called four rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of big hit D.

  The big hit E is a big hit repeated 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is played 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  In the time saving state, the probability of "per common" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur because a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It becomes a so-called continuous state which is likely to occur continuously without intervention.

  In addition, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, the ratio that the big hit game state continuously occurs without passing through the normal state (The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit as a result of the variation of the special feature game during the 20 special feature games and the percentage of occurrence of the big hit with the gaming ball winning V) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game end of the big hit C and the big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, the big hit gaming state is continuously without passing through the normal state. The rate of occurrence (the sum of the percentage that a big hit occurs as a result of fluctuating display of the special feature game during 100 special feature games and the percentage that the gaming ball wins V and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100% .

  In the present embodiment, five types of big hit A to big hit E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hit types may be provided. And four or less may be provided.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 are assigned to the jackpot A. , 150 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. For this reason, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, time saving control is not executed at the end of the big hit game at a rate of 50%. In addition, when time reduction control is executed after the end of the big hit game, the number of special figure games for which time reduction control is performed is determined to be 20 times at a rate higher than 100 times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), all the ranges (0 to 299) out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are the jackpot C The number of special figure games for which time saving control is always executed is determined to be 100 times after the big hit game is over.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6D, in the small hitting type judgment table, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the small hitting A, and 100 to 299 Is assigned to the small hit B. Therefore, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small hit game, the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is set to 100 times at a rate of 75%. At the rate of 25%, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, and the variation display result as "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined, and the departure variation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “off” ing.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit, each fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. In the present embodiment, when the determination value is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is "big hit A". In addition, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be the “big hit B” or the “big hit C”. You can increase your sense of expectation.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is a decision value within the range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a variation pattern of small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern of 2 or more is provided as a variation pattern of small hits. You may

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, it is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the number of pending storages is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. If the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed And the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table D used in advance.

  In the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A, the non-reach outlier fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), the super reach With respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation, a predetermined random value is allocated as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total of 2 to 4 pending storages, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and a super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the fluctuation pattern (PA 1-4) of shortening, non-reach loss, corresponding fluctuation pattern (PA 2-1) of normal reach, fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation during time-saving control (PA2-2) The super reach β is assigned a predetermined random number value as a determination value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation time of the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation pattern (PA1) is further reduced. The fluctuation time is shorter in the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) than in -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach out of bounds variation pattern is determined so that the variation time is short, so that the pending storage is easily digested and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 In addition to making a start-up winning when not being held, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start-up that is not made pending storage, and when the number of pending storages is reduced, the fluctuation time is not long and the non-reach is not shifted By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fluctuation display not being executed by lengthening the time of the fluctuation display.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source which is partially or entirely produced on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (eg, a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 7, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 7 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  In the first special view reserve storage unit 151A, although the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, it has not been started yet The reserve data of the special drawing game (the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it is still started The reserved data of no special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the game balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  The game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball having passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the second start winning port. The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 For example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103 Numeric data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, etc., and the random number for indicating the random value independently of the CPU 120 for effect control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes a wire for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5 and a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the LED control board 14 is connected.

  In addition, also on the side of the effect control board 12, similarly to the main board 11, for example, random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  As an example, the ROM 121 is used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the effect model). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be played, a display screen displayed in notification of various errors (abnormality), an error notification pattern such as a lighting mode of the game effect LED 9 and an output sound are stored. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting unit can update the state according to, for example, the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progression of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, the start winning prize buffer for performing the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 5D and the second suspension storage display area 5U is set in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The start winning buffer is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved storages in the first special view hold storage. In each storage area, data indicating the presence or absence of the start winning combination (specifically, "0" indicating no start winning combination and "1" indicating a starting winning combination) is stored. The data of these start winning combination buffers are effect control to be described later according to the reception of the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. While being updated in the pending display update process (S72, see FIG. 24) in the process processing, the pending in the first pending storage display area 5D and the second pending storage display area 5U based on the updated data of the start winning buffer Memory display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening, a round white color is displayed on the holding storage display in the first holding storage display area 5D. When the first variation start command is received based on the fact that the first special figure variation is newly started while the display is newly added, the largest of the pending storage displays in the first pending storage display area 5D is selected. The reserve display is performed so that the high-order (first-time start-up reserve storage) round white display is erased and the other round white display shifts (moves) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Update Similarly, when the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the holding storage display in the second holding storage display area 5U. When a second change start command is received based on the fact that the second special drawing is newly added, the topmost of the pending storage display in second pending storage display area 5U The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the first-time start-up winning storage) is erased and the other round white displays shift (move) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Do.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. As shown in FIG. 9, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, and then starts the game control main process after Sa1. Do. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (Sa2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (Sa3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc. (Sa4), the RAM 102 is made accessible Set (Sa5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (Sa6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 103 executes a normal initialization process (Sa10 to Sa12).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area is whether or not the processing of Sd2 and Sd3 in the power-off detection processing (see FIG. 11) described later is performed. It determines based on (Sa7).

  When backup data is stored, the CPU 103 performs data check of the backup RAM area (Sa8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in Sa8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs gaming state restoration processing (processing of Sa41 to Sa48) for returning the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (Sa41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (Sa42). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of Sa41 and Sa42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set. Further, the CPU 103 identifies the gaming state at the time of power interruption from the backup data (Sa 44), and the identified gaming state is any of the short time state, the small hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state, that is, the game in the present embodiment. It is determined whether or not it is in a gaming state in which a ball is hit toward the right gaming area 10R (right-handed) (Sa45).

  When the gaming state specified from the backup data is any of the short time state, the small hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state (Sa 45; Y), the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the right turn notification LED lighting specification command (Sa 46 ), The lighting of the right-handed display unit 25D is started. Then, transmission setting of the power failure recovery designation command is performed (Sa48), and the process proceeds to Sa15. When the gaming state is the normal state (Sa45; N) in which the gaming ball is launched toward the left gaming area 10L (left), only the processing of Sa48 is executed without executing the processing of Sa46 and Sa47. Then proceed to Sa15. The right-handed notification LED lighting specification command set to be transmitted at Sa46 and the power failure recovery specification command set to be transmitted at Sa48 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in a command control process described later.

  When the backup data is not stored (Sa7; N) or when the result of the parity check is not normal (Sa8; N), the initialization process is executed.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (Sa10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Also, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (Sa11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (Sa12).

  By processing Sa11 and Sa12, for example, a random number counter for determination per normal symbol, special symbol buffer, total prize ball number storage buffer, special symbol process flag, etc. Initial value for flag for selectively processing according to the control state Is set.

  After execution of Sa48 or Sa12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (Sa15). The CPU 103 performs, for example, processing in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for special image display result determination.

  Then, in Sa16, the CPU 103 performs setting of a register of CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 so that timer interruption is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (Sa18) and the initial value random number updating process (Sa19). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (Sa17), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Do (Sa20). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit, The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, with the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) is determined to generate a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal pattern. Is a random number to The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided on the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (S10). Then, by executing predetermined switch processing, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the third switch circuit 110 are performed. Detection signals input from various switches such as count switch 24B, fourth count switch 24C, first general winning opening switch 26A, second general winning opening switch 26B, third general winning opening switch 26C, fourth general winning opening switch 26D The state of is determined (S11). Subsequently, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, the third count switch 24B, and the fourth count switch 24C via the switch circuit 110. In order to pay out the prize balls according to detection signals input from various switches such as the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. In step S12, the processing of the award ball is executed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (S15), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, payout information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S16) .

  Subsequent to the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main substrate 11 side is executed (S17) . Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S18). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning winning ball unit 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (S19). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the state to the off state or the like, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  The contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described below.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power failure detection process according to this embodiment. In the power-off detection process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (Sd1). When the power-off signal is not input, the power-off detection process is ended. When the power-off signal is input, the backup data is specified (Sd2), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage provided in the RAM 102. Store in the area (Sd3). Then, check data used to restore the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (Sd4). Then, the process proceeds to loop processing in which any processing is not performed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. Since the power-off signal is continuously output when the power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value, in the power-off detection process in the present embodiment, loop processing is performed after check data is created (after execution of Sd4). By migrating, new backup data is not stored in the backup data storage area. Therefore, for example, it is prevented that new backup data is not normally stored in the backup data storage area when the power supply voltage is further reduced while storing new backup data.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main side error processing (S15) of this embodiment. In the main side error processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the abnormality informing timer indicating that the abnormality informing is being performed in the predetermined period on the side of the effect control board 12 is in operation (S401)

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not in operation (S401; N), the process proceeds to S402. If the alarming timer is operating (S401; Y), the process proceeds to S420, and the alarming timer is decremented by one, and whether or not the alarming timer after subtraction is counted up. It determines (S421).

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not up (S421; N), the process proceeds to S402. On the other hand, if the abnormality informing timer is up (S421; Y), after the informing of abnormality is cleared (S422), the process proceeds to S402.

  In S402, an abnormality determination process of determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 13 is performed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode for determining an error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 13, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type and number of these errors (abnormality) May be appropriately set according to the model and specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, each error (abnormality) of 1 to 15 is set, and in the abnormality determination processing, occurrence of each error (abnormality) of these 1 to 15 can be determined. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, priorities are set for these errors (abnormalities), and in principle, errors (abnormalities) with high priorities are notified with priority.

  These errors include, for example, an error due to a short circuit abnormality of the switch power supply that supplies the power of the apparatus, such as a switch common short circuit error of priority "1", detection of electromagnetic waves by the radio wave sensor 70, and magnetic force by the magnetic sensor 60. Of the device (switch) or an error such as detection error of the first count switch 23 or the second count switch 24A, etc. There is no possibility that the game is incorrect such as a full tank error or an out-of-ball error, but there is an error or the like that causes a problem in the progress of the game.

  Also, for each error, a condition for canceling the error that has occurred is set, and for errors with relatively high priority, "power off" is mainly taken as the cancellation condition. For an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority, it is a cancellation condition that a predetermined time elapses or the state of the error is canceled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the error (abnormality) includes an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state and an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state. A relatively high priority error is considered as an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state, and a relatively low priority error (abnormal) is considered as an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state .

  Note that among these errors, even if they are errors caused by the same sensor, some errors may differ depending on the time of detection. For example, as an error when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80, abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 when the first special variable winning ball device 7A or the second special variable winning ball device 7B is activated. Is determined to be a high vibration detection 1 error with a priority of "6" and controlled to the game stop state until the power is turned off, whereas the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning When abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 at the time of operation of the ball device 7B, it is determined that the priority is "11" and the vibration detection 2 error is low, and the game is not controlled to be stopped after 60 seconds. The error is to be cleared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the output mode of the security signal is set to each error (abnormality), and when the occurrence of each error (abnormality) is determined, each error (abnormality) The security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a mode corresponding to the above. The security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) for stopping the game is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority is output. , Or is not output at a predetermined time after the error determination. In addition, with regard to the “unauthorized winning error” of priority “10”, the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a predetermined time (4 minutes in this embodiment) after the power is turned on again. Is set as.

  As described above, in the abnormality determination process of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 detects the magnetic sensor 60, the radio wave sensor 70, the vibration sensor 80, the door opening sensor 90, the first winning prize port door sensor 91, 2 Large winning opening door sensor 92, full tank sensor 93, detection state of the ball out sensor 94, the state of the payout board, detection state of the game ball of the second start opening switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A Each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 13 is determined on the basis of FIG.

  Then, after the abnormality determination processing of S402 is performed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination processing (S403), and the occurrence of the abnormality is not determined (S403; N) End main side error processing.

  On the other hand, when the occurrence of an abnormality is determined (S403; Y), whether or not an abnormality informing flag indicating that abnormality notification is being executed is set, that is, whether or not the abnormality has already been notified. It is determined (S404).

  If the abnormality informing flag is not set (S404; N), the process proceeds to S410, sets the abnormality informing flag and the abnormality informing timer, and stores an error (abnormality) to start the informing, It progresses to S411.

  For example, if an error (abnormality) to start notification is a vibration detection 2 error, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set in the abnormal notification-in-progress timer, and an error (abnormality) to start notification (starting opening) 2) If the error is an abnormal winning error, a timer value corresponding to 300 seconds is set. However, if the error (abnormality) for starting the notification is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, “0” is set to the abnormality informing timer. As a result, it is determined in S401 that the abnormality notification in-progress timer is not in operation, and thus the set abnormality notification in-progress flag is set until the power is turned off. In other words, for errors corresponding to these "power off" cancellation conditions, the error notification is continued until the power is turned off, so the abnormality informing flag is not cleared until the power is turned off. It is supposed to be. In the case of a prize ball abnormality error where it is determined that the number of prize balls is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the game is not controlled to the game stop state, and therefore an error is notified in a state where the game is possible.

  If the abnormality informing flag is set (S404; Y), the abnormality in informing is identified from the data of the informing abnormality stored in S410 (S405), and the error determined in S402 (abnormality) It is judged whether it is the same as the error (abnormality) in alerting | reporting (S406).

  If the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is the same as the error (abnormality) during notification (S406; Y), the main side error processing ends. On the other hand, if the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not the same as the error (abnormality) in notification (S406; N), the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is higher than the error (abnormality) in notification It is determined whether or not it is a priority error (abnormal) (S407). If the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) in notification (S407; N), the main side error processing is ended. Therefore, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) during notification, the process of S413 is executed, and the error designation command is displayed on the effect control board 12. Since no notification is sent, the notification of the error (abnormality) is not executed, and the notification of the error (abnormality) in the notification is continued.

  On the other hand, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is an error (abnormality) with a higher priority than the error (abnormality) during notification (S407; Y), it further indicates a gaming stop state which is a predetermined state. It is determined whether the game stop flag is set (S408).

  If the game stop flag is set (S408; Y), that is, if the game is in the stop state, the main side error processing is ended. Therefore, when the game is stopped, even if an error (abnormality) higher in priority than an error (abnormality) during notification is determined in S402, the processing in S413 or the processing in S414 may be executed. Since no new error specification command is sent to the effect control board 12 because there is no, notification of an error (abnormality) during notification will be continued, and the output of the security signal during output will change ( There is no chance to turn on / off the signal.

  On the other hand, when the game stop flag is not set (S408; N), that is, when it is not in the game stop state, the process proceeds to S409, resets the abnormality informing timer and resets the error in notification (abnormality) Update and memorize. If the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in the notification determined in S402 is an error corresponding to the release condition of "power off", as in the case of S410 described above, the error is abnormal. By setting “0” to the timer during notification, the abnormality notification flag is set until the power is turned off.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in the notification determined in S402 is an error corresponding to the game stop (S411), and if it is not an error corresponding to the game stop ( In S411; N), the process proceeds to S413 without passing through S412. If it is an error corresponding to the game stop (S411; Y), the launch control board is set to stop the launch, and the launch of the game ball from the hit ball launch device is disabled, and the game stop flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S413.

  In S413, an error designating command for designating the occurrence of an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in the notification determined in S402 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12, and then the error (abnormality is detected) Setting to output the security signal in the output mode corresponding to (S 414), and the main side error processing is ended. By setting the output of the security signal in S414, the security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to an external device such as a hall computer in the information output process (S16).

  The error designation command set for transmission in S413 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in S20. Then, in the effect control board 12, an error notification process corresponding to the error (abnormality) specified by the transmitted error designation command is executed by execution of an error notification process (see FIG. 26) described later. Ru.

  As described above, in the main substrate 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned main side error processing is executed, and in the effect control substrate 12, the error notification processing (see FIG. 26) described later is executed. Thus, as shown in FIG. 14, the execution mode of the error notification differs depending on whether the gaming state is the gaming stop state where the predetermined state is.

  Specifically, for example, when occurrence of a vibration detection 2 error shown in FIG. 13 is first determined in the playable state, occurrence of the vibration detection 2 error is as shown in FIG. 14 (A). In addition, a pop-up window of “E-54 vibration error” corresponding to the vibration detection 2 error is notified by being displayed on the effect display device 5 for 60 seconds which is a predetermined time.

  When the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the vibration detection 2 error, the priority of the prize ball abnormality error is “7”, and the priority of the vibration detection 2 error being executed is 14A, and instead of the pop-up window of “E-54 Vibration error” notifying of the vibration detection 2 error being executed, the notification of the prize ball abnormality error is made specifically, as shown in FIG. As shown in A), a pop-up window including a message "Please call a staff member! E-33 Prize ball abnormality error Please turn on the power again" is displayed to notify that a prize ball abnormality error has occurred. However, in the occurrence of the prize ball abnormal error, the game is not controlled to the stopped state, and the game available state is maintained.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), when occurrence of “Magnetic error” which is an error having a higher priority than the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the prize ball abnormality error. The entire display on the effect display device 5 is displayed in black, indicating that the game is stopped, and also call the staff on the effect display device 5 “during game stoppage! E-02 Magnet error Re-enter the power supply Since the display of “Please do it” is displayed in white characters, occurrence of “Magnetic error” is notified, and also, it is notified that an error (abnormality) at which the game is stopped is a magnet error.

  Then, after the game stopped state as described above, the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, which is an error having a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stopped state. In this case, as described above, since the game stop flag is set even if the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, the error designation command corresponding to the determination of the "radio wave error" is not transmitted. As shown in FIG. 14 (B), these "game errors" are continued by the notification of "magnet error" which is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state being continued without the notification of "radio wave error" being executed. It is not possible to specify what kind of error is the error triggered by the state control, and it is an error triggered by the control of these game suspension states that it is appropriate for fraud using a magnet It is possible to prevent the Do corresponding becomes impossible.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the process of S 414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the “radio wave error” whose occurrence is determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the “magnet error” being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S18 shown in FIG. 10 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S21). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S31 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  In the start winning process of S21, it is determined whether there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B, and if there is a winning, the variation display result determination The random number value MR1 for the main hit, the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are extracted, and if it is the first start winning combination, the free entry in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A. In the case of the second start winning combination, it is stored in the top of the empty entry in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B.

  The special symbol normal processing of S22 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol is displayed based on the presence / absence of the pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 151A or the second special view pending storage unit 151B. It is determined whether the special drawing game is started by the display 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the variable display result derives whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is "big hit". Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B (big hit symbol or A small hit symbol, one of an off symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern can be selected from any of a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It includes the process of deciding whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing of S23, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol and the effect symbol as the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the random symbol value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. A process of determining the variable display mode is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, it is progressed by a common timer A measurement of time is taken. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S24 is the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol indicator 4A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol indicator 4B. It is sufficient that the process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the symbol is controlled by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S25 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "7". When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation indication result becoming “big hit”, etc., the process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set for opening the first big winning opening Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". It is also good. As an example, regardless of the type of big hit, while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the 1st big winning a prize opening state to “29 seconds”, the opening frequency of the 1st big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit frequency which executes the round, The setting of jackpot status is performed by setting “5 times” for “big hit A”, “10 times” for “big hit B”, and “15 times” for “big hit C”. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S27 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "5". In this big hit open process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the first big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. The process includes determining whether it is time to return the first big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. When the first big winning opening is returned to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the first big winning opening door 701 is executed, and the value of the special processing process flag is “6 Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of S28 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect is performed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect LED 9, etc. Processing for waiting until the passage of time has elapsed, and processing for performing various settings (setting of time saving flag) for starting time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  Specifically, in the big hit end process, the type of the big hit that has been executed is specified. Then, if the specified jackpot type is “big hit A”, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0” without setting the time saving flag. If the identified big hit type is "big hit B", set the time-shortening flag and set the initial count value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" in the time reduced number counter to make a special figure process. Update the flag value to "0". If the specified jackpot type is "big hit C", the hour reduction flag is set and the count initial value ("100" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in the time reduction counter. Update the figure process flag value to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this small hit opening pre-processing, setting to start the execution of the round in the small hit gaming state and open the second big winning opening based on the variable display result becoming “small hit” etc. Processing etc. are included. At this time, based on, for example, the variable display result being "small hit", the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening is opened is set to "one second", and the upper limit number of times to execute the round The setting of the small hit state may be performed by setting the opening number of the second large winning opening to "one time". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "8".

  In this example, in the small hit state, the number of opening times of the second large winning opening is set to “one time”, and the upper limit of the period for opening the second large winning opening is set to “1 second”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of opening times of the second large winning opening in the small hitting state may be two or more times, and the second large winning opening is opened. The upper limit of the period to be in the state may be a period other than “1 second” as long as the game ball can win a prize at the second large winning opening.

  The small hit open processing of S30 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". This small hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the second big winning opening, the measured elapsed time, the number of gaming balls detected by the second count switch 24A, etc. And a process of determining whether it is time to return the second big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. When the second big winning opening is returned to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 83 for the second big winning opening door 711 is executed, and the value of the special processing process flag is "9 Is updated to

  The small hitting end processing of S31 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hitting end process, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect LED 9, etc. It includes processing to wait until the time passes. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 15 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (S141). The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of pending storages of the special drawing game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the process of S141, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special view reservations is other than "0" at S141 (S141; N), the second special view suspension storage unit 151B stores the suspension data corresponding to the suspension number "1". The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out respectively (S142). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of S142, the second special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the second special view pending storage count count value or the total pending storage count count value and updating it. As well as updating the data in the second special view storage section 151B. Specifically, random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") in second special view hold storage unit 151B are used. The pending data indicated is shifted upward by one entry (S143).

  Thereafter, the variation special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special drawing designation buffer is updated to "2" (S144), and then the process proceeds to S149.

  On the other hand, when the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at S141 (S141; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (S145). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the process of S145, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is “0”. Good. Thus, the process of S145 is executed when it is determined in S141 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. Determine if As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is not limited to the one to be executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  When the number of first special view reservations is other than "0" at S145 (S145; N), the first special view suspension storage unit 151A stores the suspension data corresponding to the suspension number "1". The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out respectively (S146). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S146, the first special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, etc. As well as updating the data of the first special view reservation storage unit 151A. Specifically, random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries under the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers “2” to “4”) in first special view hold storage unit 151A are used. The pending data indicated is shifted upward by one entry (S147).

  Thereafter, the variation special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special drawing designation buffer is updated to “1” (S 148), and then the process proceeds to S 149.

  In S149, it is shown in FIG. 6 (A) as a use table for determining which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “off” the special figure display result which is a variable symbol display result of the special symbol. Select and set the display result judgment table. Subsequently, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to each special view display result of "big hit", "small hit", or "off" In comparison with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is to be "big hit", "small hit", or "off" (S150).

  After the special view display result is determined in S150, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (S151). When it is determined that the "big hit" (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S152). At this time, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to the variation special-designated buffer is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (S153). At this time, when the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is “1”, the CPU 103 selects and sets the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6B, and specifies the variation special figure When the value of the buffer is “2”, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6C may be selected and set. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination stored in the variable random number buffer by referring to the big hit type determination table thus set is "big hit A", "big hit B" in the big hit type determination table. In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each of the "big hit C" big hit types, it is determined which of the multiple types the big hit type is to be (S154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, either time-saving state when time single-out control (time-saving control) is performed, or normal state when time-saving control is not performed Whether to control to the game state is determined before the finalized special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S156. As an example, if the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, if “big hit B”, “1”, and if “big hit C”, “2” may be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" is not made in S151 (S151; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the special map display result is "small hit" (S151a). If it is determined that the "small hit" (S151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S151b). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 6D) is selected and set as a use table for determining the small hit type as any of a plurality of types (S 151 c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “small hit A”, “small hit A” in the small hit type determination table. Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each small hit type of the small hit B ", the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S151 d).

  Corresponding to the small hit type determined in this way, it is determined, for example, by setting the small hit type buffer value which is the storage value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S151e) The small hit type is stored and the process proceeds to S156. As an example, the small hit type buffer value may be set to “0” if the small hit type is “small hit A”, and may be set to “1” if “small hit B”.

  In S156, as a result of determining in advance whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is set), as a result of determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, further to the small hit gaming state In accordance with the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control (whether or not the small hit flag is set), the finalized special symbol is set. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" which becomes an out symbol is set as a finalized special symbol corresponding to a preliminary determination result indicating that the special image display result is "off". In addition, if it is determined in S151 that the special view display result is "big hit", the big hit symbol is "3", "5", or "7" according to the big hit type determination result in S154. Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number of "3" is set as the determined special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is "big hit A". Moreover, according to the determination result which makes a big hit classification "big hit B", the special symbol which shows the number of "5" is set as a confirmation special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit C”. In addition, in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the special figure display result is "small hit", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2" to be a small hit symbol is set as the determined special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in S156, the special symbol process processing is updated to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (S157), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" at S145 (S145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S158), the special symbol normal is set. End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (waiting customer demonstration specification command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 15 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol indicator 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B. Control for deriving and displaying a symbol is performed (S181). In addition, when the fluctuation special drawing specification buffer value is “1” indicating the first special drawing, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special drawing specification buffer value is In the case of "2" indicating the second special figure, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is ended. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (S 182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183), and if the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S189a.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the time short flag if the time short flag is set (S184), and the big hit stored in the effect control board 12 Depending on the type, settings are made to transmit a hit start 1 designated command (big hit A), a hit start 2 assigned command (big hit B), and a hit start 3 assigned command (big hit C) (S185). The hit start designation command set in S185 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designating command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 5) is set in the big hit display time timer (S187). Further, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times in the case of big hit A, 10 times in case of big hit B, and 15 times in case of big hit C) is set in the special winning opening open frequency counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S189), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, in S189a, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set (S189a). If the small hit flag is not set (S189a; Y), the process proceeds to S190. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (S 189 a; Y), the CPU 103 selects one of the start command 4 (small hit A), which corresponds to the type of small hit stored in the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting the start 5 designation command (small hit B) is performed (S 189 b). The hit start designation command set in S189b is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  Then, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 5) (S 189 c). In addition, the number of opening (for example, once in the case of a small hit) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S 189 d). Further, the value of the time reduction number counter is decremented by 1 (S189e), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction number counter becomes 0 (S189f). If the value of the time saving counter is 0 (S 189 g; Y), the time saving flag is cleared and the process proceeds to S 189 h (S 189 g). If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (S 189 g; N) , S189g, without advancing to S189h.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "7" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S189 h), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  On the other hand, in step S190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. When the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S198.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S190; N), that is, if it is a high base state (time reduction state) in which time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1. (S191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (S193). If it is not "0" (S193; N), the process proceeds to S198 and the value of the time reduction counter is "0." If it is "" (S193; Y), the game state corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag (specifically, the low base state (normally, normal state) after clearing the time saving flag to end time saving control (S194) The transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the state) is performed (S195). Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S196), turns off the right-handed display unit 25D, and proceeds to step S198 (S197). The command for turning off the LED for right-handed notification set in S196 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special drawing process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing in S198, and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S26 of FIG. 15 as the big hit opening pre-processing. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command transmitted flag indicating that the transmission setting of the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command has already been executed (S301). ). When the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has not been set (S301; N), the right-handed LED lighting specification command transmission setting is performed (S302), and the right-handed display unit is lighted (S303). ). Then, the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has been set, and the process proceeds to S305 (S304). The right-handed notification LED lighting specification command set for transmission in S302 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20). When the flag for indicating that the right-handed LED lighting is transmitted has been set (S301; Y), the process proceeds to S305 without executing S302 to S304.

  In S305, the CPU 103 decrements the big hit display time timer by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit display time timer has timed out (S306). If the big hit display time timer has timed out (S306; Y), the flag for transmitting the right-handed LED lighting specification command is cleared (S307), and the open time timer is set (S308). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value according to the big hit open processing, and the big hit open pre-processing is ended (S309). If the big hit display time timer has not timed out (S306; N), the big hit opening pre-processing is ended without executing S307 to S309.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S28 of FIG. 15 as the big hit end process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit end display timer is in operation (S311). When the big hit end display timer is not in operation (S311; N), the big hit end display timer, the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time to display the big hit end on the effect display device 5 (big hit end display time) It sets (S312), and ends big hit end processing.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is in operation (S311; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S313). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (S314). If it has not ended, the big hit end processing ends. If the big hit end display time has elapsed (S 314; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored big hit type is big hit A or big hit D (S 315).

  If the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot D (S315; Y), the transmission setting of the right-handed LED turn-off designation command is performed (S316a), the right-handed display part is turned off, and the process proceeds to S319 (S316b) ). Incidentally, the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command transmitted and set in S316a is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20). If the big hit type is any of big hit B, big hit C, and big hit E (S315; N), the CPU 103 sets the short time flag (S317), and after setting the time counter to "100" (S318) ), Go to S319.

  In S319, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag, and performs transmission setting of the big hit end designation command according to the big hit type (S320). Then, after performing transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time saving flag (S 321), the special figure process flag is processed as a special symbol normal processing It updates to "0" which is a value corresponding to (S322). The jackpot end designation command transmitted and set in S320 and the gaming state designation command transmitted and set in S321 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S29 of FIG. 15 as the small hit start pre-processing. In the small hit start pre-processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the small hit display time timer by 1 (S201), and determines whether the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202). If the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S202; N), while the small hit opening pre-processing is ended, if the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202; Y), the second big winning game A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, one second) is set in an open time timer for opening the mouth (S203). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit open processing (S30) (S204), and the small hit open pre-processing is ended.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S30 of FIG. 15 as the small hit open process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the open time timer by 1 ( S211). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (S212).

  If the opening time timer has timed out (S212; Y), the process proceeds to S230, and if the opening time timer has not timed out (S212; N), it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening It determines (S213). When it is the opening timing of the second large winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the second large winning opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 (S214). Then, transmission setting of the special winning opening open designation command corresponding to the round is performed (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S215 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S20) described above. If it is not the opening timing of the second big winning opening (S213; N), it proceeds to S216 without passing through S214 and S215.

  In S216, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S216). If it is the closing timing of the second large winning opening (S216; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 (S217) . Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after opening the special winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S218 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S20) described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S216; N), it proceeds to S223 without passing through S217 and S218.

  In S223, the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223). When the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S223; N), the small hit open processing is ended, and when the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223; Y), the third count switch 24B is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 24B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S224). If the V prize flag is set (S224; Y), the small hitting open processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S224; N), the V prize flag is set (S225) .

  Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 12 (S227). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S20) described above. In addition, if the second large winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 (S228), and the opening time is The timer is cleared (S229).

  Then, in S230, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "9" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (S31) (S230), and ends the small hit open processing.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S31 of FIG. 15 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit end display timer is in operation. Is determined (S231). If the small hit end display timer is not in operation (S231; N), the small hit flag is cleared (S232), and transmission setting of the hit end designation command according to the small hit to the effect control board 12 is performed (S233 ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S20) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (S234), and the small hit end process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the small hit end display timer is in operation (S231; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S235). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small hit end display timer has timed out (S236). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (S236; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237). If the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S237; N), the small hitting end processing is ended, and if the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237; Y), the third count is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the switch 24B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S238). If the V prize flag is set (S238; Y), the small hitting end processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S238; N), the V prize flag is set (S239).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 12 (S241), and ends the small hitting end process. The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S20) described above.

  When the small hit end display time has elapsed in S236 (S236; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (S242). When the V prize flag is set (S 242; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big hit flag (S 243, S 244). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type from the “big hit D” and the “big hit E” based on the small hit type in which the V prize is generated (S246). As the jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 6 (D), when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the big hit type is determined as "big hit D", and the V winning type concerned If the type of small hit that occurred is "small hit B", the type of big hit is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S247), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S248. As an example, if the big hit type is "big hit D", the big hit type buffer value may be "3", and if "big hit E", it may be "4".

  After execution of S247, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S248), and ends the small hit end processing.

  That is, in this embodiment, the game ball passes the third count switch 24B not only during small hit games but also during the period until the small hit end display time after the small hit game is over. Even if the game ball hits the second large winning opening just before the small hit game is over, the game ball passes the third count switch 24B and the big hit game is executed after the small hit end processing is completed. It has become so.

  If the V prize flag is not set in S242 (S242; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is set (S249). If the time saving flag is set, the process proceeds to S253. If the time saving flag is not set, the transmission setting of the gaming state designating command indicating the normal state is performed (S250), and the LED for turning off right indication turning off is transmitted. The setting is performed (S251). The gaming state designation command and the right hitting treatment LED extinguishing designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S20) described above. In addition, the CPU 103 turns off the right-handed display unit 25D and proceeds to S253.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in S253 to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S22), and ends the small hitting end processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes each processing in the special symbol process processing to operate the ball in the right game area by operating the bat operating handle in the short time state, small hit gaming state, big hit gaming state, etc. In the game state to launch to the 10R (do the right strike) in the gaming state the right strike display unit 25D is lit, the operation of the ball operation handle to launch the game ball to the left gaming area 10L (does left strike) in the normal state The right-handed display unit 25D is turned off.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S51) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, when the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 5.

  Next, the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56). After the error notification process (S57) shown in FIG. 26 and the power failure recovery screen display process (S59) shown in FIG. 27 are executed, the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first launches a game ball such as a short game state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc. toward the right game area 10R (does right) in a game state If there is a right strike notification process (S71) to notify the player that the game is in the gaming state in which the player is hit to the right by the display on the effect display device 5 or the lighting of the right strike notification LED 30; The suspension display updating process (S72) of updating the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 5D and the second suspension storage display area 5U to display according to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting unit is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the processes in S73 to S82 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S74).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S74): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S75).

  During the effect symbol fluctuation process (S75): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern confirmation command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77), the small hit display process (S80) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S78).

  During the big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game. For example, when the special winning opening open designation command or the special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5, display control of big hit gaming effect, sound output control, etc. are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S79).

  Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Small hitting display process (S80): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hitting on the effect display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game in-progress process (S81).

  Small hit in game processing (S81): Control of small hit in game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect process (S82).

  Small hit end effect processing (S82): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73) or the big hit display process (S77).

  In the present embodiment, when the supply of power is resumed after the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, only the effect control board 12 is unstable in operation, including the release of the game ball. The game itself can continue. For this reason, in particular, it is possible to control the big hit gaming state by executing the variable display as in the present embodiment, and the game ball passes the specific area (the third count switch 24B in the present embodiment) during the small hit game. A big hit game end based on the pachinko game machine of the type that can be controlled to the big hit game state based on what was played (the so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko game machine) or that the game ball passed a specific area during the big hit game In pachinko gaming machines where probability variation control is implemented later, the game display is launched on the right game area 10R by displaying a right-handed notification image together with the power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 5 If not prompting, the game ball loses the opportunity to pass through the specific area, causing a disadvantage for the player. In addition, even in the game arcade clerk or the like, when the power failure recovery screen is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls are not fired until the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended for the player. There may be a case where it is possible that the game store side can not appropriately take action when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed. From such a reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed by executing the right-handed notification process and the power failure recovery screen display process described below. In this case, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the right-handed notification process (S71) of this embodiment. In the right-handed notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the second mode on the effect display device 5 (S701). In addition, the right-handed notification image is displayed rightward in the upper right part of the effect display device 5 so as to face the right gaming area 10R in order to notify that it is in a short hit state or a big hit game or a small hit game. It is an image of an arrow. Further, as the display mode of the right-handed notification image in the present embodiment, the first mode and the second mode described above can be displayed by the effect display device 5, and the second mode is more than the first mode. Is an aspect that displays an image of a large right-pointing arrow.

  If the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the second mode (S701; Y), the process proceeds to S713, and the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first manner or the right-handed notification image is not displayed (S701; N) further determines whether the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S702). If the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S702; Y), the process proceeds to S710, and if the right-handed notification image is not being displayed in the first manner, that is, the right-handed notification image is not displayed In the case (S702; N), the process proceeds to S703.

  In S703, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not there is reception of a power supply recovery designation command. If the power recovery specification command is received (S703; Y), the process proceeds to S707. If the power recovery specification command is not received (S703; N), the right-handed LED lighting specification command is further received. It is determined whether or not (S704). If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S704; N), the right-handed notification processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S704; Y), for effect control The CPU 120 controls the LED control board 14 to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 30 (S705). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the display of the right-handed notification image in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 (S706), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  Further, at S 707, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S 707; N), the right-handed notification processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S 707; Y), for effect control The CPU 120 controls the LED control board 14 to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 30 (S 708). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the display of the right-handed notification image in the second mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 (S709), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  In addition, in S710, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not there is reception of the LED-off indication command for right-handed notification. If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S710; N), the right-handed notice processing ends, and if there is reception of the right-handed notification LED turn-off designation command (S710; Y), for effect control The CPU 120 controls the LED control board 14 to turn off the right-handed notification LED 30 (S711). Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the right-handed notification image in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 (S712), and ends the right-handed notification process.

  Further, in S713, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not any of the symbol determination command, the special winning opening open designated command, and the hit end designated command is received. When there is reception of any of the symbol determination command, the special winning opening open designation command, and the hit end designation command (S713; Y), the processing of S711 and FIG. 712 (right turn off notification LED 30 turn off and right turn notification image End the right-handed notification processing, and when there is no reception of any of the symbol confirmation command, the special prize opening command after the opening, and the hit end designation command (S713; N), S711 and The right-handed notification process is ended without executing the process of S712.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) in which the gaming state strikes the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 10R during the game, the CPU 120 for effect control The right-handed notification LED 30 is turned on, and the right-handed notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5. Then, when the gaming state is controlled to the gaming state (normal state) in which the gaming ball is shot toward the left gaming area 10L, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the LED 30 for right-handed notification and the right in the first mode. The display of the hit notification image is ended.

  In addition, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (the power is turned off) due to the occurrence of an error such as radio wave error, magnet error, vibration detection error or the like mentioned above during the game. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted (the power is turned on) again without operating the game machine, the gaming state at the time of stopping the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is right If it is a game state (time reduction state, big hit game state, small hit game state) to launch toward the area 10R, the LED 30 for right-handed notification is turned on, and the power display on the effect display device 5 is restored Display in the form. Then, the symbol determination command, the big winning opening open designated command, the hit ending designated command reception, that is, the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the closing of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the big hit gaming state or the small hitting game When shifting from the state to the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed notification LED 30, and ends the display of the right-handed notification image in the second mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 17, FIG. 19, FIG. 22 and FIG. 25, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 periodically performs command control processing in the game control timer interrupt processing every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). By executing (S20) and transmitting the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command and the right-handed notification LED light-off designation command toward the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 is interlocked with lighting the right-handed display unit 25D. Then, it is possible that the effect control CPU 120 turns on the right notification LED 30, and the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right notification LED 30 in conjunction with the CPU 103 turning off the right display portion 25D. Therefore, even if the player does not visually recognize the right-handed display portion 25D, the gaming state strikes the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 10R by visually recognizing the right-handed notification LED 30, the short state, the big hit gaming state, and the small It is possible to determine whether or not it is a hit gaming state.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the error notification process (S57) of this embodiment. In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the error notification timer is in operation (S501).

  If the error informing timer is not in operation, that is, if the error informing is not performed, the process proceeds to S502.

  On the other hand, if the error informing timer is in operation, that is, if the error informing is being executed, the error informing timer after timer subtraction is decremented by one after the error informing timer is decremented by one (S510). It is determined whether or not it has been done (S511).

  If the timer is not up during error notification (S511; N), the process proceeds to S502 without passing through S512 and S513.

  On the other hand, if the error notification in-process timer is up (S511; Y), the error notification in-progress flag is cleared (S512), and the error notification in progress is ended (S513), and the process proceeds to S502.

  In S502, it is determined whether the error designation command reception flag is set. The error designation command reception flag is set in the command analysis processing when the command transmitted from the main board 11 is specified in the command analysis processing (S54) as the error designation command.

  If the error designation command reception flag is not set (S502; N), the error notification process is ended. On the other hand, when the error designation command reception flag is set (S502; Y), the set error designation command reception flag is cleared (S503), and the error designation command stored in the error designation command storage area is The error type is specified from (specifically, the value of EXT) (S504), and the notification mode set for the specified error type, specifically, the content to be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the game effect The lighting mode of the LED 9 and the voice to be output are specified (S505), and the error notification is started in the specified notification mode (S506).

  Next, an error type identified in S504 is an error having a notification period, for example, a vibration detection 2 error in which 60 seconds is set as a release period (notification period), or 300 seconds as a release period (notification period) It is determined whether or not there is a starting opening 2 abnormal winning error or the like.

  If the error type is an error having a notification period (S507; Y), a value corresponding to the notification period is set to the error notification informing timer together with the error notification informing flag, and the timer notification timer timer count is started. The error notification process ends. As a result, the notification of the error started in S506 ends when the timer in the error notification is up.

  On the other hand, when the error type is not an error having a notification period (S507; N), only the error notification in progress flag is set, and the error notification processing is ended without starting the timer count of the error notification in progress timer. As a result, since the timer informing error notification is not determined to be in operation in S501 described above, the notification of the error started in S506 is continued until the next error designation command is received.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the power failure recovery screen display process (S59) of this embodiment. In the power failure recovery screen display process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the recovery screen display process timer described later is in operation, that is, whether the power failure recovery screen is being displayed in the performance display device 5 or not. It is determined (S611). If the recovery screen display process timer is in operation (S611; Y), the process proceeds to S618, and if the recovery screen display process timer is not in operation (S611; N), whether or not the power failure recovery designation command is received Is determined (S612). If the power failure recovery designation command has not been received (S612; N), the power failure recovery screen display process ends, and if the power failure recovery designation command is received (S612; Y), further, for right-handed notification It is determined whether the LED lighting designation command has been received (S613).

  If there is no reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command (S613; N), a power failure recovery screen (power left-off power failure notification to notify the game ball to be launched toward the left gaming area 10L in the effect display device 5 Proceed to S 616 (S 614), if there is reception of the right-handed LED lighting specification command (S 613; Y), the effect display device Select the right-handed recovery screen display process table for displaying a power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) to notify the game ball to launch toward the right gaming area 10R in 5 and proceed to S616 (S615).

  Then, in S615, the CPU for effect control 120 starts the process timer in the recovery screen display process data 1 of the recovery screen display process table selected in S614 or S615. In the recovery screen display process table selected in S614 or S615, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, and sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with the respective recovery screen display process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 follows the contents of the recovery screen display process data 1 (display control execution data 1 and sound control execution data 1 etc.) to produce the effect device (effect display device 5 as effect parts, effect as effect elements) The control of the speakers 8L, 8R, etc., as the parts for control is executed, and the display of the power failure recovery screen is started (S617). For example, in order to display the power failure recovery screen corresponding to the recovery screen display process table selected in S614 or S615 in the effect display device 5, an instruction is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the power failure recovery screen display process ends.

  On the other hand, in S618, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the recovery screen display process timer by one. Then, it is determined whether the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S619). When the recovery screen display process timer has timed out (S619; Y), the recovery screen display process data is switched (S620). That is, the recovery screen display process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the recovery screen display process table in the recovery screen display process timer (S621). Further, the control state of the rendering device (the component for effect) is changed based on the display control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next to the display control execution data (S 622). Then, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, when the recovery screen display process timer has not timed out (S619; N), effects are produced according to the contents (display control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) of recovery screen display process data corresponding to the recovery screen display process timer. The control of the device (the part for effect) is executed (S323), and the process proceeds to S624.

  Then, at S624, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the special winning opening open designation command. When there is reception of the special winning opening open designation command (S 624; Y), in addition to the power failure recovery screen being displayed on the effect display device 5, the effect display device 5 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The display of a notification image for the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is open is started, and the process proceeds to S629. If there is no reception of the special winning opening open designation command (S 624; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening notification image is being displayed (S 626). If the special winning opening open notification image is not being displayed (S626; N), the processing proceeds to S629, and if the special winning opening open notification image is being displayed (S626; Y), the special winning opening after the release of the designated command It is determined whether or not there is reception, that is, it is determined whether the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (S627). If there is no reception of the designated command after releasing the special winning opening (S627; N), the power failure restoration screen display processing is ended, and if there is reception of the specifying command after releasing the special winning opening (S627; Y), the special winning opening The display of the notification image during opening is ended, and the process proceeds to S630 (S628).

  Then, at S629, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any of the symbol determination command or the hit end designation command has been received. When there is reception of either a symbol determination command or a hit end designation command (S629; Y), the recovery screen display process timer is cleared, the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended, and the power failure recovery screen display processing is ended. Do. If neither the symbol determination command nor the end designation command has been received (S629; N), the power failure recovery screen display process is terminated without executing S630.

  That is, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 supplies power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the occurrence of an error such as radio wave error, magnet error, vibration detection error or the like mentioned above during the game. If it is stopped (power is turned off) and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed (the power is turned on) again without operating the clear switch, power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. If the gaming state at the time of the play is the normal state, the left display failure recovery screen is displayed on the effect display device 5. Then, when the reception of the symbol determination command, that is, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the left-turn power failure recovery screen.

  In addition, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted (the power is turned on) again without operating the clear switch, the gaming state at the time when the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped is the gaming ball If it is a gaming state (time reduction state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) to launch the game to the right gaming area 10R, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-turn power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 5. Then, the symbol determination command, the big winning opening open designated command, the hit ending designated command reception, that is, the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the closing of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, the big hit gaming state or the small hitting game When transitioning from the state to the time saving state, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the power-on-the-right-version restoration screen for right-handed use.

  Furthermore, when the large winning opening open command is received during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, that is, when the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in the large hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The effect control CPU 120 displays a notification image on the effect display device 5 during opening of the special winning opening, and informs the player that the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is open. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the power failure recovery screen is displayed during the big hit game or the small hit game, the notification image is displayed on the effect display device 5 during the opening of the big winning opening. In contrast, the game ball can be urged to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 10R so that the game ball wins the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, so the first big winning during the big hit game The game ball is not won by the game ball does not win the game ball by the game ball does not get to the player by the game ball does not win the game ball by the game ball does not win the game ball by the small hit game It is possible to reduce the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player, such as the possibility that the big hit game will be started (controlled to the big hit game state) without passing through the third count switch 24B. In other words, the game value in the present embodiment is the number of award balls awarded by the game ball having won the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening, and after the game ball has won the second large winning opening It means being controlled to a big hit game state by having passed the 3rd count switch 24B.

  In the present embodiment, the special winning opening open notification image is displayed only during the opening of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening during display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, that is, Although the display and non-display of the special winning opening open notification image is repeatedly executed by repeating the opening of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the big winning opening open notification image is the end of the opening of the last first big winning opening or second big winning opening in the big hit game or small hit game until the big hit game or small hit game is finished It may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the special display port 5 is opened to notify that the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is being opened while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed. Although the form which displays a middle alerting picture was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 1st big winning a prize opening or the 2nd big winning a prize opening is open while displaying the power failure restoration screen for right-handed The notification of the presence may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, light emission of the game effect LED 9, or the like in addition to or instead of the display of the image on the effect display device 5.

  Next, FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 show the lighting mode of the right-handed notification LED 30, the display mode of the right-handed notification image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, and the display mode of the big winning opening open notification image in this embodiment. It explains based on it.

  First, the case where the gaming state is the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, since the normal state is a gaming state in which the gaming ball is shot toward the left gaming area 10L, the right-handed notification LED 30 is extinguished. As shown in FIG. 28 (B), when an error such as a vibration detection 1 error is stopped during the execution of the variable display in the normal state, a pachinko gaming machine is operated by an operation of a game clerk etc. The supply of power to machine 1 is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started again by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, as shown in FIG. A message such as "Please wait for a while" is displayed.

  Next, the case where the gaming state is the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, and the big hitting gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the time saving state, the small hitting gaming state, the lighting mode of the right hitting notification LED 30 in the big hit gaming state, the display mode of the right hitting notification image, the display mode of the power failure recovery screen, the notification of the big winning opening open Since the display mode of the image is the same, an example in the small hit game state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, since the small hit gaming state (and the time saving state, the big hit gaming state) is a gaming state in which the game ball is launched toward the right gaming area 10R, the right hitting notification LED 30 is turned on. There is. Further, during the small hit gaming state (and the time saving state, the big hit gaming state), the right-handed notification image is displayed in the first mode in the upper right portion of the effect display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (B), when an error such as vibration detection 1 error is stopped in the small hit game is detected, the electric power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated by the operation of a game clerk etc. Supply is stopped. Then, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started again by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, as shown in FIG. "Please continue to hit the right" will be displayed.

  In addition, during the display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, since the gaming state at the point when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped is the small hitting gaming state, the right-handed notification LED 30 is lit. In the upper right portion of the effect display device 5, the right-handed notification image is displayed in the second mode. Then, when the second large winning opening (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening during the big hit game) is opened while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed, the large winning in the lower part of the effect display device 5 A message such as "the big winning opening is open" is displayed as the notification image during the opening of the mouth.

  In the present embodiment, while the game state is the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state during the display of the right-handed power failure recovery screen, the common winning opening open notification position image is displayed in the case of the small hit gaming state. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is a big hit gaming state and a small hit gaming state while the right-handed power failure restoration screen is displayed. It is also possible to display a notification image of the big winning opening open of a different aspect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the form in which the special winning opening opened during display of the right-handed power failure restoration screen displays a notification image during the opening of the special winning opening common to the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and an aspect in which the special winning opening opened during display of the right-handed power failure restoration screen is different between the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening The notification image may be displayed during opening of the special winning opening of the player so that the player can easily recognize which of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening the game ball should be won.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed in the gaming state in which the gaming balls such as the time saving state, the big hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state are launched toward the right gaming area 10R. Pachinko gaming machine by displaying the right-handed notification image together with the right-handed power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 5 when stopping and restarting the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 without operating the clear switch When the supply of power is resumed at 1, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced by not displaying the game area for firing the game ball on the effect display device 5.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the right-handed notification LED 30 is controlled from the normal state to the big hit gaming state etc. when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed. While the display mode of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 is the same as in the case of the first case when the gaming state is controlled from the normal state to the big hit gaming state etc., and to the pachinko gaming machine 1 In the second mode and the second mode when the supply of power is resumed, the player confirms whether the display mode of the right-handed notification image is the first mode or the second mode. By doing this, it can be easily recognized whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the supply of power is resumed.

  Further, since the effect control CPU 120 displays the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 based on the reception of the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command from the CPU 103, the effect display device 5 Since there is no need to provide a dedicated command for designating the start of the display of the power failure recovery screen or a dedicated command for designating the start of the display of the right notification image on the effect display device 5, the number of commands increases. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at timing other than when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the right-handed notification LED lighting designation command and the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command are also used for finely right-handed notification. The turning on / off of the LED 30 can be interlocked with the display start / display end of the right-handed notification image.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and executes a command control process (S20) in the game control timer interrupt process, and performs a same interrupt command control process. The power failure recovery specification command and the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the disconnection restoration specification command and the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command, so that the power failure recovery in the effect display device 5 The display start timing of the screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notice image can be made the same, and the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notice image are different. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the player noticing the hit notification image.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen and the display start timing of the right-handed notification image in the effect display device 5 are the same, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead of the display start timing of the right-handed notification image, it may be different from the display start timing of the power failure recovery screen if the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed display unit 25D that can notify that the game area where the game ball should be fired is the right game area 10R by the lighting control and the extinguishing control by the CPU 103, Transmits the right turn notification LED turn on command to the effect control board 12 along with the turn on control of the right turn display unit 25D, and sends to the effect control board 12 along with the turn off control of the right turn display unit 25D. Since the right-handed notification LED extinguishing designation command is transmitted, the lighting state of the right-handed display unit 25D and the display state of the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 are interlocked with each other. The display of the hit notification image can be appropriately performed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment can control the first special winning opening in the closed state where the gaming ball can not win the prize and the open state where the gaming ball can win the prize. And a second special variable winning ball device 7B capable of controlling the second large winning opening in a closed state in which the gaming ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the gaming ball can win a prize; And the second ball winning prize process can be executed based on the game ball winning a prize ball processing (S12) based on that the game ball has won, the game ball winning a second big winning hole during the small hit game The gaming state can be controlled to the big hit gaming state based on passing through the third count switch 24B. Then, in the effect display device 5, since the notification image is displayed while the big winning opening is open based on the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 When reopened, it is possible for the player to recognize that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are in an open state in which the game ball can be won, and the first big game ball is not fired. The player's fault such as not being controlled to the big hit gaming state because the game ball does not get a prize ball because the game ball does not get a prize in the winning opening or the second big winning opening, and the game ball does not pass the third count switch 24B. The generation of profits can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the notification image for the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the fact that the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened during display of the power failure recovery screen. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the display of the power failure recovery screen is in a big hit game or a small hit game, the notification image for the big winning opening is the first big winning opening Alternatively, it may be displayed on the effect display device 5 before the second big winning opening is released to make it possible for the player to recognize that the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a form in which a notice image of the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. Although the present invention has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the display of the power failure recovery screen, even when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are opened, the notification image of the large winning opening is open. May not be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a form in which a notice image of the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen (normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally open When changing from the state to the enlarged open state), the effect display device 5 may display an image notifying that the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening. That is, the "variable winning device" of the means 5 in this embodiment may be the first special variable winning ball device 7A or the second special variable winning ball device 7B as in this embodiment, or the second start winning opening. It may be a normally variable winning ball device 6B to be formed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a form in which a notice image of the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning opening open notification image is one of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening during display of the power failure recovery screen. May be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the fact that only the key is released.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the process of S 414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the “radio wave error” whose occurrence is determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the “magnet error” being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the embodiment, when the supply of power is resumed, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery screen (step S10) based on the reception of the right turn notification LED lighting specification command from the CPU 103. Although the mode for displaying the right-handed power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 resumes the supply of power. The power failure recovery screen (right-handed power failure recovery screen) and the right-handed notification image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the reception of the game state designation command according to the gaming state from the CPU 103. By doing this, it is not necessary to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notice image on the effect display device 5, and an increase in the number of commands can be suppressed.

  Specifically, Modification 1 will be described based on FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 30, in the game control main processing in the present modification 1, the CPU 103 executes the processing of Sa1 to Sa8 and Sa41 to Sa44, and then the gaming state according to the gaming state specified in the processing of Sa44. The transmission setting of the designated command is performed (a46a), and the processing of Sa48 and Sa15 to Sa20 is executed. Note that the gaming state designation command transmitted and set in Sa 46 a is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process (S 20).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 31, when the effect control CPU 120 executes S701 to S703 and determines in S703 that there is reception of a power failure recovery designation command, it is determined from the gaming state designation command that both the power recovery specification command has been received. The game state is specified (S 707 a). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is the normal state (S 707 b), and if the specified gaming state is any of the short time state, the big hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state (S 707 b; N) The processes of S 708 and S 709 are executed to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 30 and display of the right-handed notification image of the first aspect on the effect display device 5.

  If the gaming state changes from the normal state to the big hit gaming state or the like by the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 as shown in the processing of S704a to S704c. The game state is specified from the game state specification command, and if the specified game state is not the normal state, that is, if it is a big hit game state, S705 and S706 are executed to turn on the right-handed notification LED 30 and effect display device 5 The display of the right-handed notification image of the first aspect of the present invention may be started. When it is determined in S702 that the right-handed notification image is being displayed in the first mode (S702; Y), the effect control CPU 120 receives the gaming state received from the CPU 103, as shown in the processing of S710a to S710c. The game state is specified from the designated command, and if the specified game state is a normal state, S708 and S709 are executed to turn off the LED 30 for right-handed notification and the right-handed notification image of the first aspect in the effect display device 5 The display of should be finished.

  As described above, in the first modification, there is no need to provide an individual command for displaying the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5, and thereby suppressing the increase in the number of commands, the gaming state according to the gaming state The display of the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 can be realized in detail by the designated command.

  In the first modification, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the CPU 103 transmits a game state designation command according to the game state to the effect control board 12 (the CPU 120 for effect control), The effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the right-turn notification image is displayed on the effect display device 5 together with the power failure recovery screen in accordance with the game state specified from the game state designating command received from the CPU 103. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command according to the gaming state to the effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control), The effect control CPU 120 displays a power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 5 according to the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery designation command received from the CPU 103 And a right-handed notification image may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit game displays the big hit game effect on the effect display device 5 during the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the big hit game effect, Not only the effect of 1 but a plurality of effects may be executable. When a plurality of effects can be executed as a big hit game effect, the player may select an effect to be executed during the big hit game by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the player can select the effect to be executed during the big hit game by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A as described above, the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while selecting the effect. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed when the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the processing of the CPU 120 for effect control can be reduced by executing a predetermined effect of 1 as a big hit game effect. May be

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (E) as the second modification, the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays the combination showing the big hit of the production symbol, and then the first round of the big hit game In B, the options of BGM (music) output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a big hit game effect during the big hit game are displayed (the choices of song A, song B, and song C shown in FIG. 33B).

  On the screen shown in FIG. 33B, the player or the like selects any one of the options by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A and performs the determination operation. The display is ended, and the display of the image as the big hit game effect and the BGM according to the determined option are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R on the effect display device 5.

  On the other hand, in the state where it is not determined which BGM to output yet, that is, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped while the BGM option is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered again. When it is turned on, the right-handed power failure restoration screen and the right-handed notification image are displayed on the effect display device 5 as in the above embodiment.

  Then, when the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed and the first round is finished, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display an image as a big hit game effect, as shown in FIG. Among the options displayed in), one BGM (the song C in this modification 2) is determined as the BGM to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the output from the speakers 8L and 8R of the determined BGM is started.

  In the second modification, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped while the option of BGM is displayed, the supply of the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the form which determines BGM to output uniquely was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, When the supply of the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during the display of the BGM option, After the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be randomly determined from among the displayed options.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect display device 5 is right based on the fact that the game state is controlled to the game state in which the game balls such as the short time state, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state are launched toward the right game area 10R. Although the hit notification image is displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area 10R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state is the normal state, that is, When the gaming state is controlled to launch the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 10L, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect based on detection that the gaming ball has been launched toward the right gaming area 10R. A warning message may be issued to launch the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 10L by the display on the device 5, the sound output by the speakers 8L, 8R, the light emission of the game effect LED 9, or the like. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that warns and warns that the game ball should be launched to the left game area 10L based on the detection that the game ball has been launched to the right game area 10R as described above. If the rendering symbol is derived and displayed as a change display result indicating a big hit or a small hit during execution of the warning notification, the warning notification may be stopped.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the CPU 103 issues a power failure recovery designation command and an LED for right-handed notification. Although the form which displays a power failure restoration screen and a right-handed notice image on the effect display device 5 by transmitting the lighting specification command to the effect control board 12 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A storage unit capable of storing at least a part of the process being executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped is provided on the effect control board 12 to the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the content stored in the storage unit without reception of a power failure recovery designation command or a right-handed notification LED lighting designation command from the CPU 103 when the power sphere of power is resumed. Power interruption recovery screen on the display device 5 out and the right-handed notification image may be capable of displaying.

  In the above embodiment, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are provided in the right gaming area 10R so that only the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 10R can win, but the present invention Is not limited to this, and the first large winning opening and the second winning opening may be provided at positions where the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 10L can win. In this case, when the first big winning opening and the second winning opening are provided at positions where the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 10L can win, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used during a big hit game or a small hit game. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the game display ball is directed to the left gaming area 10L along with the left-turn power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 5 A left strike notification image may be displayed prompting to launch. In other words, the “specific route” in the present invention is a route where the special winning opening that is open when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed regardless of the left and right of the game area. Just do it.

  Furthermore, if it is an area where it is possible to launch a game ball, the right game area 10R such as the upper part of the center decoration frame surrounding the periphery of the effect display device 5 and the left game It may be provided in an area other than the area 10L. As described above, when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are provided in the area other than the right gaming area 10R and the left gaming area 10L, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used during the big hit game or the small hit game. When the supply is stopped and the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the effect display device 5 is provided with the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (for example, the center A notification image may be displayed prompting the user to shoot toward the top of the decoration frame or the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during the hit game or small hit game and the supply of the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is resumed, for right-handed notification Although the form which makes LED30 and right-handed display part 25D light was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, supply of electric power to pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during the hit game or the small hit game When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed, the LED 30 for right-handed notification may not be turned on. Further, the right-handed notification LED 30 and the right-handed display unit 25D in the above embodiment are omitted, and a promotion display is provided to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific route on the effect display device 5 It is also good. Furthermore, instead of the notification by the LED 30 for right-handed notification and the right-handed display unit 25D in the embodiment, notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R or the like.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed display unit 25D and the effect control CPU 120 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the right-handed notification LED 30, but the present invention is not limited thereto. There is no limitation, and the CPU 103 may control both turning on and off of the right-handed display unit 25D and the right-handed notification LED 30.

  Further, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, gaming balls having a predetermined number of balls are inside the gaming machine In addition, the number of balls that have been enclosed so as to be able to circulate and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the game values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 120 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern designation command when the fluctuation is started Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU 120 for effect control by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 uses, for example, the first command, a fluctuation time or fluctuation mode before reaching reach (before reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching reach). The second command indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time may be notified by the first command and the second command, and the CPU 120 for effect control regarding the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. The selection may be made by When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game ball is shot out from below the game area by the ball striking device, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball striking device may be pachinko game machine 1 The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing the game ball at the upper position of the game area.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the form in which the starting winning opening is made into two, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting winning opening is The number of start winning openings may be three or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two in 1st special drawing and 2nd special drawing is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is one It is good also as three or more special symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B respectively variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as a display result, and then stop the final stop symbol Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention stops display of the final stop design after variably displaying a plurality of special symbols without including the final stop design as a display result. It may be That is, the final stop symbol to be the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  In the above embodiment, the time-saving control is carried out after the end of the big-hit game (the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state), but the present invention is not limited thereto. A jackpot type may be provided in which probability fluctuation control is performed such that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is increased after the end of the jackpot game. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing probability variation control, probability variation control may be performed after the end of the big hit game based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed the third count switch 23B during the big hit game.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above and the configurations shown in the later-described embodiment and modification may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  As the gaming machine of the present invention, it is also possible to execute a game using gaming media (for example, gaming balls), and advantageous state for the player (for example, big hit gaming state, probability changing state, time saving state, etc.) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled, and capable of firing game media based on the operation of the player (for example, a bat operating handle or a bat launching device); The first control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing the game state recovery process (for example, Sa41 to Sa48 in the game control main process) when controlling the progress of the game and receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply. And a promotion display (for example, for promoting the game medium to be discharged to flow down a specific path (for example, the right game area 10R) of the flow down path where the game medium flows down A display means (for example, effect display device 5) capable of displaying a right-handed notification image) and a recovery display (for example, a power failure recovery screen) related to the recovery processing, and a means different from the display means Notification means (for example, LED 30 for right-handed notification) capable of promoting notification for promoting game media to be discharged down a specific route, and information (for example, implementation) transmitted from the first control means Second control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling display on the display means based on the right-handed notification LED lighting specification command in the example and the gaming state designation command in the first modification; Detecting means (for example, out-of-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 140 etc.) capable of detecting the game media (eg, game area 90 Signal line (e.g., the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136 etc.) to which the detection signal from the means is transmitted, and a receiving means (e.g., the main substrate 9011, the predetermined one provided on the main substrate 9011 side) that receives the detection signal. And the abnormality detection means (for example, the CPU 90103 for executing the error notification process of FIG. 137) capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first start winning combination) A regular winning ball device 906A serving as a mouth, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second starting winning port, a regular winning port 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning area, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a special winning port ) Payout means (eg, ball payout device, payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out game media based on making and predetermined states (eg, normal state etc.) different from the above-mentioned advantageous state. Specifically, the number of game media (for example, the number of hit balls, etc.) detected by the detection means in the probability change flag, the time saving flag, the state in which all round game flags are off, etc., and the payout in the predetermined state It is possible to display predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 116, etc.) calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the means (for example, the number of winning balls in each winning opening). Information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying, and the display by the information display means is limited when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means (For example, as shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, an error is notified and performance display is limited, etc.), the second control means can perform control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the right-handed notification process and the power failure recovery screen display process to cause the power failure recovery screen and the right-handed notification image on the effect display device 5 The part which displays and) a game machine is mentioned.

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the occurrence of the disadvantage of the player can be reduced when the gaming state is restored. In addition, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing an incorrect display.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the execution of the promotion display or the promotion notification may be limited. According to such a configuration, by performing the promotion display and the promotion notification in an abnormal state, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with incorrect information. The limitation is not limited to the execution of the promotion display or the promotion notification, but may be the execution of the promotion display or the promotion notification in a mode that can identify that an abnormality has been detected.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the mode of the promotion display or the promotion notification may be made different according to the calculated predetermined information. According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the calculated predetermined information, and the interest can be improved.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine which can prevent the display of incorrect information, it is possible to execute the game, and advantageous state for the player (for example, big hit gaming state, probability changing state, time saving state, etc.) Detection means (eg, FIG. 136, FIG. 140) capable of detecting a game medium (eg, a pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.) that can be Etc., a signal line (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136, etc.) to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted, and a receiving means (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. For example, a main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, and the like, and an abnormality detection unit (for example, an air in FIG.ー Information processing is performed by the CPU 90103 etc., and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the ordinary winning ball device 906A which becomes the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which becomes the second starting winning opening, the general winning area Payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media based on the winning of a special variable winning ball device 907 which becomes a general winning hole 9050A to 9050D, a big winning hole, etc. The number of game media detected by the detection means (for example, the normal state etc. Specifically, the state of the probability change flag, the short time flag, the flag during round game play etc. is off) different from the state Based on the number of hit balls and the like, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls awarded by winning on each winning opening) Information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 140, etc.) capable of displaying (for example, performance display etc.) capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 116) to be output; When an abnormality in the reception state is detected, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, and a performance display is restricted). Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
As described above, the entry of game media into the general winning area has an influence on the game as compared to the entry of game media into the start winning area where the variable display of the special symbol is executed by the entry of game media Is low. Further, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is the specific display result, it is controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player, but in this advantageous state, the game medium to the specific winning area Compared with entry, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance interest. Under such circumstances, the game nail may be maintained on the game arcade side so that entry of game media into the general winning area becomes substantially difficult.

  However, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the gaming board so that gaming media enter the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Therefore, it is desirable that the game arcade side be in a maintenance state of the game nail (such as passing the test) that the game medium enters into the general winning area at a predetermined frequency, if it is originally. It is necessary to raise the player's interest in entering game media into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entering game media into the general winning area.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is a room to further increase the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. In the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having the general winning area.

  Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 903a formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable on the gaming machine frame 903. The gaming machine frame 903 is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism. The outer frame is fixed to a so-called gaming island where a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are juxtaposed. By opening the gaming machine frame 903 with respect to the outer frame, a clerk or the like can view the back of the gaming machine frame 903 and the inside of the gaming island.

  In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails is formed. In the game area 9010, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball striking device and is shot. The game area 9010 is composed of a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area through which game balls can pass on the game board 902, and the left side is a left game area 9010A and the right side is a right game area 9010B with reference to the center of the game area 9010.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (the right side of the game area 9010 in the example shown in FIG. 34). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and in the special view game as an example of the variable display game, each is identified A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") which is a plurality of possible types of identification information (special identification information) is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. It is not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special view" . In addition, one special symbol display device may be provided.

  Near the center of the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols that are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to the start of any one of the first special figure fluctuation by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure fluctuation by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special figure game, “left The variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R “,” “middle” and “right”. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, the display symbols 905L, 905C, 905R on the left, middle and right in the image display device 905 The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 904A, or the special drawing using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that deriving and displaying a display result means stopping display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) of identification information such as a decorative symbol or the like and ending variable display.

  In the image display device 905, three areas may be provided as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R by bonding, separating, or bonding and separating. . The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. When variable display of the first special figure is executed by the first special symbol display device 904A, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special view is executed on the display device 904B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters are displayed on the decorative symbols variably displayed in “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. There are numbers "one" to "eight", alphabetic characters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of a number or a character or a symbol and a character image, and the like. Is, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure. In addition to these eight kinds of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (patterns composed of characters of "probable") corresponding to becoming "probable big hit" (also referred to as "2R positive variation big hit") and blank symbols ( A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination may be included. Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the decorative symbols. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  For example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, for example, from lower to higher symbol numbers sequentially from top to bottom Flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol with the largest symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, subsequently, the decorative symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol number. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

  At the lower right portion of the display screen of the image display device 905, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B are provided to display the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol described later. In this embodiment, while the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, the first special figure is displayed and the display result of the variable display is derived. The variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special drawing is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the fourth symbol display area 905A for the second special view and the second special drawing, and the derivation display of the display result of the variable display is performed. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special drawing is provided.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is specified by the variation pattern on the CPU 90120 for effect control) This is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 905, for example, an effect such as effect contents including variable display of a decorative symbol disappearing from the screen for a moment The presentation aspect has been diversified, such as the effect that the movable object blocks all or a part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 905, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display state is currently made. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905, is the state of the current variable display possible by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always variably displayed in a fixed operation and does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special figure and the fourth symbol for the second special figure may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol, and the fourth special symbol display area 905A for the first special figure and the second special symbol The fourth symbol display area 905B for figures may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  The variable display of the fourth symbol (variable display) is a predetermined display color of the fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B (for example, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure is white, the second for the second special figure 4 symbol display area 905 B is realized by continuing the blinking state in which lighting (display) and non-display (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals in black). The variable display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the fourth special pattern for the first special figure in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure are synchronized. The variable display of the second special view in the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display of the fourth design for the second special figure in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special view are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a big hit It will remain. Note that the display color may be made different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, when the first special symbol display device 904A causes the stop symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special figure is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) that evokes the detachment. It will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth special symbol for the first special drawing is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A in the stop display (derivative display).

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of a big hit It will remain. Note that the display color may be made different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, when the second special symbol display device 904B causes the stop symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) that evokes the detachment. It will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special view is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905B in the stop display (derivative display).

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 905H, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of variable display (the number of special map holding memories) is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display occurs when the gaming ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B (start winning). Do. That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, the hold of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done.

  As an example, the start winning memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right sequentially from the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first based on the occurrence of the start winning. There is. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special drawing game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the display is not displayed. One of the display portions in the aspect (transparent color) (for example, the display portion at the left end of the display portions in the non-display aspect) is changed to blue display. Also, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special drawing game using the second special view in the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied based on the game ball having entered the second start winning opening, the non-display One of the display portions in the embodiment is changed to red display. Thereafter, for example, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special view game using the first special view and the start condition (second start condition) of the special view game using the second special view is satisfied, The display on the left display area is removed, and the display on each display area is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts which has been changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has been changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  That is, when the start winning combination occurs, the start winning combination memory display area 905H displays the hold information (an object shown by a circle in FIG. 34, FIG. 64, etc.) corresponding to the special drawing game executed based on the start winning combination. Display control newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special view game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, the order in which the start condition is satisfied). When a new starting winning combination occurs when n pieces of holding information are displayed (when n special drawing games are held), the (n + 1) th holding information from the left corresponding to the new starting winning combination Will be displayed anew. Then, when the start condition of the special drawing game being held is satisfied, the leftmost holding information corresponding to the special drawing game is erased and the nth (n ≧ 2) holding information from the left is left one by one. And is displayed n-1st.

  In addition, the order in which the start condition of the special view game is established is not limited to the order in which the start condition occurs, but the start condition of the special view game regarding the second special figure is higher than the start condition of the special view game regarding the first special view It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority variation). Also, conversely to this, the start condition of the special view game regarding the first special figure is established over the start condition of the special view game regarding the second special view (so-called special view 1 priority variation) You may

  In the start winning storage display area 905H, a player or the like may be able to recognize the number of special drawing reservations by displaying a number indicating the number of special drawings storage, for example. Along with or instead of the start winning storage display area 905H, a display may be provided to display the number of stored special figures. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the first holding for specifying the number of special drawing holding storages in an identifiable manner on the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning storage display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first suspension indicator 9025A displays the first suspension storage number as the number of valid starting winning balls that has entered the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A in a distinguishable manner. The second suspension display 9025B displays the second suspension storage number as the number of valid starting winning balls having entered the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B in a distinguishable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit value (for example, "4") in each of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number. Is composed including. Further, on the right side of the image display device 905, a movable part 901000 is provided.

  The movable part 901000 incorporates a motor and a lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable role product 901000 is operated (rotational operation and lighting) when an effect for announcing a big hit, for example, a fluctuation result annunciation effect or anticipation informing effect described later is executed.

  Under the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal motorized product shown in FIG. A tulip type character (usually an electric character) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, the gaming ball does not enter the second start winning opening or enters It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It becomes easy to expand and open.

  The game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the first hold storage number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022B, and the second hold storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9028 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. Form a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening. The game ball entering the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are established, the special view game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and so on. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not established, suspension of variable display occurs. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special view game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is performed. The number is incremented by one (1) and the execution of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special view game using the second special drawing based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is performed. The number is incremented by one (1) and the execution of the special drawing game using the second special drawing is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started When being executed, the second pending storage number is decremented by one. The sum of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages may be referred to as the total number of pending storages or as the number of special views pending storages.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 34, the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is normally displayed (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game"). The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. In addition, the normal symbol display 9020 is not limited to one that variably displays a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", etc. as an ordinary symbol, for example, "o" and "x" Normal symbols are variably displayed by alternately turning on the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be shown, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle" and "right" in a predetermined order It may be one. Above the normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C is provided. The general drawing reserve display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing retention memories as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gates 9041A and 9041B.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. Also, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member A prize area is provided.

  The general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are formed by ball receiving members provided to project forward (to the player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member is to receive the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter for one game ball, but the game ball 2 Less than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more gaming balls are not arranged in a row in the horizontal direction to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the intervals of the ball receiving members provided with the respective regular winning openings 9050A to 9050D are intervals at which at least one or more gaming balls can pass. In addition, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the opening of the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D (for example, a character equivalent to the normal variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening and closing of the second start winning opening) is provided. It is always open. Further, even if the game balls are won in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special drawing game nor the start condition of the variable display of the common drawing game is established based on the winning.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of award balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. A variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the big winning opening, in accordance with the game ball having a winning in the winning opening. The fact that the winning ball device 907 is activated to make it easy for the gaming ball to win the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole may be defined as the specific value given by the winning of the gaming ball in the general winning hole.

  Also, the specific value to be given to the player may be made different according to the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C. If one game ball is awarded to the first general winning hole 9050A or the fourth general winning hole 9050D, 10 prize balls are awarded (ie, specific values of different sizes are given). May be given). In addition, although the specific value awarded when the game ball is won in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of winning balls, the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening When the gaming ball wins the 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, different types of specific values may be provided).

  Also, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening In such a case that a different effect is executed between the case where is awarded and the case where the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening (ie, when the type of specific value is different) Also good. In addition, in the case where ten winning balls are awarded according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, and in the case where five winning balls are awarded according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening Different effects may be performed (ie, when the magnitude of the specific value is different).

  As shown in FIG. 35, the game balls for the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D are the first general winnings corresponding to each other. It is detected by the mouth switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. When a game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Is paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the winning opening switch corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Not only what has been done, it is also possible to detect which general winning opening the game ball has won.

  The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which different general winning opening switches are provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left gaming area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the right gaming area 9010 B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You may In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that any general winning opening has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It may be possible to

  At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured. The game balls taken into the out port are recovered to the game island via a ball recovery passage (not shown) in communication with the out port. The game balls that have won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through the winning ball collecting group (not shown) It is to be collected to the game island via the collection passage. An outer sphere detector (not shown) is provided in the sphere recovery passage. As a result, in the out-of-ball detector, the game area 9010 is driven in (a game ball led to the out port without winning in any winning opening and a winning ball gathering in any winning opening The game balls collected in the game) All game balls are detected. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012 so that the effect control CPU 90120 counts the number of game balls driven into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-of-ball detector is configured to include a counter that increases by one each time a game ball is detected, effect control is performed each time the value of the counter increases by a fixed number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 9012 so that the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of outs by a fixed number of units (for example, 10 units).

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a playing effect lamp 909 is provided in the peripheral area of the playing area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the regular winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, an upper tray 9060 that holds (stores) the game balls paid out as winning balls and the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. It is provided. For example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray 9060, an operation button 9030 which can be operated by the player by pressing operation or the like is installed.

  A keyhole 9061 of a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. By inserting a key corresponding to the key hole 9061 into the key hole 9061 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, it becomes possible to open the front of the glass door frame 903 a with respect to the gaming machine frame 903. Further, by inserting the key into the key hole 9061 and rotating the key in the other direction, for example, clockwise, it is possible to open the gaming machine frame 903 forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the key hole 9061. When the key is inserted in the key hole 9061 and turned counterclockwise or clockwise and then the key is released or pulled out, the direction opposite to the direction in which the key hole 9061 is turned Turn around to return to neutral position. When the key hole 9061 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 903a can be closed and locked to the gaming machine frame 903 and the gaming machine frame 903 is closed and locked to the outer frame. Is possible. In addition, the glass door frame 903a is opened forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 to maintain the gaming board (gauge board including gaming nails and a winning opening) 902 (for example, measures for solving a ball jam) Alternatively, the user can operate the mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 described later.

  A lower plate 9062 for storing game balls that can not be accommodated in the upper plate 9060 is provided directly below the upper plate 9060, and a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area in the lower right of the upper plate 9060 A hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 9063 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire. For example, the hit ball operating handle 9063 adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that is rotatable and can be pressed. The operation button 9030 is not limited to one that can be pressed or rotated, and may be one that can be touched or pressed like a touch panel, for example, or can be tilted like a lever-type switch It may be operable or may be capable of pressing and tilting such as a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, for example, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation act by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation act by the player mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically. The player's operation performed on the operation button 9030 includes a pressing detection switch (not shown) for detecting depression of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder (for detecting the rotation direction and rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 9030 Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passing gate 9041A provided in the left gaming area 9010A and the second passing gate 9041B provided in the right gaming area 9010B is the first passing gate 9041A shown in FIG. The common drawing start conditions for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020, such as being detected by the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second passing gate 9041B After the establishment, for example, the common drawing game by the normal symbol display device 9020 is started based on the establishment of the common drawing start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbols, for example, the end of the previous common drawing game. Ru.

  In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time elapses, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special figure game by the 1st special symbol display device 904A is that the game ball which entered into the 1st starting winning a prize mouth formed in the normal winning a prize ball device 906A was detected by the 1st starting mouth switch 9022A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established, the process is started based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special view game or the big hit gaming state. The special figure game by the 2nd special symbol display device 904B is that the game ball which entered into the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth which is formed to normally variable winning a prize ball device 906B was detected by the 2nd starting mouth switch 9022 B which shows in Figure 35 etc Thus, after the second start condition is established, the process is started based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special view game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, when the predetermined time which becomes the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol The derived special symbol (special drawing display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol (outlying symbol) other than a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed It becomes ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of the big hit, and for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the positive variation big hit and the non positive variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also referred to simply as "round") is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit gaming state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening and closing plate of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 is a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number for the first period. A round game is executed to change the special variable winning ball device 907 to a first state advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening in the period until the winning balls (for example, nine) are generated. Ru. In this way, the opening and closing board which made the big winning opening open during execution of the round game receives the game ball which falls on the surface of the game board 902, and then makes the big winning opening closed, special variable winning prize ball device By changing 907 to a second state which is disadvantageous to the player, one round game is ended. In the big hit state, the number of times of execution of the round game which is an open cycle of the big winning opening is, for example, 15 times. In addition, you may provide several types of big hit classifications in which the execution frequency of a round game differs.

  After the jackpot state ends, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time reduction control is performed in which the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. It is controlled to be a short time state, or a probability change state in which probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with time reduction control.

  Here, the normal state refers to a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a normal state as a gaming state different from the probability changing state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state where initialization processing is performed after power on is performed. On the other hand, in the time saving state, either of the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result becoming a "big hit", when either condition is established first You just have to finish. Also, in the probability change state, the variable display result is "big hit" and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than that in the normal state or the time saving state in each special figure game and variable display of decorative symbols. improves. Such a definite change state continues until the next variable display result is a "big hit", or until a predetermined number of (for example, eight) special figure games are executed.

  A big hit (type) controlled to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends is also referred to as a positive change big hit. A big hit (type) controlled to a short time state without being controlled to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends is also referred to as a non-positive change big hit.

  In a definite change state or a short time state, a control for shortening the fluctuation time (common drawing fluctuation time) of an ordinary symbol in a regular drawing game by an ordinary symbol display 9020 or a variable pattern of ordinary symbols in each regular drawing game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per common view" than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per common view" The game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state, and the second start condition is The control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of being established. It should be noted that, in the definite variation state or the short time state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening in the probability changing state or the time saving state and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 904B is more likely to be satisfied, and the special drawing game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result is a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in a definite change state or a time saving state, it becomes easy to be a big hit game state compared with a normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to a probability changing state or a time saving state. A state in which the high release control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high release control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A and Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state refers to a decorative symbol ("reach variation symbol") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination. The display state in which the fluctuation continues, or the display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R) in advance The decorative pattern display area (for example, "inside") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative symbol showing "7" alphanumeric characters) constituting the defined big hit combination is stopped and displayed In the symbol display area 905C, etc.) The display condition in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or a part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle" It is a display state fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Also, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is called reach effect display (or simply reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, etc. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability"). That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. And when the reach aspect of a super reach appears, possibility (big hit reliability) of a variable display result becoming a "big hit" becomes high compared with the case where the reach aspect of a normal reach appears.

  Unlike the reach effect, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative display may be in the reach state, or the variable display result may be the "big hit". A variable display effect for notifying a player by a variable display mode of a symbol or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “simulated link” and “slip” can be performed, and each of the effect operations is performed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 9011 side. It is determined whether or not.

  Unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-run” or “slip”, display of effect images such as predetermined character images or message images is performed during variable display of decorative symbols. The player is informed that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may reach the reach state or the variable display result may become the "big hit" by the rendering operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A preview effect may be executed to

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol does not reach the predetermined state after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. The finalized decorative design that is a non-reach combination of may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "no reach lost") when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is displayed as a stop as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is performed, or the reach effect is not performed, a finalized decorative symbol to be a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach loss combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". In addition, the definite decoration pattern used as a non-reach combination and the fixed decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination are also collectively called the fixed decoration pattern as a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol to be the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. Afterward or the like, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is, for example, “1” in the symbol number variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the image display device 905. Any one of the decorative symbols from “8” to “8” is displayed on the left, “middle” or “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R aligned on a predetermined effective line and stopped. As long as it is

  In addition, after the decorative symbol that is the big hit combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state, it is pre-read and notice that notification data that the special figure display result is "big hit" is stored An advance notice effect may be performed.

  As described above, the game area 9010 is composed of the left game area 9010A and the right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the bat operating handle (operation knob) to obtain the left game area 9010A. It is possible to switch between hitting the game ball on the left and hitting the game ball on the right at the right game area 9010B.

  In the pachinko game machine 901, when the game ball is fired to the left game area 9010A (when the game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball induction member not shown. The game ball is designed to win the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired at 9010 B. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time of the normal symbol (common figure variation time) is longer than when the gaming state is the definite variation state and the time reduction state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common figure". The rate at which the game balls fired to the left gaming area 9010A win the second start winning opening in the normal state is extremely low compared to the rate at which the first starting winning opening is won. There is.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 901, when the game ball is fired to the right game area 9010B (when the game ball enters the right game area 9010B), the left is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball induction members not shown. The rate at which the game ball is winning in the first start winning opening is extremely low compared to when the game ball is shot in the game area 9010A, or the game ball is not winning in the first start prize opening There is. Therefore, even if the player makes a right strike in the normal state, the ratio at which the game ball wins the start winning hole (one of the first start winning hole and the second start prize opening) is left in the normal state. When the game ball is extremely low compared to the rate of winning in the starting winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will hit the left in the normal state.

  In addition, the ratio at which the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B passes through the second pass gate 9041B is determined by the arrangement of the game nail or game ball guide member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the one-pass gate 9041A. And the ratio at which the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B wins in the second start winning opening in the open state is the game launched in the left game area 9010A by the arrangement of the game nail or game ball induction member etc. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins in the open second start winning opening.

  Then, in the definite change state and the short time state, the probability that the change time of the normal symbol (general change period) is shorter than the normal state and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common view" is higher than the normal state. Therefore, the ratio at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening) when right hitting in the definite changing state and the short time state is left in the positive changing state and the short time state It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening) when a hit is made. Therefore, the player performs a right strike in the definite change state and the short time state.

  In addition, the ratio at which the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B wins a large winning opening in the open state is the game ball fired in the left game area 9010A by the arrangement of the game nail or game ball induction member etc. not shown. It is higher than the ratio of winning in the open special winning opening. Therefore, the player will hit the right in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player performs a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike in response to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues the right strike in the definite change state or time saving state after the big hit gaming state ends, and enters the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the jackpot game state or the end of the short time state), it will be returned to the left.

  Further, the ratio at which the game balls fired in the left gaming area 9010A win the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A is the first general winning opening 9050A and the second The game ball launched to the right gaming area 9010B is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening, depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided, and the arrangement of the game nail or gaming ball guiding member etc. not shown. It is higher than the rate of winning the 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio at which the game balls fired in the right gaming area 9010B win the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D provided in the right gaming area 9010B is the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth. The game ball launched to the left gaming area 9010A is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or gaming ball guiding member etc. not shown. It is higher than the rate of winning the 9050D.

  In addition, only a game ball shot in the left gaming area 9010A is a part or all of the plurality of general winning openings (the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B) provided in the left gaming area 9010A. It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball fired in the right gaming area 9010B may be configured not to win, and a plurality of general winning openings provided in the right gaming area 9010B (third general winning opening 9050C and fourth general winning opening Only a game ball launched to the right gaming area 9010B may be awarded for part or all of 9050D), and a game sphere launched to the left gaming area 9010A may not be awarded.

  As described above, since the left strike is performed in the normal state, the probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B among the four general winning openings is high, and the big hit gaming state, In the definite change state and the short time state, since the right hitting is performed, the probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D among the four general winning openings is high. In accordance with the game state or the like, along with the change of the game area where the game ball is fired, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning hole is provided at a position where the game ball easily wins, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, and the probability change state In the area 9010 B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the winning frequency for the general winning opening may change according to the gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 35 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. In addition, various substrates such as a power supply substrate, an information terminal substrate, a firing control substrate, an interface substrate, etc. are disposed on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The power supply substrate is a substrate for supplying power to each substrate such as the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. The power supply substrate is connected to other substrates such as a voice control substrate 9013, a lamp control substrate 9014, a relay substrate 9015 as well as the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 to supply power. A power supply switch is provided on the power supply substrate, and the power supply is turned on by turning on the power supply switch, and power supply from the power supply substrate to each substrate is started. In addition, the power supply to each substrate is stopped by turning off the power switch. In addition, the main substrate 9011 includes a payout control substrate. The payout control substrate may be provided separately from the main substrate 9011. The payout control substrate is a substrate for controlling the payout of the winning balls, and is mounted with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is configured of a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to the reception of the number-of-balls command (transmitted as a control signal from the main substrate 9011) in which data indicating the number of balls is set. To drive the payout mechanism (the mechanism for paying out the winning balls) to execute the payout of the winning balls.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special figure or the second special figure. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 9020 by performing on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display device 9020 It also has a function to control. The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

  Further, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 90100. Although described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 is an effect such as the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 909 or the like. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the purpose to execute a predetermined rendering operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The sound control board 9013 causes the speakers 908L and 908R to output a sound based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The lamp control board 9014 is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the main substrate 9011 includes a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning port switch 9024A. Wires for transmitting detection signals from the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D are connected.

  The first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are It may be one having an arbitrary configuration that can detect gaming balls as gaming media, such as one called a sensor. In addition, the main substrate 9011 includes a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and a common view hold indicator 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Further, the main substrate 9011 is connected with a wire for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with, for example, a main board connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass signals only in the direction from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015, and blocks the input of signals from the relay substrate 9015 to the main substrate 9011. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of effect control board 9012 or relay board 9015 to the side of main board 9011.

  For example, a transmission direction restriction circuit may be provided on the relay substrate 9015 for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. In each transmission direction control circuit, the anode is connected to the main substrate connector corresponding to the main substrate 9011 and the diode whose cathode is connected to the effect control substrate connector corresponding to the effect control substrate 9012 and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode And the other end of the resistor is connected to ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction control circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control substrate 9012 side to the main substrate 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction control circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay substrate 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main substrate side connector in the main substrate 9011. Can prevent the input of an illegal signal from the outside to the main substrate 9011.

  The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect lamp 909 A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like is included.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state designating command for designating a game state (normal state, positive change state, or time reduction state), a change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game, special in special figure games Variation pattern specification command to specify variation pattern of design pattern or variation pattern on image display device 905, variable display result notification command to specify variable display result such as special symbol or decoration pattern, decoration pattern on image display device 905 The decoration ball stop command which specifies the stop of variable display, the big hit start specified command which specifies the start and the end of the big hit game state, the big hit end specified command, the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening The start winning command that is output when the game ball is won in the general winning opening is one that is output Winning opening designation command, the game ball into the special winning opening includes special winning opening winning command or the like which is output when the prize.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103 Data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform game control, and hence the game control microcomputer 90100 (or CPU 90103) executes Specifically, “perform processing” means that the CPU 90103 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate different from the main substrate 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 905, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variation data write operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various change data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 90120 in the RAM 90122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive input of various signals from outside of the production control board 9012 via the I / O 90125 for the production control CPU 90120, I / O for the production control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control board 9012 includes a wire for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable part 901000, and the like are connected. In addition, the effect control board 9012 has an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the player to the operation button 9030 has been detected, from a pressing detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown) Wiring for transmission is also connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wire for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode switching switch 9031 described later, and the operation in the display switching switch 9032 described later Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the unit is also connected.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes an image display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, a light source such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, an operation button 9030, a movable character 901000, and further, a character for effect In order to control the rendering operation using the rendering device (electrical component for rendering) including the movable member and the like included in the plurality, a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the rendering control pattern are stored in advance.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 35 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120 and the like. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs various effect displays such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 or the like. Control the The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD driving circuit, and the like.

  For example, the I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms the state of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the mode switch 9031 Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal that enables and a signal that enables confirmation of the state of the display switching switch 9032, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 Configured For example, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, an instruction (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and an instruction transmitted to the lamp control board 9014 from the output port of the I / O 90125 A command (drive signal) or the like transmitted to the movable part 901000 is output, such as (electric decoration signal) or the like.

  On the voice control board 9013, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, sound number data indicated by the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The speech synthesis IC generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound to the amplification circuit. The amplification circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, to the speakers 908L and 908R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads the control data according to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The storage data of the voice data ROM may be constituted of data indicating the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver, a lamp driver and the like are mounted on the lamp control board 9014. As an example, in the lamp control board 9014, the electric decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 or the like.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the generated abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R through the sound control board 9013, or the lamp control board 9014 Control the on / off driving of the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, etc. to notify by light, or notify the display area of the image display device 905 of a notification image (error message) of abnormality via the display control unit 90123 Display and notify. Abnormalities include magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality and the like, and are detected using the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 or the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality that occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to the sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches not corresponding to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be configured of one for detecting an abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 are prepared in accordance with each type of abnormality. What specifically included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be determined according to the specification of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like. An abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely unlikely to occur in a normal game played in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (eg, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, etc. that occur when there is a fraudulent act on the pachinko And phenomena such as radio wave abnormalities) and phenomena that may impede the progress of the game, and in particular, phenomena that require notification to players and employees of the game hall (pachinko parlors etc.).

  Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality and the like based on output signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that an abnormality has occurred is the main substrate An error is generated by the display of an error message on the image display device 905, the output of the warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode at the time of the abnormality occurrence in the gaming effect lamp 909, etc. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality occurs, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), an image of characters of "an error has occurred" is displayed in an error message display area of the image display device 905.

  Here, not only the occurrence of abnormality by the notification means such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909, but also any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality and opening of the front door It may be notified so as to be able to identify whether or not the abnormality of is detected.

  The notification of the magnetic abnormality is a notification of an abnormality that is performed when a magnetic abnormality (an abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 901, in this case, there may be fraud) is detected. There are fraudulent acts such as moving a game medium with a magnet to make a winning opening a prize, or clogging a predetermined area with the game medium to guide the game medium to a winning opening. It is prevented in advance that such an action is performed by the notification of the magnetic abnormality. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of the magnetic abnormality by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates the magnetic force equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (indicating the magnetic force → with the magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that the magnetic abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 and notification of the magnetic abnormality is performed in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the text "Magnetic error has occurred" is displayed.

  The notification of the vibration abnormality is, for example, notification of an abnormality that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning prize ball device 907. By intentionally swinging a pachinko gaming machine, there is an injustice that changes the flow-down direction of the game medium to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. It is prevented in advance that such an action is performed by notification of vibration abnormality. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided. The CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to the vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates a vibration with a strength equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (a strength equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold) Show vibration of vibration → with abnormal vibration). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command specifying that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012, and notification of the vibration abnormality is performed in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of characters of "vibration error has occurred" is displayed.

  The notification of the radio wave abnormality is a notification of an abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in this case, there may be fraud) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start opening switch (the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B), the count switch 9023 and the like, these switches are switched on / off, etc. There is cheating you get. It is prevented in advance that such an action is performed by the notification of radio wave abnormality. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided. The CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of the radio wave abnormality by determining whether the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates the reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating the reception of the predetermined radio wave → the radio wave abnormality is present). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and notification of the radio wave abnormality is performed in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the text "radio wave error has occurred" is displayed.

  The mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 are both configured by DIP switches (dual in-line package switches), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 configured by DIP switches are switched between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of slide type, the position of the knob is one end side and the other end) By switching to the side), the processing (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, since the glass door frame 903a covers the front of the game board 902, the player can not operate the mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032. It has become. In the state where the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 34), the mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 can not be selected It is not shown in FIG. 34 because it is installed at an invisible position.

  As described above, the store clerk at the game arcade inserts the key into the key hole 9061 to open the lock device (not shown) and open the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903. Operation of the mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 (switching of the DIP switch) is possible. Then, when the operation of the mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 is completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state for the gaming machine frame 903 and a key is inserted into the key hole 9061 and the locking device (shown )) Is closed.

  When the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the first position, the voltage of the mode switching terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the low state, and when the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the second position, the presentation control The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in the high state. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the first position, that is, information for the player on the image display device 905 (for example, a demo It specifies that it is a game mode which displays a screen etc., and does not display the information on a number-of-winnings management table mentioned later on the image display device 905. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, information for the store clerk in the image display device 905 (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode for displaying the number of winnings etc. for each winning opening is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is at the first position, the voltage of the display switching terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the low state, and when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position, the presentation control The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in the high state. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 receives the number of winnings for the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display is not performed, and the display of information based on a display control table to be described later (information that can specify the number of winning on the general winning opening) on the image display device 905 is prohibited. On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 receives a prize for the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display the number is specified, and the information based on the display control table to be described later (information that can specify the number of winning on the general winning opening) is displayed on the image display device 905 Do.

  In this embodiment, the mode switching switch 9031 and the display switching switch 9032 are provided on the front side of the gaming board 902 (the surface facing the player), but the mode switching switch 9031 and / or the display switching switch 9032 Alternatively, it may be provided on the back side (game island side) of the game board 902. In such a configuration, by rotating the gaming machine frame 903 forward with respect to the outer frame, the mode switching switch 9031 and / or the display switching switch 9032 provided on the back side of the game board 902 It becomes possible to operate.

  As a control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012, there is a start winning command as described above. As a start winning command, a start winning opening designation command indicating to which of the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening the starting winning has occurred, or to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening There are a jackpot determination result at the time of winning of the game ball and a start winning determination result specification command indicating the jackpot type determination result.

  The CPU 90103 is an effective start winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening, that is, of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit. When winning is detected, the jackpot judging random number and the jackpot type judging random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted jackpot judging random number and jackpot type judging random number are extracted as the first in the random number storage area for the first special figure. While storing in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages (the first number of pending storages after addition including the valid start winnings), a command for designating "first starting winning opening" is set as a starting winning opening designating command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability change state). At the time of start winning determination which determines whether or not it is executed.

  If the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table in the start winning determination, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying “off” is set. When the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type judgment random number is further classified into the jackpot type judgment table for the first special view in the jackpot type It is determined which one of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command is specified which specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching determination value. For example, a command specifying “non-probable variation big hit” or a command specifying “probable variation big hit” is set as the start winning determination determination result specifying command. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first start winning opening” designation) and the start winning judgment determination result specifying command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In addition, CPU 90103 is the start winning combination of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize opening in the state where the 1st reservation memory number which corresponds to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth has reached the upper limit (ie according to the 1st starting winning a prize opening If a prize ball is paid out, but it detects an invalid start prize that is not a target of the special figure game, it sets a command to designate "first start prize mouth" as a start prize mouth designation command, and also designates start result judgment result. As a command, blank data specifying that it is not a valid start winning is set. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first start winning opening” designation) and the start winning judgment determination result specifying command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  The CPU 90103 is an effective start winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening, that is, the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit. When winning is detected, the jackpot judging random number and the jackpot type judging random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted jackpot judging random number and the jackpot type judging random number are extracted in the second random number storage area for the second special drawing. While storing in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages (the second number of pending storages after addition including the valid start winning), a command specifying the "second starting winning opening" is set as a starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability change state). At the time of start winning determination which determines whether or not it is executed.

  If the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table in the start winning determination, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying “off” is set. When the jackpot judgment random number matches the jackpot judgment value of the jackpot judgment table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type judgment random number is further stored in the jackpot type judgment table for the second special view in the jackpot type It is determined which one of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command is specified which specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching determination value. For example, a command specifying “non-probable variation big hit” or a command specifying “probable variation big hit” is set as the start winning determination determination result specifying command. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second start winning opening” designation) and the start winning judgment determination result specifying command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In addition, CPU 90103 is the start winning combination of the game ball to the 2nd starting winning a prize opening in the state where the 2nd reservation memory number which corresponds to the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth has reached upper limit (that is, according to the 2nd starting winning a prize opening If a prize ball is paid out, but it detects an invalid start winning that is not a target of the special figure game, a command to designate "second starting winning opening" is set as a starting winning opening designation command, and a starting winning judgment result is specified As a command, blank data specifying that it is not a valid start winning is set. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second start winning opening” designation) and the start winning judgment determination result specifying command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special view corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the start winning combination, and based on the determination result Although advance read advance presentation effects are executed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning combination is determined based on the random number for variation pattern determination extracted at the starting winning combination, The preview advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning combination is the variation pattern of the super reach, the preview advance notice effect is executed at a high ratio as compared with the case where the determination result at the starting combination is the variation pattern of non reach. Good.

  Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, it extracts a variation pattern determination random number from the random number circuit 90104 and extracts the variation pattern determination random number for a big hit determination. The random number and the jackpot type determination random number are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number (first pending storage number after addition including the valid start winning) in the first special figure random number storage area. In addition, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, it extracts a variation pattern determination random number from the random number circuit 90104 and extracts the variation pattern determination random number as a big hit random number and a big hit The random number for type determination is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number (second pending storage number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the second special drawing.

  Here, the ROM 90101 corresponds to the variation pattern determination table for deviation set with the random number range corresponding to each of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 41A and the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 41B. The big hit random change pattern determination table in which the random number range is set is stored.

  When the determination result of the start winning determination (display result designated by the start winning determination result specification command) is “disengagement”, the CPU 90103 is extracted with reference to the variation pattern determination table for removal (store To determine which variation pattern random number is included in the random number range of the variation pattern, and identify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, and the identified variation pattern is “out of reach” , “Start reach winning variation”, and “super reach losing” are set as variation patterns.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the start winning determination (display result designated by the start winning determination result specification command) is either “non-probability variation big hit” or “probability variation big hit”, the CPU 90103 changes for big hit With reference to the pattern determination table, it is determined whether the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of any variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified Then, the start-up winning-time fluctuation pattern determination result specifying command is specified which specifies which fluctuation pattern the specified fluctuation pattern is “normal reach jackpot” or “super reach jackpot”.

  When the CPU 90103 detects an invalid start winning, it sets blank data specifying that it is not a valid starting winning as a start winning time variation pattern determination result designation command.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning combination fluctuation pattern determination result specification command to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning combination command together with the above-mentioned start winning combination opening designation command and the start winning combination determination result specification command.

  The effect control CPU 90120 is a start winning prize designation command specifying the “first start winning prize mouth” designation command and a start winning judgment determination result designation command including valid data that is not blank data (as well as a start data that includes valid data that is not blank data) When the winning combination variation pattern determination result specification command is received, the start winning combination determination result specification command (and the starting combination variation pattern determination result specification command) is placed on the first hold in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the first number of reserved storages after addition including the valid start winnings), and the valid data that is not a starting winning opening designation command and blank data specified by "second starting winning opening" Start winning combination judgment result specification command (and start winning combination fluctuation pattern including valid data which is not blank data) When the start determination result specification command) is received, the start winning combination determination result specification command (and the start combination change pattern determination result specification command) is stored in the second reserved storage number in the start winning command storage area for the second special drawing ( It stores in the storage area corresponding to the 2nd pending | holding memory number after addition including the said effective starting winning combination. The effect control CPU 90120 confirms the start winning combination determination result specification command (and the start winning combination fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) stored in the start winning combination command storage area, thereby making the first special feature before the start condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to estimate the display result (and the variation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure, and to execute preview advance notice effects.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 is a start winning combination determination command including a start winning combination opening designation command and blank data specified by the "first start winning combination opening" designation command (and a start combination winning time variation pattern determination result specification command including blank data) Is received, it is specified that the invalid start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred, the start winning at-time determination result specifying command (and the start winning at-time fluctuation pattern determining result specifying command) for the first special drawing It is possible to store the winning history for the first starting winning opening in the winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it in the starting winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of preview advance notice effect). Start winning combination start designated “start winning combination opening designation command and start winning combination determination result designated command including blank data (and start entry including blank data) When the time variation pattern determination result designation command is received, it is specified that the invalid start prize to the second start winning prize opening has occurred, and the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern determination result designation command) ) Is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special drawing (excluded from the execution target of preview advance notice effect), and the winning history storage area to be described later stores the winning history for the second start winning opening Is possible.

  As a control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012, there is a fluctuation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the main substrate 9011 determines a variation pattern according to the special view display result to be derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control substrate 9012 of the variation pattern. Output a fluctuation pattern specification command to The data for presentation control corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 90121 of the presentation control board 9012, and the CPU 90120 for presentation control is for presentation control corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the received fluctuation pattern designation command. Data is selected, and effect control is executed in accordance with the selected effect control data.

  The CPU 90103 is a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed. Also, among the fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the change pattern determination random number in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1) and the random pattern determination random number are read The big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number in the storage area, and the change pattern determination random number are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state or time saving state, or probability change state). Execute hour judgment.

  In this start determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command specifying "off", and along with the big hit determination random number. It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern determination random number read out from the storage area at the top is included in the random number range of any fluctuation pattern set in the loss variation pattern judgment table, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern determination random number By specifying the variation pattern, the "outout variation pattern" is determined.

  If the jackpot judging random number matches the jackpot judging value of the jackpot judging table, then the read jackpot type judging random number is stored in the jackpot type judging table for the first special view for each jackpot type It is determined which one of the judgment values it matches. Then, the variable display result notification command specifying "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value is set, and the variation pattern determination random number read from the storage area at the top together with the big hit determination random number The “big hit fluctuation pattern” is determined by determining which fluctuation pattern is included in the random number range of the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern judgment table, and specifying the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern judgment random number.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern, together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

  The CPU 90103 is a jackpot determination random number and a jackpot type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed. Also, among the fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the change pattern determination random number in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1) and the random pattern determination random number are read The big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number in the storage area, and the change pattern determination random number are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state or time saving state, or probability change state). Execute hour judgment.

  In this start determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command specifying "off", and along with the big hit determination random number. It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern determination random number read out from the storage area at the top is included in the random number range of any fluctuation pattern set in the loss variation pattern judgment table, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern determination random number By specifying the variation pattern, the "outout variation pattern" is determined.

  When the jackpot judging random number matches the jackpot judging value of the jackpot judging table, the read jackpot type judging random number is further stored in the jackpot type judging table for the second special view for each jackpot type It is determined which one of the judgment values it matches. Then, the variable display result notification command specifying "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matching judgment value is set, and the variation pattern determination random number read from the storage area at the top together with the big hit determination random number The “big hit fluctuation pattern” is determined by determining which fluctuation pattern is included in the random number range of the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern judgment table, and specifying the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern judgment random number.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern, together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

  Upon receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects data for presentation control corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, variable control of the decorative symbol is started and effect control is executed based on the data for effect control selected. Along with this, the first storage area (the number of pending storages) in the start winning determination determination result specification command (and the start winning variation variation determination result specification command) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area Delete the start winning combination judgment result specification command (and the start combination winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) in the storage area corresponding to 1) The time variation pattern determination result specification command is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the ROM 90121, so that the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. Control the variable display of the symbol. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the formation timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern.

  Upon receiving the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects data for presentation control corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, variable control of the decorative symbol is started and effect control is executed based on the data for effect control selected. Along with this, the first storage area (the number of pending storages) among the start winning time determination result specification commands (and the start winning time variation pattern determination result specification commands) stored in the second special drawing start winning command storage area Delete the start winning combination judgment result specification command (and the start combination winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) in the storage area corresponding to 1), and then select the start winning combination judgment result specification command (and start winning combination) The time variation pattern determination result specification command is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, when the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D detects that the gaming ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the game ball on any general winning opening A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not the player has won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. That is, when the gaming ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, a general winning opening designation command for designating winning in the first general winning opening 9050A is output, and the gaming ball is output by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. When it is detected, a general winning opening designating command for designating a winning to the second general winning opening 9050B is output, and when a gaming ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the third general winning opening 9050C is selected. When a general winning a prize designating command for designating a prize is output and the game ball is detected by the fourth general winning a prize port switch 9024D, a general winning a prize designating command for designating a prize for the fourth general prize winning nipple 9050D .

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening and to which general winning opening the winning of the gaming ball is based on the received general winning opening designation command. . In addition, as described above, when the gaming ball has won the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 designates which starting winning opening the game ball has won. It is designed to receive mouth specification commands. In this way, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the information that can specify the general winning opening that has won a prize and the information that can specify the starting winning opening that has won a prize in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 according to the winning occurrence order. It has become possible.

  The effect control CPU 90120 indicates which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a general winning opening (a general winning opening for which the game ball has won) designated by the received general winning opening designation command. Confirm and confirm which start winning opening (starting winning opening the game ball has won) specified by the received starting winning opening designation command is either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening And the winning history for each general winning opening and each starting winning opening are stored in the RAM 90122. For example, if the game balls win in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, The history of the winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

  Further, when the winning to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the gaming control microcomputer 90100 generates a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning judgment result specifying command. The priority may be sent prior to the general winning opening designation command. For example, detection by the start opening switch of any of the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B, and by the general winning opening switch of any of the first general winning opening switch 9024A ~ fourth general winning opening switch 9024D When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt processing), the microcomputer 90100 for game control is a start winning opening designation command and a start winning judgment result specification command, a general winning opening designation command. It is better to send prior to it. By using such a transmission order, the effect control CPU 90120 recognizes that the start winning opening designation command and the start winning judgment result specifying command have already been received when the general winning opening designation command is received. It is possible, and as a specific effect to be executed based on the winning on the general winning opening, it is possible to execute a prefetch notice effect based on the start winning time determination result specification command received earlier.

  If the winning on the general winning opening occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the gaming control microcomputer 90100 transmits a plurality of general winning opening designation commands in accordance with a predetermined priority. Do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 9024A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 9024B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interruption processing), the gaming control microcomputer 90100 Alternatively, a general winning a prize opening designation command for designating a winning to a general winning a prize opening which is more difficult to win may be transmitted first. If the number of winning balls to be awarded is different according to the general winning opening, the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the general winning opening having a larger number of winning balls is preferentially transmitted first. good.

  In addition, when the count switch 9023 detects that the game ball has won in the big winning opening, a big winning opening winning command specifying that the gaming ball has won in the big winning opening is the effect control board 9012 from the gaming control microcomputer 90100. Output to Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening based on the received big winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening can be specified. Similar to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the special winning opening in the winning history storage area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a big hit start designating command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state, and then receives a big winning opening winning command in a period from when the big hit end designating command for designating the end of the big hit gaming state is received. It is possible to distinguish and count the number of receptions of and the number of receptions of the general winning a prize opening designation command. Thus, the number of winnings on the large winning opening and the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state can be separately distinguished and tabulated, and the counting result is shown in FIG. It also becomes possible to display on 905.

  In addition, when the game ball is fired in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins at any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening with a certain frequency. If the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed and the game ball does not win any of the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), There is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game and is in a non-playing state. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). If not, it is possible to make a game end determination to determine that the game has ended.

  FIG. 36A shows an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. As shown in FIG. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings for each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. Based on the jackpot start designation command, the jackpot end designation command, the gaming state designation command, and the general winning opening designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of winnings for each general winning opening for each playing state based on the general winning opening designation command. . Note that the gaming state designation command is a timing at which the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state designation command designates the gaming state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, when the big hit gaming state ends or time saving state ends) Or the timing at which the variable display of the special symbol is started (in this case, the gaming state designation command is for designating the gaming state when the special figure game is executed).

  In this example, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total over the entire period), among which the number of winnings in the normal state is 46, the number of winnings in the big hit gaming state is 2, the number of winnings in the definite change state There are 1 and the number of winnings in the time saving state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is four. Further, the total number of winnings on the regular winning opening is 108, of which the number of winnings in the left hitting period is 81 and the number of winnings in the right hitting period is 27.

  In this manner, the number of winnings in the left hitting period and the number of winnings in the right hitting period are separately stored together with the number of winnings for each general winning opening, and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901) Transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device and displayed on a display device included in the game device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device Therefore, in the game arcade, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning of the game ball to each general winning opening, and to use it for maintenance of the game nail. For example, when the number of winning game balls to a certain general winning opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning opening is bent or broken, and maintenance of the gaming nail It can be performed.

  Number-of-winnings information in the number-of-winnings management table (the number of winnings for each general winning opening, the number of winnings for the general winning opening in each gaming state, the number of winnings for the general winning opening in the left hitting period and the right hitting period, the general winning opening ) Is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation part of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position (in the maintenance mode), and in the case of the first position (in the game mode) Do not show. The salesclerk at the game arcade switches the mode switching switch 9031 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information of the winning number management table, performs maintenance of the game nail with reference to this, and moves to the general winning opening. Make the game ball's winning frequency appropriate. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the gaming state (e.g., normal state, positive change state, short time state, big hit gaming state), and the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol) Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of pending storages for special drawing games, and the execution status of regular drawing games (whether or not the variable display of ordinary symbols is being executed, the number of pending storages for common drawing games) Regardless of this, the image display device 905 is continuously displayed while the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be one that can be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the gaming state. Even when the operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the time saving state, and the big hit gaming state You may

  In addition, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the special drawing game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is the second position Even if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and can be displayed only during the period when the number of reserved memories of the special view game is 0, the operation part of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position. The period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, or the period during which the number of pending storages of the special view game is not 0 may not be displayed. In addition, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the regular drawing game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and can be displayed only during the period when the number of reserved memories of the game is 0, the operation part of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the second position. A period during which the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or a period during which the number of reserved memories of the common drawing game is not 0 may not be displayed.

  The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is the setting of the mode switch 9031, the setting of the display switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 ((1) to (3) in FIG. 38). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning a prize opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the gaming information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the gaming hall) after the end of the game arcade operation. In the gaming information management apparatus, winning number information for each gaming machine is stored every business day. Further, the number-of-winnings information stored in the number-of-winnings management table is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the relevant prize history storage area, and the like for the prize history of the aforementioned prize history storage area. Even if it is not deleted, after the transmission to the gaming information management device is completed, or the reset operation of the store clerk (for example, the operation button in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 It is erased by the operation of 9030).

  For example, the salesclerk of the game arcade has predetermined operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on image display device 905 (mode switching switch 9031 is at the second position (display setting)). By pressing time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the winning number management table (the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the total number of winnings for general winning openings) may be reset to 0 It is possible.

  FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In the display control table, the number of winnings for each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of winnings for each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings for the general winning opening is 11, among which the number of winnings for the first general winning opening 9050A is 3, the number of winnings for the second general winning opening 9050B is 5, and the third general winning opening The number of prizes for 9050C is 2, and the number of prizes for the fourth general prize port 9050D is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is in the second position (display setting for the display control table), the winning number information (specifically, the object display of the number according to the total winning number) In the case where the display setting of the general winning number is made by the operation button 9030, the image display device 905 is displayed. When the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is performed by the operation button 9030, the winning of the display control table The number information is not displayed (the display is prohibited). Further, even when the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position (in the case of display setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-display setting) Is not displayed on the display control table winning number information.

  That is, when the store clerk at the game arcade performs display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display switching switch 9032, the winning number for the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. There is. Only when the store clerk at the game arcade performs display permission setting of the winning number information by the display switching switch 9032, the winning number for the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. With regard to the effect, as shown in FIG. 37, when the operation portion of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position (in the case of the execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is made by the operation button 9030 (execution of the specific effect It becomes executable when setting is done. When the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is at the first position (in the case of the execution non-permission setting), whether or not the display setting (the execution setting of the specific effect) of the general winning number is performed by the operation button 9030 No specific effect is performed (execution is prohibited). In addition, even when the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-execution setting) In particular, no specific effect is performed.

  That is, when the store clerk at the game arcade sets the execution disapproval setting of the specific effect by the display switching switch 9032, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation of the player. Only when the store clerk at the game arcade sets the execution permission setting of the specific effect by the display switching switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the execution setting operation of the player.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning combination is also the setting of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Gaming place side: display switching switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). The present invention is not limited to such a form, and it may be possible to set individually whether to report the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether to enable specific effects or not, and may be set by different operation means. It is good.

  The winning number information stored in the display control table is the setting of the mode switch 9031, the setting of the display switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 ((1) to (3) in FIG. 38). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning a prize opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen. In the number-of-winnings information stored in the display control table (the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the total number of winnings), the winning history in the above-mentioned winning history storage area corresponds to the specific winning history storage area. Even when the effect (A or B) is deleted (reset) even if it is deleted (reset), it is not deleted, and when the game control is determined by the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed It is deleted (reset to 0) when it is not received and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, one minute).

  When the number of wins and the total number of wins for each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The number of wins on is also reset to zero. For example, the coin-type object (prize corresponding display) displayed on the right side of the character "general winning" on the screen of FIG. 39 described later is not displayed, and the number of display objects becomes zero. It should be noted that when the number of winnings for the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are the game end determination. When it is reset to 0 based on the next, when the number of winning on the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, a number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings will be displayed.

  In addition, a store clerk or a game arcade player operates the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (a state where an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total winning of general winning openings regardless of the above game end determination It is possible to reset (number) to 0, and accordingly, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

  As shown in FIG. 38, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 while displaying a demonstration screen that is not related to the progress of the special view game and the progress of the regular drawing game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, variable display of decorative symbols is not executed, and a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a special winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 In the state where it has not been received for more than a minute), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen of FIG. 38 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is displayed.

  On the screen shown in FIG. 38 (1), a message “Display general prize number please press the determination button” is displayed, and an image resembling the operation button 9030 is displayed below it, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 in accordance with the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the characters “display” and an icon including the characters “not displayed” are displayed, and a message “decision button after selection with the jog dial” is displayed, and the operation button 9030 ( After rotating the jog dial, an arrow prompting the user to press it is displayed.

  To display the number of winnings on the general winning opening, turn the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select an icon including the character of “display”, and to the general winning opening When the number of winnings is not to be displayed, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is turned to the right to select an icon including the characters “do not display”. In this example, the icon including the characters "display" is selected.

  Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state in which the icon including the characters "display" is selected in FIG. 38 (2), as shown in FIG. 38 (3), "general winning number is displayed." A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demonstration screen of FIG. 38 (4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the number of winning for the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total winning number (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total winning number in FIG. 39) stored in the display control table at the completion of the setting operation is immediately displayed. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game termination determination is not performed). You may

  On the other hand, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected in FIG. 38 (2), a message “does not display the number of general winnings” is displayed, and FIG. 38 (4) Return to the normal demo screen of. By this setting operation, the number of winning on the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

  Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, on the game arcade side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is transmitted to the image display device 905. As shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3), a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905 only when permission to display is given. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings for the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display switching switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Be done.

  As described above, the intention of the game arcade or the player can be reflected as to whether or not the number of game balls to be displayed on the general winning opening is displayed. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings for the general winning opening only when the operation section of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the game arcade side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game arcade is given priority over the intention of the player. Therefore, on the game arcade side, when the player does not want to know the winning number for the general winning opening, it is preferable to set the operation portion of the display switching switch 9032 to the first position (non-display position).

  Also, if the intention of the game arcade is prioritized over the player's intention, the game arcade side temporarily sets the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 to the first position (non-display position) ( 38 (1)-(3)), although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening regardless of the setting on the player side). When the setting screen is displayed, it is falsely recognized that the player can display the number of winning on the general winning opening by his own setting operation.

  In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) in this embodiment (general regardless of the setting on the player side) When it is already determined that the number of winnings to be won in the winning opening is not displayed, the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself of "being able to display the number of winning on the general winning opening according to the setting operation on the player side" is not performed.

  The display setting on the game arcade side (the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position) and the display setting on the player side (an icon including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2)) When it is determined that the number of winnings for the general winning a prize is displayed by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state, as shown in FIG. 39 (1), in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 905 The words "general winnings" are displayed. Then, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. (Paid-in response display) is displayed.

  The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total number of winning on the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 39 (3), every time the game ball wins the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), the total number of winnings on the display control table is incremented by one. In addition, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. Further, the coin-shaped object includes the number "10", which indicates the number of winning balls to be awarded when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of winning balls awarded according to the winning on the general winning opening. In addition, the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball is won in each winning opening (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in ROM 90121 in advance. I assume.

  In this manner, the player can display the general winning opening by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening and increasing the number of objects to be displayed according to the increase in the number of winnings. It is possible to easily grasp that the gaming ball has won a prize and the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the game is over, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings of the game balls to each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 39 (4), all coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters "general winning" are erased. That is, it is informed that the number of winnings on the general winning opening is zero.

  As described above, when it is determined that the game is over, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in the non-gaming state, the number of winnings for the notified general winning opening is reset to 0 (generally By setting that there is no winning on the winning opening), it is possible to prevent the number of winnings on the general winning opening from being grasped by the player playing the game on the gaming machine after that. .

  In this embodiment, when the conditions for determining the game end and the conditions for shifting to the demonstration screen described above are made common conditions, the number of winnings to the general winning opening being notified is 0 at the time of shifting to the demonstration screen. Will be reset to As described above, when the demonstration screen is displayed, the notified number of winnings on the general winning combination may be reset to zero.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) When the player is set not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 38), display control to increase the number of objects displayed for each winning on the general winning opening shown in FIG. 39 is not executed. . In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. 39 are not displayed, and the coin-shaped object itself is also regardless of the number of winnings on the general winning opening (total number of winnings on the display control table). Do not show.

  If the number of objects (usually objects) to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so the number of normal objects reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a mode different from a normal object including the number “100”) instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. As a result, it is possible to notify the predetermined number of winning times and the number of winning balls corresponding to the predetermined number in the display area of one special object without requiring the predetermined number of display areas of the normal objects.

  Also, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the displayed object is increased by one for each winning on the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, a plurality of general winning openings An object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one every five winnings on the general winning opening.

  In addition, display setting on the game arcade side (the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position) and display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2) When it is determined to display the number of winning on the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected, as shown in FIG. 40, the period controlled to the big hit gaming state In addition to the number of winnings for the special winning opening, the number of winnings for the general winning opening is displayed.

  FIG. 40A shows a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when being controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first round game is started, the characters "general winning number" are displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side, and "big winning number" The character of is displayed, and the number of winnings on the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side thereof. In this example, the number of winning on the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when the gaming ball is on the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, the number of winning prizes on the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when the gaming ball is winning on the big winning mouth is 15, indicating [0 × 15]. It is done. Also, in the big hit gaming state, the number of prize balls awarded [0 × 10] according to the prize winning in the general winning prize opening and the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize winning in the big prize prize opening [0 × 15] [Total 0 sphere] is displayed because the total number of 0 is 0.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the gaming ball is awarded seven times in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A The number of general winnings is 1 and the number of big winnings is updated to 7 by the game ball winning once in the 4th general winning opening 9050D). In addition, the combined number of the number of prize balls awarded [1 × 10] according to the prize winning in the general winning prize opening and the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize winning in the big prize prize opening [7 × 15] is 115. It is displayed as [total 115 spheres] by being. In addition, the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize winning in the general prize winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 spheres] and the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize winning in the big prize winning opening [7 × 15 = 105 spheres] And may be displayed individually.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the gaming ball counts in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907) in the big hit gaming state. The number of general winnings is 3 and the number of big winnings is updated to 105, as the game ball has won a total of 3 times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D). ing. Also, in the big hit gaming state, the number of prize balls awarded [3 × 10] according to the prize winning in the general winning prize opening and the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize winning in the big prize prize opening [105 × 15] The sum total of 1605 is displayed as [total 1605 spheres].

  As described above, the player can display only the number of winnings for the large winning opening by displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state separately from the number of winnings for the large winning opening. In addition, you will be interested in the number of prizes for the general prize winning opening. In addition, the player can receive a prize for winning the big prize by displaying the number of prize balls according to the number for winning the big prize port and the number of prize balls according to the number for winning the regular prize port separately. Not only the number of prize balls awarded accordingly, but also the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize winning on the general prize winning opening will be taken.

  In addition, the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 905, not limited to the number of winnings on the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is also possible to display the number of winning on the general winning combination in the normal state on the image display device 905. In addition, the number of winning on the general winning opening in the right hitting period (big hit gaming state or definite variation state or time saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, the general winning combination in the left hitting period (normal state) The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. In addition, the number of winnings on the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 in a period in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories for special drawing game).

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) If the player is set not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 38), the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. Display control is not executed. In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. 40 are not displayed, and the number of winnings on the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding thereto during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state Also, neither the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning to the large winning opening are displayed. Only the number of winning in the special winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, although an example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described, the image display device 905 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 40, an example has been described in which the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening (10) and the number of winning balls awarded according to the winning on the general winning opening are displayed. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

  As described above, it is possible to display only the number of winnings on the general winning opening, and not to display the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given according to the winning on the general winning opening. . With such a configuration, when the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the process of designing the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 905 also has to be changed according to the change. It can prevent the situation which disappears. It is to be noted that, conversely to this, only the number of winning balls awarded according to the winning on the general winning opening may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the operation section of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side, the player settings shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3) are made. Although the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that it is possible to switch on / off the number of winnings), the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 38 (1) to (3) is displayed (display / non-display switching of the number of winnings is possible) May be notified to the player).

  In such a configuration, even if the player is set to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening on the player setting screens in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3). The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings for the general winning opening on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the operation section of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game arcade side. Do not do it (Prioritize the game setting). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the winning number can not be displayed due to the priority of the setting of the game arcade.

  In addition, when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 38 (1) is displayed (display / non-display switching of the number of winnings is possible) Is notified to the player), but the setting operation of the player may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 38 (1), the screen does not shift to the selection screen of FIG. It may be impossible to select whether or not.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game setting is given priority over the player setting, but, conversely, the player setting may be given priority over the game setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 38 (1) to (3) is displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the character "display" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2) as being able to be displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings for the general winning opening is the image display device When an operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters "not displayed" is displayed on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2), the general winning combination is displayed (display control of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is executed). The number of winnings in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control in FIGS. 39 and 40 may not be executed).

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening in accordance with the order of the received setting operations with the same setting of the game arcade setting and the player setting. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening with priority given to the setting operation (the latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), a winning on the general winning opening is thereafter made on the player setting screen of FIGS. When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings on the general winning opening is displayed (display control in FIGS. 39 and 40 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screen in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3) is set not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening, the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is thereafter set to the second position. In the case of (display position), the number of winning on the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings for the general winning opening is thereafter made on the player setting screen of FIGS. 38 (1) to (3). Is not displayed, the number of winnings on the general winning opening is not displayed (display control in FIGS. 39 and 40 is not executed). Further, even if the player setting screens in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3) are set to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position thereafter. In the case of (non-display position), the number of winnings on the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 39 and 40 is not executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winning on the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by the store clerk at the game arcade operating the display switching switch 9032 and the player By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winning on the general winning opening on the image display device 905. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening on the image display device 905, while the player uses the number of winnings on the general winning opening to the image display 905. Whether to display or not can not be set (for example, the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (3) may not be provided). As described above, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winning on the general winning opening on the image display device 905 only on the game arcade side.

  Also, contrary to this, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winning on the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by the player (and the store clerk in the game arcade) operating the operation button 9030. On the other hand, there may be no provision (for example, no display switching switch 9032) for enabling only the game arcade side to set whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening on the image display device 905. In such a configuration, whether or not the number of winnings for the general winning a prize opening is displayed on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030) by the player and the store clerk in the game arcade It can be set. As described above, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winning on the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by the setting operation common to the player and the game arcade.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905. However, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is a pachinko machine. It is transmitted to the information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 901, for example, the display device of the card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the information display It may be displayed on the device. In addition, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to the information management device (for example, hall computer) that manages the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and in the information management device, a general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winning for winning may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, as a configuration in which the mode switching switch 9031 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device It may be displayed only on the information management device.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 by the setting of the mode switching switch 9031 and stored in the display control table by the setting of the display switching switch 9032. Although the example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described, as described above, the winning is achieved without providing a separate switch for performing display control of each of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch may be provided to perform display control of both the number management table and the display control table. For example, by setting the common switch as display setting, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are both displayed on the image display device 905, and the common switch is displayed. By setting the non-display setting to non-display setting, the image display apparatus 905 may be configured not to display any of the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table.

  In FIG. 41 (A), when a special symbol (disappeared symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is displayed as a finalized special symbol, it is determined by the main substrate 9011 (microcomputer 90100 for game control) The outlier fluctuation pattern is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 41 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the main substrate 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) is illustrated when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is done. Since the special drawing fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 that receives the fluctuation pattern designation command can execute the rendering according to the special drawing fluctuation time.

  Among the out-of-out fluctuation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are fluctuation patterns that are non-reach out-of-representation effects, PX003 are normal fluctuation out-of-representation fluctuation patterns, and PX004 are super-reach out-of-representation effects It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the big hit variation patterns, PY 003 is a variation pattern that is an effect aspect of a normal reach big hit, and PY 004 is a variation pattern that is an effect aspect of a super reach big hit. Here, the variation pattern of the super reach is a variation pattern in which the battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

  The battle effect is an effect that indicates whether the ally character and the enemy character perform a battle and the win or loss results in a big hit. A variation pattern of super reach loss is performed in PX004, where a defeat effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed, whereas in PY 004, which is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, an ally character wins the enemy character The presentation is performed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern specification command when the start condition is satisfied in the game control microcomputer 90100 and the variable display of the special view is executed. Thereby, when the variable display of the special figure is being executed (before the stop display of the confirmed special symbol), the special symbol (big hit symbol) specified as the fixed special symbol of the variable display is stopped and displayed (that is, the big hit It is possible to execute a fluctuation result notice effect for giving notice of being controlled to the game state).

  In the variation result notice presentation shown in FIG. 42 (a), together with the voice presentation and the first part of the variation notice presentation in which only the voice presentation is executed in which the speakers 908L and 908R output a voice of “Now is a chance!” It is possible to execute the second embodiment of the fluctuation advance presentation effect in which the character object effect in which the movable role product 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is performed. It is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied) by such a difference in the presentation mode.

  The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the random number for the notice effect determination extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: change result advance notice effect) based on the winning at the general winning opening is satisfied. The form of the change result notice presentation is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the fluctuation result advance notice effect is determined, and the determined aspect The change result notice presentation is executed at. In addition, as will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result advance notice effect is suspended or the fluctuation result notice effect Do not run

  For example, when the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the variable display result notification command received last is “off”, the voice presentation is performed at a rate of 80%. The second embodiment of the present invention executes the second embodiment of the first embodiment accompanied by the second embodiment of the present invention. On the other hand, when the variable display result (variable display result of variable display currently being executed) specified by the variable display result notification command received last specifies "big hit", the speech effect is provided at a rate of 25%. The first embodiment of the present invention executes the first embodiment of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment of the second embodiment of the second embodiment includes the voice presentation and the feature presentation at a rate of 75%.

  Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the start winning opening designation command and the start winning when the effective start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 90100. Receive the hour judgment result specification command. By this, before the start condition of the special figure is established, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) may be stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol of the variable display that has not been executed yet (that is, controlled to the big hit gaming state) It is possible to carry out pre-read notice effect to give notice of).

  In the pre-read advance notice effect shown in FIG. 42 (b), with the pre-read advance notice effect and the sound effect of the first mode in which only the sound effect in which the sound of “coming soon!” Is outputted from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the movable effect. It is possible to execute the second embodiment of the preview advance notice effect in which the feature effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Such a difference in the effect mode makes it possible to suggest that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied although the start condition is satisfied. There is.

  The effect control CPU 90120 pre-reads based on the random number for preview effect determination extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: prefetch advance effect) based on the winning at the general winning opening is satisfied. Determine the form of the preview effect. Specifically, at the timing when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), the mode of the advance notice effect is determined, and Pre-reading notice effect is executed. Note that, as described later, if the number of pending storages is 0, the execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is suspended, or the prefetch advance notice effect is not executed.

  For example, when the start winning judgment determination result designation command stored in the start winning command storage area does not include the start winning judgment determination result designation command specifying "big hit" (all start winning designations specifying "off") In the case of the hour determination result specification command), the first mode previewing effect with only the sound effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with a sound effect and a feature effect at a rate of 15% Execute preview advance notice effect. On the other hand, if the start winning time determination result specification command stored in the start winning combination command storage area includes a start winning time determination result specification command specifying "big hit", the voice effect is generated at a rate of 10%. The preview advance notice effect of the first mode with only the first aspect is executed, and the preview notice effect of the second mode with the voice effect and the feature effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing a specific effect to be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. A variation result advance notice effect for giving an advance notice as to whether or not the display result of the variable display in execution becomes a big hit symbol is executed as a specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading advance notice effect that announces whether the display result of the variable display where the start condition is not satisfied is a big hit symbol, that is, whether or not what is determined to be a big hit is included in the holding memory is this implementation. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

  In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to report the number of winnings to the general winning opening is also set as to whether or not the specific effect can be performed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is notified. If the setting has been made (if the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is at the second position (execution permission setting)), the display setting of the general winning number by the operation button 9030 (execution setting of the specific effect) is The effect control CPU 90120 can execute the specific effect only when it is being performed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 every time the general winning opening designation command and the start winning opening designation command are received. However, the winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided. For example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 9050 B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050 C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050 D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and In each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B [1st general winning opening, 2nd general winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd general winning opening, 4th] winning history Will be stored.

  In the effect mode in which only the special effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (when the winning at any of the winning openings occurs) And confirm whether or not the winning condition is established, and determines the execution of the specific effect A based on the satisfaction of the winning condition. In addition, in an effect mode in which only specific effect B can be executed, each time a winning history is stored in a winning history storage area corresponding to specific effect B (at the timing when a winning at any winning opening occurs) Whether or not the condition is established is confirmed, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. In addition, in the effect form capable of executing the specific effect A and the specific effect B, each time a winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any Check if the winning conditions corresponding to the specific effect A are satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A) at the timing when the winning to the winning opening of the screen occurs, and respond to the specific effect A The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. Based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established, the execution of the specific effect B is determined.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a specific effect A execution flag when execution of the specific effect A (variation result advance notification effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. And, at the timing when the winning condition is established, when the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decoration symbol accompanying this) is executed, as described above, the specific effect A according to the result of the variable display The mode (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the feature effect) is determined, the fluctuation result of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is erased. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, without holding the fluctuation result advance notification effect.

  On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, there is no target of the variation result notice effect, so the specific effect A is executed. Is suspended and the specific effect A execution flag is kept set. Although the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the specific effect A is executed by setting the specific effect A execution flag, it can grasp that the specific effect A is not executed and is in the hold state. It has become. Then, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is satisfied, the aspect of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, The specified effect A that has been set is executed, and the specified effect A execution flag that has been set is deleted.

  In addition, it is not limited to such a form, and at the timing when the winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended if the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed. Alternatively, the specific effect A may not be performed even if the start condition of the variable display is satisfied after the execution of the specific effect A is stopped.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a specific effect B execution flag when the execution of the specific effect B (predictive announcement effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. When the number of pending storages (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is 1 or more at the timing when the winning condition is established, as described above, 1 Determine the aspect of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the feature effect) according to the above determination result of the start winning combination, and execute the advance notice of the determined aspect and execute the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, without holding the advance advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the number of pending storages is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is established, there is no target of the advance announcement notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag remains set. It will be in the state. Although the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the specific effect B is executed by setting the specific effect B execution flag, it can grasp that the specific effect B is not executed and is in the hold state. It has become. Then, when the starting condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the winning on the starting winning opening (when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more), the aspect of the specific effect B is determined based on the result of the starting winning determination, While executing the specific effect B that has been on hold, the specific effect B execution flag that has been set is deleted.

  In addition, it is not limited to such a form, and when the number of pending storages is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect B is suspended without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter The specific effect B may not be executed even when the start condition is satisfied and the number of pending storages becomes 1 or more.

  Further, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 is a winning history storage area (a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area The winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flag (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are all erased. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during execution of the specified effect (variation result notice effect, advance notice effect) or in a state where the specified effect is not yet executed after the execution of the specified effect is determined. Even when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped, the specific effect which was being executed or the specific effect determined to be executed is not performed again. That is, since the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased for a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the specific effect is not executed. When it is confirmed that the winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history after the start of the power supply, the specific effect is newly executed.

[First effect form]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 plays the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established each time the player wins a prize. When the first winning condition is established, the presence or absence of the specific effect execution is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. And, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is the first winning condition) The winning history for any is included) is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the game control state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the game ball to win one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D when the gaming state is (2) positive or negative A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established. When the second winning condition is established, the presence or absence of the specific effect execution is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. And each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D that is the second winning condition) The winning history for any is included) is deleted.

  In the first effect mode and the second effect mode to the fourth effect mode to be described later, (1) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 The specific effect is higher than the ratio at which the special effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the definite variation state or the short time state. In the definite change state and the time reduction state, the player is generally more interested in the winning condition of the gaming ball to the second start winning opening and the variable display of the decoration pattern than the winning condition of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, Even if the specific effect is performed, it is difficult to produce the same fun as in the normal state. Therefore, in the definite change state or the short time state, the execution ratio of the specific effect is reduced as compared with the normal state, and the decrease in interest of the specific effect is suppressed.

  In the second to fourth effect modes described later, unlike the first effect mode, the presence or absence of the specific effect execution is not determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number. The second effect mode to the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, are all capable of executing a specific effect when the winning condition is established, but (2) the winning condition in the positive variation state or the time saving state is (1) normal More winnings are required than winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution ratio of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution ratio of the specific effect in the probability change state or the short time state.

  As described above, by making the execution ratio of the specific effect different according to the gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. In addition, contrary to the example of the 1st production mode-the 4th production mode, (2) ratio that the specific production is executed on the basis of the game ball having won in the general winning opening in the definite change state or the short time state, ( 1) It may be made higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening in the normal state.

  In the second to fourth effect modes described later, as in the first effect mode, when the winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of the specific effect execution is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number. You may do so. For example, in the second to fourth performance modes, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the definite variation state or the time saving state are the same winning conditions, and As in the effect form, the ratio at which the specific effect is normally executed, and the probability variation are obtained by making the lottery probability at the time of winning condition establishment in the normal state different from the lottery probability at the time of winning condition establishment in the definite variation state You may make it differ from the ratio by which a specific effect is performed in a state or time-saving state.

  Further, the specific effect may be executed at different rates according to not only the gaming state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the start winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a high rate as compared with the case where the display result of the variable display is an out symbol, If there is a pending storage determined to be a big hit, compared with the case where there is no pending storage determined to be a big hit at the starting winning combination (if only the pending storage determined to be off at the starting winning combination). The specific effect may be performed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times the specific effect is performed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be performed only once regardless of the type, or various types of specific effects are classified It may be made executable only once each time).

[Second effect form]
In the second effect mode shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is satisfied when the gaming ball has won once or more each in the winning opening. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the game control state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 respectively receives two or more of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the general winning opening. A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established when the gaming ball has won twice or more. When the second winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  Thus, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode to be described later, the number of wins to the general winning opening, which is necessary for executing the specific effect in the normal state, the probability change state or Depending on the game state, it is possible to give an interest to the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening by changing the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the time saving state .

  Further, in the second effect mode, in order to execute the specific effect, at least one or more times each of the two or more general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is a condition of winning a ball. As described above, by setting the winnings for each of a plurality of general winning openings as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of a winning on the general winning opening but also the game ball winning in any general winning opening I can be interested in what I did.

  In the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode to be described later, the start of the big hit gaming state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 has made the big hit gaming state controlled. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. It is assumed.

  Further, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. . Therefore, that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state, and the winning history only in the normal state is not necessarily determined. The first winning condition is not necessarily established based on the above. Similarly, the establishment of the second winning condition means that the second winning condition is established as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the definite variation state or the time saving state, and the definite variation state or the necessarily definite variation state The second winning condition is not necessarily established based on the winning history of only the time saving state. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the definite change state or the short time state, and the transition from the positive change state or the short time state to the normal state. Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is established based on the winning history in the normal state only, and whether or not the second winning condition is established based on the winning history in only the definite variation state or the time saving state. You may check it.

[Third effect form]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general within 90 seconds). A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established by the game ball having won a total of three times in the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probability changing state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 is in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is satisfied when the gaming ball has won a total of five times or more. When the second winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning combination is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is 120 seconds). Is set). Then, if the winning condition is not established within the period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific effect A times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without the specific effect A being executed. . On the other hand, when the winning condition is established within the period of 120 seconds (if the winning condition is established before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A Is erased.

  As described above, the winning frequency (number of winnings within a predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency required to execute the specific effect in the definite variation state or the short time state (predetermined period By changing the number of internal winnings), it is possible to give an interest to the frequency of winning to the general winning opening according to the gaming state.

  Further, in the third effect mode, when specific effect A targeted for variable display performed at the time of winning for the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for one variable display period If the winning condition is satisfied by the winning history), the specific effect A targeted for variable display different from the variable display executed at the time of winning for the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed In some cases (if the winning condition is satisfied by the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods).

  In addition, as a form that specific effect is executed when the number of winning to the general winning a prize opening in a predetermined period becomes a predetermined number like the 3rd effect form, the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed The specific effect may be performed when the number of prizes to be paid to the general prize winning opening in the specified period becomes a predetermined number. For example, it is specified when the number of wins to the general winning a prize opening in a period during which the variable display of the special symbol equivalent to the number of reserved memory numbers is executed reaches a predetermined number until all the reserved memory of the special figure game is digested. A presentation may be performed.

[Fourth effect form]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has the start winning opening (one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening) The game balls win in the order of start winning opening (one of first starting winning opening and second starting winning opening), general winning opening (any of first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D) A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established by winning in the mouth. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), start winning opening (first start winning opening). Any of the winning a prize opening and the second starting winning a prize opening, general winning a prize opening (any of the 1st general winning a prize mouth 9050A-the 4th general winning a prize mouth 9050D), furthermore, a general winning a prize mouth (1st general winning a prize mouth 9050 A-4th) A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established by the game ball winning in the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning sequence to the other winning openings (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening and the general winning opening becomes a specific order. As a result, it is possible to give an interest not only to the winning condition to the regular winning opening but also to the winning order to the regular winning opening and the other winning openings.

  It should be noted that the number of times that the game ball continuously wins in the general winning opening may be varied, and the number of times the game ball may win continuously in the other winning openings may be varied. For example, after winning in the starting winning combination three or more times in a row, the winning condition may be established by winning in two or more consecutive wins in the general winning combination. In addition, it is also possible to set the winning condition as to which of the plurality of general winning openings has been won or which of the other plurality of winning openings has been reached. For example, the winning condition is established by the game balls winning in the winning opening in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, and the second general winning opening 9050B, Also good. In addition, the winning condition is not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening occurs, and the winning condition in the starting winning opening occurs after the winning in the general winning opening occurs. May be established.

  In addition, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the winning sequence of the game balls to the plurality of regular winning openings has become a specific sequence. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning conditions are set by the gaming balls having won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. If the first winning condition is established and the gaming state is (2) a positive or negative state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) may be established by the game ball having won a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

  In addition, the winning condition may be established based on the fact that the game ball is awarded to a plurality of general winning openings and the winning sequence of the game balls to the one or more start winning openings has become a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning conditions (the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, and so on) are achieved by the game balls being won in this order If the first winning condition is established and the gaming state is (2) a positive or negative state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the first start winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, Furthermore, even if the winning conditions (referred to as the second winning condition) are satisfied by the game balls winning in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. good.

  In addition, the order is not limited to the entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the starting winning opening, but the entry is based on the entry into the general winning entry and the entry into the big winning opening being in a specific order. The conditions may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the fact that the order of the entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B becomes a specific order. You may do so. In addition, when a specific area is determined in which a big hit type (for example, a probability change big hit) is determined based on the entry of the game ball, the order of entry into the general winning a prize opening and entry into the specific area is specified. The winning condition may be established based on the order.

  In the first to fourth performance modes, an example has been described in which the variation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, but the advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. It is good.

[Fifth effect form to eighth effect form]
In the fifth to eighth effect modes shown in FIG. 44, different from the first to fourth effect modes, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the definite variation state or the time saving state. The winning conditions are not different, and are common winning conditions. In the fifth to eighth effect modes, the first winning condition in the first to fourth effect modes, that is, the winning condition adopted in the normal state is provided as the common winning condition. ing. And (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the variation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied When the state is a definite change state or a short time state, a preview advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. Thereby, depending on the gaming state when the gaming ball wins the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the specific effect to be executed based on the gaming ball winning in the general winning opening It can improve the interest.

  In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 44, when the winning condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 decides to execute the specific effect at a rate of 50%. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is all deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a definite change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A And, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is all deleted.

  In the sixth to eighth effect modes shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. On the other hand, when the game condition when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) a definite change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the specific effect A is corresponded The winning history of the winning history storage area and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased.

  In the sixth to eighth effect modes, the jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state on the basis of being controlled to the big hit gaming state by the gaming control microcomputer 90100 is the CPU 90120 for effect control When is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all erased. In the sixth to eighth effect modes, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change of the gaming state. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the definite change state or the short time state, and the transition from the positive change state or the short time state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the seventh effect mode, the timer for specific effect is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening has been stored in the specific effect A and specific effect B winning history storage areas. . Then, when the timer for specific effect times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, but the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are Both are erased. On the other hand, when the winning condition is established before the timer for the specific effect time out, (1) in the case of the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B (2) In the case of a definite change state or a short time state, the specific effect B is executed, and the prize history and specific effect of the prize history storage area of the specific effect A. The winning history in the winning history storage area of B is all erased.

[Ninth effect form to twelfth effect form]
In the ninth to twelfth performance modes shown in FIG. 45, unlike the first to eighth performance modes, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the definite variation state or the time saving state. The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects to be executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the positive or negative state When the above is established, preview advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. Thereby, depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, it is possible to make the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect different, and the game ball wins the general winning opening It is possible to improve the interest of the specific effect to be executed based on it.

  In the ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 45, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 plays the game ball in any one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. A prize condition (referred to as a first prize condition) is established each time the player wins a prize, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game control state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the game ball to win one of the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D when the gaming state is (2) positive or negative. A winning condition (a second winning condition) is established, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120 is 1 in both the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. A game condition (referred to as a first game condition) is established by the game balls winning each time or more, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game control state is (2) a probability change state or a time reduction state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more game balls each for both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established by winning, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the ninth to twelfth effect modes, the jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state on the basis of being controlled to the big hit gaming state by the gaming control microcomputer 90100 is the effect control CPU 90120 When is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are all erased. In the ninth to twelfth effects modes, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change of the gaming state. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the definite change state or the short time state, and the transition from the positive change state or the short time state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. A total of three times or more of the game balls achieve a winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition), and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, for the effect control CPU 90120, when the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short time state, the game ball is won a total of five times or more in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D As a result, a winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the eleventh effect mode, the timer for specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of specific effect A. When the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without the specific effect A being executed. On the other hand, when the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the timer for the specific effect A times out, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased. Further, the timer for specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B. Then, when the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased without the specific effect B being executed. On the other hand, when the second winning condition is satisfied in the definite variation state or the short time state before the timer for the specific effect B times out, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased Be done.

  In the twelfth effect mode shown in FIG. 45, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 is the first start winning opening, the first start winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050 B, A winning condition (referred to as a first winning condition) is established by the game ball winning in the winning opening in the order of. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a second start winning opening, a second start winning opening, a third general winning opening 9050C, and a fourth general winning opening. A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) is established by the game ball having won the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  As in the ninth to twelfth performance modes, the general winning opening (general winning port and starting winning opening in the twelfth performance mode) to be a prize target of the game ball for executing the specific performance is in accordance with the gaming state By making them different, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In the ninth to twelfth presentation modes, the target winning opening to be won in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state, and the second winning condition in the definite variation state or the time saving state. An example is shown in which the target winning opening to be winning is all different, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning opening in the normal state and the target winning opening in the positive or negative state are partially different. It may be common. For example, any of the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include a winning for the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th to 16th effects]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect mode shown in FIG. 46, the ratio at which the specific effect A is executed when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach variation period or a period before the reach condition is established in the reach variation, it is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A.

  Here, (1) With the period after reach condition establishment in reach change, the decoration design symbol (final stop from the reach condition establishment in the variable display of the change pattern with reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is specifically decided It is a period until the symbol) is stopped and displayed. Moreover, (2) The period before the reach state establishment in the period outside the period of reach change or reach change is specifically, the period when the variable display of the change pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is a period from the start of variable display of fluctuation patterns accompanied with reach production (normal reach, super reach) to a state before reach state is established.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth to sixteenth effect modes are respectively the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first to fourth effect modes. It has become. With regard to any effect mode, when the timing at which the first winning condition is established is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is the second winning condition. If the established timing is (2) outside the period of reach fluctuation or a period before reach state establishment in reach fluctuation, it becomes higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. As described above, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is established, it is possible to improve the interest when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening.

[Seventeenth embodiment to twentieth embodiment]
In the seventeenth effect mode to the twentieth effect mode shown in FIG. 47, when the timing when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) a period after the reaching state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is performed. If the timing at which the (1) is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The winning conditions in the seventeenth effect mode to the twentieth effect mode are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, respectively. With regard to any effect form, when the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) a period after the reaching state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is established. In the case where the performed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. As described above, by executing the specific effects of different types according to the game period when the winning condition is established, it is possible to improve the interest when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening.

[Twenty-first effect form to twenty-fourth effect form]
In the 21st to 24th effect modes shown in FIG. 48, when the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed. When the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach variation period or a period before the reach condition is established in the reach variation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the twenty first to twenty fourth effect modes are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the ninth to twelfth effect modes, respectively. It has become. In any of the effect modes, when the timing at which the first winning condition is established is (1) a period after the reaching state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed, and the second winning condition is established. If the determined timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. As described above, the execution ratio of the specific effect is made different according to the game period when the winning condition is established, and the specific effect of different types is executed according to the gaming period when the winning condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest when the game ball has won the general winning opening.

[The 25th performance form and the 26th performance form]
In the twenty-fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 49, unlike the first effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect mode, regardless of the gaming state or the game period, the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D) The first winning condition is established by the game ball having won a total of three times or more. When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Further, regardless of the gaming state or the gaming period, the second winning condition is established by the game ball having won a total of five times or more in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the twenty-sixth effect mode shown in FIG. 49, unlike the first to twenty-fourth effect modes, regardless of the game state or the game period, within 120 seconds, the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general) The first winning condition is established by the game ball having won a total of three times in the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is established, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the gaming state and the gaming period, within 120 seconds, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A ~ the fourth general winning opening 9050D) a total of five times or more in total for the game ball has won a second winning The condition is met. When the second winning condition is established, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  As described above, regardless of the game state or the game period, different effects are executed according to the number of winnings on the general winning opening and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within the predetermined period). And interest in the frequency of prizes. In this example, the effect mode (sound to be output) differs according to the number of winning on the general winning opening and the frequency of winning, and the variable display to be the target of the notice is different (specific effect A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: Variable display not being executed) However, the effect is not limited to this, but it is different depending on whether or not to suggest the display result of the variable display depending on the number of winning to the general winning opening and the frequency of winning For example, it may be possible to execute an effect for informing the display result of the variable display and an effect not related to the display result for the variable display), and an effect (for example, high probability) different whether or not the game state is suggested It may be possible to execute an effect notifying that it is a state and an effect not related to the gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening designation command, and a winning on the general winning opening occurs, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has won, and the reception of the start winning opening designation command causes a winning to the starting winning opening and the game to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred by the reception of the big winning opening winning command. Therefore, as the number-of-winnings management table, the number-of-winnings management table shown in FIG. 50 can be stored and updated.

  The second start winning opening is formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 906B (a game ball can be winning or easy to win from a closed state where the game ball does not win or difficult to win) The game ball can be won by switching to the state). Also, the special winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 907, the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 907 (the game ball can be winning or easy to win from a closed state where the game ball does not win or difficult to win) The game ball can be won by switching to the open state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning winning ball device 907 are classified into a winning prize winning opening where the gaming ball can be won by the operation of the bonus. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first starting winning opening are open all the time, and the non-special feature winning opening in which the game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the bonus. Divided into

  In the winning number management table of FIG. 50, the game ball has won in each winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening. The number of winning balls to be given (the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning opening, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420 in this example), which is the number of times the gaming ball has won in the winning opening, and the winning number are multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the sum of the number of balls paid out when the game ball has won a prize in the corresponding winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

  Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420, respectively) relative to the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example) (2) The non-special-purpose winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first start-up winning for the total (1572 in this example) of the number of winnings in each winning opening The ratio of the number of winnings in the mouth (11 + 36 + 2 + 14 + 754), and the ratio of the number of winnings (315 + 420) in the prize winning openings (second starting winning opening and big winning opening) and (3) Sum of winnings for each winning opening (3 In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the large winning opening (11 + 36 + 2 + 14 + 754 + 315) and the ratio of the number of winnings of the large winning opening (420) are stored.

  In addition, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts of each winning opening (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) relative to the total number of payouts of each winning opening (9268 in this example) And the total number of payouts for each winning opening (9268 in this example), the non-prize winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D and first start winning The ratio of the number of payouts of the mouth (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508), and the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) of the prize winning openings (the second start winning opening and the big winning opening) In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the large winning opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the large winning opening (6300) for 9268) are stored.

  Here, as described above, during the period in which the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is at the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Displayed on the device 905. Therefore, the salesclerk of the game arcade is paid out by the game ball winning a prize winning opening for the total number (9268) of the number of balls paid out by the game ball winning in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, against the total number (9268) of the balls paid out by the game ball having won in each winning opening, the number of balls paid out by the game ball having won in the big winning opening (6300) The ratio (hereinafter referred to as the “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be understood.

  Here, if the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%) determined in advance, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that effect in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 50, the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame because the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%). Further, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%) determined in advance, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that effect in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 50, the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame because the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%).

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and compares the comparison result with the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio. It is possible to display in a comprehensible manner. Note that the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 905 by setting of the display switching switch 9032 and setting operation by the operation button 9030 regardless of the setting of the mode switching switch 9031. Preferably, when the demonstration screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Also, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the game arcade side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, and may be displayed, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a calling lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901 for gaming. In the device, it is possible to store the received first payout ratio and the received second payout ratio and to display them on the display device. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to the information management apparatus such as a hall computer, and the information management apparatus determines the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning opening designation command, a start winning opening designation command, and a special winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 90120, external output information equivalent to these commands. Information that can specify that the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a winning in the starting winning opening occurred The information corresponding to the information which can specify which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening the game ball has won, the information which can specify that the winning opening of the big winning opening has occurred, It is assumed that the data is output to an external device such as (card unit, call lamp device) or information management device (hall computer).

  Thus, the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be specified. In the external device that has received the above information, it is possible to store the winning number management table of the form shown in FIG. 50 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. Further, for each gaming machine, it can be grasped whether the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

  In addition, regarding the counting period of the winning number information (the value of each item in FIG. 36 or 50) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the counting period, the pachinko machine It is a period from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine 901 to the stop of the power supply. With the power supply stop of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings to each winning opening becomes 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed Sometimes, the number of winnings for each winning opening stored in the number-of-winnings management table is zero. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased without being backed up.

  The aggregation period of the winning number information (the value of each item in FIG. 36 or 50) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the game arcade side, for example, operation A button 9030 can be used to set an aggregation period (for example, 10 hours or 3 hours) for the gaming machine. In addition, in the game machine (card unit and call lamp device), the store clerk at the game arcade inputs a desired tallying period using an input device or the like, and the tallying period entered is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko game machine 901, and the tallying period It may be set (stored in the RAM 90122). In addition, the manager of the game arcade in the information management device (hall computer) inputs a desired counting period by an input device or the like, and the input counting period corresponds to each pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a pachinko machine selected as a setting target It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set (stored in the RAM 90122) as an aggregation period. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours) is created, and these are displayed on the image display device 905, and the gaming devices (cards provided correspondingly) It is possible to output to a unit, a calling lamp device) and display it on the display device of the game device, or output it to an information management device (hall computer) to display it on the display device of the information management device .

  In addition, the number of winnings in the number-of-winnings management table based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command and the information corresponding to the special winning opening winning command output from the pachinko gaming machine 901 In the external device that stores and updates the information (the values of the respective items in FIG. 36 or 50), the aggregation period is set by the input device included in the external device to set each aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). It becomes possible to create a winning number management table and display it on the display device provided in the external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number-of-winnings management table for each predetermined period regarding the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device If the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display a winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[The 27th performance form]
Although the specific effect A and the specific effect B described above are all for giving notice of the variable display result in the special drawing game by the effect mode, they are executed in relation to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D. As a specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special drawing game or the variable display result in the common drawing game. FIG. 51 exemplifies a specific effect C (point application effect) as an effect not related to the variable display result in the special view game or the variable display result in the popular game.

  In the 27th effect mode shown in FIG. 52 and the 29th effect mode to be described later, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 every time the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The presence or absence of execution of the specific effect C is determined based on the execution determination random number, and when it is determined to be performed, the specific effect C is executed. By executing the specific effect C, the total point of the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 is incremented by one, and as shown in FIG. 51, the image display device 905 includes the character of “1 point” 902000 is displayed.

  That is, every time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether one point is to be awarded or not, and the player has won the lottery In this case, it is an effect form in which a point imparting effect in which one point is given is performed. A bonus is given to the player according to the total points of the point storage area.

  For example, when the total points reach 5 (when 5 times are won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 905. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code by the two-dimensional code reader of the owning information terminal, and can download a desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total points reach 10 (when the game is won 10 times), a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905. The player can access the music provision server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code by the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and can download the desired music to the information terminal.

  In the twenty-seventh effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period In the case of), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) at a rate of 80% if it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) Execute a specific effect C. In addition, CPU 90120 for production control, the fluctuation start command which designates the fluctuation start in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern specification command which designates the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern such as the decoration design in image display 905 By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

  As in the specific effect A and the specific effect B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is a winning condition) The history is included) is erased.

  Here, the total points of the point storage areas formed in the RAM 90122 are not based on the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is not reset), 10 After reaching (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and 1 is added again as the specific effect C is executed.

  In the 27th effect mode and the 29th effect mode, which will be described later, (1) a specific effect is obtained based on the game ball having a prize in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which variable display of special symbols is executed. The ratio to be executed is (2) lower than the ratio at which the special effect is executed based on the game ball having a prize at the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (out of symbol fluctuation period) It is set. In the period of (1), since the effect corresponding to the special view game (for example, the change result advance notification effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R, the player is usually a general winning prize. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decoration pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to perform the specific effect by not performing the effect corresponding to the special drawing game which is the object of interest preferentially in the original case. I am in a situation that is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by performing the specific effect at a rate higher than the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  Also, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special drawing game or the variable display result in the regular drawing game as the specific effect, the execution situation of the special drawing game and the number of pending memories In addition, it becomes possible to execute the specific effect at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when the effect related to the variable display result in the special drawing game is adopted as the specific effect, such as the specific effect A, the timing when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening is (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed If the period is not being performed (outside of the symbol fluctuation period), there is no target of the prediction of the fluctuation result at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning at the general winning opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display regarding the special figure game is satisfied (general winning The specific effect is not performed at the timing when the mouth is won, and thereafter, the specific effect is performed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special view game is satisfied). As a result, the frequency of execution of the specific effect may decrease, or there may be a decrease in interest due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such problems can be avoided by adopting a specific effect not related to the variable display result in the special drawing game or the variable display result in the common drawing game as the specific effect.

  In the twenty-seventh effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation In the case of the period), the specific effect C is not performed, and (2) the specific effect C can be performed only in the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (outside the symbol variation period) Also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the twenty-seventh effect mode, (1) identification based on the fact that the game ball is won in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) when the variable display of the special symbol is executed The ratio that the effect is executed is (2) based on the ratio that the specific effect is executed based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) It may be set to be higher.

[The 28th performance form]
In the twenty-eighth effect form, unlike the twenty-seventh effect form, the presence or absence of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for specific effect execution determination extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the twenty-eighth effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period In the case of), the specific effect A (variation result advance notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) , Does not execute the specific effect A.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 42A, the specific effect A is either the first mode in which only the audio effect is executed or the second mode in which the feature effect is executed together with the audio effect. It is a fluctuation result advance notice effect which suggests the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), is the specific effect B the first mode in which only the audio effect is executed or the second aspect in which the feature effect is executed together with the audio effect? It is a pre-reading advance notice effect which suggests that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied although the start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51, the specific effect C is the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game (whether or not it becomes the big hit symbol) and the display result of the variable display related to the common game (is it the hit symbol or not The effect is not related to any of the above, and is to give the player points in accordance with the winning on the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (described above. It is assumed that the execution of the specific effect A is suspended, and the process of “executed when the variable display start condition for the special view game is satisfied” is not performed), and it is specified only in the period of (1). The effect A is to be executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (a winning to any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is at least a winning condition) The history is included) is erased.

  In the twenty-eighth effect form, the specific effect A (variation result advance notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special drawing game being executed at the timing when the gaming ball has won at the general winning opening is executed as the specific effect. I am trying to improve my interest in specific effects. However, if the timing at which the game ball has won in the general winning opening is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the target of the variation result notice at this timing is present. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not performed at the timing when the general winning a prize is won), and then specified when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. When the effect A is to be executed, there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect mode, the special effect A is not executed when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening in the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period).

  In the twenty-eighth effect mode, when the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and in the case of the period (2) (outside of the symbol variation period), the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%. In the case of such a form, when a winning on the general winning opening occurs in the period (2) (outside of the symbol variation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening). The specific effect A is not executed at the winning timing), and thereafter, the specific effect A is performed when the variable display start condition for the special drawing game is satisfied. As described above, either when the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening is the period of (1) (within the symbol variation period) or when it is the period of (2) (out of the symbol variation period) Also, the specific effect A may be made executable, and the specific effect A may be performed at different rates.

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) (within the symbol variation period), the special running character is also being executed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be different depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display result of the figure game, or the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed. For example, when the CPU 90120 for effect control is determined to set the final decoration symbol as the big hit symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the final appearance symbol is set as the second symbol. When it is determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[The 29th performance form]
In the twenty-ninth effect form, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is: (2) in the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) when the total number of pending memory numbers is the sum of the number of pending memory numbers within 1) or more In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the number of reserved memories is 0 and variable display of the special symbol is not executed When it is out of the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  That is, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is performed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is performed at the timing when the gaming ball has won on the general winning opening (above (1) or (2) In the case of period, the special effect C is executed at a ratio of 20%, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, and the variable display of the special symbol When it is not determined to execute (in the case of the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  Every time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is a winning condition) The history is included) is erased.

  In the twenty-ninth effect mode, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is performed at the timing when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening (above (1) Or, when it is the period of (2)), the ratio that the special effect is executed is the timing when the game ball has won in the general winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol It is set to be lower than the rate at which the specific effect is performed when it is not determined to execute (when the period (3) above). In the periods (1) and (2), the effects corresponding to the special drawing game (for example, the change result notice effect and the advance notice effect) are performed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , The player is usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decoration pattern than the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the specific effect is performed in the period of (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period of (3), the player can execute the specific effect by not performing the effect corresponding to the special drawing game which is the object of interest preferentially if it is originally. I am in a situation that is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a rate higher than the period of (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  Also, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special drawing game or the variable display result in the regular drawing game as the specific effect, the execution situation of the special drawing game and the number of pending memories In addition, it becomes possible to execute the specific effect at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when a pre-read advance notice effect that can be executed only when the number of on-hold memories is one or more as in the specific effect B is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the gaming ball wins in the general winning opening is the on-off memory number In the case of a period in which 0 is 0, there is no target of pre-reading advance notice at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning at the general winning opening is canceled) or the execution is held until the number of holding memories becomes 1 or more (the general winning opening is won) At the timing, the specific effect is not performed, and thereafter, the specific effect is performed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special drawing game is satisfied). As a result, the frequency of execution of the specific effect may decrease, or there may be a decrease in interest due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Such problems can be avoided by adopting a specific effect not related to the variable display result in the special drawing game or the variable display result in the common drawing game as the specific effect.

  In the twenty-ninth effect mode, at the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least variable display of the special symbol. When it is decided to carry out (when it is a period of (1) or (2) above), the special effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the special symbol The specific effect C may be executable only when it is not determined to execute the variable display of (when it is the period of (3) above). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the twenty-ninth effect form, whether the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Or at least when it is decided to execute variable display of special symbols (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is executed variable display of special symbols It may be set to be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is performed when it is not determined to execute the variable display of the special symbol (when the period (3) above).

  In addition, the timing when variable display for the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example 0.2 seconds or less). In the case of (1), the specific effect may be performed immediately after the start of the variable display (for example, after 5 seconds) without starting the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball has won in the start winning opening (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball has won in the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example 0.2 seconds or less). In some cases, the specific effect may be performed immediately after the predetermined period (e.g., after 5 seconds has elapsed) after the number of pending storages has increased, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special drawing game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game.

[The 30th performance form]
In the thirtieth effect form, unlike the twenty-ninth effect form, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect is not determined based on the random number for specific effect execution determination extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the 30th effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is: If the total number of pending storages is the sum of pending storages) is within one or more of the periods, execute the specific effect B (pre-reading advance notice presentation) at a rate of 100%, and Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), (3) The period during which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period When it is, the specific effect B is not performed.

  Thus, the specific effect B is not executed when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2) or (3). It is assumed that (the process of "preserving the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of pending storages becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only in the period of (1), The specific effect B is to be executed. Every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D which is a winning condition) The history is included) is erased.

  In the 30th effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect B (pre-reading advance notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special drawing game being held at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening is specified I try to improve my interest in the production. However, when the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) where the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no target of the advance notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing at which the general winning a prize is won), and then the specific effect B is performed when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more. In the case where the game is to be executed, there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Therefore, in the thirtieth effect mode, the special effect B is not executed when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening in the period (2) or (3) (period in which the number of reserved memories is 0). .

  In the 30th effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) (within the period of withholding storage). Is to execute the specific effect B at a rate of 80%, and in the case of a period of (2) or (3) (within a period without pending storage), execute the specific effect B at a rate of 20% You may do so. In the case of such a form, when a prize on the general winning a prize opening occurs in the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), temporarily suspend the execution of the specific effect B. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning a prize is won), and thereafter, the specific effect B is executed when the number of held memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening is the period of (1) (within the period of holding storage), and the period of (2) or (3) (within the period of no holding storage) In either case, the specific effect B may be made executable, and the specific effect B may be performed at different rates.

  In addition, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) (within the period of holding storage), further, that holding The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on whether the reach effect is executed or not in the variable display result of the special drawing game regarding the memory and the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the execution of the special drawing game regarding the holding memory You may do so. For example, when the start winning determination determination result specifying command specifying "big hit" is stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, the holding display in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol) When there is a 80% rate, the specific effect B is executed, and the start winning judgment determination result specifying command specifying “big hit” is not stored in the start winning command storage area (ie, The special effect B may be executed at a ratio of 20% when there is no holding storage in which the variable display result of the special view game is a big hit symbol.

[31st effect form]
In the 31st effect mode shown in FIG. 53, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which variable display of the special symbol is executed ( If it is in the symbol fluctuation period), execute the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) at a rate of 100%, and (2) in a period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point providing effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  Thus, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period of (1) and the period of (2), It is assumed that different types of specific effects are to be executed. As a result, it is possible to have an interest in the effect to be executed when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, whenever specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning opening 9050A which is a winning condition) The winning history on any of the general winning openings 9050D is included).

  In the 31st effect mode, the specific effect A (variation result advance notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special drawing game being executed at the timing when the gaming ball has won at the general winning opening is performed for the specific effect. To improve their interest in However, if the timing at which the game ball has won in the general winning opening is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the target of the variation result notice at this timing is present. do not do. In this case, if the specific effect is not executed at all, the frequency of execution of the specific effect decreases. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not performed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the special figure game When the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the interest may be reduced due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the 31st effect mode, when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening in the period of (2) (outside the symbol variation period), the variable display result in the special view game or the variable in the popular game is substituted for the specific effect A. Such a problem can be avoided by executing the specific effect C not related to the display result. In addition, it is not limited to the form that always performs the specific effect of any type (performs at a rate of 100%) for every winning in the general winning a prize opening, and for every winning in the general winning opening, any of the types The specific effect may be performed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

[The 32nd effect form]
In the thirty-second effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of pending storages (for example, the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) If the total number of pending storages is the sum of pending storages) is within one or more of the periods, execute the specific effect B (pre-reading advance notice presentation) at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of pending storages is 0 If it is the period during which the variable display of special symbols is being executed (within symbol variation period), execute the specific effect A (variation result advance notice effect) at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0 And when it is a period (out of symbol fluctuation period) where variable display of a special symbol is not performed, it is made to perform specific production C (point grant presentation) at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1), the case (2), and In the case of the period 3), different types of specific effects are to be executed. As a result, it is possible to have an interest in the effect to be executed when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, whenever specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general prize which is a winning condition) The winning history for any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning hole 9050D is included).

  In the thirty-second effect mode, when the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the advance notice is present, the specific effect B (preread notice When the effect is performed, and the target of the advance notice is not present but the target of the change result notice is present, the specific effect A (the change result advance effect). In the case of the period (3), that is, when there is neither the target of the advance notice and the target of the change result notice, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

  As described above, by selecting the specific effect that can be immediately executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, by executing this, the fun when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening is appropriately improved. I am trying to In addition, it is not limited to the form that always performs the specific effect of any type (performs at a rate of 100%) for every winning in the general winning a prize opening, and for every winning in the general winning opening, any of the types The specific effect may be performed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%).

  In addition, in the 32nd effect form, when the number of pending memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of the target of the change result advance notice, the preview advance notice effect is executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the change result notice and the target of the advance notice are present”, the advance notice effect is given priority. Not limited to such a form, when the number of pending memories is 1 or more at the timing when the gaming ball has won at the general winning opening, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the change result notice is made When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the advance notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where "the target of the change result advance notice and the target of the pre-reading advance notice exist", the change result advance notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modifications of the 27th to 32nd effect modes]
In the twenty-seventh effect mode to the thirty-second effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be varied according to the state when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening. The "state" mentioned here is a result of the game in the gaming machine, and is a state based on the game in the gaming machine. Depending on the classification of the state, the execution ratio of the specific effect is made different. For example, in the 27th effect mode, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won the general winning opening is (1) within the symbol variation period, if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a definite change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball has won the general winning opening is (2) outside the symbol variation period, if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%, If the gaming state at that time is a definite change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening.

  In addition, in the twenty-seventh effect mode to the thirty-second effect mode, the types of specific effects to be executed may be made different according to the state when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect mode, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won the general winning opening is (1) within the symbol variation period, if the number of pending memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (variation result notice The effect is executed, and if the number of pending memories at that time is one or more, the specific effect B (pre-reading advance notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball has won the general winning opening is (2) outside the symbol variation period, if the number of pending memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of pending memories at that time is one or more, it is assumed that the specific effect B (pre-reading advance notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening.

  As described above, the division for the execution ratio of the specific effect or the type of the specific effect is (1) the gaming state is the normal state, or (2) the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state It is not limited to (1) whether the number of pending storages is 1 or more or (2) whether the number of pending storages is 0 or not. For example, it may be divided into (1) a period after reach condition establishment in reach change, or (2) a period before reach condition establishment in reach change. In addition, (1) is a period during which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being performed, or (2) is a period during which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being performed, It may be a category. In addition, it may be divided into (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-series effect is performed, or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-series effect is performed. . Furthermore, even if it is the division whether (1) it is before execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect, or (2) it is after the execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect. good. Furthermore, depending on the difference of these divisions, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different.

  Similar to the other specific effects A and B executed based on the game ball winning to the general winning opening, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is switched on / off according to the display setting table of FIG. 37. It is supposed to be. Specifically, the display switching switch 9032 is set to display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 38). It is only feasible if it is. As described above, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game arcade or the player as to whether or not to execute the specific effect C.

  In addition, the specific effect C (point grant effect) is not limited to the one where one point is awarded per one winning to the general winning opening, but two points or three points are awarded per one winning to the general winning opening. It may be The number of points to be awarded may differ depending on, for example, which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The game state may be different depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the probability change state or the time saving state.

  Also, in the specific effect C (point grant effect), points may be awarded according to factors other than winning to the general winning opening, for example, points are awarded according to winning to the start winning opening The points may be given according to the establishment of the reach state or the like.

[The 33rd Effect Form]
FIG. 54 exemplifies a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes in stages in accordance with the game ball's winning on the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 54, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) refers to the filling area 902100 a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the game ball winning to the general winning opening, It is an effect that can be changed stepwise from the lowest 0 to the highest 10 stages.

  In the example of FIG. 54 (a), the filling area 902100a (black part in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is 0 stage in response to the game ball having won any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. It has increased from 1 level (white part occupies 10/10) to 1 level (black part occupies 1/10 and white part 9/10) (gauge + 1). Further, in the example of FIG. 54 (b), the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is from 0 level to 3 levels (black portion) in accordance with the game ball having won any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D Is increasing to 3/10, with white areas occupying 7/10) (gauge + 3).

  In this manner, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases in accordance with the game ball winning to the general winning opening, and reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10 It is assumed that the player is given a privilege when the player is in the For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905, and the image providing server or the music desired by the player is displayed. It can be downloaded from the provider server to the information terminal.

  Not limited to this, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music is output as BGM during the game. It may be possible. Alternatively, it may be possible to execute a fluctuation result advance notice effect informing the possibility that the display result of the variable display regarding the special drawing game being executed at the timing when the filling area 902100a has reached 10 stages becomes the big hit symbol. At the timing when the area 902100a reaches 10 levels, it may be possible to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect to give notice of the possibility that the display result of the variable display regarding the special drawing game being held will be a big hit symbol.

  That is, the benefit provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels may be an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special view game or the variable display result in the popular game It may be an effect related to the variable display result in the game or the variable display result in the common drawing game. Further, the effect may be an effect associated with the gaming state, or may be an effect not associated with the gaming state. Further, different effects may be executed every time the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels. Further, different effects may be executed depending on the game state or the like when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels.

  When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches ten levels, notification of that is performed by displaying a message on the image display device 905 or by audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and then the gauge image 902100 is performed. The filling area 902100a in the is reset to 0 level. After the reset, the filling area 902100 a in the gauge image 902100 is increased again in accordance with the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening.

  In the 33rd effect mode to the 37th effect mode shown in FIGS. 55 to 56, the specification extracted from the random number circuit 90124 every time the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Based on the effect execution determination random number, it is determined whether to increase the level of the filling area 902100a (hereinafter referred to as a gauge level) in the gauge image 902100 by one level, and if it is determined to be performed, More than one step increase. That is, every time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether to increase the gauge level by one step. If you win, the gauge level will increase by one.

  In the thirty-third effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period If it is), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) if it is a period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the percentage of 80% The gauge level is increased by one level. In addition, CPU 90120 for production control, the fluctuation start command which designates the fluctuation start in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern specification command which designates the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern such as the decoration design in image display 905 By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

  As in the specific effect A to the specific effect C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, along with notification and benefit provision (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including ten or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the thirty-third effect mode, and the thirty-fourth effect mode, the thirty-sixth effect mode, and the thirty-seventh effect mode described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period in which variable display of special symbols is executed (within symbol fluctuation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball is (2) that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) Based on the gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. In the period of (1), since the effect corresponding to the special view game (for example, the change result advance notification effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R, the player is usually a general winning prize. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decoration pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to increase the gauge level by not executing the effect corresponding to the special figure game which is the object of interest preferentially in the first place. I am in a situation that is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the thirty-third effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (symbol variation In the case of (during period), it is possible to increase the gauge level (2) when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside of the symbol fluctuation period) without increasing the gauge level. Also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-third effect mode, (1) a gauge based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball being won in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) It may be set to be

[The 34th performance form]
In the thirty-fourth effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period In the case of), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (within a symbol variation period) and in particular When the remaining time until the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) and the special When the remaining time until the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, CPU 90120 for production control, the fluctuation start command which designates the fluctuation start in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern specification command which designates the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the fluctuation pattern such as the decoration design in image display 905 By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and until the variable display of the special symbol is finished (the determined special symbol is It is possible to identify the remaining time of the stop display. For example, when the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are received, the fluctuation time of the special symbol designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set as the value of the fluctuation time timer, whereby the CPU 90120 for effect control changes the fluctuation time The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol is finished (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). Also, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game, the finalized symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the fluctuation time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including ten or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the thirty-fourth effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more before symbol stop is (3) when it is less than 10 seconds until symbol stop The gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the determined decoration pattern to be stopped is displayed than the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (3), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period (3), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the thirty-fourth effect mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of (3), the gauge level may not be increased. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more before symbol stop is ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won in the general winning opening when the symbol stop is less than 10 seconds.

  Further, in the thirty-fourth effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game being executed and the outlying symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a decorative symbol that is being executed when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). The gauge level is increased by 70% when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, and the gauge level is increased by 40% when the display result is a lost symbol, while the first general winning prize is When the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning hole 9050D is the period (3), the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed becomes the big hit symbol The gauge level may be increased at a rate of 30%, and the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10% if the display result is a lost pattern.

[The 35th performance form]
As described above, the specific effect B has been exemplified as the advance notice effect for giving a notice of the variable display result in the reserved special drawing game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 42 (b), does the start winning determination determination result specifying command stored in the start winning combination command storage area include a start winning determination determination result specifying command specifying “big hit”? Based on whether or not it is determined, it is determined whether the rendering mode of the previewed preview effect is to be the first mode (only sound effect) or the second mode (voice effect and feature effect). That is, in the advance notice such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) targeted by the advance notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It is difficult.

  It is also possible to adopt an effect of informing the change of the target as the advance notice effect. For example, as described above, in the start winning combination storage display area 905H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first Is provided. If the effect control CPU 90120 is a command specifying "big hit" when the start winning combination determination result specifying command is received, the display region corresponding to the command is displayed according to the command specifying "off". It is possible to execute a pending change presentation displaying in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the part. The target change in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in the special mode, and the player can grasp the number of remaining variable displays to be executed until the target change.

  For example, if a command specifying "big hit" is received when the start winning judgment determination result designation command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30% The display site corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, when the command for determining start result at the start winning is received, if it is a command to designate "out", the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5% and at a rate of 95%. The display site corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. As described above, when displaying the display part corresponding to the pending storage generated by the start winning in the special mode at the start winning, the display part of the special mode is each time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time the start condition of the variable display game (the variable display that is the target of the pre-notice advance notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied. The display part disappears from the start winning combination memory display area 905H. In such an aspect, the on-hold change presentation is being performed during a period from the start winning to the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the start winning.

  That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied in the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the on-hold change effect is executed to display the display region displayed in the special mode (target of on-hold change effect Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to the pending display of the variable display that is not the target of the pending change effect) that exists on the left of the display information corresponding to the pending display of the variable display It is possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display which is the target of the pending change presentation is executed.

  In addition, the timing which displays a display site | part in a special mode is not restricted at the time of starting winning. For example, the display site may be displayed in the normal mode at the start winning combination, and may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode after a predetermined effect, and the timing when the start condition is satisfied (display mode of each display site May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these modes, the timing from when the display site corresponding to the variable display serving as the target of the preview preview changes from the normal state to the special mode until the start condition of the variable display serving as the target of the preview preview is satisfied. During the period, the pending change presentation is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed If there is no period (if there is no display portion of a special mode in the hold change effect and neither is the execution period of the target change), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  Further, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) that the advance notice is performed and the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 2 or more In the case of a period of 40% (when there are two or more special drawing games in which the start condition is satisfied prior to the special drawing game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode in the hold change effect), 40% The gauge level is increased by one level.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the advance notice announcement effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1 If it is a period of time (if there is one special drawing game whose start condition is satisfied prior to the special drawing game corresponding to the display area of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge is 20% The level increases by one level.

  Further, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) an execution period of target change accompanying the end of the advance notice announcement effect (on hold change effect In the case where it is a period during which the variable display based on the start condition of the special drawing game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is being executed), the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including ten or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the thirty-fifth effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) target fluctuation The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number of is 1; (4) When the remaining variable display number up to target change is 0 (execution of target change The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won in the general winning opening). In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. Also, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target change currently being executed than the winning situation of the gaming ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3) (4), it may mean that the interest of the specific effect is impaired. On the other hand, in period (2), the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level since there is a delay until the target change is executed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-fifth effect mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-fifth effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is two or more; (3) the remaining change until the target change It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of display times is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases when it is the execution period of the target change.

  Further, in the thirty-fifth effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (any of (2), (3), (4) In the case of?), The gauge level may be increased at a different ratio between the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the target change and the case where the dislocated symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, when the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the effect control CPU 90120 has a variable display result in target variation The gauge level is increased by 70% when it becomes a big hit pattern, and the gauge level is increased by 40% when the variable display result becomes a lost pattern, and the first general winning hole 9050A to 4th general When the timing at which the game ball has won any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30% when the variable display result in the target change becomes a big hit symbol, The gauge level is increased at a rate of 20% when the variable display result is an out pattern, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth one are selected. When the timing at which the game ball has won any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (4), the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15% if the variable display result in the target change is a big hit symbol, The gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10% when the variable display result is an out pattern.

[The 36th performance form]
In the 36th effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period In the case of), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. Further, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without reach effect is being executed. In the case, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%.

  Further, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is being executed and If it is a period before reaching the reach state, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) it is a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is being performed and the reach state If it is a period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including ten or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the thirty-sixth embodiment, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning at the regular winning opening before the reach state is established in reach fluctuation is (4) the general after the reach state is established in reach fluctuation The gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball having won the winning opening. In the period of (4), the player is generally interested in the remaining decorative symbols not displayed for a stop after the reach state is established, rather than the winning situation of the gaming ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (4), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), the reach state is not established, and by increasing the gauge level, the player is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the 36th effect mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3). In the case of (4), the gauge level may not be increased. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the 36th presentation mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases when it is a period in which the reach change is being executed and is a period before the reach state is established, (4 The gauge level may be set to be lower than the rate of increase when the reach change is being performed and after the reach state is established.

[The 37th Effect Form]
In the thirty-seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 56, the ratio at which the gauge level is increased differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%.

  Also, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including ten or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the 37th effect mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases is different between (1) within the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050 B or the third general winning opening The rate at which the gauge level increases is different between when the gaming ball has won at 9050C and when the gaming ball has won at the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases is different according to the general winning opening in which the game ball has won, the player is interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, thereby improving the interest be able to.

  For example, the first general winning combination provided nearer to the end of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C provided closer to the center of the gaming area 9010 The rate at which the gauge level increases when the gaming ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D when it is difficult for the game ball to win the opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By making the game level higher than the rate at which the game level is increased when the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C win, it is possible to create an interest in winning for the general winning opening which is more difficult to win. It is good to raise it.

  In the 37th effect mode, it is possible to increase the gauge level when the gaming ball has won the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, and the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening can be made. When the gaming ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Also, contrary to the example shown in the thirty-seventh effect mode, the ratio at which the gauge level increases when the gaming ball is won in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Alternatively, it may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the gaming ball has won the third general winning opening 9050C.

[The 38th performance form]
In the 38th to 42nd effect modes shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the presence or absence of the specific effect execution is not determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In addition, in the 38th to 42nd effect modes, the gauge level that increases in response to one winning on the general winning opening is not limited to one. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three in response to one winning on the general winning opening.

  In the 38th effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period If the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1), and (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the gauge level is three steps Increase (gauge + 3).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including four or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the 38th effect mode, and the 39th effect mode, the 41st effect mode, and the 42nd effect mode, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period in which variable display of a special symbol is executed (within symbol fluctuation period) The number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the winning of the game ball is (2) that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) Based on the number of stages of increasing gauge level is set less. In the period of (1), since the effect corresponding to the special view game (for example, the change result advance notification effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R, the player is usually a general winning prize. I am more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decoration pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot in the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is prevented by the fact that the presentation corresponding to the special figure game which is the subject of interest is prioritized in the first place, thereby increasing the gauge level a lot. Is in an easy-to-interest situation. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the 38th effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (symbol variation If it is within the period, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing by one step is 80%), (2) a period during which variable display of special symbols is not performed ( In the case of the symbol fluctuation period), the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps may be, for example, 80% (the ratio of changing by one step is 20%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect mode, (1) a gauge based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed The number of stages where the level increases is (2) the number of stages where the gauge level increases based on the game ball being won in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) It may be set to increase too.

  In addition, it is assumed that, as a privilege to be awarded when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege of different value may be awarded. For example, it is assumed that when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code capable of downloading only an image may be displayed, or a two-dimensional code capable of downloading an image and a music may be displayed. At this time, the latter has a greater award value than the former. The number of stages in which the gauge level increases may indicate the magnitude of the reward value to be awarded when the gauge level reaches 10 stages. For example, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) If the reward value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing one step is 80%). If the reward value is large, the gauge level is more than two steps. For example, if the increase rate is 40% (the rate of change by one step is 60%) and the benefit value is small if (2) the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period) The rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (50% of the rate of changing by one step). The ratio to above increases for example, 80% (ratio for one step changes of 20%) may be.

[The 39th effect form]
In the 39th effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period In the case of), the gauge level is increased by 3 levels (gauge + 3). The timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (within a symbol variation period) and in particular The gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge + 2) when the remaining time until the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more. The timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) and the special The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge + 1) when the remaining time until the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including four or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the 39th effect mode, (2) the number of stages of the gauge level to increase based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more before symbol stop is (3) less than 10 seconds until symbol stop It is set higher than the number of stages of the gauge level which increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the determined decoration pattern to be stopped is displayed than the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot in the period (3), the interest of the specific presentation may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period (3), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the 39th effect mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more when the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of period (3), assuming that the rate of change is 80% (the rate of change by 1 step is 20%), the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is the rate of change by 20% (1 step) May be 80%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the 39th effect mode, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more before symbol stop, 3) It may be set so that the gauge level is less than the number of stages of increase based on the fact that the game ball has won in the general winning opening when less than 10 seconds before symbol stop.

  Further, in the 39th effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)) In this case, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game being executed and the outlying symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a decorative symbol that is being executed when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). When the display result of the variable display is a big hit design, the gauge level is increased by three steps, and when the display result is a lost pattern, the gauge level is increased by two steps, while the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general When the timing at which the game ball has won any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is two steps if the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed becomes the big hit symbol The gauge level may be increased by one step when the display result is an out pattern.

[40th effect form]
In the forty-fifth effect mode, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed If there is no period (if there is no display portion of a special mode in the hold change effect and neither is the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge + 4).

  Further, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) that the advance notice is performed and the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 2 or more The gauge level is 3 if there is a period of time (if there are two or more special drawing games in which the start condition is satisfied prior to the special drawing game corresponding to the display area of the special mode in the hold change effect) Step up (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the advance notice announcement effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change becomes 1 The gauge level is increased by two steps if it is the current period (if there is one special view game in which the start condition is satisfied prior to the special view game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode in the hold change effect) Yes (gauge + 2).

  Further, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) an execution period of target change accompanying the end of the advance notice announcement effect (on hold change effect The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge + 1) when the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special view game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is being executed).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including three or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the forty-fifth effect form, (2) the number of stages of the gauge level increasing based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable displays until the target change is 2 or more; (3) the target change The number of increase in gauge level that increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display up to 1 is 1, (4) When the number of remaining variable display up to target change is 0 (target change The number of stages of the gauge level which increases based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening) is set during the execution period of. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. Also, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target change currently being executed than the winning situation of the gaming ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot in the period of (3) and (4), there is a possibility that the interest of the specific performance will be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a delay until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (3) (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the forty-fifth effect mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more if the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 20% (one step only), for example, in the period (3) (4). The rate of change may be 80%). Also, contrary to the example shown in the forty-fifth effect mode, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable displays until target fluctuation is two or more; (3) the remaining number until target fluctuation The number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the variable display count is 1 may be set to be smaller than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the target fluctuation execution period is performed.

  Further, in the forty-fifth effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (any of (2), (3), (4) In the case of?), The gauge level may be increased at a different ratio between the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the target change and the case where the dislocated symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, when the timing at which the game ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the effect control CPU 90120 has a variable display result in target variation The gauge level is increased by four steps when the jackpot symbol is selected, and the gauge level is increased by three steps when the variable display result is the lost symbol, any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D If the timing when the game ball wins is the period of (3), the gauge level is increased by three steps if the variable display result in the target change is a big hit symbol, and the variable display result is an out symbol The gauge level is increased by two steps, and any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is When the timing when the ball wins is the period (4), the gauge level is increased by two steps if the variable display result in the target change is a big hit symbol, and the variable display result is an off symbol The gauge level may be increased by one level.

[The 41st performance form]
In the forty-first effect mode, the timing when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period In the case of), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge + 4). Further, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without reach effect is being executed. In the case, the gauge level is increased by 3 levels (gauge + 3).

  Further, the timing at which the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which variable display (reach variation) with reach effect is being executed and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge + 3), and (4) a variable display with reach effect (reach variation) is being performed and the reach state is established If it is a subsequent period, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including three or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the forty-first effect mode, (3) the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning combination before reaching the reach state in the reach change is (4) after the reach state in the reach change The number is set larger than the number of stages of the gauge level that increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. In the period of (4), the player is generally interested in the remaining decorative symbols not displayed for a stop after the reach state is established, rather than the winning situation of the gaming ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot in the period (4), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), the reach state is not established, and by increasing the gauge level a lot, the player is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period (4), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

  In the forty first effect mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more when the timing when the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3). For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is changed, for example, by 20% (one step) in the case of (4). May be 80%). In addition, contrary to the example shown in the forty-first effect mode, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when it is a period in which the reach change is being executed and is a period before the reach state is established, 4) The gauge level may be set so as to be less than the number of stages of increase when the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[The 42nd Effect Form]
In the forty-second effect mode shown in FIG. 58, the number of stages of increasing the gauge level is different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) , The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) , The gauge level increases by 2 steps (gauge + 2).

  Also, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) , The gauge level increases by 3 steps (gauge + 3). On the other hand, when the timing at which the gaming ball has won in either of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) , The gauge level increases by 4 steps (gauge + 4).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification and benefits of that effect (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and music, display of special characters, output of special music, etc.) Along with this, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least the first regular winning opening 9050A to the fourth regular winning opening 9050D including three or more winning histories) is deleted.

  In the forty-second effect mode, the number of stages of increasing gauge levels differs between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050 B or the third general winning combination The number of stages of increasing gauge levels is different between when the game ball has won in the opening 9050C and when the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By changing the number of levels of the gauge level to be increased according to the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, improving the interest It can be done.

  For example, the first general winning combination provided nearer to the end of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C provided closer to the center of the gaming area 9010 When it is difficult to win the game ball in the mouth 9050A and the fourth general winning hole 9050D, the stage where the gauge level increases when the gaming ball wins in the first general winning hole 9050A and the fourth general winning hole 9050D By setting the number more than the number of stages at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, for a winning in the general winning opening that is more difficult to win It is good to increase interest.

  In the forty-second effect mode, when the gaming ball is won in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the ratio for increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80% (the ratio for changing only one step is 20) %), And when the game ball wins the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening, the percentage to increase the gauge level by two or more steps is assumed to be, for example, 20% (80% to change by one step) Also good. In addition, contrary to the example shown in the forty-second effect mode, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the gaming ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. It may be set to be smaller than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the gaming ball wins the 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C.

[Modifications of the 33rd effect mode to the 42nd effect mode]
In the thirty-fifth to thirty-seventh performance modes, determine the number of stages of gauge levels to be increased in the category serving as a reference for determining whether to increase the gauge level, and in the thirty-eighth performance mode to the forty-second performance mode The division that is the basis for the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, the classification to determine whether to increase the gauge level, the classification to determine the number of stages of the gauge level to increase, (1) gaming state is normal state, (2) gaming state is It may be divided into whether it is a definite change state or a short time state. Also, it may be divided into (1) the number of pending storages being one or more and (2) the number of pending storages being zero. In addition, it may be divided into (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-series effect is performed, or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-series effect is performed. . Furthermore, even if it is the division whether (1) it is before execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect, or (2) it is after the execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect. good.

  Although the gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling area 902100 a has a minimum of 0 level, a condition under which the gauge image 902100 is displayed may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 902100 is not displayed when the gaming state is the definite change state or the short time state (gauge The effect of increasing the level may not be performed).

  The display of the gauge image 902100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are performed during a period in which a predetermined effect is performed, and may not be performed in a period in which the predetermined effect is not performed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening only in a period (predetermined effect stage period) in which the background image of the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image. Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, the game ball wins a prize at the general winning opening only in a period in which the display portion in the start winning memory display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a white color that suggests a possibility of changing to a special mode) The gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when it occurs.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is simultaneously executed (at the same time when a predetermined time is reached in a game machine of the same model) at a timing when a not-shown RTC (real time clock) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time In the case where the effect is executed, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening during the simultaneous effect execution period.

  Further, when increasing the gauge level, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, different effect sounds may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, in the case of increasing the gauge level by three steps, compared to the case of increasing the gauge level by one step. The volume of the effect sound may be increased.

  Further, it is preferable to output an effect sound for increasing the gauge level at a volume different from that of the effect sound associated with the special view game or the effect sound associated with the regular game. For example, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound associated with the regular game, but smaller than the volume of the effect sound associated with the special view game. Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound associated with the special-figure game, but may be smaller than the volume of an error sound for notifying a gaming machine error.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be made different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be higher than the volume in the probability change state or the short time state.

  In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes in stages according to the winning on the general winning opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, but the mode of the character being displayed is in stages It may be changing (for example, the size of the displayed character is enlarged or the item owned by the character is changed), and the character selectable by the player is gradually increased. Also good. Also, the mode and position of the movable part may be changed stepwise, and the color of light emitted from the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Further, the sound outputted from the speakers 908L and 908R may be changed stepwise.

  The specific effect D (gauge update effect) is switched on / off of execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 37, similarly to other specific effects A to C executed based on the game ball winning to the general winning opening. It is supposed to be. Specifically, the display switching switch 9032 is set to display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 38). It is only feasible if it is. As described above, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game arcade or the player as to whether or not to execute the specific effect D.

[The 43rd Effect Form]
The specific effects A to D described above are effects to be executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, but to execute the specific effect when the gaming ball does not win on the general winning opening You may For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the 10-minute gaming period, the effect control CPU 90120 does not receive a winning. It is possible to execute the specific effect E for displaying on the image display device 905 the notification image 902200 etc. including the image simulating the form of the general winning a prize opening and the characters “There is no general winning”.

  As described above, the specific effect is not limited to the effect performed based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening, and the effect (general winning performed based on the game ball not winning in the general winning opening It may be an effect that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize in the mouth. That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event such as a game ball winning to the general winning opening (a game event performed or a game effect executed with no game event occurring).

  In the forty-third effect mode shown in FIG. 60, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which the gaming ball is not winning in the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is assumed to be 0), the effect control CPU 90120 starts the start winning opening designation command and the general winning opening from the gaming control microcomputer 90100. When one of the designated command and the special winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. Then, if the general winning a prize opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes have elapsed from the timer set), 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and again Start the timer.

  On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out due to not receiving the general winning a prize opening designation command until the non-winning determination timer times out, the notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. Execute a specific effect E to be displayed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) If the game has not been received, it is determined that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is paused (the value of the timer is not updated). When updating of the non-winning determination timer is paused, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to the non-winning determination timer timing out is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period in which the game is not performed (prohibition of the specific effect E). In addition, when the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 is processing according to the non-winning determination timer having timed out (specifically, according to the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0) Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped. , Resume the update of the non-winning determination timer.

  That is, the non-winning determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no determination of the game end is made), and it is generally 10 minutes during the period in which the player is playing a game. A time out occurs when the number of winning on the winning opening becomes 0 (the time-out is detected by the CPU for effect control 90120). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the special effect E is executed if a winning on the general winning opening does not occur for 10 minutes.

  In the above effect mode, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not the game ball has been launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a firing detection sensor is provided near the gaming ball entrance of the gaming area 9010, and it is determined whether the player is playing a game depending on whether the shooting detection sensor is detecting the gaming ball You may Also, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined according to whether or not the bat operating handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the launch motor provided in the bat launching device is operating). good.

  As described above, even when the player is playing a game, when a winning on the general winning combination does not occur in a predetermined period (10 minutes game period), the specific effect E is executed, Informs that there is no winning on the general winning opening. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning on the general winning opening has not occurred, and can use it as a reference (for example, determination material for selecting a game) when playing a game. In addition, in the game arcade, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the winning frequency to the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the

  Also, when the player is playing a game but no winning at the general winning opening has occurred, the specific effect E is executed, but the player has not played a game. By stopping the non-winning determination timer (when the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the processing based on the non-winning determination timer's time-out) when a winning on the general winning opening has not occurred. Execution of the specific effect E is limited.

  Incidentally, even when it is determined that the player has not played a game and it is determined that the winning at the general winning opening has not occurred, the specific effect E may be executed, and in this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than in the case where it is determined that the winning at the general winning opening has not occurred despite the game being played by the player.

[The 44th performance form]
The specific effect E is not limited to one notifying that the winning at the general winning opening has not occurred within the predetermined period (the number of winnings at the general winning opening is less than 1), and the general within the predetermined period. The notification that the number of winnings to the winning opening is less than a predetermined number may be specified to be identifiable. In the forty-fourth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is assumed to be 0), the effect control CPU 90120 starts the start winning opening designation command and the general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When one of the designated command and the special winning opening winning command is received, the value of the winning number determination timer is set to 30 minutes and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to 0. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time the general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

  Then, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 within the predetermined period in the specific effect E. Informing that the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or notifying the number of winnings within a predetermined period. For example, a message that “the number of regular winnings for 30 minutes is less than 3” and / or a message that “the number of regular winnings for 30 minutes is only 1” are displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is again set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the winning number determination timer in this case is a value corresponding to the elapsed time since the specific effect E was started. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the special effect E is not executed. Set 30 minutes again as a value and start the timer again.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) If the game has not been received, it is determined that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the value of the timer is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to time out of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period in which the game is not performed (prohibition of the specific effect E). In addition, when the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 is processing according to the winning number determination timer having timed out (specifically, the detection of the timeout where the timer value becomes 0) Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening winning command in a state where the update of the winning number determination timer is paused. , Renewal of the winning number determination timer.

  That is, the number-of-winnings determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no game termination determination is made), and 30 minutes have elapsed while the player is playing a game. The time-out occurs (when the time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of prizes to be paid to the general prize winning port in the gaming period of 30 minutes is smaller than the predetermined number.

  In the above effect mode, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not the game ball has been launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a firing detection sensor is provided near the gaming ball entrance of the gaming area 9010, and it is determined whether the player is playing a game depending on whether the shooting detection sensor is detecting the gaming ball You may Also, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined according to whether or not the bat operating handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the launch motor provided in the bat launching device is operating). good.

  As described above, even when the player is playing a game, when the number of winning on the general winning combination in the predetermined period (30 minutes game period) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. Informing that the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, determination material for selecting a game) when playing a game. In addition, in the game arcade, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nail is made so that the winning frequency to the general winning opening becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the

  In addition, although the game is being performed by the player and the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of wins to the general winning a prize opening in a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number due to no play, the number-of-wins determination timer is temporarily stopped By doing this, the execution of the specific effect E is limited.

  The special effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the player has not played a game. In this case, the specific effect is lower than in the case where it is determined that the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number despite the game being performed by the player. E may be executed.

[The 45th performance form]
In the forty-third effect mode and the forty-fourth effect mode, the situation at that time when it is determined that the effect control CPU 90120 has a smaller number (including zero) of the number of winning on the general winning opening in a predetermined period than a predetermined number. Although the specific effect E is to be executed regardless of that, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be made different according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth effect mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of wins to the regular winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the number-of-winnings determination timer times out) However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not performed in the definite variation state or the short time state.

  In addition, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (when the non-winning determination timer times out, the winning number determination timer times out) is ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) in the definite variation state or the short time state, the specific effect E is executed at, for example, the rate of 20% It is good. As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at a different rate according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number.

[The 46th performance form]
In the forty-third effect mode and the forty-fourth effect mode, the situation at that time when it is determined that the effect control CPU 90120 has a smaller number (including zero) of the number of winning on the general winning opening in a predetermined period than a predetermined number. Although the specific effect E is performed in the common mode regardless of whether the specific effect E is performed, the effect mode of the specific effect E may be made different according to the state when this determination is made. In the forty-sixth effect mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of wins to the regular winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the number-of-winnings determination timer times out) However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output) in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is performed in the definite variation state or the time saving state. It is made to carry out in 2 modes (image display only).

  Specifically, in the first aspect of the specific effect E, the image display device 905 is notified of the fact that the number of winning on the general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number, together with the notification by the image display. The second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed and a notification by audio output is not performed.

  In addition, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number (when the non-winning determination timer times out, the winning number determination timer times out) is ) In the case of the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (it is performed in the second mode at the rate of 20%); In particular, the specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20%, for example (in the second mode at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effects E in different modes according to the game state when it is determined that the number of winning on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd to 46th effect modes]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd to 46th effect modes is similar to the other specific effects A to D executed based on the game ball winning to the general winning opening, the display setting table of FIG. 37. In accordance with, the presence or absence of execution can be switched. Specifically, the display switching switch 9032 is set to display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 38). It is only feasible if it is. As described above, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game arcade or the player as to whether or not to execute the specific effect E.

  For example, when the player does not want to execute the specific effect E on the game arcade side, the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting by switching the display switching switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position) . With such a configuration, priority is given to the intention of the game arcade side with regard to whether or not the specific effect E is to be executed, that is, whether or not notification of the difficulty of winning to the general prize winning opening is notified. It can be done.

  Further, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the forty-third effect mode, and the value of the winning number determination timer and the value of the winning number counter area in the forty-fourth effect mode, both of which are stored in the RAM 90122 When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is erased along with the backup. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the forty-third effect mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the forty-fourth effect mode are both invalid states. The timer value is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the forty-fourth effect mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed.

  As described above, with the stop of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winnings on the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is resumed, the addition is started from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control load which has to be provided with backup means at the time of power interruption.

  As in the 45th effect mode and the 46th effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the classification for changing the effect mode of the specific effect E is (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state or (2 ) It is not limited to whether the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state. For example, it may be divided into (1) the number of pending storages being one or more and (2) the number of pending storages being zero. Also, it may be divided into (1) a period after reaching the reach condition establishment in reach fluctuation, and (2) a period before the reach condition establishment in reach fluctuation. In addition, (1) is a period during which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being performed, or (2) is a period during which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being performed, It may be a category. In addition, it may be divided into (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-series effect is performed, or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-series effect is performed. . Furthermore, even if it is the division whether (1) it is before execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect, or (2) it is after the execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect. good. Furthermore, depending on the difference between these divisions, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the aspect of the specific effect E may be different.

  The specific effect E executed in the forty-third effect mode to the forty-sixth effect mode is executed when the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is smaller than the predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, targeting only a specific general winning opening, a predetermined number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period The specific effect E may be executed when the number is smaller. For example, a general winning opening in a predetermined game period is intended only for the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, in which the winning frequency of the game ball is higher than that of the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is also possible to count the number of winning prizes and execute the specific effect E when the counted number of prizes is smaller than a predetermined number.

  Further, in the forty-third effect mode to the forty-fifth effect mode, when the number of wins to the general winning opening within a predetermined time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is smaller than a predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed However, the period for determining the number of prizes for the general prize winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of times of execution of the special view game, and may be, for example, a period during which variable display relating to the special view game is performed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the current time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is played by hitting left), a definite change state or a short time It may be a period controlled to a state (a period in which a game is being played with a right hit).

  Furthermore, the following method may be used as a method of determining whether or not the number of winning game balls on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning on the general winning opening is smaller than the predetermined number with respect to the predetermined number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010. During driving of the launch motor provided in the hit ball launcher, approximately 100 game balls are fired onto the game area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings on the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number for 1000 shot balls (corresponding to a game period of 10 minutes). . In addition, the ratio of the number of winning in the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is calculated, and the specific effect E is executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. It is good.

  In addition, the ratio of the number of winning on the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is different depending on whether the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio or higher than the predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be performed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winning to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is a low ratio, the character A appears and the frequency of winning to the general winning opening is low. Informing that it is a level, when the ratio of the number of winning on the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B appears To notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winning to the general winning opening to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio In the case of the ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high level.

(B) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning combination in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when ten gaming balls are paid out as winning balls when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out according to the winning in the general winning opening in the gaming period of 30 minutes If there are less than 30 (for three winnings), the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning on the general winning opening with respect to the predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired to the game area 9010 is smaller than the predetermined number. The ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning on the general winning opening with respect to the number of hit balls fired in the game area 9010 may be calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the ratio of. In addition, the ratio of the number of winning balls paid out according to the winning on the general winning opening with respect to the number of hit balls fired to the game area 9010 is lower than a predetermined ratio, and a predetermined ratio or more. In this case, different effects of specific effects may be performed.

  As described above, it may be determined whether or not the number of winning balls paid out in response to the winning on the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number. Such a form is applicable even in the case where different numbers of winning balls are paid out depending on the general winning opening on which the gaming ball has won a prize.

(C) It may be determined whether the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5) for a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 100) for the starting winning opening, It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the number of winning to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winning to the starting winning opening, and to execute the specific effect E when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, for a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10000) paid out in response to the winning in the starting winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out in response to the winning in the general winning opening is a predetermined number. It may be determined whether or not the number is small, and the prize balls paid out according to the prize winnings to the general winning prize port with respect to the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning prizes for the starting winning prize mouth The ratio of numbers may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be performed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning on the general winning opening to the number of balls paid out according to the winning on the starting winning opening is lower than a predetermined ratio The specific effects of different modes may be performed depending on whether the ratio is equal to or more than the predetermined ratio.

  Also, for example, according to the number of prize balls in a predetermined period paid out when the gaming state is the normal state (according to the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning on the starting winning opening and the winning on the general winning opening) Calculating the ratio of the number of winning balls paid out in response to the winning on the general winning opening, with respect to the total number of winning balls paid out), and the ratio is lower than a predetermined percentage. The specific effect E may be executed. In addition, different types of specific effects may be performed according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, twice). The ratio of the number of winning to the general winning opening to the consumption amount in the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a mode, different predetermined numbers (for example, 2 for 2 yen, 1 yen for 8 yen) according to the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen etc.) of the game medium used for the gaming machine Times or the like, or different predetermined rates (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen etc. for 1 yen) are applied. In addition, the special effects of different modes are executed when the ratio of the number of winning to the general winning opening to the consumption amount in the gaming machine is lower than the predetermined ratio and when the ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio. You may do it.

[The 47th Effect Form]
In the forty seventh effect mode shown in FIG. 63, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening, and the first start winning opening is displayed during the period in which the character is displayed. Effective starting winning of the game ball (ie, winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening with the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening being less than the upper limit value) and game to the second starting winning opening Based on the occurrence of any of the ball effective start winnings (that is, winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening with the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening less than the upper limit) In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold change effect is executed to change the display part corresponding to the held variable display game including the variable display game based on the generated valid start winning from the normal mode to the special mode .

  Note that the effect control CPU 90120 causes the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the valid start winning to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without passing through the normal mode based on the occurrence of the valid start winning. A change presentation may be performed. For example, when a new valid start winning occurs, a displayed portion corresponding to a variable display game corresponding to the new valid start winning, as the displayed character performs an action such as lifting the wand. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, there may be a state in which hold information in a special mode corresponding to a variable display game whose start condition is finally satisfied).

  Here, in the 47th effect mode, and in the 48th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, which will be described later, the random number circuit 90124 each time the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. Extract the character determination random number from. Then, based on the extracted character determination random number, whether or not to make the character appear, and in the case of making the character appear, in the character determination table of FIG. Determine at the indicated rate.

  The extraction of the character determination random number by the effect control CPU 90120 may be performed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting the random number for character determination on condition that it is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to limit the appearance of the character during the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state . In addition, it is possible not to make the character appear after the reach state is established by not extracting the character determination random number after the reach state is established during the period in which the variable display game is being executed.

  In the example of FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 90120 decides to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 10% when receiving a general winning a prize opening designation command for designating a winning in the first general winning opening 9050A, It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to make character C appear at a rate of 60%. In addition, when a general winning a prize opening designation command which designates winning in the 2nd general winning a prize mouth 9050B is received, it decides not to make any character appear in 50% ratio, it appears character A in 35% ratio It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to cause character C to appear at a rate of 5%.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that no character appears at a rate of 90% when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating winning in the third general winning opening 9050C, which is 10%. It is decided to make the character C appear at a rate. In addition, when receiving a general winning a prize opening designation command which designates winning in 4th general winning a prize mouth 9050D, it decides not to make any character appear at a rate of 75%, character C appears at a rate of 25% Decide to let

  That is, in this example, when the gaming ball has won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A, the third provided in the right gaming area 9010B. The character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball has won in any of the general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The player shoots the game ball to the left gaming area 9010A when the gaming state is the normal state, and shoots the gaming ball to the right gaming area 9010B when the gaming state is the definite change state or the short time state. Characters will appear at a higher rate than state or short state.

  Then, in the 47th to 49th effect modes, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect) is performed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, reach state) in the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effects G (variation result notice due to line effect notice effect) is performed, so in these effect modes, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is higher than when the gaming state is the definite changing state or the time saving state Specific effects can be performed at a rate.

  As described above, in the normal state, the appearance of the character and the specific effect are disadvantageous because the player's game, for example, the interest in the variable display of the special figure game is low compared to the definite change state and the short time state. By making the execution frequency high, the interest is improved. On the other hand, in the definite change state and the time reduction state, it is advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's game, for example, the interest to the variable display of the special figure game is high. If it remains high, it may even hurt the interest. Therefore, in the definite variation state and the short time state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set to be low.

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 61, and even when the game ball has won the same general winning opening, the ratio of appearance of the character may be different according to the gaming state. When the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B, the character appears at a rate of 50%, but when the game ball is winning in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B in the probability change state and the time saving state, 10% The character may appear at a rate of

  Also, the character may appear only in the normal state, and may not appear in the definite variation state and the time saving state. In this way, in "making the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state", the effect can be performed only in one of the states, and the effect is not performed in the other state Shall be included. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 61, the appearance ratio of the characters in the positive variation state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of the character in the normal state.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 61, when the gaming ball is won in the first general winning opening 9050A, the character appears at a higher rate than the case where the gaming ball is winning in the second general winning opening 9050B. There is. Further, when the gaming ball has won in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the character appears at a higher rate than the case where the gaming ball has won in the third general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, the game ball is more likely to win in the second general winning port 9050B than in the first general winning port 9050A, and in the right game area 9010B. When the game ball is fired, the frequency of the game ball winning in the third general winning opening 9050C is higher than that of the fourth general winning opening 9050D. That is, when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening where the gaming ball is hard to win, the character appears at a higher rate than the case where the gaming ball is winning in the general winning opening where the gaming ball is easy to win. In addition, conversely to this, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win, the character is higher than in the case where the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is hard to win You may make it appear.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 61, a character that may be displayed when the gaming ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B in which the gaming ball has a high frequency of winning in the normal state is It is characters A to C, but there is a possibility that it will be displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D in which the game ball frequently wins in the definite variation state and the short time state. The character with is the character C only. In the probability change state and the time reduction state in which the gaming interest is high compared to the normal state, "the character display period elapses without the predetermined condition of the appearance of the character being satisfied", the interest occurrence occurs Since it is possible to cause a drop, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 61, and even when the game ball has won on the same general winning opening, the appearing characters may be different according to the gaming state. 2 If there is a possibility that the game ball is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 9050B, the characters A to C may be displayed, but if the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probability changing state and the time saving state, the character Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 61, the number of characters that may be displayed in the positive and negative states is greater than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. It is good.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing display periods of the respective characters displayed on the image display device 905. As shown in FIG. The characters A to C are all displayed on the image display device 905 immediately at the timing when the characters to be displayed are determined based on the winning on the general winning opening. That is, by displaying the character immediately after the occurrence of the winning on the general winning opening, the player can easily grasp that the winning on the general winning opening has occurred.

  When the character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) From the display start of the character A when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (valid start winning, reach state established) within one minute from the display start When the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when one minute has passed and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the display start, a specific effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (hold change effect The character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result advance presentation effect) ends.

  The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to an effect to be executed with the progress of the game). In addition, even when the valid start winning occurs, if the number of holdings of the variable display game including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start winning is 1, the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the game is performed (the hold information is deleted), it becomes difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change presentation by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of pending variable display games after the valid start winning becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number (1 in this example), the pending change effect is not executed, and the number of pending variable display games after the valid starting winning is a predetermined number If there are more than (in this example, 1), the on-hold change effect may be executed.

  In addition, the character may be erased also when the game state is shifted to the big hit game state or when the game end determination by the effect control CPU 90120 is performed. Also, it is assumed that the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is not displayed again after the restart of the power supply. That is, it is assumed that backup processing is not performed to cause the image display device 905 to display the character displayed before the power interruption again on the power supply restart.

  Note that the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed in the hold storage as the appearing character has performed a predetermined action (that is, according to a change in the mode of the displayed object). Both cases where the aspect of the corresponding display site changes and cases where the aspect does not change are included. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (hold change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action, and more specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used, but each holding memory is stored by the flame 903002 emitted from the end of the cane 903001 which the character B appears or the character C may appear in the specific effect F (hold change effect). It is timing when an action effect of covering a corresponding display part is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 65 (f) and (g), that the specified effect G (variation result advance notice effect) is executed, the character 903100 (in this example, the character B is shown) appears, but the specified effect G (A character A may appear or a character C may appear in a fluctuation result advance effect). This means that a predetermined line is emitted, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result advance effect) ends is: It is the timing at which the speech of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined speech display period has elapsed).

  When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) From the display start of the character B when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (valid start winning, reach state established) within 2 minutes from the display start (2) When the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when 2 minutes have passed and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the display start, a specific effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (hold change effect The character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result advance presentation effect) ends.

  When the character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) From the display start of the character C, when the predetermined condition (valid start winning, establishment of reach condition) is not established within 3 minutes from the display start (3) When the character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have passed and (2) a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the display start, a specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (specific effect F (hold change effect ), The character C is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result advance presentation effect) ends.

  As described above, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, whereby the player is in a state after the game ball has won the general winning opening. It can be made to recognize. Further, the period in which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period in which the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on is not executed, the player recognizes that "if the predetermined condition is established while the character is displayed, the specific effect is executed", and the game is played to establish the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, since the display period is different according to the characters to be displayed, it is possible to give the player an interest as to which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period in which the predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the interest until the specific effect is performed.

  In addition, as described above, the player has a game ball in any general winning opening because the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio of the specific period in which the predetermined condition has to be established is different according to the general winning opening. You will be interested in winning a prize.

(Specific example of specific effect F (hold change effect))
In the forty-seventh effects mode shown in FIG. 63, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, the character being displayed as the specific effect F when the valid start winning is generated. The pending change presentation with the action of is performed. The occurrence of the valid start winning is, as described above, the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening with the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening less than the upper limit value, and the second It is that a winning of a game ball to the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth occurs in the state where the 2nd reservation memory number corresponding to a starting winning a prize mouth is less than an upper limit.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives the start winning combination designation command specifying the “first start winning opening” designation or the “second starting winning opening” designation, and the start winning time determination result specifying command including valid data that is not blank data. It is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning on the basis of the above. FIG. 64 shows a specific example of the on-hold change effect in the 47th effect mode.

  In FIG. 64 (a), the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right" are being executed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display area It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is two. At this time, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied in the start winning memory display area 905H, a display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied secondly is displayed in the normal mode.

  At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 is determined to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the game ball having won the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 61). In FIG. 64 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903000 (character A) with a cane 903001 on the image display device 905. It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, within one minute from the appearance of the character A, an effective start winning to the first start winning opening is generated, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 64 (c), accordingly, the number of reserved memories is 3, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game whose start condition is satisfied thirdly is displayed in the normal mode. The effect control CPU 90120 that detects the occurrence of the valid start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, changes the display portion corresponding to each of the three suspension memories from the normal mode to the special mode. Each is determined.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a start winning determination result specifying command (not blank data) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. Confirm that it contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), regarding the start winning determination determination result designating command specifying "big hit", the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display site corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, with regard to the start winning determination determination result designating command specifying “off”, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is determined to be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, 90% It is determined that the mode of the display site corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

  In this example, with regard to the start winning determination determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first and second, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode. The mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode only with regard to the start winning determination determination result specification command corresponding to the variable display game determined to be (no hold change) and the third start condition is satisfied. It is assumed that it has been decided to make it (hold change).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the character 903000 (character A) to direct the end of the wand 903001 to the start winning storage display area 905H, and the flame 903002 emitted from the end of the wand 903001. The action rendering of the aspect in which the display part corresponding to each pending storage is enclosed is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (f), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the display mode of the normal mode based on the above-described determination regarding the second left display portion from the left end and the left along with the execution of this action effect. With respect to the third display site from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above without changing the state as it is. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 903000 (character A) holding the wand 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the end of the wand 903001 are erased from the screen.

  As a result of the mode change of the display portion accompanying the action effect, for the player, the third displayed portion from the left is that the character 903000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning at the general winning opening performed an action. Recognizes that the mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and is expected to be a variable display game to be executed three after the currently running variable display game.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d), regarding the start winning determination determination result designation command corresponding to three variable display games for which the start condition is not satisfied, the display region aspect corresponding to the command is all normal. If it is decided not to change the mode as it is (no change in hold), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 64 (e) is performed, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), three hold memories are stored. None of the three corresponding retention sites remains the same as in the normal mode.

  As described above, when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed triggered by the fact that "the valid start winning is generated during the period in which the character is displayed", the valid starting win occurs in the character display period. It is possible to give an interest as to whether or not the game ball is won in the general winning opening and to enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed. In addition, the game ball is displayed on the general winning opening by the effect configuration that gives notice of the display result of the variable display game whose start condition is not yet met in response to the event of winning on the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from when the prize is won until the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, whether the display mode of any display portion of the display portions corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied yet changes from the normal mode to the special mode with the action of the character 903000 (character A) In addition, when it changes, it can be made to pay attention to which display mode of the display site changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, interest can be improved.

  In addition, an effect (appearance of character A) indicating a winning on the general winning opening and an effect (action of character A) indicating a display result of the variable display game in which the start condition is not established are common objects (action of character A). By being configured by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed. Then, a common object indicates the winning of the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied, which relates to the appearance of the character and the action. It can increase the player's interest.

  In addition, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the valid start winning (the valid start winning which is determined to be established that the predetermined condition is established) which is the trigger for executing the pending change rendering Lastly, the display result is notified by targeting each of the suspended variable display games including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the suspension change presentation is executed Targeting only the variable display game (the variable display game in which the start condition is finally met) corresponding to the valid start winning event (the active start prize determined to satisfy the predetermined condition) which triggered the event The display result may be notified in advance. In addition, conversely to this, the variable display game (lastly start condition) corresponding to the valid start winning combination (the valid start winning combination determined that the predetermined condition is established) triggered to execute the pending change effect. It is also possible to make a notice of the display result by targeting the variable display game except for the variable display game in which the above is established.

(Character erasing process)
In the same manner as the specific effect A to the specific effect D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (hold change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to 4) One or more winning history to general winning opening 9050D and one or more winning history to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are included) (the winning history of FIG. 63) Reset condition).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased by the elapse of a predetermined display period without the specific effect F being executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least One or more winning history to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is included) (a winning history reset condition in FIG. 63) is deleted.

  FIG. 66 (A) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that a variable display game of decorative symbols is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When Variable Display 1 is being executed, one of characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the game ball having won any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D at the timing of (1). Ru.

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the occurrence of the valid start winning. During this time, although the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. There is. When the valid start winning combination occurs within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the end of the action effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the occurrence of the valid start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, but the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2 and the variable At the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden and is continuously displayed. When the valid start winning combination occurs within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the action effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the occurrence of the valid start winning. In this example, since the valid start winning is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character becoming non-displayed, and the action is performed. At the timing (5) when the effect ends, the display part corresponding to the one or more holding memories is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, variable display 1 ends and variable display 2 starts, variable display 2 ends and variable display 3 starts, and variable display 3 ends and variable display 4 starts, but variable With the end of Display 1 and the start of Variable Display 2, the end of Variable Display 2 and the start of Variable Display 3, and the end of Variable Display 3 and the start of Variable Display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

  Thus, once the character is displayed, it will be displayed continuously until "a predetermined condition is met" or "a predetermined period elapses without a predetermined condition being met". ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the timing of the earlier one of “predetermined condition is satisfied” and “a predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[The 48th performance form]
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 63, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed. On the basis of this, a line according to the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game of a variation pattern with reach condition) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as in the 47th effect mode, but the predetermined condition to be established within the display period of the character and the type of the specific effect to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specified effect G (variation result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 63, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, when the reach state is established, the character effect displayed as the specific effect G. Variation result notice presentation accompanied by speech display is performed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the formation timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is executed, and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state reaches the predetermined reach state establishment timing, the reach state is established. If the character is displayed at this time, it is possible to execute the specific effect G. FIG. 65 shows a specific example of the fluctuation result advance notice effect in the forty-eighth effect form.

  In FIG. 65 (a), the variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and pending storage It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is one. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 where the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the game ball having won the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 61). In FIG. 65 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903100 (character B) with a wand 903101 on the image display device 905. It is assumed that the character B appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, in FIG. 65 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is ended and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a finalized decorative symbol, a combination that is a non-reach loss with “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” in the middle is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Is no longer present, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode.

  Then, within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the reach state is established, and the predetermined condition is established. In FIG. 65 (e), with the establishment of the reach state, the characters "903!" Of "reach!" Are displayed at the top of the screen. The effect control CPU 90120 that detects the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the speech of the character B.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbol being executed is determined to be a big hit combination or is determined to be a lost combination. It should be noted that it may be checked whether the last fluctuation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a jackpot fluctuation pattern designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command for disconnection. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), when it is decided to make the display result of the variable display game a big hit combination, the character of "CHANNEL!" Decide to display sideways, and decide to display the line of "super heat !!" at the rate of 75% to the side of the character currently displayed. On the other hand, when it is decided to set the display result of the variable display game as a losing combination, it is decided to display the line of "chance!" Next to the character being displayed at a rate of 90%. It is decided to display the line of "Heating fever !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of%.

  In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line of "superheat !!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 effects that the character 903100 (character B) swings up the wand 903101 and emits a dialogue 903102 of "scorching !!" Run When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period, the character 903100 (character B) with the cane 903101 and the dialogue 903102 emitted from the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

  As a result, for the player, the line of the character 903100 (character B) appearing based on the winning at the general winning opening may cause the decorative symbol to be displayed in the final stop as a result of the reach effect. It can be understood that high.

  In this manner, whether the reach state is established in the character display period by executing the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) triggered by the fact that the reach state is established in the period in which the character is displayed. It is possible to give an interest or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest from when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed. In addition, the general winning a prize is a game with a presentation configuration in which the display result of the variable display game whose display result is not derived and displayed is notified in advance at an event of winning on the general winning port not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from when the ball wins until the specific effect is performed. Also, the speech of the character 903000 (character A) can be focused on, and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

  In addition, an effect (appearance of character B) indicating a winning on the general winning opening and an effect (line of character B) indicating a display result of the variable display game in which the display result is not derived and displayed are common objects. By being configured by (character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed. Then, a common object is suggested by a common object for winning a general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game not determined, the player's It can raise interest.

  In the forty-eighth effect mode, a specific effect G that causes the character to emit a predetermined speech is executed when the reach state is established, that is, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the predetermined mode. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect G may be executed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, for example, when variable display of the decorative design is being executed, it is triggered that a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) different from the specific effect G is executed. The specific effect G may be executed as

  In addition, in the forty-eighth effect mode, an example has been described in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening regardless of the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening is in a predetermined mode, for example, the game ball is winning in the general winning opening The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed at the time of the game is in the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character erasing process)
In the same manner as the specific effect A to the specific effect D and the specific effect F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (variation result advance notification effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to 4) The one or more winning history to the general winning opening 9050D is included) (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 63) is deleted.

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased by the elapse of a predetermined display period without the specific effect G being executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least One or more winning history to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is included) (a winning history reset condition in FIG. 63) is deleted.

  FIG. 66 (B) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) is executed. In this figure, the variable display game of decorative symbols is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3 and variable display 4, and of these, reach effect is executed only in variable display 4 and reach condition Shall hold. When Variable Display 1 is being executed, one of characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the game ball having won any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D at the timing of (11). Ru.

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) after one minute has elapsed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is continuously displayed without being hidden. If the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the line display effect is completed.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B becomes non-displayed at the timing (13) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2 and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is continuously displayed without being hidden. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the line display effect is completed.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C becomes non-displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, since the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have elapsed from the appearance of the character C, the line display effect is executed without the character becoming non-displayed. During this time, with the end of variable display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and with the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not displayed. It is not displayed continuously.

[The 49th performance form]
In the 47th effect mode and the 48th effect mode described above, an example is shown in which the specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of the characters A to C is displayed. However, only when the character of the specific type is displayed, the specific effect of the type according to that may be executed.

  For example, in the forty-ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 63, a specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed based on the occurrence of the valid start winning within the period in which either character A or B is displayed. Even if the valid start winning combination occurs within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed. Further, the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) is to be executed based on the reaching state being established within the period in which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) is not executed.

  As described above, according to the type of the character to be displayed, that is, according to the notification mode informing that the game ball has won in the general winning opening, a predetermined condition for enabling the specific effect and the predetermined condition The type of specific effect to be executed based on the establishment may be different.

  In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling the specific effect to be executable is common regardless of the type of the character to be displayed, the specification to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the character to be displayed. The type of effect may be different. For example, when the valid start winning combination occurs within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (specific effect G (variation result advance effect) is not performed) However, if an effective start winning combination occurs within the period in which the character C is displayed, a specific effect G (variation result advance notification effect) is executed (a specific effect F (hold change effect) is not performed). It is good.

  In addition, depending on the type of the character to be displayed, although the predetermined condition for enabling the specific effect is different, it is executed when the predetermined condition corresponding to each is satisfied regardless of the type of the character to be displayed. The types of specific effects to be played may be the same. For example, when the valid start winning combination occurs within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (specifically, even if the reach state is established within that period) Although the effect F is not executed), the specific effect F (held change effect) is executed even when the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed (an effective start winning occurs temporarily in that period) However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

  In addition, (1) a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action when the valid start winning occurs before the establishment of the reach state within the period in which the character is displayed. After execution, the character is erased, and (2) if the reach state is established prior to the valid start winning, the character is displayed after executing a specific effect G (variation result advance presentation effect) in which the character on display emits a speech. You may make it erase | eliminate. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions of (1) and (2) will be established within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition of the plurality of predetermined conditions is established first. A specific effect of a corresponding type may be executed.

  In addition, (1) a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the character being displayed performs an action when the valid start winning occurs before the establishment of the reach state within the period in which the character is displayed. The character is erased after execution, and (2) the character being displayed executes the specific effect F (hold change effect) to perform the action even when the reach state is established before the valid start winning, the character is erased You may do it. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions of (1) and (2) will be established within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is given when any of the predetermined conditions is established. It may be executed.

[Modifications of the 47th to 49th effect modes]
In the example of FIG. 62, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period triggered by this. An example has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be displayed continuously until the end of the specific period even after the specific effect is performed. good.

  In the case of such a form, the specific effect may be executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning on the general winning opening, the character C continues without disappearing from the screen even if the valid start winning occurs for 5 minutes during which the character C is displayed. The special effect F (hold change effect) may be executed each time the valid start winning is generated in the five minutes.

  In the example of FIG. 62, although the example in which the display period of the character is a predetermined fixed period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form. The period until the variable display game is performed a predetermined number of times may be performed, or the period until the variable display game being performed when the character is displayed may end, or the character is displayed It may be a period until the end of the gaming state (for example, the normal state, the probability changing state or the time saving state, the big hit gaming state).

  Further, characters may be continuously displayed until the predetermined condition is established regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed regardless of the elapsed time from the display start.

  Also, before the type of the character to be displayed is determined, the display period of the character may be determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when the game ball has won in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which one of the one-minute, two-minute, and three-minute display periods the character is to be displayed. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes If the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, then the character C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, or depending on the gaming state.

  In addition, the predetermined condition to be established to be able to execute the specific effect is not limited to the formation of the effective start winning or reach state mentioned above, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state of a predetermined type (for example The occurrence of the largest number of big hits in rounds, that the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states (continuous number = probability change state or time short after the end of the big hit gaming state) The number of consecutive big hit gaming states controlled by the state +1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit gaming state, the fact that it has been controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, positive change state), the display result is a lost combination That the variable display game has been continued a predetermined number of times, that the variable display game of the variation pattern of "non-reach" ("no reach lost") has been continued a predetermined number of times, pending storage There may be a satisfied conditions with such that you have reached the predetermined number, the other conditions, i.e., in the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, but the variable display of the special symbol such as the period controlled to the big hit gaming state (effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) is executed It may be performed during a period that is not being performed.

  In the forty-fifth effect mode and the forty-fifth effect mode, an example is shown in which the notice effect for giving a notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is hold change effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (b) described above, depending on whether or not a big hit is present, the voice-only effect is executed or the sound and effect by the movable character 901000 are executed. The pre-read advance notice effect may be a pre-read advance notice effect in which the proportion of the game is different, or may be a chance eye advance notice effect as shown in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display number of times until the variable display that is the target of the preview notice.

  In the forty-seventh effect mode and the forty-ninth effect mode, after the character is displayed based on the fact that the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character that is displayed is an aspect of the hold information by the occurrence of the valid start winning. An example of executing a pending change effect for changing the game is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a form, and when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the starting winning judgment corresponding to each variable display game being held If there is a variable display game or a variable display game with a reach state in which the display result is a big hit by confirming the result specification command or the start winning combination fluctuation pattern determination result specification command, the ratio is higher than the case where it does not exist. The character may be made to appear. Further, in the case where there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the ratio in which the specific character appears may be higher than in the case where it does not exist. Also, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state. Then, when a valid start winning combination occurs after the appearance of the character (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable to execute the on-hold change effect in which the displayed character changes the mode of the on-hold information.

  Further, in the 47th to 49th effect modes, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the character being displayed is erased, and during the period to be controlled to the big hit gaming state, the game ball is displayed on the general winning opening. The specific effect may be prevented from being executed by preventing the appearance of a new character even if the player has won a prize. In this way, the player's awareness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effects, effects during rounds, ending effects, etc.) to be executed along with control to the big hit gaming state so as not to disturb these various effects. be able to.

  In the forty-fifth to forty-fifth effects according to the present invention, an example is described in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Even when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a ratio of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at the ratio of 50%. Is performed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is performed at a ratio of 100%, etc., and the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character The execution rates may be made different.

  Here, in the 47th to 49th effect modes, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening when the character is displayed, the display of a new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is It is assumed that the character already displayed is continuously displayed without performing. That is, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence / absence of the character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 61 on the condition that no character is displayed. And the character is displayed based on the determination.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a character is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, it is substituted for the character based on the previous general prize already displayed (already displayed Character may be deleted), and a character based on a later general winning combination may be displayed.

  In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning, which has already been displayed, and the display period of the character based on the subsequent general winning are compared, and the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning is If it is long, the character is continuously displayed without displaying the character based on the later general winning, and if the display period of the character based on the later general winning is longer, the character based on the previous general winning is substituted (already The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In such a mode, when displaying a character based on a later general winning instead of the character based on the previous general winning (when the character already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the later general winning Alternatively, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winnings that has already been displayed may be added (a period in which both are added is regarded as a display period of the newly displayed character).

  In the 47th to 49th effect modes, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening within the display period of the character, the display of a new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is not performed. The remaining display period of the character already displayed may be extended. Here, as a period to be extended (time to be added to the remaining display period), a display period defined for a character already displayed (for example, one minute if the character A is displayed) may be used. Also, even when a winning on the general winning opening occurs within the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 61, and the determined character (but newly displayed) A display period (for example, 2 minutes in the case of the character B) corresponding to a character not to be canceled may be added to the remaining display period of the character already displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, when a character is displayed when the game ball has won in the general winning opening, the character is displayed together with the already-displayed character based on the general winning (without deleting the character already displayed), Characters based on the general winnings of may also be displayed. For example, when it is determined that the game ball is won in the general winning opening when character A is displayed and character B is newly displayed, the character A is newly displayed in addition to character A already displayed. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

  In such a mode, a period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the subsequent general winning to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning is set as the common display period of both characters. It is good. In this case, if a predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, a specific effect is executed, and one or both characters are erased. Further, when the common display period elapses without the predetermined condition being established, both characters are erased.

  In addition, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, a first predetermined condition (for example, valid) corresponding to the first character. When the start winning combination is established and the first specific effect (for example, specific effect F (hold change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is erased and only the second character is deleted. A second specific effect (for example, a specific effect G (for example, a variation result) based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition is established, and the second predetermined condition (for example, reach condition) corresponding to the second character is satisfied. The second character may also be deleted when the advance presentation effect is executed. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

  In the case of such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be common conditions (for example, occurrence of a valid start winning), in which case both the first character and the second character are While being displayed on the image display device 905, the first specified effect by the first character and the second specified by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of an effective start winning only once). Both effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

  Also, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effects (for example, specific effect F (hold change effect)), in which case both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, valid start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed at 905, a specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) of a certain type is executed, When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, a specific effect of the same type (specific effect F (specific effect F ( Hold change effect) may be executed to erase the second character.

  In addition, as in the 49th effect mode, if the first character (character A or B) is being displayed, the first specified effect (specific effect) is performed according to the establishment of the first condition (the occurrence of the valid start winning). F) can be performed, and in the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed, the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be performed according to the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) It is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (in a case where both the first character and the second character are not simultaneously displayed). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character if the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state) is higher than the case where the first specific effect is executed. It shall be displayed prior to the character. For example, when the first character is displayed, if it is determined to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, the first character is erased and the second character is deleted. Shall be displayed anew. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, control to display the first character is not performed instead.

  On the other hand, when the first character and the second character can be simultaneously displayed on the image display device 905, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects directed to the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are the same as the result of the variable display game of the same variable display game and reach) In the case where it is executed immediately after the establishment of the state), the second specified effect is executed with priority over the first specified effect, and at this time, the first specified effect is not executed.

[The 50th performance form]
In the 50th effect mode shown in FIG. 67, each time a game ball earns a prize in the general winning opening, button icon 904000 is newly displayed on image display device 905 (see FIG. 68 etc.), and button icon 904000 being displayed. The types of specific effects that can be executed are different according to the number of. Here, the specific effect in the present effect mode is for urging the player to perform some operation, and is an effect capable of giving notice of the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the operation of the player. As specific effects, three types of cut-in advance notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo continuous notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye advance notice effects (specific effects J) are provided.

  The display information condition of FIG. 67 is the display number of the button icons 904000 necessary to execute each specific effect, and each specification is not performed if at least the button icons 904000 indicated in the display information conditions are not displayed. The production is not performed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the pseudo-series notice effect is not performed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the chance eye notice effect is If three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, it is not executed.

  The button icons 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 increase by one each time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and can display up to a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) on the image display device 905 There shall be. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the button icons 904000 have the number obtained by subtracting the displayed number of the button icons 904000 required for the execution of the specific effect from the displayed number of the button icons 904000 before the specific effect execution. It will be displayed on the image display apparatus 905 after execution of a specific effect. For example, in the state where five button icons 904000 are displayed, when (1) cut-in advance notice effect (number of button icons required to be displayed = 1) is executed, the button icon The display number of 904000 is 4 and when (2) pseudo run announcement effect (display number of required button icons = 2) is executed, the display number of 90 4000 button icons after run of pseudo run announcement production is 3 (3) When the chance eye advance notice effect (the number of button icons required to be displayed = 3) is executed, the number of displayed button icons 904000 after the chance eye notice effect execution is 2 is 2.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect of giving an advance notice of the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern after the reach state is established, according to the contents of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 67, the cut-in notice effect is (1) when one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) when the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern involving a reach state, A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous hitting operation, and (3) execution becomes possible when the player performs a predetermined continuous hitting operation.

  In addition, when the variable display game is executed with the change pattern with the reach state in a state where no button icon 904000 is displayed, notification of the continuous hitting operation according to the cut-in notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in notice The production is not performed. Further, in the variable display game of the variation pattern not accompanied by the reach state, notification of the continuous hitting operation according to the cut-in advance notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in advance notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the cut-in notice effect, a reach state is established within a period during which the variable display game is being executed, and then the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times, so the reach effect is executed. The condition is the execution of the variable display game according to the variation pattern to be played. A specific aspect of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 68 (a), the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right" are subjected to the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction), and pending storage It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is one. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 where the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  The effect control CPU 90120 causes the first button icon 904000 to be displayed at the left end of the screen based on the game ball having won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 68B, the screen is updated from the state where the button icon 904000 is not displayed to the state where one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, in response to the fact that one or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen in total, characters "cut-in" 904000a indicating that "cut-in notice effect can be executed after establishment of a predetermined operation suggestion condition" are displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggesting condition referred to here is that (1) a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state is executed in a state where one or more button icons 904000 are displayed.

  And in FIG.68 (c), the variable display of the decorative pattern currently performed shall be complete | finished and a display result shall be derived | led-out displayed. Here, as the finalized decorative symbol, a combination of “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle is derived and displayed as a non-reach lost.

  Here, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 is a microcomputer for game control whether or not the change pattern of the variable display game is a reach change pattern with a reach state. It confirms based on the fluctuation pattern specification command received from 90100. Then, when the variable display game to be started is the reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is established.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Is no longer present, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode.

  In the variable display game of reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established. Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the characters "Continuous Strike!", Downward arrows, and operation buttons 9030 are simulated in order from the top of the screen, as shown in FIG. The continuous hit suggestion information 904100 composed of an image and a time bar indicating a remaining period for which the operation is effective is displayed. Thus, the player recognizes that an operation to press the operation button 9030 should be performed continuously.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes one button icon 904000 required to execute the cut-in notification effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes 0, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is erased from the screen as there is no executable specific effect.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hitting suggestion information 904100 continuously performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar in accordance with the elapsed time since the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 is displayed. The time bar is in five stages of five stages at the time of display, and is reduced by one stage every one second after the display. As shown in FIG. 68 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 turns the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar becomes 0 out of 5 (for example, within 5 seconds from the display start). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen according to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the display result of the variable display game to be executed to be the final stop symbol of the big hit combination as shown in FIG. Is determined to display the characters "chance!" At a rate of 20% and to display the characters "scorching !!" at a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a lost combination In the case of the final stop symbol of, it is decided to display the letters "chance!" At a rate of 80% and to display the letters "scorching !!" at a rate of 20%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect that causes the image display device 905 to display a screen including the determined character. In the example of FIG. 68 (i), the character 904200 of "scorching !!" is largely displayed on the entire screen.

  If the operation button 9030 is not operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of display of the continuous hitting suggestion information 904100, the effect control CPU 90120 "chance!" And neither letter of "super heat !!" shall be displayed on the screen.

(Simulation series notice production)
The pseudo-series notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if by performing re-variation to scroll the decoration pattern temporarily stopped temporarily in the vertical direction again in one variable display game, as if it were a plurality of times It is an effect that makes it appear as if variable display of decorative symbols is being executed continuously. When re-variation is performed, a pseudo-continuous symbol (consists of the characters "NEXT" in this example) as a decorative symbol in the "in" decorative symbol display area 905C according to each symbol stop operation of the player Shall be suspended temporarily.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the case of (1) two or more button icons 904000 being displayed, (2) the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern of variation time of 8 seconds or more as shown in FIG. 67. In this case, a notification is given to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute the predetermined symbol stop operation.

  Further, in the pseudo linked advance notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within a period during which one variable display game is being executed. It takes a certain operation time, and the condition is to execute a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific aspect of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

  In FIG. 69 (a), the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right" are being executed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display area It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is one. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 where the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  In addition, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen based on the game ball having won in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and "cut after a predetermined operation suggesting condition is established. The character 904000a of "cut in" which shows that "in advance notice production becomes executable" is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the second button icon 904000 to be displayed on the left end of the screen based on the game ball having won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 69 (b), the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of two or more button icons 904000 in total, the character 904000b of "pseudo run" indicates that "simulated run advance notice effect can be executed after the establishment of the predetermined operation suggestion condition". It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggesting condition referred to here is (1) in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more. is there.

  Then, in FIG. 69 (c), after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is ended and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as the finalized decorative symbol, a combination that is a non-reach loss with “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” in the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 has received from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the change time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirm based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. Then, when the fluctuation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is satisfied.

  When the operation suggesting condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the variable display game to be started to have a non-reach change pattern without a reach state, as shown in FIG. 69 (d). Is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol (performs re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and it is determined not to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol (does not perform re-run) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the change pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach change pattern accompanied by the reach state, it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-connected symbol (execute the re-change) with a probability of 100%.

  The effect control CPU 90120 is a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in response to each symbol stopping operation of the player, when it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbol, and The decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R is determined, and it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbol in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C.

  As described above, when receiving the fluctuation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the data for presentation control corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display result The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the notification command is determined. The "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R according to each symbol stop operation of the player when it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbols It may be different from or the same as the “left” and “right” decorative symbols that constitute the decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

  When it is decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and the "right" decorative symbol display according to each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 905R and the "inside" decorative symbol display area 905C, the swing symbols of "left", "right" and "inside" which constitute the determined finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are respectively rocked and stopped Decide on that. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined to stop the swing of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player.

  Thus, once the presence or absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol in the case of performing re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 69 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, Along with this, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in the non-display mode. At the start of the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 69 (f), the character "press!", The downward arrow, and the operation button 9030 are sequentially displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905L of "left". The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the imitated image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905L of "left".

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the two button icons 904000 required for the execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes 0, and the characters 904000a of "cut in" and the characters 904000b of "pseudo reunion" are erased from the screen as there is no executable specific effect.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (g), the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905L of the "left" performs an operation to push the operation button 9030, thereby displaying the "left" ornament. The decorative symbol ("1" in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative pattern is not scrolled up and down, but is not completely stopped and is swinging (a state in which the final stop is not displayed). The decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped here is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of temporary stop symbols determined in advance, when it is determined that the pseudo continuous symbol is to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the consecutive symbols, it is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that has been determined in advance.

  When the decorative symbol of “left” is rocked and stopped, then the effect control CPU 90120 displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the decorative symbol display area 905R of “right” as shown in FIG. 69 (g). . As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decoration pattern in the "right" decoration pattern display area 905R.

  The player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905R of the "right" performs an operation to press the operation button 9030, whereby the ornament of the "right" is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (h). The decorative symbol ("2" in this example) is rocked and stopped in the symbol display area 905R. The decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped here is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes a combination of temporary stop symbols determined in advance, when it is determined to stop the pseudo continuous symbol, and the pseudo When it is determined not to stop the consecutive symbols, it is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that has been determined in advance.

  When the decorative symbol of “right” is rocked and stopped, next, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the “in” decorative symbol display area 905C as shown in FIG. 69 (h). . As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decoration pattern in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 905C.

  It is assumed that the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the "in" decorative symbol display area 905C performs an operation to press the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 decides to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol based on the table of FIG. 69 (d), as shown in FIG. 70 (i), “middle” In the fancy symbol display area 905C, the pseudo continuous symbol composed of the characters "NEXT" is rocked and stopped. As a result, the combination of the temporary stop symbols “left”, “middle” and “right” determined in advance is displayed temporarily. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (j), after temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle" and "right" are changed (for example, the symbol pattern) The re-variation in which the scroll display in the up and down direction is resumed is performed. After re-variation, the combination of the decoration pattern (final stop pattern) is finalized and displayed in the left, middle, and right decoration symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, and the decoration pattern is variably displayed. The game display results will be finalized.

  On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90120 decides not to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol based on the table in FIG. 69 (d), as shown in FIG. 70 (k), The "inside" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) previously determined in the decorative symbol display area 905C is swung and stopped. As a result, the combination of the "left", "right" and "middle" finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbols) determined in advance is rocked and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (l), after the swing stop of the predetermined period, the decorative symbols displayed on the left, middle and right are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R (final stop) The combination of the symbols is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is decided.

  The effect control CPU 90120 has also decided to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol even when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In this case, it is assumed that the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance is displayed temporarily and re-variation is performed. That is, if it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo run symbol, even if the operation is not performed, the combination of the temporary stop symbol is automatically displayed for a temporary stop, and the re-variation is executed. I assume.

  In the present example, in the case where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed by the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more, the operation suggestion condition is satisfied. Although the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern involves the reach state (that is, regardless of the designated presentation mode of the variation pattern), the present invention is not limited to such a form, Two or more button icons 904000 may be displayed, and the variable display game may be executed with a variation pattern accompanied by a reach state as the operation suggestion condition. In the case of such an operation suggesting condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped at a higher rate than in the case where the display result is a release. It is good to make it.

  Further, when the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect is set in advance for each fluctuation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, according to the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 In the case where it is specified that the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped, two or more button icons 904000 are displayed for the effect control CPU 90120, and the pseudo run symbol is specified to be temporarily stopped. To receive the variation pattern specification command (execute the variable display game by the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo continuous notice effect), may be the operation suggestion condition, and as in the above-mentioned example, regardless of the designated variation pattern , Two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and a predetermined time or more The variable display game is executed by the change time, it may be used as the operation suggested condition.

(Chance eye notice production)
The chance eye preview effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the big hit combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game which is the target of the advance notice. By displaying the chance eye which is the display result as the final stop display, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game which is the target of the advance notice.

  In this example, the same odd decorative symbols are finally displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R is "left". And by making the final stop display of an even decorative pattern that is one larger than the odd decorative pattern displayed in the final stop in each decorative pattern display area 905L and 905C of the "middle", "left", "medium" and A combination of decorative designs on the right side shall be completed.

  That is, the combination of the decorative symbols of "left", "middle" and "right" which are chance eyes in this example is one of "112", "334", "556" and "778". It is possible to make the final stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols to be the chance eyes in accordance with the all symbol stop operation of the player.

  As for the chance eye advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 67, (1) three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is suspended, and the variable When none of the variable display games executed before the display game involves the reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player is determined all symbols stop operation. It becomes executable by doing.

  In addition, in the chance eye advance notice effect, in one variable display game, the player operates the operation button 9030 only once, and the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols swings. It is stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-series announcement effect in which each symbol stop operation for stopping the swing of each of the left, right and middle decorative symbols in one variable display game is requested three times, The operation required for one variable display game (all symbol stop operation) is only once. A specific aspect of the chance eye advance presentation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72.

  In FIG. 71 (a), the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right" are being executed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display area It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is three. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, each display part corresponding to 3 variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (left end, second from left, and 3 from left) Each) are displayed in the normal mode.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the start winning combination fluctuation pattern determination result specification command stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display part at the left end) of which the start condition is first established among the three variable display games held by confirming the start winning prize time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command. Is the non-reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) in which the start condition is met second is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is met third It is assumed that it is grasped that the change pattern corresponding to the variable display game to be displayed (the third display part from the left) is the change pattern of the reach.

  In addition, two button icons 904000 are displayed at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least two times or more) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. "Cut-in" character 904000a indicating that the cut-in notice effect will be executable after the establishment of the operation suggestion condition of "," and "The pseudo-series notice effect can be executed after the formation of the predetermined operation suggestion condition" The character 904000 b of “pseudo chain” indicating is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 causes the third button icon 904000 to be displayed at the left end of the screen based on the game ball having won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 71 (b), the screen is updated from the state in which the two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state in which the three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the fact that three or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, the character 904000c of "chance eye" indicates that "chance eye advance notice effect can be executed after establishment of a predetermined operation suggestion condition". It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggesting condition referred to here is: (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed; None of the variable display games that are executed before are accompanied by the reach state.

  Then, in FIG. 71C, after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is ended and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as the finalized decorative symbol, a combination which is a non-reach loss with “5” in the left, “9” in the middle and “6” in the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a non-reach change pattern in which the change pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is not accompanied by the reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display area at the left end) of which the start condition is first established among the two variable display games being held is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is secondly satisfied. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the chance eye advance notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggesting condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a variable display game (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied) which is executed before the variable display game of the reach variation pattern being held. For each of the variable display games of (1) and (2), it is determined to request the player to perform a full symbol stop operation after variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the variable display game of the reach variation pattern being held is a big hit combination or a lost combination, the start winning time determination result specification command corresponding to the variable display game or the start winning time variation pattern Confirm based on the judgment result specification command.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), when the display result of the variable display game of the reach variation pattern being held is a big hit combination, all symbols of the player are displayed in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. In response to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance at 75% rate and to stop the non-chance order (combine combination other than chance eyes) at 25% rate, and the change of the pending reach variation pattern If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance at 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, Decide to stop the non-opportunity at a rate of 75%.

  If it is decided to stop the chance eyes, the effect control CPU 90120 configures the chance eyes according to the player's all symbol stop operation, the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display area 905L. And an odd decorative pattern to be stopped at 905C and an even decorative pattern to stop swinging to the "right" decorative pattern display area 905R are determined.

  When it is decided not to stop the chance eyes, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and the "medium" decorative symbol display area 905C according to the player's all symbol stopping operation. And, in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, according to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, swing the decorative symbol constituting the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which does not become a chance eye Decide to stop. That is, in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is decided to stop the swing of the finalized symbol (final stop symbol) which is the non-chance.

  Thus, when the presence or absence of the chance stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in the non-display mode. Along with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), the character 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" Is displayed large at the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of an arrow and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed. Thus, the player recognizes that the user should press the operation button 9030 in order to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right". Do. In the chance eye notice production, unlike the pseudo-series notice production described above, by operating the operation button 9030 only once, all decorative symbol display areas 905 L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” The decorative pattern is stopped at 905C and 905R.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 is a button icon 904000 displayed along with the display of the character 904200 "stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, the three buttons required to execute the chance eye notice effect Erase the icon 904000. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes 0, and the character 904000a of "cut in", the character 904000b of "pseudo reunion", and "chance eye" with the absence of an executable specific effect. The character 904000c is erased from the screen.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the character 904200 "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 performs an operation to press the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 decides to stop the non-chance on the basis of the table of FIG. 71 (d), as shown in FIG. 71 (g), “left”, In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, the combination of the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is shaken. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (h), after swinging stop for a predetermined period, the decorative symbols displayed in “left”, “middle” and “right” display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are finalized (final stop) The combination of the symbols is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is decided. Here, the combination which becomes a non-reach loss of "4" in the left, "9" in the middle, and "7" in the right is derived and displayed as a fixed ornamental symbol for the non-chance.

  Note that the effect control CPU 90120 is a player when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of “Stop all symbols!” If it has been decided to stop the non-chance according to the all-pattern stop operation, the finalized design (final stop design) that does not become a chance according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command The combination of shall be rocked and stopped.

  Next, based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 is determined to request the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game as described above, the start condition for the next variable display game is When established, the presence or absence of the chance eye stop is determined as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 72 (i), when the display result of the variable display game of the reach variation pattern being held is a big hit combination, all symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. In response to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance at 75% and to stop the non-chance at 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the reach variation pattern being held is a combination If it is, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance at a rate of 25% in accordance with the all symbol stop operation of the player, and the non chance eye at 75%. Decide to stop.

  Furthermore, the CPU 90120 for effect control, in the same manner as in the previous variable display game, stops the entire symbol of the player when it is determined to stop the chance or when it is determined to stop the non-chance. Decide on the combination of the decorative symbols to stop swinging according to.

  Thus, when the presence or absence of the chance stop and the stop symbol when performing the chance stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 72 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is in the non-display mode. At the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 72 (k), a character 904200 "Stop all symbols!" And operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed at the center of the screen. Thus, the player recognizes that the user should press the operation button 9030 in order to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right". Do.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the character 904200 "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 performs an operation to press the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 decides to stop the chance on the basis of the table of FIG. 72 (i), as shown in FIG. 72 (l), “left”, “I” In the "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eyes is stopped swingingly. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (m), after swinging stop for a predetermined period, the decorative symbols displayed in “left”, “middle” and “right” are fixed in display areas 905L, 905C and 905R (final stop The combination of the symbols is displayed at the final stop, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is decided. Here, a combination that becomes a non-reach lose with “1” on the left, “1” in the middle, and “2” on the right is derived and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol for the chance eye.

  Note that the effect control CPU 90120 is a player when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of “Stop all symbols!” Even if it has been decided to stop the chance eye according to the all pattern stop operation of, the finalized decorative pattern (final stop not corresponding to the chance pattern according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command The combination of the symbols) shall be stopped swinging.

  Subsequently, for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern which is the target of the chance eye preview effect, it is determined that the effect control CPU 90120 requests the player to perform the all symbol stop operation. Because there is not, when the start condition of the next variable display game is satisfied, the presence or absence of the chance eye stop is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Is no longer present, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode.

  In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 72 (o), the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established.

  In the fifty-fifth effect mode described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect are all in the state after the game ball is won in the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000 is In the state of being displayed, execution is possible with the operation of the player corresponding to each notice effect. As described above, by providing a specific effect that is executed on the condition of the player's operation after winning the game ball to the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  In addition, every time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, whereby the player can play the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that has won.

  When one or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied, a notification prompting the user to perform a continuous hitting operation as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo run announcement production is satisfied in the state being done, the notification which urges each symbol stop operation as the operation corresponding to the pseudo run announcement production is notified and the chance eyes in the state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the notice effect is established, a notification prompting the user to stop all symbols is performed as an operation corresponding to the chance notice effect, and the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. You can figure out

  In addition, according to the display number of button icons 904000, the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed when the display number is 1 or more, and the character 904000b of "pseudo ream" is displayed when the display number is 2 or more. When 3 or more is displayed, the character 904000c of "the chance eye" is displayed, whereby the player can grasp the type of the specific effect which can be executed according to the number of the button icons 904000 displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give an interest to the number of winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.

  In addition to the type of the specific effect that can be performed, an operation required to execute the specific effect may be notified. For example, according to the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the number of displays is 1 or more, the character of "continuous hit" is displayed next to the character 904000a of "cut in", and when the number of displays is 2 or more, "pseudo run" The characters "each symbol stop" are displayed next to the characters 904000b, and when the number of displays is three or more, the character "all symbols stop" is displayed next to the character 904000c with "chance eye". The required operation can be grasped according to the type of the specific effect that can be executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where operation suggesting conditions corresponding to each of a plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously established. For example, in the state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 8 It may be seconds or more, and in this case, a notification (display of continuous hit suggestion information 904100) prompting continuous hitting operation for cut-in advance notice effect execution and prompt each symbol stop operation for pseudo linked continuous notice effect execution It becomes a problem which of the notification (display of the operation suggestion information 904050 in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the larger number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, a notification (each requiring two or more button icons 904000) for prompting each symbol stop operation for the pseudo consecutive notice effect execution is a notification for prompting the continuous hitting operation for the cut-in advance effect execution (one or more button icons 904000 are required) It shall be carried out prior to.

  Further, in the state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is 8 seconds or more, , There is a case that the variable display game being held is a reach variation pattern, in this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for the execution of the pseudo consecutive notice effect execution (in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R Any of operation indication information 904050) and notification to prompt all symbol stop operation for the chance eye preview effect execution (character 904200 of "stop all symbols!" And operation indication information 904050 in each variable display game) The question is what to do. In this case, a notification (all three or more button icons 904000 are required) prompting all symbol stop operations for the chance eye preview effect execution is a notification (button icon 904000) prompting each symbol stop operation for the pseudo consecutive notice effect execution. Should take precedence over two).

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of button icons 904000 displayed is the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect (1 for cut-in notification effect 1, 2 for pseudo-series notification effect) If there are more than 3) in the case of the eye preview effect, button icons 904000 of the number obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 initially displayed It will continue to be displayed even after the execution of the production.

  For example, in the state where four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the chance eye advance notice effect is executed, one button icon 904000 to be continuously displayed remains even after the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect. The "cut-in" character 904000a remains displayed on the screen. Thereafter, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition of the cut-in advance notice effect is satisfied, and the notification of prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (check the number of button icons 904000). And the variation pattern of the variable display game is checked), but is not limited to such a form, when the variable display game is being executed, whether the operation suggesting condition according to each specific effect is established? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for performing the continuous hit is displayed. It may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display of derived display result) has become a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If it is displayed, operation indication information 904050 for causing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 holds the variable display game with the reach state (including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start prize) at the timing when the valid start prize is generated, and the variable display game If none of the variable display games to be executed before is accompanied by the reach state, it is determined whether or not three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if it is displayed, the entire symbol stop operation is performed. You may make it display the character 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "stop all the symbols!" That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (determined without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed), A notification to the effect that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be performed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the game ball winning at the general winning opening. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for performing the continuous hit may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is the remaining until the end of the variable display game being executed (derivation display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If the time is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display of derived display result) is predetermined time At the timing when 10 seconds remain, operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the valid start winning at a timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. Variable display game with reach state by determining whether any variable display game executed prior to the variable display game is not accompanied by the reach state. Is suspended, and when none of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game is accompanied by the reach state, the entire symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. You may make it display the character 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "stop all the symbols!" That is, in the variable display game being executed at the timing when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (determined without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed), A notification to the effect that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be performed.

  Further, in the 50th effect mode, any of the operation suggestion conditions for giving notification to perform predetermined operations (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are conditions related to the variable display game (display mode and Although an example is described in which a specific effect is executed during execution of a variable display game due to a predetermined operation being performed, the operation suggestion condition is, for example, a big hit The condition regarding the gaming state (for example, whether the jackpot gaming state is controlled or not, whether the jackpot type is a probability variation big hit, whether the number of rounds is more than a predetermined number, etc.) may be used. The specific effect may be performed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within a period controlled to the jackpot gaming state, a notification is presented to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation, and a predetermined operation has been performed. Sometimes, an effect may be performed to notify whether the big hit gaming state is a definite big hit or not, or whether the number of rounds of the big hit gaming state is larger than a predetermined number. In addition, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number during a period in which the game state is controlled to a definite change state (however, the player makes it difficult to recognize that the change is a definite change state). A notification may be issued to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when a predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be performed to notify whether the gaming state is a definite change state.

  Further, in the 50th effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 904000 is 1, a notification to urge continuous hitting operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggesting condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. An example has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and if the number of displayed button icons 904000 is not more than a predetermined number (for example, two or more or three or more), notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, There is no notification for prompting any operation of continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation), no specific effect is executed (for example, any of cut-in notice effect, pseudo continuous notice effect, and chance eye notice effect) The specific effect of is not executed)).

(Example of one-shot notification)
In addition, in the 50th effect mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, three operations for each area are performed, but the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) ) May be performed three times for each area in order to stop each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines the finalized decorative symbol (finally stopped symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 The left symbol that makes up the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped according to the operation of, and then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905R of “right”, and the final stop according to the operation of the operation button 9030 The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped swinging, and finally the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol according to the operation of the operation button 9030 May be stopped. In such a configuration, when the combination of the jackpot symbols is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905 L and 905 R for “left”, “right”, and “middle” according to the player's three operations. By stopping the same decorative pattern sequentially in 905C, the player's sense of expectation for the operation can be enhanced.

  In the symbol display area of "left", "right", and "middle", a combination of special decorative symbols different from the combination of ordinary decorative symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8") By stopping the game, the player is notified to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and further, depending on the predetermined operation of the player, whether the display result of the variable display game becomes a big hit or loses (or a definite variation big hit and It is also possible to execute a specific effect of informing whether or not a non-probable variation big hit etc.). For example, the special decoration pattern that is an image imitating the operation button 9030 is stopped in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas (or in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas) The symbol is stopped), and in the symbol display area of "middle", the image of the character "double hit!" Is stopped. Then, when the player who recognizes the image of the character of "continuous hit!" Performs the continuous hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character of "big hit!" Or The image of the character "" may be displayed.

  In addition, in such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the symbol display area of “middle” (according to the notification mode that suggests that a predetermined operation is performed), the variable display game It is also possible to make the display result a big hit ratio (or a probability variation big hit ratio) to be different. For example, in the symbol display area of "medium", the operation button 9030 is made longer than when the image of characters of "Consecutively strike!" Is suggested to perform an operation to press the operation button 9030 several times short as a special symbol. The percentage of the display result becoming a big hit may be higher when the image of the characters “long press!” Suggesting that the operation of pressing once is stopped as a special symbol. As described above, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display game according to the operation of the player may be executed as the specific effect without passing through the reach state. In addition, within the period when the variable display game of 1 is being executed, the combination of the special decorative symbol is stopped plural times in the symbol display areas of “left”, “right” and “middle”, the special decorative symbol The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination is stopped. In this case, the advance notice effect indicating the display result may be executed every predetermined operation (except for the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. .

  In the 50th effect mode, each symbol stop operation becomes effective on the condition that two or more wins to the general winning opening are made, and the pseudo consecutive notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the general winning opening is An example is shown in which all symbol stop operation is effective on condition of winning of three or more wins, and further, a chance eye advance notice effect is executed according to all symbol stop operation, but notification that a predetermined operation should be performed (predetermined The condition that the operation is effective) may be a condition of four or more winnings on the general winning opening.

[The 51st Effect Form]
In the fifty-first effect mode shown in FIG. 67, different from the fifty-fifth effect mode, it is assumed that specific effects which can be executed are different according to the game state. In the 51st effect mode, the cut-in advance notice effect requiring the continuous hitting operation can be executed when the gaming state is any of the normal state, the positive change state and the short time state. On the other hand, the pseudo-series notice effect requiring each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state, and the chance eye notice effect requiring the all symbol stop operation is the gaming state being a definite change state or a time saving state It is only feasible when.

  In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-run notice effect, the operation suggesting condition may be satisfied simultaneously in the normal state, but in this case, the pseudo-run notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. For each symbol stop operation is prioritized and prompted. On the other hand, since the executable gaming state is different between the pseudo linked advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect, the operation suggesting condition is not satisfied at the same time.

  Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is three or more, the character “Cut in” 904000 a and “pseudo-run” are not performed in the normal state because the chance eye advance notice effect is not executed. The character 904000b is displayed, but the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the definite change state or the short time state is three or more, the character of "cut in" is not performed in the false change state or the short time state because the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed. Although the characters 904000 c and “chance eye” 904000 c are displayed, the characters “pseudo reunion” 904000 b are not displayed.

  As described above, according to the gaming state when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed is different, appropriately according to the gaming state It becomes possible to make the interest different.

  Note that, in the present effect mode, priority is given to the advance effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and a high expectation effect for the player can be obtained. It may be executed with priority. For example, when the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo continuous notice effect are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher percentage of big hit (for example, the pseudo line notice effect) It is good to give priority to).

[The 52nd Effect Form]
In the fifty-second effect mode shown in FIG. 73, unlike the fifty-fifth effect mode and the fifty-first effect mode, button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, and the gaming ball to the general winning opening Whether or not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each winning, and if it is displayed, the character 904000a of "cut in", the character 904000b of "pseudo reunion", and the character 904000c of "chance eye" It is determined which of the two will be displayed. In FIG. 74 (A), whether or not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c in accordance with the winning on each general winning a prize opening, and which of the characters 904000a to 904000c to display in the case of displaying 6 shows a display information determination table for determining the

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines that the character 904000a of "cut in" is displayed on the screen at a rate of 25% when the gaming ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A, and at a rate of 75% It is determined that the character 904000 b of “pseudo chain” is displayed on the screen. In addition, when the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning a prize opening 9050B, it decides not to display any of the characters 904000a-904000c at the ratio of 50%, the character 904000a of "cut in" at the ratio of 25%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display the character 904000b of "pseudo reunion" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

  In addition, when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a ratio of 80%, and the character 904000a of "cut in" at a ratio of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display the character 904000 c of “eye on the eye” on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the game ball wins in the 4th general winning a prize opening 9050D, it decides not to display any of the characters 904000a-904000c at the ratio of 70%, the character 904000a of "cut in" at the ratio of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display the character 904000 c of “CHANNEL ONLY” on the screen at a rate of 20%.

  Then, similarly to the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode described above, when the variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is started in the state where the character 904000a of "cut in" is displayed, continuous hit operation is performed. Informing that it is performed, the cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation, and the variable display game of the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state where the character 904000b of "pseudo ream" is displayed. In the case where it is determined that each symbol stop operation is to be performed, the pseudo consecutive notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach variation pattern is variable in a state where the character 904000 c of “chance eye” is displayed. If the display game is suspended, and all the variable display games executed before that are non-reach variation patterns, perform an all symbol stop operation. Notification to, to run the chance eyes announcement attraction in response to all the symbol stop operation.

  In the example of FIG. 74 (A), when the gaming ball is won in the first general winning opening 9050A, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the gaming ball is in the second general winning opening 9050B. In the case of winning, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when the gaming ball has won at the third general winning opening 9050C, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When the game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 50C, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

  As described above, according to the general winning opening where the gaming ball has won, any general winning opening is different because the ratio at which the type of the specific effect to be performed is notified and the ratio at which the specific effect is executable is different. Can make the game ball enter the game and improve the interest.

  In addition, the game ball fired to the left gaming area 9010A is more likely to win the second general winning port 9050B than the first general winning port 9050A, and the game ball fired to the right gaming area 9010B is the fourth general winning port Assuming that the third general winning opening 9050C is configured to be easier to win than the 9050D, a general winning opening that is more difficult to win (in the normal state, the first general winning opening 9050A, in the definite variation state or the time saving state When the gaming ball has won in the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the rate at which the specific effect is executed is high.

  In addition, when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, there is a possibility that either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo ream" is displayed. There is, however, that the "Opportunity Eye" character 904000c is not displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball is won in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye" may be displayed. Although there are characters 904000b of "pseudo chain", they are not displayed.

  Thus, according to the general winning opening where the gaming ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different. You can focus attention and improve interest.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal state, the gaming ball is fired to the left gaming area 9010A, and when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time shortening state, the gaming ball is fired to the right gaming area 9010B, the first general winning opening In the normal state where the gaming ball wins in the 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, characters 904000a to 904000c are more than the probability changing state or the time saving state in which the gaming ball wins the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D The rate at which one of the two is displayed is high, and the execution rate of the specific effect is high.

  When the gaming state is the normal state, the interest is likely to decrease, so the interest rate is prevented from decreasing by increasing the ratio in which the characters 904000 a to 904000 c appear and the ratio in which the specific effect is performed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the player's interest is directed to the special drawing game and the common drawing game, so the execution of the specific effect based on the display of characters 904000a to 904000c and the establishment of the operation suggestion condition In some cases, the rate at which the characters 904000 a to 904000 c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is performed are made lower than those in the normal state. As described above, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of the game ball winning in the general winning opening according to the game state.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 74 (A), and when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the ratio of appearing characters 904000a to 904000c and the specific effect are executed compared to the normal state. The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 74 (A), when the gaming ball has won in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning combination Characters 904000 a to 904000 c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball has won a prize in the mouth 9050 A or the second general winning prize mouth 9050 B. Further, in FIG. 74 (A), the pseudo linked preliminary announcement effect can be executed only when winning in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C. Alternatively, there may be provided a specific effect that can be executed only when winning in the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 74 (A), as shown in FIG. 74 (B), a game ball is won for each winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the gaming state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000 a to 904000 c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed than when the gaming state when the gaming ball wins is the probability changing state or the time saving state You may make it high. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), when the gaming ball is won in each general winning opening in the probability changing state or the time saving state, the gaming ball is winning in each general winning opening in the normal state. Characters 904000 a to 904000 c may be displayed at a higher rate than the above. Further, in FIG. 74 (B), a specific effect that can be performed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided, and a specific effect that can be performed only when the gaming state is the definite change state or the time saving state. May be provided.

  In addition, according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, or the probability variation state or the time saving state, the ratio in which the characters 904000a to 904000c are displayed or the ratio in which the specific effect is executed is not limited to the example. For example, whether the jackpot gaming state is controlled or not, whether or not the number of balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of jackpot gaming states continued (consecutive number = end of the jackpot gaming state) Whether or not the jackpot gaming state controlled to a definite change state or time reduction state has reached a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times, whether or not a variable display game in which the display result is a lost combination continued a predetermined number of times Depending on other conditions such as whether the variable display game of the variation pattern of "reach" ("no reach lost") continues a predetermined number of times, and whether the number of pending storages has reached a predetermined number, etc. Ratio and the specific effect that 4000a~904000c is displayed may be made different proportions to be executed.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixels at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) A rectangular area defined as a vertex with and the coordinates (X, Y) is defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

  In the first area α, the number of winnings for the general winning opening, the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings for the second starting winning opening, etc. The number information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 905A, 905B, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, and start winning storage display area 905H. Is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 75 and 76, the background image can be viewed in the second area β, but the background image can not be viewed in the first area α.

  In this example, the entire image of the background image stored in the ROM 90121 as effect data has an entire width of (X + 1) pixels, as shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 77 described later. The image is an image in which the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D climbs near the top of the mountain, and the character E climbs near the foot of the mountain. In the example of FIGS. 75 (b) and (c) and 76 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]] Among them, only the area corresponding to the second area β (a rectangular area defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as apexes) is visible to the player. Among the entire area of the background image, an area [a rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as apexes] corresponding to the first area α is invisible to the player.

  Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 75 (b) (c) and 76 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as the vertices. Although the character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as the vertices is not visually recognizable.

  In the example of FIGS. 75 (b) and (c) and 76 (e) and (f), “the number of general prizes for today” which is the sum of the number of prizes for general prize mouths on the day (1) in the first area α. (2) “Today's number of winning prizes to the first starting winning opening on the day” and (3) “Today's total winning number to the second starting winning opening on the day” The three items of the electric chow prize number are displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the winning for the general winning opening occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the game ball to be won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A start winning combination designating command for specifying a start position winning command is received, and when a winning combination to the start winning combination occurs, a starting winning combination specifying which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has won Receive a mouth specification command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can separately count the number of winnings for the general winning opening, the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings for the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “the number of general prizes for today” is 70, (2) “the number of prize winnings for today” is 521, and (3) “number of prizes for electric chow for today” is 217. As described above, by displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening and the number of winnings for the starting winning opening in a contrastable manner, it becomes possible to relatively grasp the winning situation for each winning opening.

  Further, in the example of FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special view is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A, The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Further, in the start winning combination storage display area 905H, a circular object is displayed at the left end as one piece of holding information corresponding to the holding of one special drawing game. The image of the fourth symbol in the variable display, the image of the decorative symbol in the variable display, and the image of the holding information are all displayed only in the second area β.

  It is assumed that the display layer of the fourth pattern, the display layer of the decorative pattern, and the display layer of the hold information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is made visible to the other image. This means that display control is given priority over gender. Specifically, in the example of FIGS. 75 (b) and (c) and FIGS. 76 (e) and (f), one of the region where the respective images of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the holding information are displayed and the background image In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the display layer is higher than the background image, and the fourth pattern, the decorative pattern, and the holding information are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make it difficult to visually recognize the background image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, it appears that the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information are displayed in front of the background image (the player side).

  Further, in this embodiment, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (f), the area in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the area in which the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area With regard to the above, the display control is performed to make the display pattern difficult to visually recognize (including invisible) while making it easy to visually recognize (including visible) an error message in which the display layer is higher than the decorative pattern. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative pattern (the player's side).

  It should be noted that, as display control for making the player visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire area of the background image is the background An area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set in the display layer of the background image (ie, the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and And Y) may be used as image data of only a rectangular area defined as a vertex).

  Further, as another display control for making the player visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set to the display layer of the background image (ie, The image data of the entire background image [rectangular area defined as coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] uses image data of the first display layer higher than the display layer of the background image By setting another background image for winning number information (for example, a plain white image) to the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer can not be viewed visually You may In the case of such a configuration, it is the visibility of the image of the display layer below the display layer to a predetermined transmittance (for example, a white solid plain image) for the winning number information. By setting 0%, the image of the lower display layer may be made visible by setting 0%, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer The region corresponding to the first area α can be viewed, and the character E can be viewed.

  Further, the display layer of winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the display of the other information in the first area α does not reduce the visibility of the winning number information. In addition, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message. Or the lower display layer. For example, the display layer of winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and it is in the display area of other information (whether displayed in the first area α or displayed in the second area β) It does not matter that the visibility does not decrease.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the holding information are all performed in the second area β, these images are Depending on being displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings on the general winning opening as the winning number information displayed in the first area α ("the number of general winnings for today"), the first start winning The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth ("the number of winning prizes for today") and the number of winnings for the second starting winning opening ("number of winning tee wins for today") will not be hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decoration symbol, and the display of the hold information.

  And, when the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are being performed in the image display device 905, when a winning on the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. As shown in d), based on the effect control CPU 90120 receiving the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings on the general winning opening displayed in the first area α ("the number of general winnings for today") Is updated. As described above, when a winning on the general winning opening occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the holding information are being performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α The number of winnings on the mouth is updated without disturbing the visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not disturbed by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a winning on the general winning opening has occurred and, as a result, the number of winnings on the general winning opening has been updated.

  And, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the variable display of the first symbol for the first special drawing is ended and the display result is stopped. While being displayed, the variable display of a decorative pattern is also ended and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 905A is in a state of being lit (displayed) in a display color that evokes an exfoliation (display result is stopped and displayed), and as a finalized decorative symbol, In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the out-of-the-box symbols that are "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the fourth symbol being displayed stopped (in the state where the display result is derived and displayed), and the stop displayed (the display result is derived and displayed Since the decorative symbols in the state are all displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α can be displayed by displaying these images on the image display device 905. As information, the number of winning to the general winning a prize opening ("the number of general winning a prize today"), the number of winning to the first starting winning a prize opening ("the number of winning prize winning today"), and the winning to the second starting winning a prize opening The visibility of the number ("Today's electric chow prize number") will not be disturbed. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  Then, when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are being performed on the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), when a winning on the general winning opening occurs. On the basis of the effect control CPU 90120 receiving the general winning opening designation command, the number of winnings on the general winning opening (“the number of today's general winnings”) displayed in the first area α is updated. As described above, when the winning of the general winning opening occurs while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop of the decorative symbol are being performed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is And visibility is updated without interruption. That is, depending on the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not impeded. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a winning on the general winning opening has occurred and, as a result, the number of winnings on the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example of FIGS. 75 (b), (c) and (d), although the number of winnings on the general winning opening is updated without being disturbed by the visibility, to the first start winning opening When a prize is generated, the same as in the case of the general prize opening, regardless of the variable indication and stop indication of the fourth symbol, and the variable indication and stop indication of the decorative symbol, the prize to the first start winning opening The number is updated without disturbing the visibility. In addition, even when the second start winning opening occurs, as in the case of the general winning opening, regardless of variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol, and variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings on the second starting winning opening is updated without hindrance to visibility.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (e) and (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command specifying that an abnormality has occurred, an error message is generated in the image display device 905 (in this example, an “error occurs "" Is displayed. As described above, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed, or when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, an area in which the decorative symbol is displayed and an error With regard to the overlapping range with the area in which the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to view (including viewable) and to make the decorative pattern difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 76 (b), when viewed from the player, the error message is before (the player side) the decorative symbol (or the decorative symbol in the stop display) in the variable display. It looks like it is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (f), since the display of the error message is performed in the second area β, if the error message is displayed on the image display device 905, the inside of the first area α is displayed. The number of prizes for the general prize opening ("the number of general prizes for today"), the number of prizes for the first start prize hole ("number of prizes for today's prize"), and (2) The visibility of the number of winnings on the starting winning opening ("the number of winning electric winnings for today") will not be impeded. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

  Then, in the image display device 905, when an error message is displayed, and when a winning on the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 76 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning. Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of winnings on the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of today's general winnings”) is updated. As described above, when a winning on the general winning opening occurs while the error message is displayed, the number of winnings on the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not impaired in visibility. It will be updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not impeded. As a result, the player can easily grasp that a winning on the general winning opening has occurred and, as a result, the number of winnings on the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 76 (f) and 76 (g), the number of winnings on the general winning opening is an example in which the visibility is updated without being disturbed, but there is a winning on the first start winning opening. Even when it occurs, the number of winnings on the first starting winning opening is updated without hindrance to visibility, as in the case of the general winning opening, regardless of the display of the error message. Also, even when a winning on the second starting winning opening occurs, as in the case of the general winning opening, the visibility of the number of winnings on the second starting winning opening is impeded regardless of the display of the error message. It is updated without.

  Also, in the example of FIG. 76 (f), the text “error has occurred.” Is simply displayed to notify that an abnormality has occurred based on the reception of an abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed according to the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection specification command specifying that a magnetic abnormality has occurred is received, the characters “Magnetic error has occurred.” Are displayed, and an abnormality detection specification command specifying that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Occasionally, the message "Vibration error has occurred." May be displayed, and when the anomaly detection specification command to specify that a radio wave anomaly has occurred is received, the message "Radio wave error has occurred." May be displayed. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and the coordinate (X, Y) are defined as the top of the rectangular area defined as the second area β, but the first area where the winning number information can be displayed, as well as the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, the hold The second area in which the information and the error message can be displayed is not limited to the rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display / non-display setting of winning a prize information)
As described in FIG. 37, the glass door frame 903a is opened forward and operated (the store clerk in the game arcade can operate but the player can not operate). When the player is set to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening on the player setting screen (see FIG. 38), the general winning opening is set. The number-of-winnings information related to the number of winnings, etc. is to be displayed.

  The example shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 is a display mode of the screen in the state where the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this manner, and the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, not only the number of winnings for the general winning opening, but also the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening (so-called "Hezo") and the winnings for the second starting winning opening (so-called "electric chew") The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings on the first start winning opening and the number of winnings on the second starting winning opening in accordance with the operation of the display switching switch 9032 and the operation button 9030.

  Here, as described in FIG. 37, when the operation portion of the display switching switch 9032 is set to non-display setting (first position), the number-of-winnings information (number of winnings on general winning opening) with the operation button 9030 The winning number information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings for the second starting winning opening, etc.) is set. Do not show. Further, even when the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), the setting for displaying the winning number information by the operation button 9030 is not performed (in the case of non-display setting) The winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905).

  The example shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c) is the display mode of the screen in the state where the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed. In this case, the number of winnings on the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings on the first starting winning opening (so-called "Hero") and the second starting winning opening (so-called "electric chew") The number of prizes won is also not displayed.

  Thus, according to the convenience of the game arcade side, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation of the game arcade side and according to the setting operation of the player side. Also, it is possible to display the winning number information according to the judgment of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a), (b) and (c), when the winning number information is not set to be displayed, the error message display area 5E is compared with the setting where the winning number information is set to be displayed. The respective areas of the fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, and the start winning storage display area 905H are common. That is, the display position and the display range (size of the image) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number Does not change with settings that do not display information. Thus, display control accompanying setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning number information is simplified.

  On the other hand, when the winning number information is not set to be displayed, as shown in FIGS. 77 (a), (b) and (c), the winning number information is set to be displayed (example of display in FIGS. 75 and 76). However, the background image can be viewed in the first area α and the second area β. In the example of FIGS. 77 (a), (b) and (c), the first area of the entire area of the background image [a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]] An area corresponding to α [a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices], and an area corresponding to a second area β [coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates ( Both the rectangular area defined with X, Y) as the apex, that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

  Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 77 (a), (b) and (c), the player is a character included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. While being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in a rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is also visually recognizable.

  In this way, with regard to the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying winning number information and the displaying of winning number information are displayed While the control load is reduced by not changing (commonizing) with the setting that is not performed, it is possible to visually recognize the setting for displaying the winning number information and the setting for not displaying the winning number information for other images (background images). By changing the range, it is possible to improve the interest when the number-of-winnings information is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are being performed on the image display device 905, a winning to the general winning opening is performed. Even in the case where an occurrence of a has occurred, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), since the winning number information is not set to be displayed, the winning number for the general winning opening is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), even when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed in the image display device 905, even when a winning on the general winning opening occurs. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), since the winning number information is not displayed, the winning number for the general winning opening is not displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 77 (b), (c) and (d), there is shown an example in which the number of winnings on the general winning opening is not displayed even when a winning on the general winning opening occurs. When it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, and the winning to the second starting winning opening occurs. The number of winnings for the second starting winning opening is not displayed. As described above, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings for each winning opening in accordance with the operation of the player.

(Each item of winning number information)
FIG. 78 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. In addition, although FIG. 78 is an item related to the number of winning to the general winning a prize opening, to the item related to the number of winning to the first starting winning a prize opening and to the 2nd starting winning a prize opening similarly to this. Items related to the number of winnings of can be displayed in the first area α.

  It is possible to display "Today's general prize number (A1)", which is the total value of the prize numbers for each general prize port from the time the power of the gaming machine is turned on. At the time of power on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and increments the value of the general winning number counter by 1 each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By doing this, it is possible to count A1.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the today's general winning ratio (referred to as A2)”, which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs from the time of power-on of the gaming machine. At the time of power on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. By adding one at a time, it is possible to add up the total number of outs, and it is possible to add up A2 by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs.

  In addition, it is possible to display “Today's general prize ball number (A3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning on each general winning hole since the power-on of the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to display “the ratio of today's general prize balls (referred to as A4)”, which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of balls from the time the power is turned on to the gaming machine.

  The ROM 90121 stores the number of winning balls determined for each of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and the special winning opening. . The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and designates the general winning opening designation command each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning combination opening to the value of the general winning ball number counter, it is possible to count A3. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the special winning opening It is possible to add up the total number of winning balls by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening specified by each command to the value of the winning balls counter each time a large winning opening winning command designating a winning is received. A4 can be calculated by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of winning balls.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the gaming state by the game state designation command, and the winning in the low base state The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be classified and counted.

  Specifically, “general winning number in low base state (referred to as B1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings to each general winning port in the low base state, can be displayed, and each general winning port in high base state It is possible to display "the number of general winning combinations in high base state (C1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers.

  It is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 and the value of the high base medium winning number counter to 0 when the power is turned on. . Then, during a period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designating command is the normal state, B1 is incremented by adding 1 to the value of the low base medium winning number counter each time the general winning opening designating command is received. During the period when the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designating command is either the probability changing state or the time saving state, the value of the high base medium winning number counter can be calculated each time the general winning opening designating command is received. By adding one at a time, it is possible to count C1.

  In addition, it is possible to display “general winning ratio in low base state (referred to as B2),” which is the ratio of B1 to out number in low base state, and the ratio of C1 to out number in high base state It is possible to display “the high base state general winning ratio (C2)”.

  It is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base middle out counter stored in the RAM 90122 and the value of the high base middle out counter as 0 when the power is turned on. In the normal state, the low base middle out counter can be added up by 1 each time the low base middle out counter is added each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. B2 can be calculated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low base medium outs. On the other hand, in a definite variation state or a short time state, it is possible to count the high base middle out number by adding 1 to the value of the high base middle out number counter for each reception of the detection signal outputted from the outer sphere detector. C2 can be calculated by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs.

  In addition, it is possible to display "the low base state general prize ball number (referred to as B3)", which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning on each general winning opening in the low base state, and the high base It is possible to display "the number of high base state general prize balls (C3)" which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning on each general winning opening in the state.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets both the value of the low base medium award ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 and the value of the high base medium award ball number counter to 0 when the power is turned on. I assume. Then, during a period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designating command is a normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning hole designated by the received general winning hole designating command is a low base medium winning ball number counter By adding to the value of B, it is possible to count B3 ("the number of general prize balls in the low base state"), and the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is either the definite change state or the time saving state The period is C3 ("High Base Condition General Prize Ball Count by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general prize opening designated by the received General Prize Win Selection Command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball counter. ") Can be counted.

  In addition, it is possible to display the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, "low base state general prize ball ratio (B4)", and it is possible to display the number of prize balls in the high base state. It is possible to display "the high base state general prize ball ratio (C4)" which is the ratio of C3.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets both the value of the low base middle prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 and the value of the high base middle prize ball number counter to 0 when the power is turned on. . In the normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening designated by each command is received at the low base middle prize for each reception of the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command. The low base middle prize ball number can be added up by adding to the value of the ball number counter, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the low base middle prize ball number B4 (“low base state The general prize ball ratio can be added up. On the other hand, in the definite variation state or the time saving state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening designated by each command is set high for each reception of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command and the special winning opening winning command. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball number counter, the high base middle prize ball number can be added up, and C4 (“high” is calculated by calculating the ratio of C3 to the high base middle prize ball number. It is possible to count the base status general prize ball ratio.

  As described above, since it is possible to count information related to the number of winning on the general winning opening for each gaming state, it is possible for the player to grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), the items B1 to B4 are noted, and when the gaming state is the high base state (positive change state or short time state), the items C1 to C4 are noted. Become.

  When the gaming state is the low base state, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α, but does not display the items C1 to C4 and the gaming state is the high base state. , C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Moreover, although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, in the low base state, the items B1 to B4 are viewed more than the items C1 to C4. In the high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a mode (for example, large) that is more easily visible than the items B1 to B4.

(Totaling number of winnings information in set period)
Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is capable of totaling the number-of-winnings information in the period set by the player, and is a total value of the number of winnings to each general winning opening in the setting period Can be displayed in the first area α.

  When the counting period according to the player's operation shown in FIG. 79 described later is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122, and adds up the counting. The timer value is set to a set period (total period according to the operation of the player), and the total timer is started. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by one during the setting period, and the general winning during the setting period when the aggregation timer times out (when the set aggregation period has elapsed) The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

  In addition, while the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the detection signal is last received from the out sphere detector), the aggregation timer is updated while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection signal was finally received from the out-of-sphere detector, the aggregation timer may not be updated and may be stopped. In this manner, a period in which the game balls are not fired in the game area 9010 may be excluded from the counting period.

  In addition, when the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set for the setting period The aggregation period is set according to the operation, and the aggregation timer is restarted. Then, the value of the general winning number counter is added during the setting period each time the general winning opening designation command is received, and the general winning number counter during the setting period when the aggregation timer times out again (when the set aggregation period has elapsed again) Is displayed in the first area α as D1. Thus, D1 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

  In addition, it is possible to display “a general winning ratio (referred to as D2) in a setting period”, which is a ratio of D1 to the number of outs of gaming machines in the setting period. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the value of the general winning number counter is set to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122. It is possible to count the number of outs in the setting period by adding 1 each time the value of the out number counter during the setting period each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. D2 can be summed up by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the setting period (D3)” which is the total value of the number of winning balls provided based on the winning on each general winning combination in the setting period. In addition, it is possible to display “general prize ball ratio (set as D4) in setting period”, which is a ratio of D3 to the number of winning balls in the setting period.

  When the counting period according to the player's operation shown in FIG. 79 described later is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general award ball number counter to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122, and The value of the counting timer is set to a set period (the counting period according to the operation of the player), and the counting timer is started. Then, each time a general winning opening designation command is received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening designated by the general winning opening designation command is added to the value of the general winning number counter during the setting period, and the counting timer During the setting period when timed out (when the set aggregation period has elapsed), the value of the general prize ball number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3.

  Further, when the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set for the setting period Is set to the aggregation period according to the operation of (1), and the aggregation timer is restarted. Then, the value of the general prize ball number counter is added during the setting period each time the general winning a prize opening designation command is received, and the general prize ball during the setting period when the aggregation timer times out again (when the set aggregation period has elapsed again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. Thus, D3 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

  In addition, when the value of the general prize ball number counter is set to 0 during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122, the effect control CPU 90120 also sets the ball number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122. The value of 0 is set to 0, and each time a start winning opening designation command, a general winning opening designation command, and a special winning opening winning command specifying a winning to a special winning opening, each command receives a winning opening It is possible to count the number of winning balls in the setting period by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the value to the value of the winning ball number counter during the setting period, and the ratio of D3 to the number of winning balls in the setting period D4 can be calculated by calculating.

  The general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 designates which general winning opening the game ball has won, so the effect control CPU 90120 is the first general winning opening 9050A to 9050A. 4 Each winning number to the general winning opening 9050D is separately counted, items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening, and the total value It is possible to display in the first area α.

  Each item related to the number of winning to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winning to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winning to the second starting winning opening Among the items, which one is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined in accordance with the game state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, for each item related to the number of winning to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winning to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winning for the second starting winning opening Among the related items, which may be displayed in the first area α may be selectable by an operation on the game arcade side (for example, an operation using the display switching switch 9032 and the operation button 9030). It may be selectable by the operation of (for example, the operation using the operation button 9030).

  In addition, for each item related to the number of winning to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winning to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winning for the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value has not reached the reference value As shown in FIG. 79 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message informing that the total value of the items displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thus, the player determines whether the tally value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value compared to the reference value of the item and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not to continue the game in the relevant gaming machine).

  Next, a method of setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the tabulation period setting screen of FIG. 79 sets the tabulation period further when selection is made to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2) described above. A selection screen for selecting whether or not to be displayed, and a screen displayed when selection to set the aggregation period is performed on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) I assume.

  On the setting screen shown in FIG. 79 (1), a message “Set aggregation period.” Is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it. On the setting screen, an icon containing the characters of "10 minutes", an icon containing the characters of "30 minutes", and an icon containing the characters of "60 minutes" are displayed. A message is displayed, and further, an arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is displayed.

  To set the aggregation period to 10 minutes, turn on the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the characters "10 minutes" and then press the operation button 9030. The message “The period is 10 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Further, when setting the aggregation period to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 79 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where the icon including the characters “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. 79 (2) As shown in the message “The setting period is 30 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. Further, when setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where the icon including the character of “60 minutes” is selected by turning the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right, The message "Setting period is 60 minutes" is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

  As described above, it is possible to set a desired aggregation period according to the operation of the player. In the example of FIG. 79, 30 minutes are set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), in the first area α, the number of winnings per general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the number of general winnings in the setting period (D1)”. In the example of FIG. 79 (3), while 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winning to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, the total value of the number of winning to general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, it is not notified that the total value has not reached the reference value.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 79 (4), while 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of prizes for the regular winning opening per 30 minutes, the total number of winnings for the general prize mouth per 30 minutes Since the value is 29, the aggregate value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, a notification (display of a message “the value is lower than the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”) indicating that the total value has not reached the reference value is displayed.

(Items related to the number of prizes for the start winning entry)
In addition, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command which specifies which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has won when a winning to the starting winning opening occurs, In the same manner as the counting process when a general winning opening designation command specifying which of the first to fourth general winning openings has been received, the number of winnings for today's first start winning opening (A1 Equivalent), "winning ratio for today's first starting winning opening (equivalent to A2)", "number of winning balls awarded based on winning today for first starting winning opening (equivalent to A3)", And "the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of today's first starting winning opening to the total number of winning balls today (equivalent to A4)", and "the second starting winning opening of today Number of winning prizes (equivalent to A1), "winning prize for today's second start winning entry" Rate (equivalent to A2), "the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of the second starting winning opening today (equivalent to A3)", and "the number of the day against the total number of prize balls today" 2) A ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning on the starting winning opening (corresponding to A4) can be totalized and displayed in the first area α.

  In addition, "the number of winning to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "the first in the low base state (1) The number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of the starting winning opening (corresponding to B3), and “the number of winning balls awarded in the low base status to the first starting winning opening in the low base status Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winnings (equivalent to B4), "number of winnings to second starting winning opening in low base status (equivalent to B1)", "second starting in low base status" Prize ratio to the winning opening (equivalent to B2), "the number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3)", and "given in the low base state In a low base state against the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, "the number of winning to the first starting winning opening in high base status (equivalent to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in high base status (corresponding to C2)", "the first in high base status (1) The number of winning balls awarded based on the winning on the starting winning opening (corresponding to C3), and "to the first starting winning opening in high base status relative to the number of winning balls awarded in high base status" Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winnings (equivalent to C4), "number of winnings to second starting winning opening in high base status (corresponding to C1)", "second starting in high base status" Prize ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2), "the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)", and "given in the high base state In high base conditions against the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, "the number of winning to the first starting winning opening in the setting period (equivalent to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)", "the first starting winning in the setting period Awarded based on the number of winning balls awarded based on winnings in the mouth (corresponding to D3), and "winning based on the first starting winning opening in the setting period for the number of winning balls awarded in the setting period "The number of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D1)", "the winning ratio to the second starting winning opening in the setting period ((D4))" "Corresponds to D2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on winning on the second starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)", and "setting for the number of winning balls awarded in the setting period Awarded based on the winning of the second start winning opening in the period Percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

(Relevant ratio (ratio), display of ratio)
In addition, in the gaming machine 901, in the gaming control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, etc.) , Also referred to as the "entry area", the number of game ball entry into the game is counted. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 901, it is possible to display predetermined information such as winning combination (continuous ratio) and winning ratio on the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 provided on the main substrate 9011.

  As described above, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the gaming board so that gaming media enter the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passing the test). Further, when conducting the test, it is confirmed at a predetermined frequency whether game media has entered the general winning area. Furthermore, even after the game machine is installed, it is confirmed as to what adjustments have been made and, as a result of the adjustment, whether game media has entered the general winning area with a frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having the general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the character ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the counting of the game balls on the main substrate 9011 and the display of the feature ratio and the like will be described.

  A main substrate 9011 shown in FIG. 82 is a substrate that performs control relating to a game. As shown in FIG. 84A, the main substrate 9011 is enclosed in a substrate case 90201, and a display monitor 9029 is disposed at the center on the back surface side of the main substrate 9011. The display monitor 9029 is disposed on the front when the main substrate 9011 is viewed. The main substrate 9011 can not be viewed in a state in which the glass door frame 903a is not opened, so the front when viewing the main substrate 9011 visually recognizes the back side of the game board 902 in a state in which the glass door frame 903a is opened. The front of the gaming machine 901 is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front of the main substrate 9011 may be in common with the front of the gaming machine 901.

  In the main substrate 9011, information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the big winning opening ( The total number of prize balls and prize balls by winning in the attacker) is input and counted, and the display monitor 9029 is a ratio of the number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. It is a ratio that the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (%) Role ratio (%) is to be displayed. The number of winning combinations (continuous ratio) is a ratio of the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters obtained as described below) by the winning to the large winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls from the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls from the winning on the large winning opening (attacker) (number of balls for winning the following items) Is the proportion of The total number of winning balls (total winning ball number below) is the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (electric chew), and the big winning opening (Attacker) and the number of prize balls by the winnings to the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (electric chew). Note that the special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable features, and by the variation of the passable width of the gaming ball, the winning probability ratio of the gaming ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is a fixed winning combination, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed feature.

  The information on the game winnings is summarized and the calculation method is the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) with 6000 winning balls (general winning balls), (2) The number of regular electric circuit prize balls (number of electric chow balls) which is the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the start winning opening (electric chew), and the special electric pole prize which is the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) Count the number of balls (attacker prize ball number). The total is regarded as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60000 straight lines (continuous ratio) (%), and a ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls number) by winning in the 1st starting opening (Heso) and general winning opening (Sode) to be counted, the ordinary electric service prize ball number (electric chew award ball number), the special electric duty The number of winning balls (the number of attackers) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. Furthermore, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of memory for 11 sets of 66000 are stored, and the total number of combinations (ratios) (%) and ratios (%) of cumulative values within the range of those numerical values are stored. It can be calculated.

  The display monitor 9029 includes 60000 combinations (ratio) (%), a ratio (%), and a cumulative combination (ratio) (%), and a ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30). Can be switched and displayed every second). That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display everything, but the number of prize balls from the winning on the first starting hole (Heso) and the winning on the second starting winning hole (electric chew) are counted up as the game progresses The number of prize balls due to the change in the number of prize balls due to the prize winnings on the large winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the number of winning balls won after displaying 60000 commercial links (continuous ratio) (%) is reflected in the ratio (%) of 60000 printed after that, There is a risk that discrepancies may occur between 60000 pieces of service reams (%) and 60000 pieces of tribute ratio (%). Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker), total winning balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented if the number is input and tabulated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of 60000 regular combinations (continuous ratio) (%)). .

As an example of calculation method below, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu) and winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) The method of calculating the item ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of acquired item balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total winning ball number refers to the total cumulative number of gaming media (winning balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the prize winning ball number refers to the total number of game media paid out by the game media winning in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the continuous winning thing winning ball number refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by the game media winning the attacker. For this reason, it is possible to obtain the combination (continuous ratio) by the following equation (1). Further, the duty ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Role ream (continuous ratio) = [number of consecutive winnings acquired balls / total number of winnings] × 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(continuous character acquisition ball number + character acquisition ball number) / total acquisition number] × 100 ... (2)

In the case where the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42000, the character ratio can be obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 as 0.70 decimal places and discarding three digits.
However, since the microcomputer used for the gaming machine can not perform the operation after the decimal point, the operation according to the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of balls obtained by the bonus is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. And this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. And divide 42000 by 600. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

  In this example, although the total number of winning balls is 60000, a 3-byte area is provided as a region for storing the total number of winning balls in order to calculate the feature ratio of a long period. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA 60h in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A 410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the bonus item acquisition ball number as well.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, 60h of the lower 1 byte is rounded off for 00EA 60h of the total number of winning balls so that calculation with a microcomputer used for a game machine is easy, and the total number of winning balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number Calculate 234 by notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  While the third calculation method facilitates calculation with a microcomputer used in a game machine, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of winning balls and the number of obtained balls are 10 times. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the feature ratio is extended, and approximates to the original value.

  In addition, the substrate case 90201 is formed of a translucent material, and the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be viewed. The substrate case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 9011 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing the heat of the electrical component of the main substrate 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is not blocked by the heat radiation holes. Here, “directly on the front” means directly in front of the main substrate 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who is trying to visually recognize the main substrate 9011 and the main substrate 9011.

  Further, the substrate case 90201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specification and the like of the main substrate 9011. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are disposed so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, when the display monitor 9029 is disposed in the first part of the main substrate 9011 (for example, the central part of the main substrate 9011), the second part different from the first part in the main substrate 9011 Alternatively, other electrical components may be arranged in a portion (for example, the peripheral portion of the main substrate 9011), and holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals may be arranged in the portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 9011. Good. In particular, in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 9029, the heat dissipation holes are preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat dissipation holes be disposed at positions not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the display monitor 9029 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information on the winning.

  Further, it is preferable to prevent the wiring from overlapping the portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, the portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. Make it According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being disturbed by the wiring.

  In addition, although the main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine, the main board 9011 may be separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components in order to avoid misidentification with the 7 segments of the display monitor 9029 It is preferable to arrange it by sandwiching. The other electronic components referred to here are desirably, for example, large control components such as a CPU.

  In addition, a storage area where information on game winnings is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the bonus ball acquisition ball number is larger than the stored value of the total ball number, or the character Initialization of the storage area where information on winning of the game is stored when an event that can not occur as a situation is detected, for example, when the value of the continuous winning object winning ball number is larger than the value of the winning ball number You may process. In addition, the error count error display or the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error count error display or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the error count display or the warning display. The error count error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the duty ratio (%), for example, assuming that the total number of obtained balls is 34,321 and the number of obtained balls is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34,321 against 19876 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912 and so on, which is calculated to be about 57.9% of the part ratio (%). In the case where calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 90100, calculation with decimal points must be avoided, so the following calculation formula is used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34,321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded off, resulting in 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the decimal part is rounded off, it is calculated that it is 57% of the part ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, it is an error on the display from the value calculated by the correct calculation There will be no

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of obtained objects are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when converted to the calculation by the gaming control microcomputer 90100, there is an error of + 0.3% at 32799/327 = 100.3%. For example, when the decimal point is rounded down and the calculation is performed, the correct value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the ratio (%) (or combination (ratio) (%)) can be displayed with a very small error also on the display of an error of 1%.

  Further, in the case of using the above calculation method, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation can not be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Furthermore, the error is gradually increased when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in an even larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specified number or more is counted by the counter, the ratio (%) of the display monitor 9029, Even if the display is not performed or the display may be displayed, the error may be large even if the dedicated lamp emits light, an alarm sound is output, or the displayed value is blinked or displayed. Good.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the part ratio (%) and the parting series (ratio) (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds) indicate. In this case, for example, while displaying a part ratio (%) for 30 seconds, a phenomenon occurs that a game medium is newly awarded to a power chew or an attacker, and a value calculated according to it is obtained after 30 seconds. If it is displayed as the value of the consecutive ratio) (%), there is a possibility that the values of the part ratio (%) and the consecutive part (%) may differ. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display the values calculated and calculated within the same interrupt as the part ratio (%) and the parting ratio (series ratio) (%).

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 segments are provided), the display can not be made 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 83 and 84A can display numerical values in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, numerical values may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

  In the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of balls acquired, the number of balls acquired as a feature, and the number of balls obtained as a continuous combination are counted in the counter. A sensor is provided to detect that the game medium has won, and the number of winning balls is individually counted based on the detection result, and then the number-of-articles-acquired ball number counter, the number-of-continuous-items acquired ball number counter You may calculate the value to be aggregated. In addition, based on the detection result, a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge path for discharging the gaming medium for which the attacker has won and the gaming medium for which the electric Chu has won are combined are used. It is also possible to calculate a value to be added to the character acquisition ball number counter and the continuous character acquisition ball number counter. Hereinafter, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described where it is detected that the game medium has won by the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew, and the numbers of winning balls are individually counted based on the detection results.

  As shown in FIG. 82, a display monitor 9029 is connected to the main substrate 9011 in the gaming machine 901. As shown in FIG. 83, the main substrate 9011 is provided on the back side of the game board 902 (see FIG. 34) provided in the game machine frame 903 in the game machine 901. On the back side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, peripheral control boards such as an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. There is. The main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position not overlapping the peripheral substrates other than the main substrate 9011. Note that the main substrate 9011 may overlap with these peripheral substrates. In particular, the main substrates 9011 may overlap so as to be above the peripheral substrates.

  The RAM 90102 in the main substrate 9011 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, and a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 9021A. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of the game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  Further, a clear switch is connected to the main substrate 9011. The clear switch is disposed on the back side of the game board 902 at a position where an employee or the like can not easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, data to be used for combination (ratio) and ratio stored in the RAM 90102 described later is cleared. Clear Switch is a switch that is operated when it becomes impossible to recalculate the ratio (combination ratio) or ratio, such as when failure occurs in calculation of the ratio (combination ratio) or ratio, etc. It is. For this reason, it is a switch which does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination (continuous ratio) and a ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main substrate 9011 in addition to the data clear.

  Further, an RTC 90106 is provided on the main substrate 9011. The main substrate 9011 can detect the current time by the RTC 90106. The RTC 90106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by performing initial setting, but in this embodiment, the RTC 90106 can measure the operating time of the game arcade.

  The main substrate 9011 is accommodated in a substrate case 90201 as shown in FIG. 84 (A). A caulking pin 9011 B is attached to the substrate case 90201. By providing the caulking pin 9011 B, the main substrate 9011 is completely sealed in the substrate case 90201, and an illegal act on the main substrate 9011 is prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

  Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main substrate 9011. In addition, a sealing seal 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 for proving that the main substrate 9011 is sealed. The sealing seal 9011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 90201. The sealing seal 9011S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 9011 and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is interrupted, such as the front of the display monitor 9029. Thus, the display monitor 9029 is disposed at a position not hidden by the seal seal 9011S.

  The display monitor 9029 includes four-digit display units of a first display unit 9029A, a second display unit 9029B, a third display unit 9029C, and a fourth display unit 9029D. Each of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D is composed of seven segments each composed of seven segments that draw the character of "8" and dots arranged at the lower right of the seven segments. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 84 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 9029. The aggregation period is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B in the upper two digits, and numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D in the lower two digits. In the display No. 1, short-term combinations (continuous ratio) are displayed, and in the display No. 2, short-term ratios are displayed. In the display No. 3, the total-cumulative combination (continuous ratio) is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the total-cumulative combination ratio is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (the number of acquired balls) is 60000. The period for which the total total is to be determined means the period of totaling after starting calculation of the ratio (combination ratio), ratio of combination, or total period after the calculation of ratio (combination ratio), ratio once reset. Do.

  In the above example, the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the number of winning combinations may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by winning to the large winning opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of winning balls. In addition, the winning combination, the winning total number of balls, the winning combination of the total number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning a second starting winning opening during high base state and the big winning opening during the big hit gaming state It may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by

  In the case where the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the short-term combination of display No. 2 is displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. In addition, when the short-term combination (display ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed, the first display 9029A and the second display unit 9029B display the short-run combination (transmission ratio) in percentage (% display). When the short-term-combination ratio of display No 2 is displayed, the short-term-combination ratio is displayed in percentage (in%) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B.

  When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 (continuous ratio) is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. In the case, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. In addition, when the total accumulated combination of display No. 3 (continuous ratio) is displayed, the total display combination (continuous ratio) is displayed in percentage on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D (% display) When the total cumulative combination ratio of display No 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D.

  The main substrate 9011 is a game ball that enters the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening when calculating the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio. Tallying the number of entries. In the main processing, the CPU 90103 performs the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general A state confirmation process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 9024D.

  In the state confirmation processing of each switch, it is specified to which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first starting port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the second starting opening switch 9022 B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, When the value of the large winning number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D The first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, the fourth general winning number counter By adding the value, it counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

  As described above, the steps for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area are executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch state confirmation process) Therefore, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of lack of capacity due to an increase in the execution program. .

  The CPU 90103 of the main substrate 9011 calculates the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening based on the counted number of gaming balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls paid out by one winning for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is predetermined for each winning opening.

  The number of winning balls for each winning opening classified here is, as shown in FIG. 85, a general winning opening winning ball (a winning ball for winning a first general winning opening to a fourth general winning opening (Sode)), 1st start winning a prize winning ball (a winning ball by the winning a prize to the first starting winning a prize mouth (heso)), a regular electric circuit winning a prize ball (a winning a prize ball by a winning a prize to a electric chew), a special electric winning a prize ball (a winning a prize to the attacker The number of balls awarded by The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of winning balls. The CPU 90103 separately counts the number of game ball wins to the general winning opening and the number of game ball wins to the first starting opening, but the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first start opening The number of winning game balls may be collected and counted. Also, although the number of prize balls for the general winning prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting mouth ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general winning mouth ball and the number of first winning mouth balls The number of winning balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 90102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing these winning balls. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of prize balls obtained by winning into each winning opening for every 6,000 number of prize balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer is provided with a 0-th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls. The number of winning balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added to the zeroth storage area. Eleven storage areas of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store data of 256 × 256 = 65536, and up to 6000 data can be stored with room.

  Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area of the total sum and the total sum of the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, for each winning opening. The storage area for 10 sets of totals and total totals is configured with a maximum of 3 bytes of counter, so it can store 256 x 256 x 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60000 pieces of data have a margin. It can be stored.

  Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a combination (combination ratio) combination ratio storage area for storing a combination of 10 sets and a total cumulative combination ratio and a combination (combination ratio). In the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011, the winning combination of 10 sets and total cumulative ratio and combination (continuous ratio) are calculated by the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening of 10 sets and total cumulative total The combination ratio of 10 sets and the total total and the combination (combination ratio) are stored in a combination (combination ratio) combination storage area. The combination (combination ratio) combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and combination (combination ratio) of 10 sets and total cumulative total is composed of a maximum of 1 byte counter. For example, when storing the combination ratio and combination (total ratio) of the 10 sets and the total total, by an integer, it can be stored with a maximum of 1 byte counter with a margin.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main substrate 9011 will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the built-in register, the ROM 90101, the RAM 90102, and the like described above. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 86, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 has a built-in ROM area of 16K bytes in the memory space from 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; the same applies hereinafter) Assigned to The CPU 90103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area of FE00H to FEBFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via the built-in register area.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is allocated to the RWM area (internal RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 90102 and write data to the RAM 90102. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC 0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87, a use area program area, a use area data area, a non-use area program area, and a non-use area data area are allocated to the built-in ROM area. In addition, a free area is allocated between the use area program area and the use area data area. Similarly, free areas are allocated between the use area data area and the non-use area program area and between the non-use area program area and the non-use area data area. The CPU 90103 designates this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 90101.

  Among these, the use area program area is composed of instruction data (op code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplemental data (operands) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. Data of game related programs related to the progression of the game are stored. The game related program stored in the use area program area includes a game control program which is a program for controlling a game, and a special symbol display output program which is a program for displaying a special figure, a common drawing, etc. There is. The game control program and the special symbol display output program are stored in the use area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for controlling the progress of the game, such as a big hit lottery program for lottery for the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  The non-use area program area is composed of instruction data (op code) for the CPU 90103 to calculate combination ratio and ratio, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. The data of a program (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a combination (combination ratio) combination ratio program) for calculating or displaying the combination ratio (combination ratio) and the combination ratio is stored. In the parting-related (combating ratio) parting ratio related program, a combination displaying (combating ratio) parting ratio calculation program and a parting-training ratio (combating ratio) and a parting ratio monitor for calculating the parting-up (combination ratio) and the parting ratio monitor A combination (combination ratio) combination display output program for display at 9029 is included. In the non-use area program area, a combination series (combination ratio) ratio calculation program and a combination series (combination ratio) combination display output program are stored. The combination series (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

  Here, the use area program area and the non-use area program area will be further described. FIG. 88 shows a structure of a use area program area and a non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 88, in the use area program area, as a game-related program, "switch input process", "digit output process 1", "jump process to non-use area (digit output process 2)", "error detection process" "Random number update processing" "Special drawing processing" "general processing" "information output processing" "prize ball processing" "test terminal processing" "solenoid processing" "memory display processing" "error notification processing" "non-use area (role Each program of “jump process to ratio calculation process” is stored. Further, in the non-use program area, respective programs of combination (combination ratio) “digit output processing 2”, “jump processing to used area (error detection processing)”, and “combination calculation processing” are stored. In the CPU 90103, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common and executed in one interrupt processing. Also, in digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2, the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, and the display monitor 9029 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, instead of dynamic lighting, static lighting may be performed.

  Among these processes, the program that performs "Digit Output Process 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs "Digit Output Process 2" corresponds to the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display program . Also, a program that performs "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter, also referred to as "game progress control processing") corresponds to a game control program, and a program that performs "combination calculation processing" is a series of winning combinations It corresponds to a combination ratio calculation program. In the combination series (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program, the combination pattern (combination ratio) and combination ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when displaying the calculated combination (combination ratio) and combination ratio on the display monitor 9029, in other words, The light emission patterns of the plurality of LEDs (the first segment SG1 to the seventh segment SG7 and the dot SG8 shown in FIG. 100) in the display monitor 9029 are determined.

  The use area data area stores reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the use program area. Further, in the non-use area data area, data used for displaying a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, in the non-use area data area, there is provided a storage area for storing the total cumulative total of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a combination (combination ratio) combination storage area for the total cumulative. In the non-use area data area, there is an active buffer with a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer with a 1st storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls per winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for total sum and a combination (combination ratio) storage area for 10 sets are provided.

  In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each data described above (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) If the management data) is data of a byte count (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, it is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  In addition, a use area program area in which the special symbol display output program and game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 90103, and a combination (combination ratio) combination display output program and combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program Different upper addresses (head addresses) are set to the stored non-use area program areas.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, the upper address of the subroutine in the use area program area where the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is "00". The upper address of the subroutine in the non-use area program area in which the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program and the combination (combination ratio) combination calculation program are stored is set to “01”. Thus, the upper address of the program stored in the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the use area program area.

  "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the program stored in the used area program area as a call instruction for each of these programs. Also, for programs stored in the non-use area program area, only "CALLmn" is used, and "CALLF" is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area program area are called by "CALLF" or "CALLmn", but are called by "CALLF" here. Also, the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program and combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area program area is called by “CALLmn” and called by “CALLF”. Absent. Comparing these calling instructions, "CALLF" is a calling instruction having a short tone and a light capacity as compared to "CALLmn".

  The CPU 90103 also includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program whose upper address is omitted. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, when calling a program stored in the used area program area, a fixed value "00" is set, and when calling a program stored in the non-used area program area, a fixed value "01" is set. Ru. Thus, after setting a fixed value in the upper address of the use area program area, the Q register may set a fixed value in the upper address of the non-use area program area to execute the program in the non-use area program area. It is possible.

  Next, the execution order of programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 will be described. The CPU 90103 executes programs in the order of the addresses in principle. Therefore, referring to FIG. 88, CPU 90103 first executes "switch input processing" in the use area program area, and then "digit output processing 1" according to the special symbol display output program in executing the program. Run. When starting the interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 digit signals for the special drawing and the drawing obtained in the previous routine are displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display 9020 Execute processing to output to etc.

  After executing the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 jumps from the use area program area to the non-use area program area and executes "digit output process 2" according to the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program. . When jumping from the use area program area to the non-use area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same is true thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting to the display monitor 9029 a digit signal regarding a winning combination (continuous ratio) and a winning ratio obtained in the previous routine. For this reason, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are successively executed.

  After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 jumps from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, and performs a process according to the game control program. When jumping from the non-use area program area to the use area program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same is true thereafter. In the processing according to the game control program, the CPU 90103 performs "error detection processing" "random number update processing" "special drawing processing" "general drawing processing" "information output processing" "prize ball processing" "test terminal processing" "solenoid processing" The "memory display process" and the "error notification process" are sequentially executed. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a drawing, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

  The CPU 90103 executes the “error notification process”, and when the process according to the third program is completed, jumps from the use area program to the non-use area program, and “combinations according to the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program Execute ratio calculation processing. The CPU 90103 calculates a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio by “combination ratio calculation processing”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 90103 executes "digit output process 1" and "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display The display of the special drawing and the common drawing to the container 9020 and the display of the linking (continuous ratio) and the ratio to the display monitor 9029 are executed.

  Next, the configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 90 shows another configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 90, in the use area program area, “switch input processing” “error detection processing” “random number update processing” “special drawing processing” “general drawing processing” “information output processing” “prize Programs of "ball processing", "test terminal processing", "solenoid processing", "memory display processing", "error notification processing" and "digit output processing 1" are stored. Further, in the non-use program area, respective programs of “digit output process 2” and “combination calculation process” are stored.

  Next, the execution order of programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 90, when executing a program, the CPU 90103 first executes “switch input processing” in the use area program area, and then performs processing according to the third program. In the processing according to the game control program, the CPU 90103 performs "error detection processing" "random number update processing" "special drawing processing" "general drawing processing" "information output processing" "prize ball processing" "test terminal processing" "solenoid processing" The "memory display process" and the "error notification process" are sequentially executed. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special drawing, a drawing, etc. by processing according to these game control programs.

  Subsequently, the CPU 130 executes “digit output processing 1” according to the special symbol display output program. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 digit signals for the special drawing and the drawing obtained in the previous routine are displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display 9020 Execute processing to output to etc. However, it is also possible to output a digit signal about a special drawing or a common drawing obtained in this routine.

  Then, the CPU 90103 shifts directly to the non-use area program area, and executes “digit output processing 2” according to the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting to the display monitor 9029 a digit signal regarding a winning combination (continuous ratio) and a winning ratio obtained in the previous routine. For this reason, "digit output processing 1" and "digit output processing 2" are successively executed.

  After that, when the digit output process 2 is performed, the CPU 90103 executes “combination ratio calculation processing” according to the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program. The CPU 90103 calculates a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio by “combination ratio calculation processing”, and generates a digit signal regarding the combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, and the like. Thus, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 90103 executes "digit output process 1" and "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display The display of the special drawing and the common drawing to the container 9020 and the display of the linking (continuous ratio) and the ratio to the display monitor 9029 are executed.

  For example, regarding the configurations of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 88 is taken as an area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. In addition, the configuration of the use area program area and the non-use area program area in the built-in ROM area is the configuration shown in FIG. 88 except for the jump processing between the use area program area and the non-use area program area Let's say C.

  In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 91A, in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, a special symbol display output program → a combination (combination ratio) combination display output program → a game control program → The processing is executed in the order of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program. Also, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 91B, in the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, game control program → special symbol display output program → combination (combination ratio) combination display output program → combination (( The process is executed in the order of the consecutive ratio) combination ratio calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 91C, the special symbol display output program → game control program → combination series (continuous ratio) combination display output program → combination series (continuous ratio) combination ratio calculation program Processing is performed in the order of Hereinafter, interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 91 (A) is referred to as first interrupt processing, interrupt processing whose procedure is shown in FIG. 91 (B) is referred to as second interrupt processing, and interrupt is shown in FIG. 91 (C). The process is called third interrupt process.

  Next, control for displaying a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio for the display monitor 9029 by the main substrate 9011 will be described. Here, the main substrate 9011 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items related to a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio. FIG. 92A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 92A, when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, first, a short-term winning combination (link ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of short-term commercial run (continuous ratio) of display No. 1 is displayed in green. As shown in FIG. 92 (B-1), in the case of display No. 1 short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the character “y” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and “6. on the second display portion 9029B”. The character "is displayed. In addition, a short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display No. 1 is continued for 30 seconds, the short-term duty ratio No. 2 is displayed. The display of No. 2 short-term executives (continuous ratio) is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 92 (B-2), in the display of the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2, the character "y" is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

  When the display No. 2 is continued for 30 seconds, the total cumulative number of consecutive No. 3 (continuous ratio) is displayed. The display of total number 3 in total (cumulative ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 92 (B-3), the character of "A" is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and "6" on the second display portion 9029B. The characters “.” Are displayed. In addition, a total cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative role series (continuous ratio) is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display No. 3 is continued for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative duty ratio of display No 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total-cum-combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 92 (B-4), the letter "A" is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the letter "7." on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative winning ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

  When the display No. 4 is continued for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 92 (B-5), a short run combination (link ratio) of No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) to display No. 4 of display No. 1 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Moreover, as for the color of the display, only the short-term combination (display ratio) of display No. 1 is green, and the total combination of short-term ratio of display No. 2 to display No. 4 is red. As described above, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the short-term service combination (continuous ratio), the short-term ratio, the total cumulative combination (continuous ratio), and the total-cumulative ratio every 30 seconds.

  Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 9029 is not limited to the above content and can be determined as appropriate. For example, in the above example, characters such as "y" and "A" are displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display unit 9029B to the fourth display unit 9029D. Characters may be displayed on the display unit 9029B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display unit 9029A, the third display unit 9029C, and the fourth display unit 9029D.

  In addition, numerical values may be displayed on all of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, and a predetermined ratio and the like may be indicated only by the numerical values. Alternatively, characters may be displayed at two locations of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, and numerical values may be displayed at the other two locations. In addition, a numerical range of characters may be set, and only characters may be displayed on the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" may be displayed as "Q", and "61" to "100" may be displayed as "R". Also, the characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, and may be hiragana, katakana, kanji and the like. Further, not a character but a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

  Further, when displaying a numerical value or the like on the display monitor 9029, the color or the display mode may be changed according to the displayed numerical value. For example, in displaying the winning ratio, it may be displayed in “blue” when the displayed winning ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and may be displayed in “red” when exceeding the predetermined value. In addition, when the part ratio to be displayed is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be lit and may be blinked when it exceeds the predetermined value. In the blink display, any display among the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D may blink. For example, the whole of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D may be blinked, or two of the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, or the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. The two may be blinked. About the display part which is not blinking, you may make it light or you may make it light-extinguish.

  Further, on the main substrate 9011, when the total number of balls in the zeroth storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the zeroth to tenth storage areas in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, update the storage of the total (total ratio) total storage area for 10 sets of total and total cumulative storage areas, and the combination and ratio (total ratio) of 10 sets and total cumulative totals .

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 93, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 0th memory area to the 9th memory area is “27” “81” “120” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66” “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6,000, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is “27”, “81” “ Update to "120" "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Further, the number of winning balls in the 0 th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of winning balls in the 10 th storage area is erased.

  When the number of winning balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the stored number of winning balls may be once erased and then a new number of winning balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new winning number may be stored by overwriting the stored winning number.

  Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 82 includes a door open sensor that detects the open of the glass door frame 903a. The opening of the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when the employee performs, but often corresponds to an abnormality when a person other than the employee performs. Therefore, in this embodiment, a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main substrate 9011 when it detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a.

  Door opening includes opening of a normal glass door frame 903a by an employee and opening of an abnormal glass door frame 903a by persons other than the employee. Here, the detection of the door opening is performed on the assumption that the abnormal glass door frame 903a is opened. In addition, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 903a when the normal glass door frame 903a is opened, the door is detected as being open, but the employee or the like recognizes that the glass door frame 903a is opened. Because there are many, it is possible to prevent a particular problem from occurring.

  Subsequently, control relating to display of combination (combination ratio) and combination ratio performed by the main substrate 9011 will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initialization, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply substrate is started, the data used for displaying the ratio (ratio) or ratio stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. Ru. The data used to display the combination ratio and ratio stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 90102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Further, the register setting of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. After initialization, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The combination (combination ratio) and ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. In addition, among the processing (series ratio) and ratio related processing, the series (combination ratio) ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S90209 in FIG. 97), and the other processes Running ratio calculation program is executed. The combination calculation process in the combination (combination ratio) ratio calculation program also includes other processes of calculation of combination (combination ratio) and combination ratio. However, in the part ratio calculation process, processing of calculating the part series (series ratio) and the part ratio is performed, and a program corresponding to other processes in the combination series (series ratio) part ratio calculation program is separately prepared. Good.

  FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a process of association (combination ratio) and ratio related processing. In the main substrate 9011, as shown in FIG. 94, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio related process (step S90101). Whether or not the abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not the clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), a warning display preparation is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S90101; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S90103). In the winning information, the gaming ball is detected by any of the first starting opening switch 9022A and the second starting opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Acquired by

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the current time is within business hours (step S90104). The RTC 90106 measures and determines whether the current time is within business hours. As a result, if the current time is within business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an open signal is transmitted from the door open sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor, and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the gaming ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time. It is determined whether or not it is (step S90106). As the unit time and the predetermined number of balls here, numerical values are set assuming a state in which it is impossible to win in a normal game. Specifically, since the firing of the game balls is 100 shots for a maximum of 1 minute, for example, it can be appropriately determined with an upper limit of 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is five when the unit time is one second, or thirty when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 90106. Also, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of detected game balls by the count switch 9023.

  As a result, when the gaming ball has not won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of winning balls adding the number of balls according to the winning information obtained in step S90103 is added. The process is performed (step S90107). In addition, a prize ball number addition process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when the warning display preparation is performed, the processing related to the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio is ended as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general prize winning opening (Sode), the general prize winning opening (Heso), the ordinary electric utility prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric award ball (attacker) in the 0th memory area shown in FIG. Each prize ball number is added.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition processing, the general winning opening (Sode), the general winning opening (Heso), the ordinary electric service winning ball (electric chow), the special electric symbol winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer Calculate the total number of balls for each number of balls. Here, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Move it. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed out (step S90108; NO), the processing in conjunction (combination ratio) / combination ratio is ended. If the calculation timer is up (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning balls (total of winning balls) obtained by adding in step S90107 is the calculated number (step S90110). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, and for example, a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The total number of winning balls can be slightly less than 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number be a number slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout number of balls from 6,000.

  As a result, if the number of winning balls (total winning balls) has not become the calculated number (step S90110; NO), the processing related to combination (combination ratio) and ratio is ended. If the number of winning balls is the calculated number (step S90110; YES), the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term ratio, the cumulative ratio (continuous ratio) (total cumulative ratio (continuous ratio)), and the cumulative ratio (total cumulative ratio) are respectively calculated. Therefore, the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term ratio, the cumulative combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparation for the combination (combination ratio) and combination ratio is performed (step S90112), and the combination (combination ratio) and combination ratio processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), and if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), an attacker may use an attacker per unit time in step S90106. If it is determined that the gaming ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more (step S90106; YES), an abnormal count error display preparation is made (step S90113).

  Next, a combination (combination ratio) and ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the part-time- (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 95, in the processing of combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control processing, it is judged whether preparation for combination combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display has been completed (step S90201). If it is determined that the winning combination (continuous ratio) / combination ratio preparation processing has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether preparation for displaying an abnormal count error has been completed (step S90202).

  As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal count error display preparation is completed (step S90202; YES), the abnormal count error display is performed (step S90203). The error count error display can be appropriately performed. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Also, when displaying an abnormal count error, a predetermined abnormal count error may be displayed on another display device, for example, the image display device 905 and the first special symbol display device 904A on the second special symbol display device 904B, etc. The game effect lamp 909 may be turned on or off in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, predetermined warning sounds may be generated from the speakers 908L, 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine provided on the main substrate 9011. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the error count error display is performed, the processing for continuous combination (continuous ratio) and ratio display control ends. If it is determined in step S90202 that it is not determined whether the abnormal count error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), the warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may blink or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029 in order to indicate that a warning is made. Alternatively, display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 9029. Thus, it is preferable that the warning display be performed in a more prominent manner than the other displays. In addition, after the error count error display is performed, the process may proceed to the judgment (step S90204) whether or not the warning preparation is completed. Here, when it is determined that the warning preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), the abnormal count error display and the warning display are performed. In order to perform the abnormal count error display and the warning display on the display monitor 9029, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeated for several seconds, for example, at intervals of 5 seconds. Moreover, you may display by another display method.

  In addition, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, etc., on another display device, for example, the image display device 905 and the first special symbol display device 904A. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on or off in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine provided on the main substrate 9011. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the warning display is performed, the combination series (combination ratio) and ratio control processing is ended. Also, if it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (step S90204; NO), the winning combination (continuous ratio) / combination ratio control processing is ended.

  Further, when it is determined that the part-time-run (continuous ratio) / combination-of-combinations display preparation is completed (step S90201; YES), display restriction confirmation processing is performed (step S90206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to restrict the display of the winning combination (continuous ratio) / combination ratio is executed. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the display restriction confirmation process.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether a door opening required error has been detected (step S90301). The door opening error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 903 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. As errors occurring in the gaming machine 901 except for the abnormal count error, there are various errors shown in FIG. 98, for example. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error Magnet error (magnetic error) is an error due to detection of a magnetic anomaly. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main substrate 9011 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. Also, security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize Ball Abnormality Error A prize ball abnormal error is an error due to detection of a predetermined number of, for example, 2000 or more abnormal number balls. The abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball to be paid out when the gaming ball has won a prize exceeding the count number of the large winning opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when there is no payout of the prize ball while detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning opening. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when a payout switch abnormality is detected or when a payout case abnormality is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating an error that has occurred, such as performing an error cancellation.
Error 4: Out-of-ball error Out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when the out-of-play game ball is not on the back side of the game board 902 when the out-of-ball state is detected and the game ball is detected winning into the winning opening. The out-of-ball error is an error that is released when the supply of gaming balls is started.
Error 5: Radio wave abnormality error A radio wave abnormality error is an error due to detection of a radio wave abnormality. The radio wave abnormal error is an error that is released by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 9011 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when communication between the main board 9011 and the payout control board is recovered.
Error 7: Card unit error A card unit error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 9011 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error released when communication between the main substrate 9011 and the card unit is recovered.
Error 8: Full Tank Error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the plate (upper plate or lower plate) from which the gaming balls are paid out becomes full and payout of the gaming balls becomes impossible. The full tank error is canceled by removing the game ball from the plate from which the game ball is paid out and the tank is not full.
Error 9: Feature first start error The first feature start error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when starting a feature for the first time. The first feature start-up error is canceled by pressing the operation button 9030.
Error 10: Incorrect prize error Unauthorized prize error is an error that occurs when the game ball intrudes into the big winning opening other than operating. In the gaming machine 901, since the special winning opening is only the special variable winning ball device 907, an incorrect winning error is not detected, and this is an error that occurs in a gaming machine having two or more large winning openings. When an incorrect winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main substrate 9011 to the hall computer. The incorrect winning error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, three minutes, has passed since the security information was output.
Error 11: RTC-SRAM Abnormal Error The RTC-SRAM abnormal error is an error that occurs when turning on the power switch, detecting an RTC abnormal, or detecting a backup failure. The RTC-SRAM abnormal error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example 60 seconds, has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main substrate 9011 to the hole computer. The time for which the security information is output is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds, has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 13: Vibration detection device abnormality error The vibration detection device abnormality error is an error that is detected when vibration occurs in the gaming machine. The vibration detection device abnormal error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds, has elapsed since the occurrence.
Error 14: Door Opening Error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 903a is opened from the gaming machine frame 903 or when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is canceled when the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 which has been opened is closed.

  Among these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening errors that require opening from the outer frame of the gaming machine frame 903 to cancel the errors. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 are errors that do not require opening from the outer frame of the gaming machine frame 903 in order to cancel the error, and are not door opening required errors. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, it is an unnecessary error to determine whether it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903.

  Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 96, it is determined whether a door opening required error has been detected, in other words, whether any door opening required error from error 1 to error 7 has been detected (step S90301). If the door opening required error is detected (step S90301; YES), it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S90302).

  Here, if the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90302; NO), the door opening required error flag is set (step S90303). If the door open required error flag is set (step S90302; YES), the process directly proceeds to step S90304.

  Next, it is determined whether the measurement timer is set (step S90304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time for which the restriction on the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display is continued after the door opening error is released. The measurement timer is a timer that measures time in a set state, and is a timer that does not measure time in a reset state.

  The time for continuing the restriction on the combination (combination ratio) ratio display after the door open error has been released can be, for example, the time required for releasing the door open error or a time that is somewhat longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. In addition, it may be a long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required to clear the door opening error may be uniform or may be set according to the type of the door opening error. For example, errors 1, 2 and 5 released by turning off the power switch shorten the time required to release the door opening error, and the error of the error 3 that needs to be eliminated is a prize ball error etc. The time required to release the door open error may be extended.

  If it is determined in step S90304 that the measurement timer is set (step S90304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S90305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S90304; NO), the process directly proceeds to step S90306. When the door opening required error is detected, the state where the measurement timer is set is a state in which the door opening required error occurs again after the door opening required error is once canceled. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S90305, if the door opening required error is detected again during measurement of the time by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is canceled. The time can be measured by a measurement timer.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the door open required error flag is set (step S90306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306; YES), the display control of the winning combination (continuous ratio) is executed (step S90307), and the display restriction confirmation processing is ended. If the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is ended. For example, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio is canceled as the combination ratio display restriction.

  If it is determined in step S90301 that the door opening required error is not detected (step S90301; NO), it is determined whether the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308). As a result, when it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90308; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306.

  If it is determined in step S90308 that the door open required error flag is set (step S90308; YES), the door open required error is once detected, and then the door open required error is released. (Step S90309). Subsequently, it is determined whether the measurement timer is set (step S90310).

  If the measurement timer has not been set (step S90310; NO), it is immediately after the door open error has been released. In other words, it is the state of flowing this flow only after the door open error has been released. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S90311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for which the restriction on the combination (combination ratio) combination display is continued after the door open error has been released.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S90312). If the measurement timer is set in step S90310 (step S90310; YES), it is determined whether the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S90312).

  If the process proceeds through step S90311, the measurement timer is not at 0 (the time is not up) (step S90312; NO), the process directly proceeds to step S90306. In addition, after the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S90310 that the measurement timer is set (step S90310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the flow loop, and it is determined that the measurement timer has timed out when time t has elapsed since the measurement timer was set.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the measurement timer is up (t = 0) (step S90312). Here, if the measurement timer is up (step S90312; YES), the measurement timer and the door open necessary error flag are cleared (step S90313). If the measurement timer has not timed out (step S90312; NO), the process proceeds directly to step S90306 without clearing the measurement timer and the door open required error flag.

  If the process does not pass through step S90313, it is determined that the door open required error flag is set in step S90306 because the door open required error flag is not cleared (step S90306: YES). Therefore, a combination (combination ratio) combination display restriction is performed. When the process proceeds through step S90313, it is determined that the door open required error flag is not set in step S90306 because the door open required error flag is cleared (step S90306; NO). Therefore, the combination (combination ratio) combination display restriction will not be executed. Thus, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the combination (combination ratio) combination display restriction is to be executed. In summary, in the display restriction check process, the detection time until the door opening necessity error is detected and after the door opening necessity error is canceled, the measurement time (= time to continue restriction on the combination ratio display) is passed. In the time of, the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display is restricted, and in the other time, the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display is not limited.

  Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 95, based on the determination made in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S90206, it is determined whether to execute display restriction (step S90207). As a result, when the display restriction is executed (step S90207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S90208), and the display of the winning combination (ratio) is restricted. Then, the processing of continuous combination (continuous ratio) and ratio display control ends.

  If the display restriction is not performed (step S90207; NO), the display switching control process is performed (step S90209), and the winning combination (continuous ratio) / combination ratio display control process is ended. The display switching control process is performed according to the procedure shown in FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 97, in the display switching control process, it is first determined whether or not short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) display is performed on the display monitor 9029 (step S90401). If the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) display is performed (step S90401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combining (continuous ratio) display starts. (Step S90402). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms). The predetermined time may be shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or may be longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

  Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90402; NO), the display switching control process is ended. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term (continuous ratio) display remains on. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90402; YES), short-term winning ratio display control is performed (step S90403), and the display switching control process is ended. In the short-term ratio display control, a short-term ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure an elapsed time from the start of the short-term ratio display.

  If it is determined in step S90401 that the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) display is not performed (step S90401; NO), it is determined whether the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S90404) . If the short-term-combination-ratio display is being performed (step S90404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term-combination-ratio display starts (step S90405).

  Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90405; NO), the display switching control process is ended. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term duty ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90404; YES), the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S90406), and the display switching control process is ended. In the cumulative combination display (continuous ratio) display control, while displaying the cumulative combination (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 9029, set the timer to measure the elapsed time after starting the cumulative combination (continuous ratio) display .

  If it is determined in step S90404 that the short-term-combination ratio display has not been performed (step S90404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination (continuous ratio) display has been performed (step S90407) . If the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display is performed (step S90407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combining (continuous ratio) display has been started. (Step S90408).

  Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90408; NO), the display switching control process is ended. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative running combination (continuous ratio) display continues to be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90408; YES), the cumulative winning combination ratio display control is performed (step S90409), and the display switching control process is ended. In cumulative ratio display control, a cumulative ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure an elapsed time after starting the cumulative ratio display.

  If it is determined in step S90407 that the cumulative winning combination (continuous ratio) display is not performed (step S90407; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative winning combination display is performed (step S90410) . If the cumulative winning ratio display is being performed (step S90410; YES), it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative winning ratio display was started (step S90411).

  Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90411; NO), the display switching control process is ended. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative running combination (continuous ratio) display continues to be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90411; YES), short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) display control is performed (step S90412), and the display switching control process is ended. In the short run combination display (continuous ratio) display control, the short run combination (continuous ratio) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time from the start of the short run combination (continuous ratio) display. . Thus, the display switching control process ends.

  In the short-term-combination-ratio display control in step S90403 described above, digit output processing 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, digit output process 2 by the second program is executed also in the cumulative combination (continuous ratio) display control in step S90406, the cumulative combination ratio display control in step S90409, and the short-term combination (continuous ratio) display control in step S90412. Be done.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, and digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103. One cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 90103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is about 2 ms, for example.

  FIG. 99 (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the flow of signals when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor etc., and FIG. 99 (B) is the flow of signals when the first interrupt process is executed It is a time chart which shows the relation between and the display state of a monitor etc. Here, the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1) displays “0” on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1) and the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) displays symbols (characters) corresponding to “y”. An example in which a symbol (character) equivalent to “1” is displayed on the symbol display device 904A and a symbol (character) corresponding to “6.” is displayed on the display monitor 9029 is assumed.

  In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 91 (C), a game progress process (a special symbol display output program) and a digit output process 2 (combination (combination ratio) combination display output program) The game control program is executed. For this reason, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and digit output processing 2 (combination (combination ratio) combination display output program), as shown in FIG. 99 (A). As a result, a delay occurs in the digit output (DG).

  As a result, in the first cycle, a symbol corresponding to "0" is clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1), but a problem occurs in display on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2). Specifically, the problem with the example in which the character corresponding to “y” is to be displayed on the display monitor 9029 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 100, the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D in the display monitor 9029 are provided with seven LEDs and eight LEDs arranged in the lower right dot. Assuming that these LEDs are the first segment SG1, the second segment SG2, the third segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the fifth segment SG5, the sixth segment SG6, the seventh segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the second segment SG2 The three-segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 display light. This failure occurs, for example, because the control not to turn on the display monitor 9029 in the cycle before the first cycle has penetrated to the first cycle. The second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 are clearly displayed for the characters corresponding to "6." displayed in the second cycle, but the first segment The SG1, the fifth segment SG5, and the dots SG8 are displayed light. This defect is also caused, for example, because the control for lighting the LED of the character corresponding to “y” on the display monitor 9029 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

  On the other hand, in the first interrupt processing shown in FIG. 99 (B), digit output processing 2 (special combination display ratio program) is executed following digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) . Therefore, there is almost no difference between digit output processing 1 (special symbol display output program) and digit output processing 2 (combination (combination ratio) combination display output program), as shown in FIG. 99 (B). As shown in, there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

  As a result, in the first cycle, a symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1). In addition, all characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2). Thus, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the display failure on the LED of the display monitor 9029.

  As described above, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 displays the short-term service combination (continuous ratio), the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination (continuous ratio), and the cumulative combination ratio. . In addition, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main substrate 9011 that controls the game so as not to hinder visibility. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made with respect to game nails (obstacle nails), windmills, etc. provided on the game board.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 is disposed on the front when the main substrate 9011 is viewed. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 can be prevented from being disturbed. Further, the main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position where the heat dissipation hole provided in the substrate case 90201 is not directly in front. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 from being disturbed.

  Further, the main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position not overlapping with the peripheral substrates other than the main substrate 9011. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 from being obscured by the peripheral substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 from being disturbed.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the relationship between the winning balls paid out by passing the electric chew or the attacker and the winning balls paid out by passing the general winning opening, and the ratio can do. In addition, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short run (run ratio) and a cumulative run (run ratio) at predetermined intervals. For this reason, since it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying the information about a several period, it can contribute to the reduction of a number of parts.

  In addition, since the display monitor 9029 displays combinations (continuous ratio) (short-term combinations (continuous ratio)) and combinations (short-term ratios) for every 6000 winning balls, the total winning balls are displayed. It is possible to easily recognize a numerical value of a period corresponding to a certain unit, such as 6000 in number. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than when the number of winning balls is 6,000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of winning balls is 1,000 or 10,000. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of winning balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as one hour, three hours, or ten hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 has a total of 6,000 winning balls (continuous ratio) (short-term ratio (continuous ratio)) and ratio (short-term ratio) as well as a cumulative combination (continuous ratio) And the cumulative duty ratio is switched and displayed. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), the short-term combining ratio, the cumulative combining (continuous ratio), the cumulative combining ratio, and the like for each predetermined unit. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main substrate 9011 housed in the crimped substrate case. Therefore, the present invention can contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsification of the display on the display monitor 9029.

  In addition, the gaming machine 901 is provided with detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that can not display proper predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of winning balls outside the business hours of the game arcade, counting the number of winning balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 901 is operated within the business hours of the game arcade, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be a fraud. In addition, the game machine 901 is to play a game by closing the door frame, and the counting of the winning balls during the opening of the door frame is highly likely to be a fraud.

  Also, during the game of the gaming machine 901, the gaming ball can not be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, the number of shots of the game ball is 100 for a maximum of one minute. For this reason, the upper limit number of winning game balls in one minute is about 100. Therefore, for example, when winning of 100 game balls per minute or more than 20 game balls is detected in 12 seconds, the probability of having a fraudulent action becomes extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 901, in order to detect a fraud, if it is not within business hours, if the glass door frame 903a is not closed, the prize ball when the game ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time It eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the falsification of information on the role series (link ratio) and the role ratio due to the fraud. It should be noted that the fraud may be detected based on the number of balls paid out per unit time, instead of the number of balls won when the gaming ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, the ring buffer can be prevented from running out of capacity.

  In the ring buffer, the first storage area to the tenth storage area are provided, and when the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area is It is erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is in units of predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. In addition, data remaining without being erased can be increased.

  When moving the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 9th storage area of the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, data in the tenth storage area may be erased to move data in the ninth storage area, or data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented.

  When moving the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, in the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer, and it is possible to calculate the duty ratio and the duty ratio with a large amount of data.

  When the data in the ring buffer is erased, not only the data in the tenth memory area but also all the data in the first memory area to the tenth memory area may be erased. Good. In this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased first, and then part of data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but some or all of the data in the storage area other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total sum, is similarly erased. May be

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, data of short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (continuous ratio), and cumulative combination ratio are displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The period of displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Or, it may be every hour. Also, the data to be displayed may be data other than short-term winning combination (continuous ratio), short-term ratio, cumulative combination (continuous ratio), cumulative ratio, or even only a part of these data. Good.

  In addition, when displaying the data of short run combination (run ratio), short run combination ratio, cumulative run combination (run combination), and cumulative duty ratio every cycle of 30 seconds, about short run combination (run ratio) The display is different from the data of. Specifically, short-term executives (in a ratio) are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. For this reason, it can be made to recognize that new data are displayed from a short-term officer series (continuous ratio).

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 901, when an abnormal operation is performed, a warning display is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated in the case where a failure occurs in calculation of a duty ratio (continuous ratio) or a duty ratio. When this switch is operated, it is possible to falsify the combination data and ratio data, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 901, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, it is possible to suppress the fraud such as falsification of data.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, and the third general winning opening switch 9024C. Based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated. For example, using a sensor (count switch 9023) individually provided to the attacker, and a sensor provided after a discharge path where the gaming medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric cho are discharged join If the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated based on the detection result and counting on the counter of winning balls and the winning ball of consecutive winnings, it is specified from which winning opening. There is a risk that the calculation of the part ratio and the part-by-part ratio (continuous ratio) will be complicated. In this respect, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the fourth general winning opening It is detected that the game medium has won by the switch 9024D, and based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, by calculating the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning ratio, based on the winning of each winning opening You can judge the number of winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio easily and accurately.

  In addition, when the door opening required error occurs, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to cancel the error. When the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the main substrate 9011 provided on the gaming machine frame 903 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 can be visually recognized by, for example, a player located outside the gaming machine 901.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine 901, when an error for opening the door occurs, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio on the display monitor 9029 is limited. Therefore, even if the door opening error occurs and the display monitor 9029 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

  In addition, the restriction of the display of the combination (combination ratio) ratio to the display monitor 9029 is executed when the door opening required error occurs. For this reason, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 due to the occurrence of the door opening error, so that the player can view the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901 as well. It is possible to prevent the display of the combination ratio (combination ratio) from being seen.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, when the door opening required error occurs, the display of the combination (continuous ratio) combination ratio on the display monitor 9029 is executed, but after the door opening required error occurs, the game is played When the machine frame 903 is opened, the display of the combination (continuous ratio) ratio on the display monitor 9029 may be limited. After the door opening error has occurred, the restriction on the display of the ratio (combination ratio) to the display monitor 9029 is executed when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the player is not limited to the combination Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the ratio.

  In addition, the restriction of the display of combination (combination ratio) combination ratio for display monitor 9029 is measured by the measurement timer after the door open error is canceled for a predetermined time, specifically, the door open error is canceled. Is performed until the elapsed time has elapsed. Therefore, immediately after the door opening required error is released, the gaming machine frame 903 is in the open state although the door opening required error is canceled. At this time, the player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901. In this respect, the player can continue to view the game from the outside of the gaming machine 901 by continuing the restriction of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display until the continuation time measured by the measurement timer elapses after the door open error is released. It is possible to prevent the display of the combination ratio (combination ratio) from being seen.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the duration is measured after the door opening error is released, but after the door opening error is released, the duration is closed after the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. It may be measured. The duration in this case may be uniform regardless of the type of door open error, or may be set according to the type of door open error. Also, it may be shorter than the duration time measured after the door open error has been released.

  The above door opening error is an example, and may be another aspect. For example, if the method of canceling the error is different and the error 1 to error 7 can be canceled without opening the gaming machine frame 903, these may be considered as errors other than the door opening required error. On the contrary, if the errors 8 to 13 can not cancel the error unless the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, these may be set as the door opening error. Further, errors other than the errors shown in FIG. 98, for example, an error that the game ball can not be fired from the ball striking device, an error that can not lend a ball, an error that the game board moves, etc. It may be an error. Further, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 for canceling the error, the error is often detected outside the business hours of the game arcade, for example, the display abnormality of the image display device 905 In the case of an error such as an error on the ROM check screen or an error that normally requires repair outside the business hours, such as the electric chew or the large winning opening, the door opening error may be treated as an error other than an error requiring door opening.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 901, the mode of display restriction is taken to be the stop of display, but the display may be limited to another mode. For example, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio may be lightened or reduced, or the display monitor 9029 may display a different display from the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio. As a display different from the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio, an error may be displayed, or, for example, a segment may be fully lit.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided on the main substrate 9011 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 903, so when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened Although it is made to limit display of combination ratio) role ratio, it is good also as another mode. For example, the main substrate 9011 may be provided on the surface of the game board 902 at a position where it can not be viewed from the outside of the game machine 901 by the glass door frame 903a when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 9029 may also be provided on the surface of the game board 902 and at a position where it can not be viewed from the outside of the game machine 901 by the glass door frame 903 a when the glass door frame 903 a is closed. In the gaming machine of this aspect, when the glass door frame 903a is opened instead of the aspect in which the display of the combination (continuous ratio) combination ratio is restricted when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened The ratio display may be limited. Further, with regard to the continuation of the restriction of the display of the combination (combination ratio) and the like, instead of the condition of opening and closing of the gaming machine frame 903, the condition of opening and closing of the glass door frame 903 a may be made. .

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the CPU 90103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the use area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the non-use area program area has a combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display output program And a combination (combination ratio) combination ratio display program is stored. As described above, the special symbol display output program and the game control program and the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program and combination (combination ratio) combination display program are divided and stored in different areas. It is possible to make it easy to test the program related to the game. Further, in the CPU 90103, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are performed in common by one interrupt processing. Thus, digit output processing can be simplified.

  Further, when digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are continuously performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), in the first interrupt processing, a special symbol display output program → a combination (combination ratio) combination display output program → a game control program → a combination (combination ratio) combination The programs are executed in the order of the calculation program. Further, in the second interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 91A, a game control program → special symbol display output program → combination (combination ratio) combination display output program → combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program The program is executed in the order of For this reason, in any of the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt process) and the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program (second interrupt process) The game control program (game progress control processing) and the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program (combination combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation processing) are prevented from being caught. Therefore, it is possible to prevent delays in digit output processing 2 and the like, so the display problems of the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, and the display monitor 9029 It is possible to prevent and display symbols or characters clearly.

  When digit output processing 1 and digit output processing 2 are made common, an execution procedure of the first interrupt processing shown in FIG. 91 (A) or the second interrupt processing shown in FIG. 91 (B) is included. Just do it. For example, any program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt process or the second interrupt process.

  In the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, after executing the game control program, the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program is executed. For this reason, the processing related to the main part of the game such as the lottery for the transition to the big hit gaming state is executed before the calculation of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio. Therefore, the delay of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process, the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program is executed after executing the special symbol display output program. In addition, after the special symbol display output program is executed, the specific program such as a game control program or a combination (combine ratio) combination calculation program is executed until the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program is executed. Will not run. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the failure of the display of the LED on the display monitor 9029.

  Further, for the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the use area, a call using "CALLF" having a short tone is performed. On the other hand, a call using "CALLmn" is made to the combination (combination ratio) combination display output program and combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program stored in the non-use area, and the word tone is No call is made with the short "CALLF". Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

  Further, the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio displayed on the display monitor 9029 is determined by combination combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation processing in the non-use area. The combination (combination ratio) combination ratio calculation program and the combination combination (combination ratio) combination display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn" having a relatively long tone is used for a program unrelated to the progress of the game, it is possible to reduce waste in processing of the program.

  Further, since a call by "CALLmn" having a relatively long tone is performed in the non-use area, a call by "CALLF" having a short tone can be performed in the use area. Therefore, it is possible to use an instruction having a short tone of "CALLF" or the like and high versatility for the program related to game control executed in the use area.

  Further, the CPU 90103 includes the Q register, and calls the program by the Q register. Therefore, the program can be called without specifying the upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, although it can be used, for example, in the used area program area, it may not be used in the non-used area program area, which may lower the versatility.

  In this respect, the upper address of the use area program area in the CPU 90103 is "00", the upper address of the non-use area program area is "01", and the upper address of the non-use area program area is the upper address of the use area program area It is different from the address. When calling a program stored in the use area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "00". Therefore, since the Q register can be used when calling the program stored in the use area program area, the program stored in the use area program area can be called only by specifying the lower address. Further, since the upper address of the non-use area program area is different from the upper address of the use area program area, it is possible to prevent the calling of the program stored in the non-use area program area by the Q register. When calling a program stored in the non-use area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area, the Q register can be used also in the non-use area program area while securing versatility of the Q register.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 is disposed at the center on the back surface side of the main substrate 9011 in front of the main substrate 9011 when viewing it, but the display monitor is easy to see from an oblique direction. May be arranged. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to an aspect in which the display monitor is disposed so as to be easily viewed in an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor disposition aspect”).

  The first display monitor layout mode is referred to as the first display monitor layout mode, the second display monitor layout mode is referred to as the second display monitor layout mode, and the nth display monitor layout mode is referred to as the nth display monitor layout mode. A main substrate 9011 similar to the main substrate 9011 shown in FIG. 84A is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and all the main substrates 9011 have the same structure. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 84A, the main substrate 9011 is accommodated in the substrate case 90202. In the description of the first display monitor arrangement aspect to the ninth display monitor arrangement aspect, right and left are based on the direction in which the main substrate 9011 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame is the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 101, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129A is provided on the back surface side of the main substrate 9011, and the display monitor 90130A is provided on the base member 90129A. The display monitor 90130A is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129A and the main substrate 9011.

  The base member 90129A is in the form of a triangular prism having a right bottom in the form of a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 90129A is arranged along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including the one side forming the rectangular portion of the right triangle at the base of the triangular prism which is the shape formed by the base member 90129A is superimposed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011 to form the rectangular portion in the rectangular triangle. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in the direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The side surface of the triangular prism (hereinafter referred to as “inclined surface”) including the side facing the right-angled portion in the right-angled triangle (hereinafter referred to as “inclined surface”) is disposed in an inclined direction with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

  The display monitor 90130A is provided on the inclined surface of the base member 90129A. The orientation of the display monitor 90130 A is arranged to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main substrate is attached is opened from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 102, in the display monitor 90130A, when the gaming machine frame 903 to which the main substrate 9011 is attached is released from the outer frame 903A, the display monitor 90130A is between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged to face the front as viewed from the opening.

  The display monitor 90130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement aspect faces the front as seen from the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. Is located in For this reason, when the store clerks or the like check the role ratio, the store clerks, etc., need not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly open them. It is possible to check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[Second display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 103A is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 103 (A), in the second display monitor arrangement mode, a base member 90129B is provided on the back surface side of the main substrate 9011, and a display monitor 90130B is provided on the base member 90129B. The display monitor 90130 B is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 B and the main substrate 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the main substrate 9011 is attached to the back surface of the game board 902 (see FIG. 35) provided in the gaming machine frame 903. The base member 90129B has a plate shape and is provided upright on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. Further, the main substrate 9011 and the base member 90129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 90130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 90129B. Therefore, in the display monitor 90130 B, the surface on the opening side of the door frame in the standing portion provided upright on the main substrate 9011 provided in the gaming machine frame 903 faces the opening portion of the door frame. It is arranged. The display monitor 90130 B is disposed at a position projecting from the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

  The display monitor 90130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main substrate 9011 in a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. Also, the main substrate 9011 is attached to the back of the game board 902 provided in the gaming machine frame 903. For this reason, when the store clerks or the like check the role ratio, the store clerks, etc., need not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly open them. It is possible to check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

  In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 90129A and 90129B are accommodated in the substrate case 90202, but even if the base members 90129A and 90129B are formed to protrude to the outside of the substrate case 90202 Good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 103 (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 103 (B), in the third display monitor arrangement mode, a buried inclined surface 9011 K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The embedded inclined surface 9011 K is formed to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

  The embedded inclined surface 9011 K is formed as a part of the print substrate on the main substrate 9011. A display monitor 90130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 9011K of the main substrate 9011. The display monitor 90130C is provided on the embedded inclined surface 9011K, so that when the gaming machine frame 903 is released from the outer frame, the front as viewed from the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame It is arranged to face. Further, the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 90130 C are accommodated in a case 90202.

  The display monitor 90130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement aspect faces the front as seen from the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame Is located in For this reason, when the store clerks or the like check the role ratio, the store clerks, etc., need not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly open them. It is possible to check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[Fourth display monitor layout]
FIG. 104A is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 104A, in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129D including a first base member 90129D1 to a fourth base member 90129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on each of the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4. A display monitor 90130D is formed by the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4. The display monitor 90130D is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

  The first base members 90129D1 to the fourth base members 90129D4 all have the same shape. This shape will be described using the first base member 90129D1. The first base member 90129D1 has a triangular prism-like shape whose bottom surface is a right triangle. The first base member 90129D1 has the same shape as the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

  Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement aspect has a size equal to the size of the four seven segments and the lower right dot (see FIG. 84A). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 has the same size as the size of one 7-segment and the lower right dot. On the first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1, it is possible to display one 7-segment and the lower right dot.

  The first base member 90129D1 is disposed at a position slightly to the left of the approximate center position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The second base member 90129D2 is disposed on the right side of the first base member 90129D1, and the third base member 90129D3 is the right side opposite to the left side on which the first base member 90129D1 is disposed in the second base member 90129D2. Is located in The fourth base member 90129D4 is disposed on the right side which is the opposite side to the left side on which the second base member 90129D2 of the third base member 90129D3 is disposed. Thus, the first base members 90129D1 to the fourth base members 90129D4 are arranged in parallel along the substantially horizontal direction.

  A second display monitor 90130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 90129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 90130D3 and a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 90129D3 and the fourth base member 90129D4. On the first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the first base member 90129D1, the content corresponding to the first display portion 9029A of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A is displayed.

  On the second display monitor 90130D2 provided in the second base member 90129D2, the content corresponding to the second display portion 9029B of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A is displayed. On the third display monitor 90130D3 provided on the third base member 90129D3, the content corresponding to the third display portion 9029C of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A is displayed. On the fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the fourth base member 90129D4, the content corresponding to the fourth display portion 9029D of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 84A is displayed.

  The display monitor 90130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement aspect faces the front as seen from the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame Is located in For this reason, when the store clerks or the like check the role ratio, the store clerks, etc., need not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly open them. It is possible to check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[Fifth Display Monitor Layout]
FIG. 104 (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 104B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129E including a first base member 90129E1 to a fourth base member 90129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. A first display monitor 90130E1 to a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on each of the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4. A display monitor 90130E is formed by the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4. The display monitor 90130E is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

  The first base members 90129E1 to the fourth base members 90129E4 all have the same shape as the first base members 90129D1 to the fourth base members 90129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement aspect. The first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are the same as the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4, respectively. 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are respectively provided.

  The first base member 90129E1 is disposed above the substantially central position in the width direction of the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The second base member 90129E2 is disposed below the first base member 90129E1, and the third base member 90129E3 is disposed below the second base member 90129E2. The fourth base member 90129E4 is disposed below the third base member 90129E3. Thus, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in parallel along the substantially vertical direction. Thus, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the longitudinal direction.

  A first display monitor 90130E1 is provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129E1. Similarly, the second display monitor 90130E2, the third display monitor 90130E3, and the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 90129E2, the third base member 90129E3, and the fourth base member 90129E4, respectively. There is. In the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 provided in the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4, the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. Contents corresponding to 9029D are displayed respectively. Further, since the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are also arranged in the vertical direction. For this reason, the four-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 may be arranged in the lateral direction.

  The display monitor 90130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement aspect faces the front as seen from the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. Is located in For this reason, when the store clerks or the like check the role ratio, the store clerks, etc., need not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but only slightly open them. It is possible to check the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[Sixth Display Monitor Layout]
FIG. 105A is a perspective view of a main substrate on which a display monitor is arranged in a sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 105A, in the sixth display monitor arrangement aspect, the base member 90129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and the display monitor 90130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F. There is. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130F is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130F may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The base member 90129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In addition, a display monitor 90130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F is provided with four seven segments and a lower right dot (see FIG. 84A). The substrate case 90202 includes a substrate case main body 90202A and a lid 90202B. The base member 90129F is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A of the substrate case 90202 and the lid 90202B.

  The display monitor 90130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like checks the role ratio, the store clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but opens it slightly and only opens the role ratio. You can check the Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[The seventh display monitor arrangement aspect]
FIG. 105 (B) is a perspective view of a main substrate on which a display monitor is arranged in a seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 105B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and the display monitor 90130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129G. There is. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130 G may be arranged in the horizontal direction. The base member 90129G is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A of the substrate case 90202 and the lid 90202B as in the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement aspect.

  The base member 90129G is in the form of a triangular prism whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 90129G is arranged along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right-angled portion of the right triangle forming the bottom of the triangular prism is disposed on the right side which is the opposite side of the left side where the gaming machine frame 903 is open. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 90129G is an inclined surface which descends from the opposite side (right side) of the side (left side) where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened. A display monitor 90130G is provided on this inclined surface.

  The display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like checks the role ratio, the store clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but opens it slightly and only opens the role ratio. You can check the Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

  Further, the upper surface of the base member 90129G provided with the display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement aspect is directed from the opposite side to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is open toward the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is open. And it is an inclined surface that descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130 G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130 G can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[The eighth display monitor arrangement manner]
FIG. 106A is a perspective view of a main substrate on which a display monitor is arranged in an eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 106A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129H is provided on the left side of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and the display monitor 90130H is provided on the left side of the base member 90129H. It is done. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The base member 90129H is in the form of a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped. In addition, the display monitor 90130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H includes four seven segments and dots at the lower right (see FIG. 84A). The substrate case 90202 includes a substrate case main body 90202A and a lid 90202B. The base member 90129H is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A of the substrate case 90202 and the lid 90202B.

  The display monitor 90130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130H can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like checks the role ratio, the store clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but opens it slightly and only opens the role ratio. You can check the Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

[Ninth Display Monitor Layout]
FIG. 106 (B) is a perspective view of the main substrate on which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 106B, in the ninth display monitor arrangement aspect, the base member 90129I is provided on the right regular surface of the substrate case 90202 for housing the main substrate 9011, and the display monitor 90130I is provided on the right side of the base member 90129I. It is provided. The base member 90129I is provided in the substrate case 90202 across the substrate case main body 90202A of the substrate case 90202 and the lid 90202B, like the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement aspect.

  The base member 90129I is in the form of a triangular prism whose bottom surface is in the shape of a right triangle, and the height direction of the base member 90129I is disposed along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right-angled portion of the right triangle that forms the base of the triangular prism is disposed on the right. For this reason, the left side surface of the base member 90129I is an inclined surface which is closer to the right as it goes from the upper side to the lower side. A display monitor 90130I is provided on this inclined surface. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

  The display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130I can be viewed from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the store clerk or the like checks the role ratio, the store clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but opens it slightly and only opens the role ratio. You can check the Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

  In addition, the left side surface of the base member 90129I provided with the display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement aspect is an inclined surface which approaches the right side as it descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130I can be easily viewed. Therefore, it is possible to more easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

  The display monitors 90130A to 90130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement aspect to the ninth display monitor arrangement aspect all set the installation angle of the display monitor to the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It may be provided in the adjustment means which makes adjustment possible. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixing portion fixed to the base members 90129A to 90129I or the embedded inclined surface 9011K, and a mounting portion movable relative to the fixing portion, and the mounting portion is provided on the mounting portion. Either one may be attached. The adjusting means may be a manual type that can be operated manually by a store clerk or the like by opening the gaming machine frame 903, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. May be. In addition, in the case of the motorized type, a person who can operate from the office or the like through the communication device or the like may be used.

  The range in which the mounting portion is movable may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up, down, left, and right directions, or may be a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Moreover, the movement range which combined the movement range accompanying these movement may be sufficient. The display monitor 90130A to 90130I is provided with the adjustment means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame, whereby the game arcade where the gaming machine 901 is installed Adjustments can be made according to your wishes.

  In the above first display monitor layout mode to the ninth display monitor layout mode, the display monitor layouts are shown, but these layout modes may be combined. For example, by combining the eighth display monitor layout mode and the ninth display monitor layout mode, the display monitor may be arranged across the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and the left side surface.

[A game machine equipped with a wing type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, the so-called big hit gaming state is controlled when the variable display game (special game) performing variable display is executed and the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special game) is a big hit Described is a digipachi type gaming machine. On the other hand, as a so-called honeymoon type gaming machine in which the big hit gaming state is controlled by the game ball passing through a specific area (V area) provided inside the openable and closable wing type variable winning ball apparatus. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a honey type game machine will be described. Hereinafter, with respect to the honey type, differences from the above-described gaming machine 901 will be mainly described, and the common description may be omitted.

  FIG. 107 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a vane type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 108 is a front view of the variable winning ball device provided on the game board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 107, a pachinko gaming machine 90501 has a glass door frame 90502 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 90502 is a striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 90503. In the lower part of the ball supply tray 90503, there are surplus ball trays 90504 for storing gaming balls that can not be accommodated in the ball supply tray 90503, and the speed at which the ball launching device shoots the game balls And a striking operation handle (operation knob) 90505 for adjusting the

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball emitted from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 90505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, the speed of the gaming ball fired from the ball striking device is gradually increased, and when it exceeds a predetermined speed, the launched gaming ball Enters the left side area of the game area 90507 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 90505 is further rotated to the right, the fired game ball enters the right area of the game area 90507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball striking device, and to adjust the area into which the gaming ball is struck .

  A game board is removably attached to the back of the glass door frame 90502. In addition, a game board is a structure which contains the plate-shaped body which comprises it, and the various components attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front of the game board, a game area 90507 divided by the induction rail is formed.

  At approximately the center of the game area 90507, a wing type variable winning ball device 90520 is disposed. Below the wing type variable winning ball device 90520, a first starting winning hole 90511, a second starting winning hole 90512, and a variable winning ball device 90515 forming a third starting winning hole 90513 are provided. The winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 90511 are detected by the first starting opening switch 90511 a, and the winning balls entering the second starting winning opening 90512 are detected by the second starting opening switch 90512 a, respectively, the back of the game board Led to Also, the winning balls that have entered the third starting winning opening 90513 that can be won by the variable winning ball device 90515 being opened are detected by the third starting opening switch 90513a and are led to the back of the gaming board. The variable winning ball device 90515 is opened by the solenoid 90515a. Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513 may be generically referred to as "starting winning opening" or may be referred to as starting winning openings 90511, 90512, 90513 . In addition, the first start port switch 90511a, the second start port switch 90512a, and the third start port switch 90513a may be collectively referred to as a "start port switch" or may be represented as start port switches 90511a, 90512a, 90513a. . A predetermined number of, for example, five game balls are paid out as winning balls by the game balls winning in the starting winning opening. The number of winning balls of the winning balls to be paid out by the game ball winning in the starting winning opening may be common or may be different for each starting winning opening. For example, the number of payouts of the winning balls when the gaming ball has won in the first starting winning opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512 is five, and the winning balls in the third starting winning opening 90513 are winning The number of payouts may be two.

  When the game ball is won in the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 is controlled to open or close once or twice. By opening and closing control, the left open door 90576A on the left moves from the initial position to the left, and the right open door 90576B on the right moves from the initial position to the right, so that the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened. As the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B return to their initial positions, the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 is closed. The state in which the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning opening of the starting opening switch in this way is referred to as the starting operation state. Hereinafter, the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 may be referred to as a useful item. In addition, various game items are provided on the game board, but in the following, the case of the game means the feather type variable winning ball device 90520.

  On the back side inside the wing type variable winning ball device 90520, an effect display device 90509 such as an LCD for effect display is provided. The effect display device 90509 variably displays the effect pattern as identification information (variation display). In this embodiment, the effect display device 90509 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  A special symbol display 90508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the wing type variable winning ball device 90520. The special symbol display 90508 is constituted by, for example, a 7-segment display.

  Above the special symbol display 90508, a special symbol start memory indicator 90518 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of activated winning balls having the game balls in the start winning hole, ie, the number of start memories, is provided. The special symbol start memory indicator 90518 displays the number of start memories up to four in the winning order. The special symbol start storage indicator 90518 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one each time the start winning opening 90511, 90512, 90513 has a valid start winning. Then, each time variable display is started by the special symbol display 90508, the number of lighted LEDs is reduced by one (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start storage indicator 90518 shifts the lighting state each time the variable symbol display is started by the special symbol indicator 90508. In addition, since the number of start memories is displayed also by the effect display device 90509 as described later, the special symbol start memory indicator 90518 may not be provided.

  On the left side of the vane type variable winning ball device 90520, a normal symbol display 90510 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. When the game ball passes the gate 90532 provided on the right side of the game area 90507 and is detected by the gate switch 90532a, the normal symbol display 90510 indicates that the normal symbol (in this example, the number display by the 7 segment LED) Variable display is started. In this embodiment, "7" is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display in the case of a hit, and other than "7" is stopped and displayed in the case of disconnection. In the case of a hit, the variable winning ball device is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. In addition, the hit probability of the normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 90510, a normal symbol start memory indicator 90541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of passing balls having passed through the gate 90532 is provided. Each time the gate 90532 passes, the symbol start storage indicator 90541 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 90510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  On the right of the variable winning ball device 90515, a special winning opening is provided in which the open / close plate 90516 is opened by the solenoid 90521 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening and closing plate 90516 is a means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 90523. A predetermined number of, for example, 15 gaming balls are paid out as winning balls by the game balls winning in the special winning opening.

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 90507, a decoration lamp is provided which blinks during the game, and at the lower part, there is an out port 90526 for collecting the game balls that did not win.

  In addition, two speakers 90527 for emitting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right of the game area 90507. A sky lamp lamp 90528 a, a left frame lamp 90528 b, and a right frame lamp 90528 c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 90507. Furthermore, decoration LED is installed around each structure (vane type variable winning ball device 90520 etc.) in the game area 90507. The sky lamp 90528a, the left lamp 90528b, the right lamp 90528c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light-emitting member provided in a game machine.

  The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 90507 through the hit rail, and then drop the game area 90507. When the hitting ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts variable display on the special symbol display 90508 and the effect symbol is displayed on the effect display device 90509 Starts variable display. If it is not in a state where variable display of symbols can be started, the start winning memory number is increased by one if the start winning memory number, which is the suspension storage of the variable symbols of the special symbol in the special symbol display 90508, is not the upper limit number. That is, the number of LEDs to be lit in the special symbol start storage indicator 90518 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbols ("0" to "9") on the special symbol display 90508 is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of the stop is the big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, "3", "7"), the first big hit gaming state (without going through the starting operation state) of the big hit gaming state Switch to the jackpot gaming state to be started. Also, if it is a small hit symbol (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), it shifts to the starting operation state Do. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins in the special area provided inside the wing type variable winning ball device 90520, it shifts to the second big hit gaming state (big hit gaming state started after passing the starting operation state) . In addition, the gaming state before shifting to the jackpot gaming state is a normal state. In addition, after the big hit game state ends, it moves to normal state or time saving state (the state where the variable winning ball device 90515 is easy to be released by shortening the average fluctuation time of special symbol and production design) Do. The time saving state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and the transition condition to the big hit gaming state is satisfied before the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened 100 times. The gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the big hit gaming state. When the variable winning ball device 90515 opens 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the big hit gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34, in this embodiment, the gate 90532 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case where the game ball is controlled to be in the short time state, it is better to aim at the right of the game area 90507 and fire the game ball (so-called right-handed) in order to pass the game ball to the gate 90532. It is advantageous. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, in this embodiment, the special winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to win the game ball in the big winning opening during the big hit game, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hit). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if it is not in the time saving state or in the big hit game (in the normal state), the game ball is fired (so-called left) aiming at the left side of the game area 90507.

  In addition, a left gate 90517 is provided on the left side of the game area 90507, and the gaming ball having passed through the left gate 90517 is detected by a left gate switch 90517a. Further, a right gate 90519 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507, and the gaming ball having passed through the right gate 90519 is detected by the right gate switch 90519a.

  In this embodiment, when transition of a predetermined gaming state is performed, control is performed to shift the gaming state based on passage of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, the big hit game is started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when the game ball is won in the specified winning opening 90566 in the wing type variable winning ball device 90520. Instead, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball passes the gate. In this embodiment, since the big winning opening is provided on the right of the game area 90507 (it is hit right during the big hit game), the big hit is based on the game ball passing through the right gate 90519. The game is started. In addition, the big hit game is not started based on the game ball passing the left gate 90517 or the right gate 90519, but when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or the specific winning in the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 When a game ball is won in the mouth 90566, a big hit game may be started immediately, or a big hit game may be started after a predetermined time has passed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the big hit game is ended, it is shifted to a state where it is possible to start a new variable display based on passage of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the left gate 90517 if it is controlled to be in the normal state after the big hit game is over since the left is hit in the normal state and the right in the short state. When it is controlled to be able to start a new change display on the basis of the game ball and it is controlled to be in a short state after the big hit game is over, it is changed to a short time state on the basis of passing the right gate 90519 It is transitioned to a state where display can be started. In addition, based on the game ball passing left gate 90517 and right gate 90519, instead of being shifted to the state where it can start a new variable display, when the big hit game is finished, or the big hit game is finished When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the new variable display may be started.

  Next, the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 will be described. When the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are opened by the drive of the open / close motor 90575, the wing type variable winning ball device (feature) 90520 can enter the gaming ball. The gaming ball having entered the accessory 90520 passes through the passage opening and the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 90520. In FIG. 108, a state in which the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are closed and the gaming ball can not enter into the character 90520 (enter difficulty) is shown by a solid line, A state in which 90576 B is open and the game ball can enter (allows easy entry into) the article 90520 is shown by an imaginary line.

  The left movable member 90577 and the right movable member 90578 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 90520, respectively. The moving part of the left movable member 90577 is the left movable part 90577A, and the moving part of the right movable member 90578 is the right movable part 90578A. The left movable portion 90577A is moved by the left movable portion drive solenoid 90577B, and the right movable portion 90578A is moved by the right movable portion drive solenoid 90578B. The left movable portion 90577A and the right movable portion 90578A move in the vertical direction.

  At the lowermost part of the prize 90520, a specific winning hole 90566 for forming a specific area is provided. In addition, an offset opening is provided at the back of the position where the special winning opening 90566 in the prize 90520 is provided, and a passage for distributing the game ball to the special winning opening 90566 or the reverse opening is provided inside the bonus 90520. It is provided. A specific area switch 90566A is provided in the specific winning opening 90566, and a game ball winning in the specific winning hole 90566 is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, and a gaming ball winning in the off slot is detected by the off area switch Be done. A predetermined number of, for example, ten gaming balls are paid out as winning balls by the game balls being won in the specific winning opening 90566 and the off-going opening. In addition, the number of winning balls of the winning balls to be paid out by the game ball being won in the specific winning opening 90566 and the off-going opening may be common or different. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out by the game ball winning in the specific winning opening 90566 may be ten, and the number of winning balls to be paid out by the game ball winning at the off-going port may be three. In addition, when the game ball enters the opening, there may be no payout of the winning balls (the number of winning balls is zero).

  On the condition that the gaming ball having entered the inside of the prize 90520 wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, it is possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state. In addition, when the game ball which has entered into the special item 90520 wins in the out side, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state.

  An example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine 90501 will be described. In the gaming machine 90501, when the gaming ball is won in any of the first start winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513 in the normal state, either a big hit, a small hit, or an off Lottery to determine the (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "big hit lottery") is executed. As a result of the jackpot lottery, it is determined to be a jackpot, a jackpot or a fall. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the special symbol indicator 90508 stops and displays the symbol according to the result of the big hit lottery.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the gaming state is from the normal state to the big hit gaming state (1st It is transferred to the jackpot gaming state). In the big hit game state, the big winning opening by the opening and closing plate 90516 is controlled to open and close 16 times (16 rounds, 29 seconds for the allowable opening time of one round). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 16 and is constant, but the number of rounds (for example, any of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit, the bonus item 90520 is not controlled to be open. Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit, the bonus product 90520 may be controlled to be in the open state.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a small hit, after stopping the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit) to be displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the article 90520 is controlled to be open The start operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 90520 is in the open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (opening number) is once, twice or three times. In the starting operation state, when the gaming ball wins the prize 90520 and the gaming ball wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, the V winning occurs. When the V prize occurs, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). If the game ball enters the opening and the V prize is not generated, the game does not shift to the second big hit gaming state. That is, it becomes an off state and maintains the normal state.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out of place, it is controlled that the special item 90520 is opened after stopping and displaying the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the out) on the special symbol display 90508 Absent. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the big hit gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

  In addition, there are non-time and time big hits and time and time big hits in the big hit. In any case, once the variation of the special symbol is over, the game will shift directly to the 16 round big hit gaming state (the first big hit gaming state) without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of time-time big hit, the big hit gaming end After that, the gaming state shifts to the short time state (On the other hand, in the case of a non-time short jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is the normal state).

  There are three types of small hits: first small hits to third small hits. The first small hit is a small hit where the character 90520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit where the character 90520 opens twice, and the third small hit is a character 90520 is a small hit that opens three times. Also, in the case of a disconnection, the accessory 90520 does not perform the opening operation.

  In addition, the second big hit in the case of winning a V when the bonus 90520 performs the opening operation in the first small hit or the second small hit is non-time and time big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state ends, it is normal Transition to the state. In addition, the second big hit in the case of winning a V when the bonus 90520 performs the opening operation in the third small hit becomes a time jackpot, and after the second big hit gaming state ends, it shifts to the time saving state.

  In addition, the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, and this main board is used in combination (continuous ratio) or The ratio is calculated and the calculated combination is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is disposed in front of the main substrate when viewing the main substrate on the main substrate so as not to hinder visibility. This point is the same as the above-described gaming machine 901. In addition, the calculation procedure of the winning combination (continuous ratio), the ratio of the ratio, the display procedure, and the like are the same as those of the above-described gaming machine 901.

  The combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio in the gaming machine 90501 can be determined by the above-mentioned equations (1) and (2). The number of prize winning balls in the gaming machine 90501 is determined by the game ball winning against the large winning opening provided with the variable winning ball device 90515, the specific winning opening 90566 and the missing opening in the wing type variable winning ball device 90520, and the opening / closing plate 90516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

  In addition, when the first jackpot gaming state is being executed, the continuous winning feature winning ball number in the gaming machine 90501 is that of the gaming ball paid out by the winning of the gaming ball to the large winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 Say the total number. In addition, when the second big hit game state is executed, of the game balls paid out by the winning of the game ball for the large winning opening provided with the opening and closing plate 90516 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "big winning opening winning") It is good also as a total number, the specific winning a prize mouth 90566 in the wing type variable winning a prize ball device 90520 at the time of V prize winning which became the opportunity of the transition to the 2nd big hit gaming state and the game ball paid out by big winning a prize winning It may be the total number of gaming balls to be paid out by the game ball winning on the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "trigger winning").

  The "V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state" in the trigger prize may be when the vane type variable winning ball device 90520 in which the V prize has occurred has been opened, or the V prize has occurred It is also possible to include a series of opening by winning to the starting winning opening that triggered the opening of the vane type variable winning ball device. For example, when the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened by the game ball winning to the third starting winning opening 90513 where the number of times of opening of the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 is three, there is a V prize at the time of opening The trigger winnings may be a winning of the game ball for the specific winning opening 90566 and the opening of the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 at the time of opening three times.

  When the number of consecutive winnings winning prize balls is the total number of gaming balls paid out by the large winning opening winning combination and the trigger winning combination, the winning combination for the specific winning opening 90566 of the feather type variable winning ball device 90520 and the off opening becomes the opportunity winning. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the V prize which has triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state occurs. Therefore, the specific winning opening 90566 of the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 and the total number of gaming balls to be paid out by the winning for the off mouth (hereinafter "temporary memory opportunity winning prize ball number") is once stored. Even when the V winning that triggered the transition to the state occurs, the temporary memory winning prize winning ball count is added to the continuous winning prize winning ball count as the total number of gaming balls paid out by the trigger winning Good. The timing at which the temporary memory trigger winning prize ball is added to the continuous winning object winning ball number may be an appropriate timing. For example, it may be a timing to shift to the second big hit gaming state and count the number of winning balls of the gaming balls paid out by the large winning opening winning, or counting the number of winning balls of the gaming balls paid out by the large winning opening winning When starting, while counting or counting the number of winning balls of the gaming balls paid out by the big winning opening winning combination, it may be a timing immediately before displaying the winning combination (continuous ratio) on the display monitor 9029.

  In addition, after storing the temporary storage trigger winning prize ball, the temporary memory starting winning prize ball may be erased when the V winning that has triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur. When the game ball is won in the special winning opening 90566, the V winning which triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state has occurred, so substantially, the wing type variable winning ball device 90520 of the off The total number of gaming balls to be paid out by winning a mouth may be temporarily stored. The determination that the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur is, for example, that the V winning has not occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the feather type variable winning ball device 90520. can do.

  In addition, as a part-time-run (combine ratio) and a combination ratio to be displayed on the display monitor, similar to the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, a short-term part-time job series (co-term ratio) Etc. Further, the display monitor may be attached to the main substrate in the same manner as the above-described gaming machine 901. Further, as the arrangement manner of the display monitor, various arrangement manners described in the attachment manner to the gaming machine 901 may be adopted.

  The above-mentioned gaming machine 90501 is a gaming machine provided with a vane type variable winning ball device 90520. In a gaming machine provided with such a vane type variable winning ball device 90520, a main board is displayed with a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio. In addition, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so as not to hinder visibility. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made with respect to game nails (obstacle nails), windmills, etc. provided on the game board.

  Further, in the gaming machine 90501 having the wing type variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio are calculated in a mode different from that of the gaming machine 901. Also in the gaming machine 90501 including such a wing type variable winning ball device 90520, it is possible to calculate a winning combination (continuous ratio) and a winning ratio and to display it on a display monitor attached to the main substrate.

  Further, in the gaming machine 90501, of the start winning openings for opening and closing the wing type variable winning ball device 90520, the variable winning ball device 90515 is used as the third start winning opening 90513, but the start winning opening is the first start winning It may be only one that is not provided with a variable winning ball device such as the mouth 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512. In addition, only the variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning opening 90513 may be the starting winning opening.

  In addition, the number of prize balls paid out by the winning of the gaming balls to the third starting winning opening 90513 is added to the number of winning prize winning balls used for calculating the winning ratio, but the first starting winning hole 90511 and the second The number of winning balls paid out by the winning of the game ball to the start winning hole 90512 is not added to the number of winning prize balls and the number of consecutive winning balls.

  Further, in the gaming machine 90501, a big hit lottery is executed by the game ball winning in the starting winning opening, but even if winning in the starting winning opening, the big hit drawing is not executed and the variable winning ball device 90520 is always open It may be an aspect in which the operation is performed. Also, instead of the big hit lottery, a lottery may be made for the opening number of the variable winning ball device 90520, or both of a big hit lottery and a drawing for the opening number of the variable winning ball device 90520 may be performed. . In addition to the drawing of the number of times of opening, in addition to drawing the number of times such as once, twice, three times, etc., 0 times may be included as a target of the number of times of opening.

  Also, the gaming machine 90501 is set to a big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state and second big hit gaming state), and the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a wing type variable winning ball device 90520 and an opening / closing plate 90516 A winning opening is provided. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state may be set, and only the blade type variable winning ball apparatus may be provided without providing the big winning opening. In this case, in the big hit game state, the variable vane type variable winning ball device may perform an opening and closing operation or an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  In addition, in the aspect in which only the feather type variable winning ball apparatus is provided, the V winning may be set as the continuation condition of the big hit gaming state. For example, when transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the highest continuation round may be set, and the continuation of the next round may be determined when there is a V prize in one round.

(Modification regarding display control of the number-of-winnings information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α has been described. For example, items related to the number of times the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α, for example. When the gaming ball passes the gates 9041A and 9041B, a passage gate designation command for designating which gate the gaming ball has passed from the main substrate 9011 (microcomputer for gaming control 90100) to the effect control substrate 9012 (production By transmitting to the control CPU 90120, the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of times the gaming ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, and can display it in the first area α.

  For example, the number of gate passes today (corresponding to A1) by the same method as tallying processing in the case of receiving a general winning opening designation command specifying which of the first to fourth general winning openings has been received. Gate passing ratio (corresponding to A2), gate passing number in low base state (corresponding to B1), gate passing ratio in low base state (corresponding to B2), gate passing number in high base state (corresponding to C1), high base It is possible to display in the first area α by totaling the gate passing ratio in the state (corresponding to C2), the gate passing number in the setting period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passing ratio in the setting period (corresponding to D2) . Further, these items can be summed up (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B) for each gate and displayed in the first area α.

  (2) In addition, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives the special winning opening winning command from the gaming control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to count the number of winnings to the special winning opening, and for winning to the special winning opening. It is possible to count the number of awarded balls based on the number and to display in the first area α.

  For example, in the same manner as the tabulation process when a general winning opening designation command specifying which of the first to fourth general winning openings has been received, the number of winnings for today's special winning opening (A1 Equivalent), "winning ratio for today's big winning opening (equivalent to A2)", "number of winning balls awarded based on winning for today's big winning opening (equivalent to A3)", "total for today Proportion of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of the today's big winning opening against the number of winning balls (equivalent to A4), "number of winnings of big winning opening during the setting period (equivalent to D1)" , "Winning ratio to the special winning opening in the setting period (equivalent to D2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on winning to the special winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)", and "in the setting period Awarded based on winnings on the big winning opening in the set period for the number of prize balls awarded The percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Here, "the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of the today's big winning opening to the total number of winning balls today (equivalent to A4)", and "the winning balls awarded in the setting period. If the ratio (equivalent to D4) of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning in the big winning opening in the setting period with respect to the number is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), that effect is notified You may do it. For example, in the first area α, a message “The winning prize ball ratio exceeds the reference value (60%)” may be displayed.

  In addition, the number of winning balls provided based on the winning on the second starting winning opening controlled by the normally variable winning ball device 906B for the total winning balls, and the opening and closing control of the special variable winning ball device 907 When the ratio of the total to the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning on the special winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), notification may be made to that effect. For example, in the first area α, a message or the like may be displayed that "the prize winning ball ratio exceeds the reference value (70%)."

  (3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main substrate 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each entry area. Although an example of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area has been described, based on the main substrate 9011 of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main substrate 9011 side, in the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main substrate 9011 side, The number of entry of game balls is counted, or the effect control CPU 90120 enters the game balls into each entry area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game balls enter the entry areas. It is also possible to count the numbers.

  The number of game ball entry into each entry area (the value of the counter corresponding to each switch) counted by the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main substrate 9011 side or the effect control CPU 90120 is sent to the effect control CPU 90120. And can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a command for specifying the number of entry into each entry area to the effect control board 9012 so that the effect control CPU 90120 can enter each entry area based on the command. The entry number can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

  Note that the number of entries into each entry area counted by the game control microcomputer 90100 is a display device provided on the main substrate 9011, such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It may be displayed on the screen. In addition, when the ratio of the number of wins to the general winning opening to the number of wins to the starting winning opening has not reached the predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, By performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol, that effect may be notified. In addition, as a display provided on the main substrate 9011 on which the aggregated result is displayed, not only the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc., but also to display the aggregated result The display device may be a dedicated display device. The display device may have any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, a light guide plate, and the like.

  The value of each counter stored in the RAM 90102 (the number of entry into each entry area) is, for example, a gaming state flag stored in the RAM 90102 (a probability change state, a time saving state, etc. can be specified by the Displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B when a reset operation for resetting a flag or the like according to the game state to be played is performed by the game arcade side (for example, a store clerk) Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main substrate 9011. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the gaming board 902, and pivots the gaming board 902 forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903. By doing this, the reset button provided on the back side of the game board 902 can be operated.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described. In the gaming machine, the aggregation period is set (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or is set by an operation on the game arcade side), and the number of winnings in the aggregation period set. Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winning to the general winning a prize opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes) In that case, that effect may be notified.

  (5) Further, when a winning on a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the first area α may be notified of that. For example, when the number of winnings for the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message of “10 minutes for general winning not occurring” may be displayed on the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game arcade side (for example, an operation using the display switching switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030) It may be settable by

  (6) It should be noted that the above embodiment is applied to a gaming machine provided with a sorting apparatus in which the winning ratio to the start winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). It is possible to display winning number information related to the winning number for each winning opening on the first area α. For example, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening; By providing the dispensing device, it is possible to distribute the gaming balls received by the sorting device alternately to the start winning opening and the general winning opening. The above embodiment is applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the sorting apparatus alternately distributes the game balls to the start winning opening and the general winning opening, and the number-of-winnings information related to the number of winnings for each winning opening is applied to the first It can be displayed in the area α. However, since the number of winnings to the general winning opening is automatically determined according to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening, as described above, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening is displayed There is no need to

  (7) In FIG. 79, it is possible to set the counting period according to the operation of the player, but the winning number information is reset according to the operation of the player and counting of winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do so. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings on the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 90120 performs a general winning opening designation command. For each reception, the number of winnings on the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

  Further, the aggregation period which has been set once may be changed according to the operation of the player before the lapse of the setting period. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, in order to know the aggregation result quickly, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses, and the aggregation period may be shortened to 10 minutes. In addition, although the aggregation period is initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation result of a longer period, the player performs a reset operation before the set period elapses, and the aggregation period is extended to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the aggregation period which has been set once may be extended according to the operation of the player after the setting period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes which is the set aggregation period have passed and the aggregation result of 10 minutes is once displayed, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the aggregation result of the longer aggregation period, The aggregation period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both the aggregation result of 10 minutes and the aggregation result of 60 minutes including the 10 minutes can be obtained).

  (8) In the demonstration screen displayed on the image display device 905, or in the first area α in the state in which the game is being performed (the gaming end determination is not made and the demonstration screen is not displayed). The image may be displayed to explain whether each winning opening provided on the game board surface is any winning opening of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening. Alternatively, the number of winning balls in each winning opening may be notified.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the game setting is given priority over the player setting. Conversely, the player setting may be given priority over the game setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation part of the display switching switch 9032 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 38 (1) to (3) is displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2) as being able to be displayed on the image display device 905, winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 38 (2) (the display control of FIGS. 75 and 76 is executed), the winning number information is displayed as an image It may not be displayed on the device 905 (the display control of FIG. 77 is executed).

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the winning number information is to be displayed according to the order of the received setting operation with the same setting of the game arcade setting and the player setting. That is, it may be determined whether or not the winning number information is to be displayed by giving priority to the setting operation (the latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), thereafter, the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screen of FIGS. 38 (1) to (3). When the setting is made, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3) are set not to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) thereafter. If it is determined that the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the number-of-winnings information on the player setting screen in FIGS. When it is set, the winning number information is not displayed (display control of FIG. 77 is executed). Further, even if the player number setting screen of FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3) is set to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position). In the case of (1), the winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 77 is executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by the store clerk at the game arcade operating the display switching switch 9032 and the player can operate the operation button 9030. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-winnings information on the image display device 905 by operating the screen, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a store clerk at the game arcade operates the display switching switch 9032 While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player can not set whether to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIG. 38 (1) to The setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided. As described above, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the game arcade side.

  Also, contrary to this, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by the player (and the store clerk at the game arcade) operating the operation button 9030, while the game arcade It is also possible that there is no means (only for example, the display switching switch 9032 is not provided) that can set whether or not only the winning side information is to be displayed on the image display device 905. In such a configuration, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-winnings information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030) by the player and the store clerk in the game arcade. . As described above, whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 may be set by the setting operation common to the player and the game arcade.

  (10) In addition, the winning number information on the winning number for each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which the display position (second position) is displayed, and the game in which the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position) In the mode, the image display device 905 may not be displayed. That is, it may be handled in the same manner as the information of the winning number management table shown in FIG. 36 (a).

  As described above, the number-of-winnings information related to the number of winnings for each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) explained in FIG. The information may be displayed on the image display device 905 only when it is performed, and the player may not normally view the information. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demonstration screen is displayed), or a state in which a game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special figure game is being performed, a regular game Is not displayed on the image display device 905 in a state in which the player is executing, including a big hit gaming state, etc., and is a predetermined period (for example, one minute from the start of power supply of the gaming machine) May be displayed only before the game is performed, or may be displayed only for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when an operation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed. good.

  (11) In addition, the winning number information regarding the winning number for each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described in FIG. 78, etc. is either maintenance mode or gaming mode Also in the mode, it may be possible to display on the image display device 905. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed on the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, it is possible to display only the first area α. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be made different between the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

  In addition, while the number-of-winnings-information of all the items collected is displayed in the maintenance mode, in the game mode, some items (items set by operation of the game arcade side or the player or It is also possible to display winning number information of a predetermined main item). That is, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

  (12) Also, in the game mode, during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game completion determination being made, it is possible to display the winning number information in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, it may be possible to display the winning number information only in the first area α during a period in which it is determined that the game is not being determined and the game is not being determined. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be made different between a period in which it is determined that a game is not being performed and a period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

  In addition, during the period during which the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game completion determination being performed, the game completion determination is not performed while the winning number information of all the items collected is displayed. During the period determined to be medium, winning number information of some items (items set by the operation of the game arcade side or the player or main items determined in advance) may be displayed. That is, the items of the number-of-winnings information to be displayed may be differentiated between the period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

  (13) In the above embodiment, with regard to the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and holding information), a setting for displaying winning number information ( 75 and 76) and the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 77) are not changed (commonized), while for other images (background images), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number Although the viewable range is made different depending on the setting in which the information is not displayed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 80, the setting for displaying winning number information (FIG. 80A) With the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 80 (b)), the display position and the display range (size of the image) of all the images including the background image other than the winning number information may be made common. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (size of the image) of the decorative symbol are set to display winning number information (FIGS. 75 and 76) and setting to not display winning number information (FIG. 77). Although the display position and the display range of the decorative pattern may be changed according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 81A), the setting for not displaying the winning number information at an interval of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (FIG. The intervals of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display of the decorative symbol may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 905L in the case where the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. As described above, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display or stop display of the decorative symbol in the first area α may be permitted. As described above, the entertainment may be enhanced by performing the rendering using the entire screen.

  (15) In the above embodiment, magnetic errors, vibration abnormalities, and radio wave abnormalities are exemplified as errors of the gaming machine, but not limited to these, errors of the game machines include an opening abnormality of the front door, an abnormality of the payout mechanism (Prize ball abnormality, etc.), Unfair prize abnormality of the big prize mouth (abnormality that the prize prize is detected even though the big prize mouth is not open) or malfunction of various members of the pachinko machine 901 Or the like.

[Other modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. It should be noted that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above effects may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above effects and the following modification The control and configuration of the gaming machine may be arbitrarily combined.

  In the above embodiment, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041 B due to the arrangement of members defining the flow-down direction of the game nails and game balls on the game board are the third general winning opening 9050 C and the fourth general winning opening 9050 D. It shall be possible to win one of them. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect a prize to be paid to a general winning opening provided downstream of the game ball even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041 B in a definite change state or a short time state. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041B may be allowed to win either of the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D at a higher rate than the gaming balls that have passed through the gate 9041B. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect a winning to a general winning opening provided downstream of the gaming ball even when the frequency of the game ball passing through the gate 9041 B is low in a definite change state or a short time state. It is possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest. Furthermore, by performing the specific effect based on the winning on the general winning opening, it is possible to further enhance the game interest.

  In the above embodiment, executing the specific effect at a different rate according to the gaming state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain gaming state and not performing the specific effect in another gaming state . In the above embodiment, to execute the specific effect at a different rate according to the game period, it is possible to execute the specific effect only in a certain game period and not to execute the specific effect in another game period. included.

  In the above embodiment, in order to execute the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the effect can be executed only in the first state In the second state, not including the effect is included. Here, the division between the first state and the second state is the division according to the number of pending storages, the division according to the special figure game execution period, in addition to the division according to the above-mentioned gaming state Classification according to the type of fluctuation pattern (eg, classification as to whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display being executed is a fluctuation pattern with reach effect, or , Division according to whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display being executed is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by pseudo-sequence effect, division according to specific presentation timing (eg, before establishment of reach state in fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach effect) Or after it has been established, or a classification as to whether it is before or after the execution of the pseudo-sequence effect in the variation pattern with the pseudo-sequence effect, etc. .

  In the first to twelfth effect modes, the specific effect may be executable only in one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probability change state or the short time state. For example, (1) it is possible to execute the specific effect only in the normal state, and (2) not to execute the specific effect in the definite variation state or the short time state. Further, in the thirteenth to twenty-fourth performance modes, any of (1) a period after the reach state is established in reach fluctuation, and (2) a period before the reach state is established outside the period of reach change or reach fluctuation The specific effect may be executable only in one case. For example, (1) it is possible to execute the specific effect only in the period after reaching the reach condition in the reach fluctuation, (2) in the case before the reach condition establishment in the reach fluctuation or outside the reach fluctuation period The presentation may not be performed.

  In the first to twelfth performance modes, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) a normal state or (2) a probability change state or a short time state, the execution ratio or the specific effect is executed. Type of specific effect is different, but when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the presence or absence of the specific effect execution and the specific effect to be executed based on the effect execution conditions common to when the gaming state is the normal state The type may be determined, or the presence or absence of the specific effect execution and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect execution conditions common to those in the definite variation state or the short time state. . Also, the classification of gaming state is not limited to (1) normal state or (2) positive change state or short time state, for example, (1) high base state or (2) It may be a category that is not a high base state, or may be a category such as (1) a big hit gaming state or (2) a big hit gaming state.

  In the thirteenth to twenty-fourth effects modes, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change Depending on whether it is a period, the presence or absence of the execution of the specific effect, and the type of the specific effect to be executed is determined, but it is not limited to the classification of such a game period, for example, (1) May be a period of 1 or less, or (2) whether the number of pending storages is 2 or more, or (1) is a period during which variable display of a decorative symbol is being performed, (2) It may be a section as to whether the variable display of the decorative symbol is not being executed.

  In addition, (1) is a period during which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being performed, or (2) is a period during which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being performed, It may be a category. In addition, it may be divided into (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-series effect is performed, or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-series effect is performed. . Furthermore, even if it is the division whether (1) it is before execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect, or (2) it is after the execution of the pseudo connection effect in the variable display with the pseudo connection effect. good.

  In the first to fourth effect modes and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect modes, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect, but both of the specific effect A and the specific effect B It may be feasible. That is, when the winning condition is satisfied, one of the variation result notice effect and the advance notice effect, which meets the predetermined condition, is executed (for example, the change result notice effect is executed when the number of held memories is 1 or less). If the number of pending storages is two or more, the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed, or both may be executed simultaneously. For example, in the case where the advance notice effect is the effect of changing the mode of the display information (display portion) corresponding to the pending storage, the above-described change result notice effect (voice effect only or voice effect and feature effect) The preview advance notice effect can be performed simultaneously, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the advance notice effect are performed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result of the start winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display being executed at the time of satisfaction of the winning condition becomes the big hit symbol, the fluctuation result notice presentation is given priority and executed, and the display result of the variable display being executed at the time of satisfaction of the winning condition If there is a holding memory which is a disappointing symbol but is determined to be a big hit in the start winning determination, it is preferable to execute pre-reading advance notice effects with priority.

  In the above embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 9030 only in a period determined to be in the non-playing state by the effect control CPU 90120 (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which becomes possible was explained, it is not limited to such form, regardless of game state (for example, normal state, definite change state, time saving state, big hit game state), also execution condition of special figure game (special symbol) Whether or not the variable display of is executed, the number of reserved memory of special drawing games), whether or not the variable display of ordinary symbols is being executed, or the number of reserved memories of common drawing games Whether or not the number of winnings is displayed may be set by the operation button 9030 regardless of. That is, whether or not the number of winnings is to be displayed by the operation button 9030 even during a period in which a game is being performed, for example, a period during which variable display of a decorative symbol is being executed or a period controlled to a big hit gaming state It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, positive change state, time saving state, big hit gaming state), and special feature The execution status of the game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game), the execution status of the common drawing game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of held memories of the common game.

  In the above embodiment, since there is no restriction on the period in which the display switching switch 9032 can be operated, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the game arcade side, the display switching switch 9032 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening. Not limited to such a form, the period during which the setting operation on the game arcade side can be performed may be limited. For example, in the configuration where the display change switch 9032 is not provided, the setting screen shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (3) is also used to set whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening on the game arcade side. It is assumed that selection and determination are performed by the operation button 9030. In such a configuration, depending on the gaming state (for example, normal state, positive variation state, time saving state, big hit gaming state), or whether or not the special symbol game execution status (special symbol variable display is executed or not , 38 (1) ~ according to the execution status of the special drawing game) and the execution status of the regular drawing game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and the number of holding memories of the common drawing game) The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, a period controlled to the jackpot gaming state, a period controlled to the definite variation state or the time saving state, a period during which the special figure game is being executed, a period for which the number of reserved memory of special figure games is not 0, etc. The setting screen shown in 38 (1) to 38 (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game arcade side may be prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only when the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening by switching the display switching switch 9032 which can not be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position). Although the setting screen (FIGS. 38 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed as such, It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening as a configuration not provided with the display switching switch 9032 which can be operated only by the game arcade side, not limited to the form, by both the player and the game arcade side It is a screen similar to the common setting screen (FIGS. 38 (1) to (3) for setting, and for selecting and determining whether or not to display the number of winnings on the general winning opening by operating the operation button 9030. Screen) may be displayed. Even if it is set that the clerk in the game arcade is not set to display the number of winnings for the general winning opening in the configuration where such a common setting screen is displayed, the player subsequently selects the number of winnings for the general winning opening. When the setting is made to be displayed, the number of winning for the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

  In addition, when it is set to display the number of wins to the general winning opening by switching the display switching switch 9032 which can be operated only by the game arcade side (the operation unit is set to the second position), and by the operation of the operation button 9030 When the setting is made to display the number of winnings to the winning opening, the image display device 905 displays common information (for example, the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table) You may make it In such a configuration, even if it is set that the common information is not displayed by switching of the display switching switch 9032, if it is set that the common information is subsequently displayed by operating the operation button 9030, Common information may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

  In the above embodiment, a limit may be provided to a period (playing state) in which the number of winnings on the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, during a period when variable display of decorative symbols is being performed, the number of winnings for a general winning opening may not be displayed in a period from reaching reach status to deriving display of a decorative symbol. . In addition, in a predetermined gaming state such as a definite variation state or a time saving state, the number of winnings on the general winning combination may not be displayed. In such a mode, the setting means (for example, the display switching switch 9032) on the game arcade side can be used to determine in which period (playing state) the number of winnings for the general winning opening can or can not be displayed. It may be settable or settable by setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

  In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player, the personal identification ID registered on the website, etc.) and the like by the operation button 9030. By doing this, game data including the number of wins to the general winning a prize port from the player ID input and the like can be added up, and operating the operation button 9030 when ending the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 The game data collected after the player ID input may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. A player captures an image of a two-dimensional code (information capable of specifying a player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, thereby the information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet. And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the information management server The game data managed by is updated. The player can access the information management server through the information terminal and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), and as a result, the winning of the general winning opening is achieved. It becomes possible to grasp the number. In such an embodiment, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be settable by the setting means (for example, the display switching switch 9032) on the game arcade side, the setting means on the player side It may be settable by (for example, the operation button 9030).

  In such a mode, a benefit may be given to the player according to the number of winning on the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winning in the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, a background image usable on the information terminal, application software, etc. is given as a benefit to the player of the player ID. Also good. Further, points may be awarded to the player according to the number of winning in the general winning opening, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may exchange some or all of the owned points with the benefit.

  In the above embodiment, although the pachinko gaming machine 901 has described an example of displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening, it does not display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, but the game ball is winning on the general winning opening It may be a notification of what has been done. For example, a message of winning notification may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening, and the sound effects and sound of the winning notification are output from the speakers 908L and 908R. You may In such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won in the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, display switching switch 9032) on the game arcade side It may be possible or may be set by the setting means (for example, the operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the status of winning on the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the number of winnings on each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings on the general winning opening to the number of fired balls to the game area, or the general winning per hour on the image display device 905). The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed, and the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the winning frequency. In addition, when a winning on the general winning opening occurs, the winning on the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. With such voice notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency to the general winning opening. In addition, when a winning on the general winning opening occurs, the bat operating handle, the operation button 9030 and the like may be vibrated. With such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency for the general winning opening.

  The number and winning frequency for each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905 and is output to a management device such as a hall computer communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is possible to manage the number of winnings for each general winning opening for each machine. This information can be useful, for example, for maintenance of the gaming machine.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a different sound effect from that when winning in the other winning openings such as the start winning opening It is good to make it output. In such a configuration, the sound effects at the time of winning may be made different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effects may not be output when winning is made at a specific general winning opening.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the game ball has won in the general winning opening, it may be possible to change the execution ratio of the advance effect and the effect mode. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the presentation mode of the notice effect change, and for example, a predetermined variable, for example, It is preferable that the execution ratio after the change and the presentation mode be continued until the number of displays is performed.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined variable display frequency is executed for a predetermined period It is recommended that the changed music be continued until the end. In addition, when the number of winning on the general winning opening has reached a predetermined value, a specific piece of music (for example, a big hit medium music) may be output. In addition, based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening or the number of game balls reaching the general winning opening having reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from among a plurality of music (BGM) The music (BGM) may be selectable.

  Further, based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening, the music being reproduced may be continuously output. For example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, based on the fact that the game ball has won in the general winning opening, it may be possible to continue to output the music during the big hit even after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, based on the game ball having won in the general winning opening, a stage change may be performed to change the background image of the decorative symbol and the music (BGM). It should be noted that the transition destination stage (the background image and the music) may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings has won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect to be executed based on the winning at the general winning opening has been described as an example in which the change result notice effect and prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special drawing game Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special drawing game. For example, among the plurality of general winning openings, a general winning opening in which the gaming ball is not winning may be displayed, and a character may appear when the gaming ball wins in the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even though the game ball is fired in the game area, when the game ball does not win the general winning opening for a predetermined period, or the winning frequency to the general winning opening is less than the threshold. In some cases, specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 905 that a winning on the general winning opening has not occurred may be executed. In addition, even though the game ball is fired in the game area, if the game ball does not win only in a specific general winning opening among a plurality of general winning openings for a predetermined period, or a winning in a specific general winning opening If the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 905 that a winning on the specific general winning opening has not occurred may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when simultaneous rendering is performed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winning on the general winning opening until simultaneous rendering is performed, or all at once The specific effect may be executed according to the winning on the general winning opening during the effect period. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed, the stop symbol may be changed, or the slip effect may be performed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, every time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the objects displayed on the image display device 905 are increased one by one to recognize the number of winning and winning in the general winning opening. It may be easy. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning on the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out on the basis of the winning on the general winning opening If the predetermined number has been reached, a specific effect such as displaying “100 hits!” On the image display device 905 may be executed. If the timing at which the number of award balls paid out based on the winning on the general winning opening has reached a predetermined number is a period in which notification of a gaming machine error based on fraud detection or failure detection is made, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is given priority over the specific effect and displayed, and the specific effect held after the notification of the gaming machine error is ended is executed.

(9) In the pachinko game machine 901, the game sound is output each time the game ball gets a prize in the general winning opening, and during notification of the game machine error, the notification sound of the game machine error is better than the game sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, the game display is made to display a winning display on the image display device 905 each time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and during notification of the gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when being controlled to the big hit game state, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening, and the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening The number of prize balls paid out may be added to the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. In the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is performed on the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state] At the same time, it is preferable to perform addition of the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. That is, the increase in the number of winning balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of the gaming ball to the big winning opening, and according to the winning timing of the gaming ball to the general winning opening [in the big hitting gaming state The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing such as updating the number of awarded balls].

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winning balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, in the case where the gaming ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right gaming area 9010B When the gaming ball has won in the 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, five winning balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect may be performed in which a general winning opening is made to win a game ball. For example, as in the sixth effect mode, the seventh effect mode, and the fourteenth effect mode, in a mode in which the specific effect is executed by causing the game balls to win each of the plurality of general winning openings, the plurality of Of the general winning openings, a general winning opening where the gaming ball is not winning is notified by the image display device 905, and an effect is suggested to the player to aim at the general winning opening where the gaming ball is not winning. It is good to make it. Further, as in the eighth effect mode and the sixteenth effect mode, in a mode in which the specific effect is executed based on the game balls having won in a specific order in the plurality of winning holes, a winning hole to be awarded and It is preferable that the order to be awarded is notified by the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general winning opening" is displayed, and after the winning of the first general winning opening 9050A is confirmed, the next operation is performed. After displaying "Aim for the first start winning opening!" And confirming the winning for the first starting winning opening, finally display "Aim for the second general winning opening!" After the winning of the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) Further, in the case where the game area 9010 is provided with a guide route of the game ball heading to the general winning opening, and the entry sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide route. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the entry sensor, an effect may be performed to notify in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. In addition, a period of time from the game ball's winning to the general winning opening until the payout of the winning ball is executed is secured for a certain period, and within that period, the effect based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. You may do so.

(14) When a stage capable of rolling game balls is provided below the image display device 905, an entrance to a general winning opening and a guidance route connected to the general winning opening is provided on the stage. Alternatively, the player may be interested as to whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guiding route.

(15) An effect may be performed in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 is updated for each winning on the general winning opening. For example, when the character grows for every winning on the general winning opening and reaches a predetermined number of winnings (when the character has grown to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (such as awarding a bonus) is executed. You may do so. In addition, an effect such as increasing the gauge is executed for each winning on the general winning prize opening, and when the predetermined winning number is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (the awarding of a bonus) Etc.) may be executed. In such a form of effect, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. It may be done.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect to be executed (variation result notice effect, prefetch notice effect) differs according to the game state when the winning condition is established, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although the example in which the voice is different has been described, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be different according to the game state without being limited to such a form. In addition, since there are many cases in which the effects produced by the game effect lamp 909 and the music to be reproduced are more flashy in order to improve interest in a definite change state and a time reduction state, the aspect of the specific effect is also more You may make it a player-friendly and flashy aspect.

(17) In spite of firing a fixed number of gaming balls in the game area 9010, when the number of winning in the general winning opening and the frequency of winning do not reach the reference value, the player is usually grasped It is also possible to report information on gaming machines that is difficult to do, for example, a latent probability change state or a limiter.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is established has been described, but temporarily, the variable display of the special view is not executed and the number of pending storages (first pending storage When the winning condition is satisfied with the total number of the number and the second reserved memory number being also 0, neither the variation result advance notice effect nor the prefetch advance notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect (for example, appearance of a specific character or reproduction of a specific music) not associated with the display result of the special drawing game as a specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the special display variable display is not executed and the number of pending storages (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) is also 0, the winning condition is satisfied. The execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and thereafter, the specific effect may be performed at the timing when the variable display of the special view is performed or the timing when the number of stored memories becomes two or more. That is, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning condition, and the specific effect held on the basis that the start condition of the special view game is satisfied or the start condition of the special view game is satisfied. It may be executed.

(20) In the above embodiment, when the number of winning prizes on the general winning prize opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number, the game ball does not win in the general winning prize mouth (for example, Message may be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, only during a maintenance mode in which information for the store clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, general It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening. By letting the gaming area 9010 fire the gaming ball for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode, a clerk at the game arcade can check whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening. It should be noted that, if the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number regardless of the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, the image display device 905 displays that the gaming ball does not win on the general winning opening. You may Further, similar to the display control of the number of winnings on the general winning opening, if the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined number based on the setting by the display switching switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings on the general winning opening in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively winning on the general winning opening (for example, “to the general winning opening “The number of winning prizes is too large.” May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, only during a maintenance mode in which information for the store clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, general It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball is excessively winning at the winning opening. By letting the gaming area 9010 fire the gaming ball for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode, a clerk at the game arcade can check whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning situation of the gaming ball to the general winning opening.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the gaming information management device managing the gaming information, and the gaming information The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the microcomputer 90100 for game control outputs a general winning signal when it detects the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening (for example, it outputs a signal of one pulse every one winning) By doing this, the gaming information management device may manage the number of winnings on the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device, as game information, the number of prize winnings in the general winning a prize opening per predetermined period (for example 1 hour), the number of prizes winning a general winning a prize opening per predetermined number of hit balls (for example 6000 shots) Alternatively, it is possible to calculate the winning rate for the general winning opening (the number of winnings for the general winning opening ÷ the number of inserted balls) and manage for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the effect control CPU 90120 increases the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 for each winning on the general winning opening, but the invention is not limited to such a form. The form of the object displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed every time the winning opening is made. For example, the expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed in accordance with the number of winning on the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information on the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the salesclerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts for each winning opening). In the above, an example in which notification is given is described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and notification may be provided by audio notification using the speakers 908L and 908R, or by the game effect lamp 909, decoration LED, and on / off control of 7 segments It is good. Further, the present invention is not limited to a form in which all the information in the winning number management table is informed, and only the information on the winning opening that is not within (or within) the predetermined reference range is provided. You may do so.

(25) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, as shown in FIG. 50, the information on the winning number management table is used as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts for each winning opening). Although an example in which notification (display) is performed in a mode not related to the effect performed in the above has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and may be notified in a mode according to an effect mode performed in a game good. By being notified in the form according to the aspect of the effect, compared with the case of being notified only by the table data as shown in FIG. Can be easily grasped. Note that the effects performed in the game may be any effects such as demonstration screen effects, advance notice effects, reach effects, and jackpot effects, and are not limited to effects displayed on the image display device 905, but may be voice. The effect may be by a lamp or the like. In addition, informing in the form according to the aspect of the effect, for example, the display and voice output such that the character appearing during the advance effect and the reach effect reads the information of the number-of-winnings management table Regardless of whether the resident character is displayed on the image display device 905 and performs a notice or an explanation of the game, a display or sound may be output such that the information of the winning number management table is read. In addition to the character image, information on the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operating means such as the mode switching switch 9031 operated to display information of the winning number management table as information for the store clerk (for example, winning number and payout number for each winning opening). However, although the example in which the player is inoperable and only the game store clerk can operate is described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the game arcade clerk can not operate. It may be provided at a position where only persons concerned such as a game machine inspector, inspector or manufacturer can operate. In addition, any person other than the above player may be provided at an operable position.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with ten maximum 2-byte counters is used as a storage area for storing information related to game winning, but a maximum 3-byte counter or a maximum 4-byte counter Can also be provided. At this time, the above-mentioned combination ratio (%) and combination (continuous ratio) (%) are displayed on the above-mentioned display monitor 9029 based on the total number of acquired balls of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method for performing this is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 109, when counting each of the total acquisition ball number, the character acquisition ball number, and the continuous character acquisition ball number by the counter configured by maximum 4 bytes, calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits thereof You may go. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquisition balls is 30,000 per day by the counter of 4 bytes, 4294836225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (the number of acquisition balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = Approximately 392, which is a calculation to cover the total of 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84A, the display monitor 9029 is provided at the center of the main substrate 9011 accommodated in the substrate case 90201. However, the display monitor 9029 is described. May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 110A, a display substrate 9011D is provided separately from the main substrate 9011C provided with no display monitor and the main substrate 9011C, and the main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. Alternatively, the display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display substrate 9011D. In this case, the main substrate 9011C performs calculation of a combination (continuous ratio) and a ratio to be displayed on the display monitor 9029 and data to be used for the calculation. The main substrate 9011C transmits information on the calculated combination (combination ratio), the combination ratio, and the control for displaying these to the display substrate 9011D via the harness 9011E. In the display substrate 9011D, based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 9011C, the display monitor 9029 may display a combination (combination ratio) and a ratio.

  The main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are housed in a substrate case 90201A which is a caulking substrate case. Similar to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 84A, caulking pins 9011B are attached to the substrate case 90201A. By providing the caulking pins 9011B, the main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are completely sealed in the substrate case 90201A, so that tampering with the main substrate 9011C is prevented. Further, in the substrate case 90201A, as in the case of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 84A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are disposed so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029.

  As shown in FIG. 110B, the display substrate 9011D may be provided outside the substrate case 90201B which is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 9011C may be sealed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 110C, the display substrate 9011D may be sealed in the substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be sealed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E. Further, in the substrate case 90201C, as in the case of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 84A, a hole and a heat dissipation hole are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are disposed so as not to block the display on the display monitor 9029. Note that the substrate case 90201C for sealing the display substrate 9011D may not be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 83 (A), and a label for the use of caulking is described on the label 9011R. It is also good. Here, the label 9011R may be disposed at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. As described above, by partially hiding the display monitor 9029 by the label 9011R, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, the player can not easily visually recognize the combination (ratio) or the ratio. You can In addition, even when the label 9011R is attached, the display monitor 9029 may be attached at a position not to be hidden.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the movable part, an electric part such as a big winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid or a second start winning opening (electric chow) is used. Instead, a so-called mechanical part that opens and closes by its own weight may be used as the movable part. Further, although a 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 9029, a 7-segment LED may be replaced with a dot display, a display screen, or the like. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided with four-digit display units of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, but the number of digits is not limited to four and may be another number of digits. For example, two digits, eight digits or ten digits may be used.

  In addition, as described in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of a combination (combination ratio) or a combination ratio. There is a case to deal with such as error cancellation. For example, in order to pay out the gaming balls, a back side of the gaming board 902 may be provided with a replenishment mechanism for replenishing the gaming balls (refilling balls). In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball clogs or the like occurs, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 may be opened to solve the ball clog, and the error may be canceled. When error is canceled by opening the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, a combination (combination ratio) or ratio of the display monitor 9029 can be obtained. It is possible not to display etc.

  Also, at this time, in order to prevent the display monitor 9029 from displaying a combination (combination ratio) or a combination ratio, there is no occurrence of an error to a display (combination ratio) or combination ratio The condition may be Errors with respect to the display of the winning combination (continuous ratio), the winning ratio, etc. are, for example, the detection of abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 96 or the winning information in business hours determined in step S90104. The acquisition may be a detection of a predetermined number of winnings or more for the attacker per unit time determined in step S90106. The player can see information such as a combination (combination ratio) or a combination ratio on condition that no error with respect to the display of such combination (combination ratio) or combination ratio has occurred. You can control the situation.

  Also, regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened and the error is canceled, and after the error cancellation is completed, the combination with the display monitor 9029 (continuous ratio) It is possible to wait for a predetermined period, for example, one minute, until a combination ratio or the like is displayed, and to display it after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the occurrence of an error, it is not possible to completely remove the cause of the occurrence of the error, and similar errors often occur in succession. By displaying the combination of ratios (ratio) and the ratio on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined time has elapsed, information such as ratio (ratio) or ratio to the player is obtained even when such an error occurs. It can control the situation that can be seen. The predetermined period here can be set arbitrarily, and may be longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Also, the predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of the failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the ball clogging of the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  The main substrate 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. The error indicator is preferably disposed at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be disposed at the right third of the main substrate 9011, and the error indicator may be disposed at the left third of the main substrate 9011. Also, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easy to understand, it may be printed on the substrate case 90201 where the display monitor 9029 is located on the main substrate 9011 or a seal may be attached to the substrate case 90201 You may leave it. The display monitor 9029 may be provided on a payout control board which is a part of the main board 9011.

(29) In the above embodiment,
Although it has been described that calculating the role ratio (%) and the role series (continuous ratio) (%) taking the pachinko gaming machine as an example and displaying it on the display monitor, the role ratio (%) or role in the pachinko gaming machine in the slot machine It is also possible to calculate values corresponding to reciprocity (dual ratio) (%) and display these values on a display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided, for example, on the main substrate of the slot machine, as in the above-described gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

  The role ratio and role combination (continuous ratio) in the slot machine is, for example, a feature for which the payout of the gaming value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as “medal”) accompanying the progress of the slot machine game is loaded in the slot machine The slot machine is calculated based on whether or not the slot machine is loaded with a feature other than the first-class special feature as the feature.

  For example, Type 1 special character, Type 2 Special character, and Normal character are set as characters, and Type 1 special character is not loaded as a character on the slot machine, When only other items such as objects are loaded, the ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the item relative to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, when only a type 1 special role is loaded as a feature on the slot machine, and a feature other than the type 1 special role is not loaded, a combination of winnings (total ratio) is a total payout of medals. It is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the character relative to the number.

  Hereinafter, an example of a method of calculating a combination (ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described. Here, an example will be described in which the type 1 special character is in the special game state, and only the type 1 special character is loaded as a character. In the slot machine, the fluctuation of the symbol can be started by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol. For winning in a slot machine, it shifts to a special gaming state in which the probability of occurrence of the award winning, the re-gaming winning where the fluctuation of the symbol can be started without setting the bet number, and the award winning with the award of gaming value There is a bonus prize. Here, in the slot machine, the winning combination (%) is the total of gaming values obtained by the occurrence of the award winning as a result of the variation of the symbol within the period in which the variation of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times In addition to the total winning balls in the pachinko gaming machine described above, the total game value obtained by the occurrence of the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period of transition to the special gaming state (as described above It is expressed by the ratio of the continuous character acquisition ball number in a pachinko game machine). For example, when the number of medals which is an example of the game value obtained in the period is 16000 during the period in which the variation of the symbol of 6,000 times is performed, the award winnings are made in the period transitioning to the special game state When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9,000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is a rule (continuous ratio) (%).

  Also, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, at the back of the outer frame. For this reason, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the main board looks different from the gaming machine 901 when the main board is viewed from the outside of the slot machine. Since reels and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than the pachinko machine. Also, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the back of the outer frame (the inner side of the plate on the back side). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, the light may not reach the main board sufficiently. Therefore, when the display monitor is attached to the main board, the information displayed on the display monitor ( With regard to numerical values, characters, etc., it is preferable to display them brightly with a large amount of light.

  Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is disposed so as to be easily viewed from an oblique direction with respect to the main substrate provided at the back of the outer frame. For example, when the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement that can be easily viewed from an oblique direction is a configuration that faces the front as viewed from the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Since the display monitor is arranged in this manner, the store clerk or the like opens slightly without opening the gaming machine frame 903 largely when the store clerk etc. performs the check operation of the role ratio (continuous ratio). It is possible to do the work of confirming the part-time ratio (continuous ratio) only by doing. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the combination ratio (combination ratio).

  When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, it has an inclined surface such as a base member 90129A shown in FIG. The display monitor may be attached to the inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be a buried inclined surface formed on the main substrate. The display monitor may be provided on a base member such as any of the base members 90129A to 90129I on which the above-described display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided, including these. When a display monitor is provided on the main substrate, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main substrate, and the main substrate and the display monitor may be accommodated in the substrate case. May be provided.

  Moreover, these display monitors may be provided in the adjustment means which can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening part between a door frame and an outer frame. The display monitor is provided on the adjustment means that can adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, so that the adjustment according to the wishes of the game arcade where the slot machine is installed It can be carried out. Also, the adjustment means may be manual or motorized.

  Although the main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, it may be provided at another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side as viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side. When provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, so when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor is easy to see be able to.

  Also in the slot machine, as in the pachinko gaming machine, the main board may be provided on the back side of the door frame. However, since there is nothing equivalent to a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine in a slot machine, and a visual check window for visualizing a reel is provided in a door frame, the main board is placed at a position avoiding this visual check window. It should be provided. Also in the pachinko gaming machine, instead of providing the main substrate on the back side of the game board, the main substrate may be provided on the far side or on the left and right sides of the outer frame like a slot machine.

  In addition, although the example which displays the calculated part ratio (%) and a part-time-run (continuous ratio) (%) in the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the main board was shown, it is not restricted to this, but payout control A display monitor may be provided on another substrate such as a substrate, a game board surface, a gaming machine frame (underframe) or the like. Also, the present invention is not limited to the provision of a dedicated display monitor for displaying a part ratio (%) or a parting line (multiple ratio) (%), and an existing display device (for example, the image display device 905 to display an error) It is also possible to display predetermined information such as a winning ratio (%) or a winning combination (continuous ratio) (%) by using a 7-segment display, a credit display in a slot machine, a payout number display, and the like).

  Further, in the above-described pachinko gaming machine 901 and slot machine, the predetermined information is a combination (combination ratio) and a combination (cumulative combination (combination ratio) and cumulative combination ratio), but may be other information. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the predetermined information may be the number of payouts of the gaming balls (= the number of winning balls). Further, in the slot machine, the machine split (= (the number of paid-out medals / the number of inserted medals) × 100) or the difference between the number of inserted medals and the number of paid-out medals may be used. Further, these numerical values may be information calculated for each predetermined number of games and for each predetermined number of inserted medals. In addition, predetermined information such as a winning combination (combination ratio), a winning ratio, a machine split, etc. may be calculated for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and predetermined information for each game number may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

  Some slot machines have so-called settings. The setting is a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine into stages, and, for example, six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. About information such as a part-time job (continuous ratio) and a part ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information, it may be possible to display it for each setting, and when displaying for each setting, the setting is displayed together It is also good.

  In addition, some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of medals inserted (number of bets). For example, one game can be executed by selecting the number of inserted coins (number of bets) for executing one game from one to three and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as a winning combination (continuous ratio) and a winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each inserted number (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required insertion number (the number of bets) differs according to the gaming state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required insertion number is 2 when the gaming state is in the bonus mode, and the required insertion number is 3 when the gaming state is other than the bonus state. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as a winning combination (continuous ratio) or a winning ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the gaming state and the number of inserted cards.

  Further, in the slot machine, as predetermined information, in addition to combinations (ratios) and ratios calculated on the basis of a regular character or special character, etc., for example, an advantage other than during a bonus on the gaming state of the slot machine When the section and the non-interest section are set, the ratio of the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-interest section is displayed. It is also good. In addition, on the display monitor, as predetermined information, the number of continued games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as “the number of advantageous section games”) and the number of games in the advantageous section and the non- advantageous section It is also possible to display a ratio (hereinafter, referred to as "a favorable / non-preferred ratio"). The number of continuing games and the advantage / non-interest ratio of the advantageous section may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination (combination ratio) ratio, or may be displayed with a time difference using a common display monitor. Good. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous / not advantageous proportion → short-term winning combination (continuous ratio) → short-term winning combination → cumulative combination (continuous ratio) → cumulative winning ratio → number of advantageous interval games → It may be displayed in the order of ....

  Further, the number of advantageous section games may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous section during the continuation of the advantageous section, or may be a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3,000 G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games of the advantageous section executed on a predetermined period, for example, on the day. The advantageous / non-favorable ratio may be a predetermined game number, for example, the number of games per 3000 G in the past, or may be an advantageous / non-favorable ratio of a predetermined period, for example, the day.

  Further, the ratio of the difference between the inserted number of medals and the paid-out number of medals in the advantageous section and the difference between the inserted number of medals and the paid-out number of medals in the non-favored section may be displayed. The point is that the ratio between the medals paid out in the advantageous section and the medals paid out in the non- advantageous section may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non- advantageous section. By reducing the payout ratio of medals in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the fluctuation of increase and decrease of medals. In addition, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, the advantageous section may have a predetermined limit, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section, or a machine split in the advantageous section. .

  An advantageous section refers to a section in which the ratio (machine percentage) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted is higher than that of the non- advantageous section. This is a section that is advantageous for the player because the machine percentage is high. As an advantageous section, in addition to being in a bonus in which a normal character or special character is in operation, listing during a replay time (RT), during an assist time (AT), during an assist replay time (ART), etc. Can. The mechanical ratio in the advantageous section is often more than 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT etc.). If the machine percentage in the advantageous section is less than 100%, although the game continues to consume, the medals will be consumed, but the player is more likely to the non-favorable section in that the percentage of medals consumed is lower. It is advantageous.

  During the replay time is, for example, a state in which the probability of winning a replay (winning probability) is higher than in a state other than the replay time. During the replay time, since the replay probability is higher than that during the non-replay time, the amount of medal consumption can be reduced, so the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

  During the assist time is, for example, a state in which the operating procedure is navigated when a condition device is established in which a winning combination is displayed on the effective line when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operating procedure is satisfied. . As navigation of the operation procedure, for example, in the case of stopping three reels in a predetermined stopping order, it is the navigation of the stopping order or in the case of stopping display of a predetermined symbol. It is During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated in any state other than the assist time, so whether or not the operation procedure is executed is uncertain, but during the assist time, the operation procedure is navigated As a result, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the activated line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

  During the assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are simultaneously executed. In the slot machine, by combining these advantageous sections and non- advantageous sections, the game is designed to proceed with increase and decrease of medals. Here, with respect to each advantageous section such as a bonus, a replay time, an assist time, and an assist replay time, there are cases where the degree of advantage is smaller although it is more advantageous than the non-favorable section.

  The advantageous sections for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be all or part of them. For example, in a slot machine provided with a plurality of advantageous sections as the advantageous sections, the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as the predetermined information may be only the advantageous section in which the machine percentage exceeds 100%. Further, even in the case of advantageous sections of the same type, it may be changed depending on transition conditions whether or not to be an advantageous section for calculating a ratio displayed as predetermined information. For example, in a slot machine that transitions during the replay time immediately after bonusing ends and after a predetermined number of games, for example, 1000 games after the bonus ending ends, the replay is performed immediately after the bonusing ends. During the time is set as an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information, and during the replay time shifted after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus, the ratio displayed as predetermined information is calculated. It may not be an advantageous section for

  During the replay time, which is shifted immediately after the end of the bonus, it is during a so-called chance replay time to give the player who has won many medals in the bonus a chance of acquiring further medals. On the other hand, during the replay time, which has been shifted after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus, the player who has lost many medals is in a so-called salvage replay time to give relief for the lost medals. An advantageous section for calculating a ratio displayed as predetermined information during such chance replay time, and an advantageous section for calculating a ratio displayed as predetermined information during rescue replay time You may not do.

  In addition, in order to calculate other numerical values such as winning combination (continuous ratio), winning ratio, or machine percentage in the slot machine, for replay, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted and one game is executed. The calculation may be performed assuming that three medals have been paid out. Alternatively, with regard to replay, it may be assumed that a player has not played a game and may perform other numerical values such as a winning combination (running ratio), a winning ratio, or a machine discount in a slot machine.

  Further, in the ring buffer provided in the RAM 90102 in the pachinko gaming machine, the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls is stored. On the other hand, the ring buffer in the slot machine may store, for example, the number of medals paid out for an advantageous section and a non- advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals, or for each predetermined number of games. The payout number of medals of the section and the non-favorable section may be stored. The predetermined number of sheets may be, for example, 500 or 1000. Other appropriate numbers may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum payout number of medals paid out in one game is 15, the maximum payout number of medals paid out in 400 games is 6,000. For this reason, the maximum payout number in 400 games can be stored with a margin in a 2-byte storage area.

  In the above embodiment, one change is made when the change is started in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-links. Although the example which transmits a pattern designation command was shown, it may be made to notify a change pattern to a production control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the main board (main side) is before reaching reach (if it does not reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo run, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command) Send a command (for example, a front fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time or fluctuation mode (for example, a front fluctuation pattern) before the second stop, and for the second command, type of reach or presence / absence of relottery effect, etc. It is also possible to transmit a command (for example, a post fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode (for example, a post fluctuation pattern) after reaching a reach (after a so-called second stop when not reaching a reach) .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and a specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can also be changed as appropriate. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one kind of outlying symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishment of the symbol concerned. . Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the process shown in the flowchart, etc., the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED The various rendering operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and the gaming medium is enclosed and scored based on the occurrence of a prize It can apply also to the enclosed type game machine which grants.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device included in the game machine such as a pachinko machine 901, for example. It may be distributed by being preinstalled in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls (general prize balls number) by the winnings to the first starting opening (Heso) and the general winning prize opening (Sode) to be counted, and the number of ordinary electric service prize balls (electric Chu prize balls) Number), special rake award ball number (attacker award ball number) is to be recorded in the ring buffer, there is a recording capacity for at least 11 sets, and is updated every set However, instead of this format, in the present invention, it is possible to have a format having only two types of total accumulation as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Specifically, it has RWM9010000 for total accumulation storage and RWM9010001 for total accumulation storage, and relates to game winnings in order to display combination ratio (synonym with "combination (combination ratio)" in the above embodiment) and combination ratio. Information (The number of prize balls by winning in the first opening mouth (Heso) and the general winning prize hole (Sode) (General prize ball number), Regular electric pole number (Den Chu award ball number), Special electric pole number ball The number (attacker award ball number) is accumulated in RWM 9010000 and 9010001 and stored. Furthermore, by deleting the information on winning of the game at a predetermined opportunity, the total cumulative saving RWM 9010000, the running ratio calculated based on the count from the deleted timing to the present, the duty ratio, short-term running ratio and It can be displayed as a short-term combination ratio, and can be displayed as a cumulative combination ratio or a cumulative combination ratio, which is calculated based on the aggregation of the total cumulative storage RWM 9010001. With such a configuration, it is sufficient that there are only a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information on winnings in a game, and processing such as storing and updating a fixed amount of information like a ring buffer is also unnecessary. It is preferable because

  In addition, as a predetermined | prescribed opportunity, ON / OFF of a power supply can be made an opportunity, for example. According to this, it is possible to totalize the information regarding the winning of the game from the power ON, that is, it is possible to display the consecutive ratio of one day, the combination ratio as the short-term connection ratio and the short-term combination ratio. In this case, RWM9010002 is provided to save the accumulated value of RWM9010000 for total cumulative storage when erased, and the accumulated value of RWM9010002 can be displayed as a short-term connection ratio and a short-term duty ratio. It is preferable that the 1-day short-term continuous ratio and the short-term ratio before entering can be displayed. Note that it is also possible to accurately count short-term continuous ratios such as one day and one hour and short-term duty ratios by using a real time clock or the like as a predetermined trigger.

In addition, as a predetermined trigger, it can be a trigger related to a game such as setting change, door opening, or touch sensor detection of a steering wheel. According to this, although it is not a one-day period like power-on, short-term continuous ratio and short-term ratio in a predetermined period (such as between setting change and setting change, between door opening and door opening) It is preferable because the duty ratio can be displayed. Further, the same effect can be obtained even when the number of times the demonstration screen is displayed or the number of times of big hit reaches the predetermined number as a predetermined trigger.
It should be noted that two regions may be formed in the RWM region of the memory space instead of the configuration having two RWMs as in RWM 9010000 and 9010001.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, instead of the ring buffer type, a type as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 112 can be used. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 9020000 for collecting information on game winnings and an area B1 for storing cumulative results of information on game winnings on the 6000th are stored. An area B10 for storing an accumulation result of information on winnings of the area B2, 18000... 60000th game is provided. Then, information on game winnings is added to the area 9020000 and updated, and the game winnings accumulated and stored in the area 9020000 are stored on the condition that the number of winning balls reaches 6,000. Information (The number of prize balls by winning in the first opening mouth (Heso) and the general winning prize hole (Sode) (General prize ball number), Regular electric pole number (Den Chu award ball number), Special electric pole number ball The value of the number (attacker prize ball number)) is stored in the area B1. Furthermore, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2 on the condition that the number of winning balls reaches the 12000th, and the information relating to the game winning combination accumulated in the area 9020000 is stored in the area B1. Remember. Thus, the information of the area 9020000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th, and the information of the other areas is shifted. In addition, after the number of winning balls reaches 66000, the information regarding the game winning combination stored in the area B10 is erased, and the information of the area B9 is controlled to shift to the area B10.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display the contingent ratio and the winning ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the area 9020000 as a cumulative coupling ratio and an accumulative winning ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B 2000 from the area 9020000, it is possible to display the nearest 60000 pieces (that is, about 10 time portions), and the combination ratio as the short-term combination ratio and the short-term combination ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 9020000, it is possible to display the nearest 6,000 consecutive ratios (that is, about one hour), the combination ratio as the short-term connection ratio, and the short-term combination ratio.

  Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 112, only the region B10 can be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, although it is not possible to obtain a detailed ratio of about 1 hour and a part ratio, it is possible to display the nearest short term ratio of 60000 pieces (approximately 10 hours) and the short term part ratio. Less preferred.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, instead of the ring buffer format, the format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 114 can be used. Specifically, it has RWM 9030000 for total cumulative storage and RWM 903 0001 for total cumulative storage, and information on game winnings (first opening (Heseo) and general winnings (Sode) to display multiple ratio, combination ratio Accumulated award winning ball number (general winning number ball number), ordinary electric number winning electric number ball number (electric chu prize number ball number), special electric number winning hand number ball number (attacker number ball number)) in RWM 9030000, 9030001 Let me remember.
The total cumulative storage RWM 9030000 is accumulated and stored from the first winning number of balls, whereas the total cumulative storing RWM 903 0001 is the standby without storing the first to 60000 number of winning balls In addition, it is made to accumulate and memorize from the number 60001 of the winning balls. According to this, the difference between the total accumulated storage RWM 9030000 and the total accumulated storage RWM 903 0001 becomes 60000, and by subtracting the total accumulated storage RWM 903 0001 from the total accumulated storage RWM 903 0000, the ratio of 60000 units, the ratio It can be displayed as a short-term continuous ratio, a short-term duty ratio. In addition, it is possible to display a running ratio and a winning ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM 9030000 as a cumulative running ratio and a running ratio.

  Further, in the above embodiment, instead of the ring buffer type, a type as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 115 can be used. Specifically, cumulative counter 904 0000, 904 0001, total cumulative counter 904 0002, total cumulative counter 904 0002, information about the winning of the game in order to display the consecutive ratio, the combination ratio (first starting opening (Heso) and general Prize ball number (general prize ball number) by winning in the winning slot (Sode), ordinary electric pole prize ball number (electric chew prize ball number), special electric pole prize ball number (attacker prize ball number) It is made to accumulate and memorize from the number 1st. The ratio and the duty ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the total cumulative counter 9040002 can be displayed as a cumulative ratio and a cumulative ratio.

On the other hand, by means of two counters of the cumulative counters 9040000 and 9040001, a ratio of 60000 is displayed as a short-term ratio and a short-term ratio. More specifically, the cumulative counter 9040000 starts counting from the first winning number, and clears it when the sixth winning number is reached. On the other hand, the total counter 9040001 starts counting from the 30,000th and clears it when the number of winning balls reaches the 90,000th. And when it is going to calculate the short-term running ratio for 60000 pieces and the short-term part ratio, for example, from 30001st to 60000th, it is calculated based on tallying of the total counter 9040000 and 60001th to 90000th. Is calculated based on the aggregation of the cumulative counter 9040001.
As described above, since the cumulative counters 9040000 and 9040001 are counted so that the number of winning balls is divided by 30,000, when displaying the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term combination ratio, at least 30,000 or less within the total number. That is, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive ratio and the short-term duty ratio within 5 hours ago. According to this, while suppressing that a capacity | capacitance increases, since a relatively latest short-term continuous ratio and a short-term ratio can be displayed, it is preferable.

(Display of performance)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, performance information (described later) can be displayed in place of or in addition to the display of the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 901, for example, performance display is performed on a display monitor (a display monitor 901130 or the like shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later) provided on the main substrate 9011.

  FIGS. 116 and 117 are explanatory diagrams related to performance information. FIG. 116A shows an example of items of performance information displayed by the gaming machine 901. In the gaming machine 901, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 116 (A), it is possible to display the real time base value and the previously accumulated base value as the performance information. The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is a base value (real-time value during measurement) every 60000 out in the normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of gaming balls used (launched) in the normal state and reaches 60000 (0-59999), the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of gaming balls under measurement ( %). The last accumulated base value of the item number “b6” is a base value (total value measured last time) every 60000 out in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative total base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of winning balls to the number of gaming balls previously measured 60000. .

  The normal state in the performance display is a state managed or controlled by the aforementioned game state flag. Specifically, it is a state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off (except that the round game in progress flag is on). That is, in the performance display, a state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are off is referred to as a normal state. The positive change flag is a flag indicating whether or not a positive change state is present. The time saving flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state is set. The in-round game flag will be described later.

  In the normal state in the performance display, it has been described that the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are all in the off state, but the other display (the number of winning balls on the main board 9011 side or the effect control board 9012 side) In the display related to etc.), the state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the in-round game flag are in the off state may be set as the normal state. For example, the items B1 to B4 in FIG. 78 may be counted when all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are off. Further, for example, although it has been described that, in relation to FIG. 84 (B), the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state, for example It is also possible to calculate and display a winning combination (continuous ratio) and a winning ratio in a state in which all of the flags in the round game are off.

  FIG. 116B shows values collected (updated) on the game control microcomputer 90100 side for performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 116 (A) is calculated based on the values shown in FIG. 116 (B). Specifically, the above-mentioned base value is the number of winning balls from all winning openings with respect to the number of hit balls (60000) (the number of winning balls from the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B The number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by the third regular winning hole 9050C, the number of prize balls by the fourth general winning hole 9050D, the number of prize balls by the first starting winning hole, the number of winning balls by the second starting winning hole, It is a ratio (%) of the winning balls number by the big winning opening. That is, in the gaming machine 901, each value shown in FIG. 116 (B) is totaled in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative total base value shown in FIG. Calculate, display.

  FIG. 116 (C) shows the display mode of the performance information. In the gaming machine 901, performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main substrate 9011 in the display mode shown in FIG. Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) “bL.” Indicating that it is the real-time base value in the upper two digits among all four digits. The lower two digits of all four digits are displayed (lit) with a number (%) or "-" in the range of "00" to "99". Although the lower 2 digits of the total 4 digits are the original real-time base value, the display of the real-time base value may be called with the display of all 4 digits including the upper 2 digits. In addition, when displaying the previous cumulative total base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) “b6.” Indicating that it is the previous total cumulative base value in the upper two digits among all four digits. Of the four digits, the lower two digits are displayed (lit) with a number (%) or "-" in the range of "00" to "99". Although the lower 2 digits of the total 4 digits are the original last accumulated base value, there are also cases where the display of the previous aggregate base value is carried out with the display of all 4 digits including the upper 2 digits.

  FIG. 117A shows a section (total section, evaluation section) according to the total number of outs (total number of shots). The “factory shipment test section” in FIG. 117A is a section in which the total number of outs is less than 300. The “first section” is the first section among the sections managed every 60000 (0 to 59999) in total. The “second interval” is the second interval of the above-described intervals. The “third time section” is the third time section of the above sections. In FIG. 117 (A), the following sections are omitted.

  FIGS. 117 (B) to 117 (F) show display modes of the performance information according to each section (and the number in the section). In each of FIGS. 117 (B) to 117 (F), the display mode of the real-time base value on the left side, the display mode of the previous cumulative base value on the right side It indicates that it will switch.

  FIG. 117 (B) shows the display mode of the performance information displayed in the factory shipment test period shown in FIG. 117 (A). In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), a real-time base value in which the upper two digits are "bL. (Flashing)" and the lower two digits are "--(lit)" The previously accumulated base value in which the two digits are "b6. (Flashing)" and the lower two digits are "-(lighting)" is alternately displayed every five seconds. The radiation-like highlighted display illustrated in the portion of the upper two digits "bL." On the left side and the portion of the upper two digits "b6." On the right of FIG. It shows that. The same applies to FIGS. 117 (C), 117 (D), 117 (E), 138, and 139.

  FIG. 117 (C) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is less than 0 to 5999 in the first section shown in FIG. 117 (A). When the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the upper two digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are numerical values The real-time base value which is lighting (% in the example of FIG. 117 (C)) and the upper two digits are "b6. (Flashing)" and the lower two digits are "--( The previously accumulated base value, which is "lighted", is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 117 (D) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is less than 6000 to 59999 in the first section shown in FIG. 117 (A). When the total number of outs is 6,000 to 59999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the upper two digits are "bL. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are numerical values The real-time base value which is lighting (% in the example (33 (lighting) in the example of FIG. 117 (D)) and the upper two digits are "b6. (Flashing)" and the lower two digits are "--( The previously accumulated base value, which is "lighted", is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 117E shows the display mode of the performance information displayed when the total number of outs is less than 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 117A. When the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), the upper two digits are “bL. (Flashing)” and the lower two digits are The real-time base value which is the lighting of the numerical value (%) ("34 (lighting" in the example of FIG. 117 (E)) and the upper two digits are "b6. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are the numerical value (% And the previously accumulated base value, which is “33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 117 (E), are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 117F shows the display mode of the performance information displayed when the total number of outs is less than 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 117A. When the total number of outs is less than 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the upper two digits are "bL. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are The real-time base value which is the lighting of the numerical value (%) ("34 (lighting)" in the example of FIG. 117 (F)) and the upper two digits are "b6. (Lighting)" And the previously accumulated base value, which is “33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 117F, are alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

  Hereinafter, the configuration and the like of the gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display will be described. FIG. 118 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 118. The gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display described above may have, for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 118 and FIG.

  In FIG. 118, reference numeral 90700 in the vicinity of the tip of the guide rail (near the outlet of the game ball) is a launch ball detector provided with a launch detection sensor 90700A (see FIG. 119). Although FIG. 118 shows an example in which the launch ball detector 90700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail, other positions of the guide rail (for example, around the center of the guide rail (for example, the same height as the normal symbol display 9020) The launch ball detector 90700 may be disposed at a position (e.g., a position closer to the entrance (closer to the entrance) of the guide rail). Although part of the appearance of the game effect lamp 909, the operation button 9030 and the like is different, the same reference numerals as in FIG. Description is omitted about.

  In FIG. 119, reference numeral 901130 is a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 90700A is a launch detection sensor. In FIG. 119, the same components as in FIG. 82 will be assigned the same reference numerals as in FIG. 82, and the description of the components (the same components as in FIG. 82) will be omitted.

  Subsequently, the operation and the like of the gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 127.

  FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing an example of special view processing (also referred to as special symbol process processing). In the special view process shown in FIG. 120, the CPU 90103 executes a state control process (step S901101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes a start winning determination process (step S901102). In the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of start winning, for example, based on detection signals from the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B, and determines whether or not to perform preview advance notice effects. , And performs transmission settings of various commands (held storage number notification command, start winning determination result specification specification command, etc.).

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process of step S901102, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S901110 to S901117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102). And run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S901110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start a special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B based on the presence / absence of the pending data (pending storage) or the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, using a random number for special display display result determination whether or not to set the variable display result as "big hit", or when it is determined to be "big hit", use a random number for big hit type determination. It is determined which jackpot type to use, and the finalized special symbol in the special figure game. In the special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is set to the on state, and "big hit" The value corresponding to the jackpot type determined when it is determined to be determined is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control buffer setting unit in the RAM 90102). In the special symbol normal processing, for example, when the determined special symbol is determined, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S901111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In the variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern as any one of a plurality of types is performed using random numbers for determining the variation pattern. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of step S901112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In the special symbol variation process, a process of varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, a process of measuring an elapsed time after the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the like are performed . In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S901113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop and display a finalized special symbol as a variable display result of the special symbol for a predetermined time (special figure final display period) Etc. In the special symbol stop process, when the special figure determination display time has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" or "4" with reference to the big hit flag. Specifically, when the big hit flag is on (when the determined special symbol is a big hit symbol), the big hit flag is cleared to be in an off state, and the value of the special process process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (when the determined special symbol is a lost symbol), the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S901114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In the big hit opening pre-processing, processing to wait until waiting time (big hit start production waiting time) until the end of the execution time of fanfare effect (also called big hit start production) executed on the side of production control board 9012 elapses Or, setting etc. are performed to open the big winning opening after the passage of the big hit start effect waiting time. When the setting for opening the big winning opening is performed in the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S901115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the process of determining whether the condition to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state is satisfied (elapse of the big winning opening open upper limit time or winning of the upper limit number), or Settings for returning the special winning opening to the closed state are performed. When the setting for returning the big winning opening to the closed state is performed in the big hit open processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “6”.

  The jackpot post-processing in step S901116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. In the big hit opening post process, processing etc. which determine whether the number of times of execution of the round which makes a big winning opening open state reached a predetermined number of times are performed. In the big hit open post-processing, if the number of round executions has not reached the predetermined number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and if the predetermined number of times is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is "7" Update to

  The big hit end processing of step S901117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In the big hit end processing, processing etc. to wait until the waiting time (big hit end production waiting time) until the end of the execution time of ending effect (also called big hit end production) executed on the side of the production control board 9012 etc. Is done. In the big hit end processing, when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process performed in step S901101A of FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 121, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the value of the special view process flag is 4 (step S902001). When the value of the special view process flag is 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the round game in progress flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is on. It is determined (step S902002). The in-round game flag is one of the flags defining the normal state, as described above. If it is determined in step S902002 that the round game in progress flag is on (step S902002; YES), the state control process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the in-round game flag is off in step S902002 (step S902002; NO), whether the state change switching wait flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is on It is determined whether or not it is (step S902003). The state change switching wait flag is a flag provided to set the state change switching waiting time (described later) only once when the round game in progress flag is off.

  If the state change switching wait flag is off at step S902003 (step S902003; NO), the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S902004). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is specified as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the status change switching wait time. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902004 is a time shorter than the jackpot start effect waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 122). Although the details will be described later, time T1 in FIG. 128 is the jackpot start presentation waiting time, and time T2 in FIG. 128 is the state change switching waiting time.

  Following step S902004, the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting flag to ON (step S902005). Then, the state control process is ended.

  If the state change switching waiting flag is on at step S902003 (step S902003; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006). In the process of step S902006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902004 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed at step S902006 (step S902006; NO), the state control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S902006 that the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching wait flag and turns it off (step S902007), and turns on the round game flag It sets (step S902008).

  Subsequent to step S902008, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time saving state or the probability changing state (step S902009). In the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 executes, for example, a process of clearing the time saving flag or the probability change flag and turning it off. Further, in the process of step S902009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set to the probability variation count value which is the storage value of the probability variation number counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102) The process may be performed to initialize the probability variation count value to “0”. In addition, in the process of step S902009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set in the time count value which is the storage value of the time counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). The process may be executed to initialize the count value of the time saving number to “0”. The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of times of execution or the number of remaining times) of the special figure game in which the time reduction control or the high release control is performed. The certain variation counter is a counter for counting the number of times (the number of executions or the number of remaining times) of the special figure game in which the certain variation control is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902015). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. Then, the state control process is ended.

  In the state control process shown in FIG. 121, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, the time saving state or The game state designating command may be transmitted only when the probability change state changes to the normal state. In addition, on the side of effect control board 9012, the current gaming state is specified based on the gaming state designation command transmitted from main substrate 9011, but instead, the current gaming state is determined based on hit start designation command etc. May be identified. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG.

  If the value of the special view process flag is not 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether the value of the special view process flag is 7 (step S902010). When the value of the special processing process flag is not 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; NO), the state control process is ended.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the round game in progress flag is on (step S902011). If it is determined in step S902011 that the round game in progress flag is off (step S902002; NO), the state control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S902011 that the round game in progress flag is on (step S902011; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the round game in progress flag and puts it in the off state (step S902013).

  Subsequent to step S902013, the CPU 90103 performs setting for starting the time saving state or the probability variation state (step S902014). In the process of step S902014, the CPU 90103 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state according to the big hit type (value stored in the big hit type buffer; big hit type buffer value), and counts the number of positive changes according to the big hit type. Set the initial value to the value and the count value of time saving. For example, after the big hit ends, in the case of a big change that will be the next big hit and a big change that the time saving state continues, the positive change flag and the short time flag are set to the ON state. Also, for example, in the case of a definite change state and a time change state in which a definite change state and a short time state continue, the positive change flag and the short time flag are turned on in the definite change state and the time change state continues. It sets, 100 is set as an initial value to the count value of probability variation, and 100 is set as an initial value to the count value of the time saving. Further, for example, after the end of the big hit, a definite change state and a short time state continue ending with the special figure game which will be the next big hit until the next 30 big special games continue, and after the 31st special figure game, the big hit will be the next big hit In the case of a definite variation big hit in which the short time condition continues to finish 100 times of the special figure game continues, the definite variation flag and the short time flag are set to the on state, and 30 is set as the default variation count value as the initial value. Set 100 as the initial value to the count value. Further, for example, in the case of a non-probable variation big hit where the short time state continues until the next big hit becomes over 100 times after the big hit ends, the time short flag is set to the on state, and the number of times is short Set 100 as the initial value to the count value. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, in the case of a non-probable variable big hit that does not become a definite change state or a short time state, nothing is done (the positive change flag and the short time flag are not set on either, Do not set the count value).

  Following step S902014, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902015 described above, and ends the state control process.

  FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S901113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 122, the CPU 90103 first determines, for example, whether the special view finalization display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like is on (step S902291). Here, the special view final display flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S902295 in response to the final display of the final special symbol which is the variable display result in the special view game.

  When the special figure finalization display flag is off at step S902291 (step S902291; NO), the CPU 90103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol (step S9022292). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol determination designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902293). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the special view finalized display time which is the stop display time of the finalized special symbol (step S902294). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is specified as a timer initial value of the special view determination display time timer value which is a storage value of the special view determination display time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the special view finalization display time.

  Following the processing of step S902294, the CPU 90103 sets the special view finalized display flag to the on state (step S902295), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

  If it is determined in step S902291 that the special figure determination display flag is on (step S902291; YES), it is determined whether the special figure determination display time has elapsed (step S902296). In the process of step S902296, for example, it is determined whether or not the special figure determination display time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S902294 has timed out (the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). Good. If it is determined in step S902296 that the special view confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S902296; NO), the special symbol stop process is ended.

  When the special figure determination display time has elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; YES), the special figure determination display flag is cleared and turned off (step S902297) to determine whether the big hit flag is on or not. It judges (Step S902298). If the big hit flag is on (step S902298; YES), the big hit start time waiting time is set (step S902299). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is a timer value of the big hit start effect waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit start effect waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102), Set a predetermined big hit start production waiting time. Subsequent to the process of step S902299, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 (step S902300). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the big hit flag and turns off (step S902301), and sets the big hit start time flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) to on state (step S902302). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S902305), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S902298 (step S902298; NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving state or the probability changing state is ended (step S902306). In the process of step S902306, the CPU 90103 updates each count value according to whether or not a value (a value other than 0) is set to the count value of probability variation or count value of time reduction, and the status of time reduction or probability variation is changed. It is determined whether to end. For example, when the value is set to the time count value (for example, a special figure game is completed after the end of the non-probability variation big hit where the short time state continues to finish the special figure game until the next big hit or 100 times. Is updated 100 times or less) by subtracting 1 from the time count value. In addition, the CPU 90103 determines whether the updated time count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, “0”), and the updated time count value does not match the time reduction end determination value. Is determined not to end the time saving state. Also, for example, when values are set for the probability variation count value and the time count count value (for example, a probability variation state and a time variation state continuing until the next big hit hits 100 special figure games and the time variation state continues) In the case where the special figure game consumed after the end of the big hit is 100 times or less etc.), the probability variation count value is decremented by 1 and updated, and the time count value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the count value of the probability variation number after the update matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, “0”), and the count value of the probability variation number after the update does not match the probability variation end determination value. Determines that the definite variation state is not to be ended, and determines that the definite variation state is to be ended if it matches, and whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, "0") If it is determined that the time saving count value after the update does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined that the time saving state is not ended. Note that the CPU 90103 clears the probability change flag and turns off when it is determined to end the probability change state, and clears the time delay flag and turns off when it is determined to end the time saving state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S902306, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S902307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. Then, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated (initialized) to "0" (step S902308), and the special symbol stopping process is ended.

  In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 122, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes even when the game state changes, but when the game state changes (for example, the time saving state Alternatively, the game state designation command may be transmitted only when the probability change state changes to the normal state. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the current gaming state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead, the effect control is performed independently of the main board 9011 side. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is performed on the side of the substrate 9012 or the like.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing performed in step S901114 of FIG. In the big hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 123, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit start time flag is on (step S902131). Here, the big hit start time flag is set to the on state in the special symbol stop process corresponding to the big hit flag being on (step S902302 in FIG. 122).

  If the big hit start time flag is not on in step S902131 (step S902131; NO), the special winning opening determination process (see FIG. 125) is executed (step S90220), and the process proceeds to step S902138. Thus, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S901115, the big winning opening determination process is executed also in the big hit opening post process in step S901114, thereby suitably detecting a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value. be able to. For example, over prize winning can be suitably detected while waiting for the next opening (during step S902138 (YES)). The special winning opening determination processing will be described later.

  Although it has been described that the addition of the number of winning balls is excluded when the gaming ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more in the large winning opening per unit time, the over winning is not excluded. That is, even if there is a prize exceeding the above-mentioned "upper limit judgment value", the prize ball (the actual payout if it is within the range (for example, about +3), which is generally assumed to be an over prize. , Reflection to performance information). What is excluded from the addition of the winning balls is because of the wrongdoing, and the number of excess winnings is generally out of the range that is generally assumed to be over-winning.

  If the big hit start time flag is on in step S902131 (step S902131; YES), it is determined whether or not the big hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902132). In the process of step S902132, for example, whether or not the big hit start time waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the big hit start time waiting time timer value becomes 0 Or not).

  If the jackpot start production waiting time has not elapsed (step S902132; NO), the jackpot opening pre-processing is ended.

  If the jackpot start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902132; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the jackpot start flag (step S902134). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the special winning opening open frequency counter (step S902135). Specifically, the special winning opening open frequency count value is initialized to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 90103 reads the big hit type buffer value (step S902136), and sets an open control pattern corresponding to the read big hit type buffer value (step S902137). That is, in accordance with the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal processing, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 907 (big winning opening) is set. In the opening control pattern, for example, a winning opening opening upper limit time for each round is set.

  Following the process of step S902137 or the process of step S90220, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the next open standby is in progress (step S902138). That is, it is determined whether it is in the interval period until the big winning opening is opened as the next round. In the process of step S902138, for example, whether or not the round start waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902366 of the big hit open post-processing timed out (whether the round start waiting time timer value became 0) It is sufficient to determine If it is in the next opening standby (step S902138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit opening pre-processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if not waiting for opening next time (step S902138; NO), that is, if the interval period is over, the CPU 90103 controls the start of opening of the special winning opening (step S902139). For example, the CPU 90103 sets an opening time for opening the big winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S902137 and the count value in the large winning opening opening number counter, and the big winning opening is opened. To set. Specifically, in the process of step S902139, for example, the CPU 90103 sets the step as the timer initial value of the open time timer value which is the stored value of the open time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). The special winning opening open upper limit time (upper limit time for opening state) of the corresponding round in the opening control pattern set in S902137 is set. Further, in the process of step S902139, the solenoid drive signal may be transmitted through the solenoid circuit 90111 to set the solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door to be in the on state. In addition, in the case of the 1st round (when the big hit opening pre-processing is executed following the special symbol stop processing), the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), step In the process of S902138, it is immediately determined not to be waiting for the next release.

  Following the process of step S902139, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting the special winning opening open notification command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902140). Then, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5" (step S902141), and the big hit opening pre-processing is ended.

  FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit open process executed in step S901115 of FIG. In the big hit open processing shown in FIG. 124, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the big winning opening open upper limit time has elapsed (step S902121). If the special winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S902121; NO), the special winning opening determination processing is executed (step S90220).

  125 shows the big hit opening pre-processing of FIG. 123 (step S901114), the big hit opening processing of FIG. 124 (step S901115), the big hit open post processing of FIG. 126 (step S901116), and the big hit ending processing of FIG. 127 (step S901117). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special winning opening determination processing performed at.

  In the special winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 125, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 9023 is in the on state (step S90221). If the count switch 9023 is not on (step S90221: NO), the special winning opening determination processing is ended.

  When count switch 9023 is on (step S90221; YES), transmission setting of the special winning opening winning notice command for notifying winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening is performed to effect control board 9012 (Step S90222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view process flag is “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S 90223). If the value of the special view process flag is not "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S90223; NO), the special winning opening determination processing is ended.

  If the value of the special view process flag is "5" corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S90223; YES), the storage of the winning number counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102) The winning number count value, which is a value, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90224). Then, the special winning opening determination processing ends. When the process of step S90224 is performed in the special winning opening determination process, a payout process of winning balls is performed in the winning ball process. Also, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), if all of the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game in progress flag are in the OFF state, the number of winning balls by the big winning opening is updated in relation to the performance display. . However, as shown in FIG. 121, during the round game at least during the start of the first round (closing of the big winning opening door → opening) to the end of the final round (opening of the big winning opening door → closing) Since the flag is not in the off state but in the on state, the number of winning balls from the big winning opening is not updated during the period.

  It returns to FIG. Subsequent to the special winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 125, it is determined whether the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, "10") (step S902126). If the winning upper limit judgment value has not been reached (step S902126; NO), the big hit open processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the special winning opening open upper limit time has elapsed in step S902121 (step S902121; YES), or when the winning upper limit judgment value is reached in step S902126 (step S902126; YES), opening the special winning opening Control the end of the process (step S902127). That is, the CPU 90103 determines that the round game this time is ended, and sets the big winning opening to be in a closed state. For example, the transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 may be set to be stopped. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to “0” (step S902128). Then, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "6" (step S902129), and the process of big hit release is ended.

  FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening post process performed in step S901116 of FIG. In the big hit opening post process shown in FIG. 126, the CPU 90103 first executes the special winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 125 (step S90220). Thus, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S901115, the big winning opening determination process is executed also in the big hit opening post process in step S901116, thereby suitably detecting a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value. be able to.

  After executing the special winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 125, the CPU 90103 updates the special winning opening opening number count value so that 1 is added (step S902364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated special winning opening open frequency count value has become the maximum value (step S902365).

  The “maximum value” in the comparison with the updated special winning opening open frequency count value in step S902365 is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit frequency of the round. That is, since the special winning opening opening frequency count value to be compared with the above "maximum value" is after updating (step S902364), and the initial value of the special winning opening opening frequency count value is "1" (FIG. S902135), the above "maximum value" needs to be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of a big hit of 6 rounds (upper limit number of rounds is 6 times), the above "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of big hit of 16 rounds (upper limit number of rounds is 16 times), The above "maximum value" is "17". It should be noted that the "maximum value" may be compared with the number of times of opening the number of times of opening before being updated instead of the number of times of opening the number of times of opening after updating. In this case, the “maximum value” may be set as the upper limit number of rounds.

  If the special winning opening open frequency count value is other than the maximum value (step S902365; NO), the round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S902366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 is a predetermined timer initial value of a round start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of a round start waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the round start wait time.

  Subsequent to step S902366, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a notification command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control board 9012 (step S902367). Then, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4" (step S902368), and the big hit open post-processing is ended. Thus, by repeatedly executing the processing of steps S901114 to S901116 shown in FIG. 120 etc. until it is determined in the processing of step S902365 that the big winning opening open frequency count value after updating is the maximum value, It is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state. In addition, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S902366, the process will be waiting for the next release in the process of step S901114 shown in FIG. 120 etc. until the round start waiting time has elapsed (see FIG. Step S902138; YES), it is possible to start the next round with a desired interval period.

  If it is determined in step S902365 that the big winning opening open frequency count value is the maximum value (step S902365; YES), a jackpot end rendering waiting time is set (step S902369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 is a big hit end time of the big wait end production waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). As, the predetermined big hit end production waiting time is set.

  Following step S902369, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902370). Then, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "7" (step S902371), and the big hit opening post-processing is ended. Thus, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 by setting the jackpot end effect waiting time in the process of step S902369 (FIG. 127, step S902321; YES), The special symbol normal processing of step S901110 shown in 120 can be executed.

  FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S901117 of FIG. In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 127, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902321). In the process of step S902321, for example, whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902369 of the big hit open post-processing timed out (the big hit end effect waiting time timer value becomes 0 Or not). If the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; NO), the big winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 125 is executed (step S90220), and the jackpot end processing is ended. As described above, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S901115, the big winning opening determination process is also executed in the big hit end process in step S901117 to preferably detect a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value. Can.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; YES), the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0" (step S902325), and the execution of the big hit end process is ended.

  In the above, the operation of the gaming machine 901 in the case of performing performance display has been described using FIG. 120 to FIG. 127, but according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 120 to FIG. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, but the round playing flag is turned on at the stage before the opening of the first round. Details will be described below.

(A) End of fanfare effect → first opening of special variable winning ball device After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special figure confirmation display time), the CPU 90103 executes the fanfare effect execution time in the special symbol stop process. The waiting time until the end of (the big hit start waiting time) is set (step S902299 in FIG. 122), and the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Further, the CPU 90103 opens the special winning opening after the elapse of the waiting time (step S902132 in FIG. 123; YES) in the big hit opening pre-processing (step S902139 in FIG. 123). That is, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 is in the closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in the first open state after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) The round game in progress flag is set to ON → end of fanfare effect Also, when the value of the special process process flag is updated to “4”, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 121 Step S902004) After the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (Step S902006 in FIG. 121; YES), the in-round game flag is set to ON (Step S902008 in FIG. 121). Then, as described above, the state change switching waiting time is a time shorter than the big hit start waiting time (execution time for fanfare production). That is, before the end of the fanfare effect, the in-round game flag is turned on.

  From the above (A) and (B), the in-round game flag is set to ON → end of fanfare effect → the first opening of the special variable winning ball device 907. That is, the in-round game flag is turned on before the opening of the first round.

  Further, as described above, the gaming state in which the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls are collected for displaying performance is referred to as a normal state, and the normal state specifically includes a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and a round game In the gaming state, all the medium flags are in the off state (see FIG. 116). Therefore, since the game does not correspond to the normal state at least when the in-round game flag is in the on state, at least when the in-round game flag is in the on state, the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls are not collected for performance display. That is, at least when the in-round game flag is in the on state, the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected on the performance display.

  According to the above (A) and (B), since the flag during the round game is turned on at the stage before the opening of the first round, the number of winning balls and the hit balls from the stage before the opening of the first round at the latest The number is not reflected in the performance display (it is not reflected more accurately). It should be noted that the expression "at the latest" means that the playing state in progress of the special figure game prior to the special figure game in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is a definite change state or a short time state (that is, at least a positive change flag or a short time flag A stage before the "a certain stage before the opening of the first round" (for example, a stage during the execution of a special figure game prior to the special figure game in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, etc.) ) Because the number of balls and the number of hit balls have not been reflected on the performance display.

  FIG. 128 is an explanatory view for explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of gaming balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, from top to bottom, the detection timing of the gaming ball by the launch ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), the state of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 (big win door) , Closed state), winning timing for the big winning opening (detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023).

  As shown in FIG. 128, the big hit symbol (shown in the figure as the finalized decorative symbol “777” in the image display device 905) is stopped and displayed as the final determined special symbol in the special figure game (more specifically, in FIG. 122) The special variable winning ball device 907 opens for the first time in the special variable winning ball device 907 when the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed) and the big hit start waiting time (shown as the fanfare effect in the same figure) ends Is shown). Note that the jackpot effect in the image display device 905 is an effect performed during execution of the jackpot open processing (FIG. 124). Note that, in addition to the effects performed during the big hit open process (FIG. 124), the effects performed during the big hit open post process (FIG. 126) may also be referred to as a big hit effect.

  Timing t1 shown in the lower part of FIG. 128 is timing when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol in the special figure game. The timing t3 is a timing at which the special variable winning ball device 907 performs the first opening operation after the jackpot start effect waiting time ends. The time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is the jackpot start effect waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stopping process (FIG. 122). The timing t2 and the like will be described later.

  Further, FIG. 128 schematically shows a state in which three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) fired by the ball striking device are detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A. The game ball a is detected by the discharge detection sensor 90700A at a timing (for example, during reach effect etc.) slightly earlier than the timing t1 and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, of the big winning opening door in a closed state) It is a game ball etc. which flowed down the near side. The game ball b is a game ball which is detected by the ejection detection sensor 90700A at timing t2, picked up by the big winning opening door at timing t3 (instant opening moment), and detected by the count switch 9023. The game ball c is a game ball detected by the ejection detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly later than the timing t2, picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and detected by the count switch 9023.

  The time T2 between the timing t1 and the timing t2 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 121). The game ball b detected by the shot detection sensor 90700A at the timing t2 is detected by the shot detection sensor 90700A, and then flows down the game area 9010 at the slowest possible flow rate, and the winning opening door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up and detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, it is assumed that the game ball detected by the ejection detection sensor 90700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A.

  In other words, since there is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 among the game balls detected by the discharge detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the special winning opening door (for example, during the execution period of fanfare effect etc.) Like the ball c, the game ball detected by the fire detection sensor 90700A at any timing of time T3), the game ball detected by the fire detection sensor 90700A before the big winning opening door is opened by the count switch 9023 In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected from being reflected in the performance display, the in-round game flag is set to the on state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed) (step S902008 in FIG. 121).

  It should be noted that if the flag during round game is set to ON at timing t3 (when it is not reflected on the performance display from the opening timing of the big winning opening door), for example, time T3 as in game ball c. The game ball detected by the firing detection sensor 90700A at any timing is reflected on the performance display as the number of hit balls, but not reflected on the performance display as the number of winning balls when winning in the special winning opening Inconsistencies occur, and accurate performance indication can not be made. On the other hand, if the in-round game flag is set to the on state at timing t2 (when time T2 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

  Although it has been described that the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the gaming ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, the timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be an average timing detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, or may be a timing later than the average timing when the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the moment of opening is opened. May be That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 121) takes into consideration the flow-down time of the gaming ball (launch ball detector 90700 → special variable winning ball device 907) If it is However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned earliest timing as the timing t2. The same applies to FIG.

[Modification of launch ball detector]
FIG. 129 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. The gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display may have, for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 129 and FIG.

  In FIG. 129, reference numeral 90701 above the first pass gate 9041A is a first launch sphere detector provided with a first launch detection sensor 90701A (see FIG. 130). All gaming balls passing through the left gaming area 9010A pass the first shot ball detector 90701. That is, the first shot ball detector 90701 (first shot detection sensor 90701A) detects all gaming balls passing through the left gaming area 9010A. Reference numeral 90702 above the second pass gate 9041 B is a second launch sphere detector provided with a second launch detection sensor 90702 A (see FIG. 130). All gaming balls passing through the right gaming area 9010B pass the second launch ball detector 90702. That is, the second launch ball detector 90702 (second launch detection sensor 90702A) detects all gaming balls passing through the right gaming area 9010B.

  Although FIG. 129 shows an example in which the shooting ball detectors 90701 and 90702 are disposed above the passing gates 9041A and 9041B, other positions (for example, passing gates 9041A and 9041B, for example, can be used if all gaming balls can be detected The launch ball detectors 90701 and 90702 may be disposed under the lower side of In FIG. 129, the same components as in FIG. 118 are assigned the same reference numerals as in FIG. 118, and the description of the components (the same components as in FIG. 118) will be omitted.

  In FIG. 130, reference numeral 90701A denotes a first emission detection sensor. Reference numeral 90702A is a second emission detection sensor. In FIG. 130, the same components as those in FIG. 119 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG.

  The operations shown in FIGS. 120 to 127 are also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 129 and 130. In other words, the special view processing in the case of performing the performance display in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 and the special display in the case of performing the performance display in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIG. It is common to the figure processing.

  FIG. 131 is an explanatory view for explaining a state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. In FIG. 131, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of gaming balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is the detection timing of the game ball by the shooting ball detectors 90701 and 90702 (the shooting detection sensors 90701A and 90702A) in order from the top, of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning opening door) A state (opened state, closed state) and winning timing to the special winning opening (detection timing of the gaming ball by the count switch 9023) are shown.

  Also, in FIG. 131, the three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) shot by the ball striking device are detected by the first shot detection sensor 90701A (or the second shot detection sensor 90702A), etc. It shows schematically how it is done. The game ball a is detected by the first shot detection sensor 90701A (or the second shot detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1 and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, in a closed state) It is a game ball etc. which flowed down the near side of a big winning opening door. The game ball b is detected by the first shot detection sensor 90701A (or the second shot detection sensor 90702A) at timing t2, picked up by the big winning opening door at timing t3 (instant opening moment) and detected by the count switch 9023 Is a game ball to be played. The game ball c is detected by the first shot detection sensor 90701A (or the second shot detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t3 and picked up by the winning opening door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3. It is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023.

  Although the first shot ball detector 90701 (first shot detection sensor 90701A) and the second shot ball detector 90702 (second shot detection sensor 90702A) can simultaneously detect the game ball, they simultaneously detect the game ball. Even in the case, the respective game balls detected simultaneously can be captured (counted) as the number of hit balls. For example, by shifting the execution timing of processing (processing to be recorded) to be executed after detection for one of the game balls, the respective game balls detected simultaneously may be captured as the number of hit balls.

  Because the arrangement position of the launch ball detector 90700 shown in FIG. 118 and the arrangement position of the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 shown in FIG. 129 are different, they are shown in FIGS. Thus, in the configuration of FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the time for the game ball fired by the ball striking device to be detected by the first launch ball detector 90701 (or the second launch ball detector 90702) is shown in FIG. In the configuration shown in FIG. 119, the game ball launched by the ball striking device is longer than the time of the kite detected by the launch ball detector 90700. Also, in the configurations of FIGS. 129 and 130, the time for the game ball detected by the first shot ball detector 90701 (or the second shot ball detector 90702) to reach the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 907 is In the configurations of FIGS. 118 and 119, the game ball detected by the launch ball detector 90700 is shorter than the time for the special variable winning ball device 907 to reach the arrangement position.

  Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 131) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 129 and 130 is the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 128) set in the case of the configurations of FIG. Is longer than time T2).

  The first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (or the part including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (referred to as a part A)) Alternatively, they may be detachable. In addition, the game board 902 may be configured of a part A and one or more parts other than the part A, and the part A may be detachable from one or more parts other than the part A. For example, in FIG. 129, the portion including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (the portion above the broken line P in the figure) may be removable.

[Modification using an out-of-sphere detector]
FIG. 132 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 133 is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 132. The gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display may have, for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 132 and FIG.

  In FIG. 132, reference numeral 90710 in a broken line is an out-of-sphere detector provided with an out-of-sphere detection sensor 90710A. The out-of-sphere detector 90710 is disposed at a position where it can not be visually recognized from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, FIG. 132 is illustrated using a broken line. Further, reference numeral 9052 is an out port. Enter the winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, special winning opening) The game balls that were not present are taken into the out port 9052.

  The out-of-ball detector 90710 detects all the game balls launched to the game area 9010 by the hit launching device. In other words, the game balls launched into the game area 9010 are the winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth general winning opening 9050D, first start winning opening, Either the second start winning entry or the big winning entry) is entered or the entry is taken out of the out entry 9052 without entering the winning entry. Both the game balls entering the winning opening and the game balls taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path on the back (or inside) of the game board 902. Since the out ball detector 90710 is disposed on the above path, it detects all the game balls shot to the game area 9010 by the ball hitting and launching device.

  Although FIG. 132 shows an example in which the out-of-ball detector 90710 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction (below the out opening), other positions (for example, the right Out ball detector 90710 may be disposed on the side, left side in the left and right direction, etc.). In FIG. 132, the same components as those in FIG. 118 are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in FIG.

  In FIG. 133, reference numeral 90710A denotes an out-of-sphere detection sensor. In FIG. 133, the same components as in FIG. 119 will be assigned the same reference numerals as in FIG. 119, and the description of the components (the same components as in FIG. 119) will be omitted.

  In the gaming machine 901 configured as shown in FIG. 132 and FIG. 133, the state control process (FIG. 134) in step S901101B is executed instead of the state control process (FIG. 120 and FIG. 121) in step S901101A. The other special view processing (each processing shown in FIG. 122 to FIG. 127) is also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIG. 132 and FIG.

  FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the state control process executed by the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIG. 132 and FIG. In the state control process shown in FIG. 134, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the value of the special process process flag is 7 (step S902021). When it is determined in step S902021 that the value of the special view process flag is 7 (step S902021: YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the round game in progress flag is on (step S902022). If the round game in progress flag is off in step S902022 (step S902022; NO), the state control process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the round game in progress flag is on at step S902022 (step S902022; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the state change switching wait flag is on (step S902023).

  If the state change switching wait flag is off at step S902023 (step S902023; NO), the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting time (step S902024). Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902024 is a time shorter than the big hit end presentation waiting time set in step S902369 of the big hit open post processing (FIG. 126). Although the details will be described later, time T4 in FIG. 135 is a big hit end presentation waiting time, and time T5 in FIG. 135 is a state change switching waiting time.

  Subsequent to step S902024, the CPU 90103 sets a state change switching waiting flag to ON (step S902025). Then, the state control process is ended.

  If the state change switching waiting flag is on at step S902023 (step S902023; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902026). In step S902026, for example, it is determined whether the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value has been set in step S902024 has timed out (whether the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed at step S902026 (step S902026; NO), the state control process is ended.

  If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching wait flag and turns it off (step S902027) and clears the round game in progress flag. The off state is set (step S902028).

  Subsequent to step S902028, the CPU 90103 performs setting for starting the time saving state or the probability changing state (step S902029). The process of step S902029 is the same as the process of step S902014 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG.

  Following step S902029, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. Then, the state control process is ended.

  When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902030). If it is determined in step S902030 that the value of the special processing process flag is not 4 (step S902030; NO), the state control process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S902030 that the value of the special view process flag is 4 (step S902030; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the round game in progress flag is on (step S902031). If it is determined in step S902031 that the round game in progress flag is on (step S902032: YES), the state control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S902031 that the round game in progress flag is off (step S902031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the jackpot start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902032). In the process of step S902032, similarly to the process of step S902132 of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S901114) shown in FIG. 123, the big hit start where the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. It may be determined whether the hour effect waiting time timer has timed out. If it is determined in step S902032 that the jackpot start effect waiting time has not elapsed (step S902032; NO), the state control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S902032 that the jackpot start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902032; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the round game in progress flag to the on state (step S902033).

  Following step S902033, the CPU 90103 performs setting for ending the time saving state or the probability change state (step S902034). The process of step S902034 is similar to the process of step S902009 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG.

  Following the process of step S902034, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902035 described above, and ends the state control process.

  FIG. 135 is an explanatory view for explaining a state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIG. 132 and FIG. In FIG. 135, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of gaming balls. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower part of the display of the image display device 905 is, from top to bottom, the state (open state, closed state) of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 (big winning opening door), winning timing to the big winning mouth (game with count switch 9023) The detection timing of the game ball by the out-of-ball detector 90710 (out-ball detection sensor 90710A) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the final opening (shown as the opening of the last R in the figure) ends in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the big hit end effect (shown as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

  The timing t4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 135 is the timing when the final opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 ends (the timing when the big winning opening door is closed). The timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. The timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between the timing t4 and the timing t6 is the jackpot end presentation waiting time set in step S902369 of the jackpot post-processing (FIG. 126). The timing t5 and the like will be described later.

  Further, FIG. 135 schematically shows that the three game balls (game ball d, game ball e, game ball f) fired by the ball striking device are detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, etc. . The game ball d is picked up by the large winning opening door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, is detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and the out ball detection sensor at a timing earlier than the timing t5. It is a game ball detected by 90710A. The game ball e is picked up by the big winning opening door at timing t4 (the moment of closing), is detected by the count switch 9023 at timing later than timing t4, and is detected by the outside ball detection sensor 90710A at timing t5. It is a game ball. The game ball f is a game ball not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, a game ball etc. which has flown down the near side of the large winning opening door in the closed state) and is more than timing t5 (further than timing t6) It is a game ball detected by out ball detection sensor 90710A at a late timing.

  The time T5 between the timing t4 and the timing t5 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 134). In addition, after the game ball e picked up by the big winning opening door at timing t4 is picked up by the big winning opening door, it moves to the position detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at the slowest possible speed (moving And the out ball detection sensor 90710 A). In other words, it is assumed that the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the closing moment can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A.

  In other words, since there is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the closing of the special winning opening door (for example, during the execution period of the ending effect) The game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at any timing of time T5 like the game ball d), even the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after closing the big winning opening door count switch In order to prevent the game balls that can be detected by the step 9023 from being reflected in the performance display, the in-round game flag is cleared to the off state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed) (step S902028 in FIG. 134). That is, at timing t5 (time T5), the in-round flag is maintained in the on state and is not reflected on the performance display.

  It should be noted that if the flag during round game is cleared to the off state at timing t4 (when it is made to reflect on the performance display from the closing timing of the big winning opening door), the winning prize is won in the special winning opening before timing t4. , The game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the timing t4 (the game ball launched at a timing slightly earlier than the game ball d), the winning ball number when the winning opening is a performance display Although this is not reflected in the above, there is a mismatch as reflected in the performance display as the number of inserted balls, and accurate performance display can not be performed. On the other hand, if the in-round game flag is cleared to the off state at timing t5 (when time T5 has elapsed), the above-described problem is solved.

  Although it has been described that the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the gaming ball picked up by the big winning opening door at the closing moment can be detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A, the timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, timing t5 may be an average timing at which game balls picked up on the big winning opening door at the closing moment are detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, or at an earlier timing than the average timing. It may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S902024 in the state control process (FIG. 134) takes into consideration the movement time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 907-out ball detector 90710) If it is However, in order to perform performance display more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned latest timing as timing t5.

  FIG. 136 is a configuration example of the out-of-sphere detector. The above-described out-of-sphere detector 90710 may be, for example, one as shown in FIG. 136 (A). The out-of-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 136A includes a main body 90720 and a harness 90730. The main body 90720 detects an opening (passing portion) 90721 through which the game ball taken into the winning opening or the game ball taken into the out-port 9052 and a game ball detecting the game ball passing through the opening 90721 A sensor 90710A and a connection portion 90722 are provided. The harness 90730 has a signal line 90734 to which connection parts (connection parts 90732 and 90733) are connected at both ends, a connection part (connector) 90732 for connecting to the connection part 90722 on the main body 90720 side, and the main board 9011 side. And a connection portion (connector) 90733 for connecting to a predetermined connection portion (not shown) provided. Note that FIG. 136A (also in FIG. 136B) shows a state in which the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 are connected. Note that the out-of-ball detector 90710 (harness 90730) and the main substrate 9011 are detachable at the connection portion (connection portion 90733, connection portion on the main substrate 9011 side). Further, in the connection portion (connection portions 90722 and 90732), the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be detachable.

  The game balls having entered into any of the winning openings or the game balls taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path, and all pass through the opening 90721. When the game ball having passed through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball is detected is output to the main substrate 9011 via the harness 90730. In addition, since the game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 is counted (counted) as the number of hit balls, the out ball detection sensor 90710A may be referred to as a count switch.

  Note that the out-of-ball detector 90710 is in the case where the harness 90730 is detached from the main body 90720 (when the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side and the connection portion 90732 on the harness 90730 side are not properly connected) When the etc. is broken (broken line in the signal line 90734, broken line between the signal line 90734 and the connection portion 90732, broken line between the signal line 90734 and the connection portion 90734, etc.) It is configured to output to the substrate 9011 side. Therefore, the CPU 90103 can detect a harness omission or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out-of-sphere detector 90710 in the above-described error detection process. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that harness disconnection or disconnection has occurred when the ON signal is continuously input for a predetermined time or more.

  In addition, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 when the gaming ball passes through the opening 90721 may be configured from a predetermined on / off pattern. When at least a part of the detection signal is formed of a predetermined on / off pattern, the CPU 90103 can detect signal distortion due to noise or the like by monitoring a signal input from the out-of-sphere detector 90710.

  Further, the out-of-sphere detector 90710 may be provided with a clasp 90740 having a screw hole 90741 as shown in FIG. 136 (B). Alternatively, out-of-sphere detector 90710 (body 90720) may be attachable to clasp 90740. Note that the clasp 90740 is an example of a fixing member for fixing the main body 90720 to the gaming machine 901 etc., and it can be anything as long as the main body 90720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 901 etc. It is also good.

  The harness 90730 (at least a part of the connection portions 90732 and 90734 and the signal line 90734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Further, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be separate bodies. That is, the main body 90720 of the out-of-sphere detector 90710 may be connectable to a separate harness 90730.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart of an example of error notification processing of an error related to performance display. FIG. 138 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. In the error notification processing shown in FIG. 137, the CPU 90103 determines whether a reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the out-of-sphere detector 90710 has been detected (step S901200).

  If there is an abnormality in the out-of-ball detector 90710 (e.g., disconnection of the harness, disconnection, signalization, etc.), the CPU 90103 detects out-of-ball in the process (error detection process described above) different from the error notification process. The reception abnormality relating to the reception of the detection signal output from the detector 90710 is detected. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the on signal continues for a predetermined time. In addition, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-of-sphere detector 90710 is configured to have a predetermined on / off pattern, and the CPU 90103 receives an input of a reception signal different from the predetermined on / off pattern. If there is, it may be determined that the signal is abnormal.

  If the reception abnormality is not detected in step S901200 (step S901200; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether the reception error flag provided in the RAM 90102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is on (step S901200). Step S901201). If it is determined in step S901201 that the reception error flag is on (step S901201; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S901202), and the process proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is off in step S901201 (step S901201; NO), the process of step S901202 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

  If the reception abnormality is detected in step S901200 (step S901200; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether the reception error flag is on (step S901203). If it is determined in step S901203 that the reception error flag is off (step S901203; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the reception error flag to on (step S901204), and proceeds to step S901205. If it is determined in step S901203 that the reception error flag is on (step S901203; YES), the process of step S901204 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

  Following step S901201 (NO), step S901202, step S901203 (YES), or step S901204, it is determined whether the reception error flag is on (step S901205).

  If the reception error flag is off in step S901205 (step S901205; NO), the CPU 90103 performs control so that the performance display is performed in the normal mode (normal mode) (step S901206). In the process of step S901206, the CPU 90103 performs control so that performance display is performed according to the display modes shown in FIG. 117 (B) to FIG. 117 (F). Then, the error notification process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S901205 that the reception error flag is on (step S901205; YES), the CPU 90103 controls to display an error notification mode (step S901207). In the process of step S901207, for example, the CPU 90103 performs control so that display in the display mode of FIG. 138A is performed. In the display mode of FIG. 138 (A), the upper two digits are "--(flashing)" and the lower two digits are "--(lighting)". Then, the error notification process is ended.

  In the case of reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal by the out-of-ball detector 90710, the number of hit balls (FIG. 116 (B)) is not updated as a matter of course, but the number of winning balls in each winning opening ( It does not update also about FIG. 116 (B). That is, the CPU 90103 performs the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, Although the game ball is detected by any of the general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, each winning information is obtained (received), but under the situation where the number of inserted balls is not updated, the winning is achieved. It is configured not to perform the winning number addition process based on the information.

  According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 137, while the upper two digits are normally displayed as “bL. (Blinking, lighting)” or “b6. (Blinking, lighting)” (FIG. 117 (B) -FIG. 117 (F), when reception is abnormal, "--(lighting)" is displayed (Fig. 138 (A)). That is, when reception is abnormal, the display of the upper two digits is displayed in a display mode which is not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it can be easily recognized that the display is not normal.

  Note that the display mode shown in FIG. 138 (A) is an example. For example, in the process of step S901207, control may be performed such that display is performed by the display mode of FIG. 138 (B) instead of the display mode of FIG. 138 (A). Similar to FIG. 138 (A), the upper two digits in FIG. 138 (B) are also display modes that are not normally displayed. Therefore, by looking at the display of the upper two digits, it can be easily recognized that the display is not normal.

  Further, for example, in the process of step S901207, control may be performed so that display in the display mode of FIG. 138C or 138D is performed. “E. (flashing)” in the upper second digit of FIG. 138 (C) and “Er. (Flashing)” in the upper two digits of FIG. 138 (D) recall “Err”. Therefore, the display of the upper two digits (or the upper second digit) makes it possible to easily recognize the abnormality.

  Moreover, although lower two digits are "--(lighting)" in FIG. 138 (A)-FIG. 138 (D), lower two digits may be "--(flashing)", and another display It may be an aspect.

  When the display is normal, that is, in the display in the process of step S901206, the display contents as shown in FIG. 117 (B) to FIG. 117 (F) every 5 seconds according to the section shown in FIG. 117 (A). Changes, but when it is abnormal, that is, in the display by the processing of step S901207, always (that is, even if reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 117A), 5 seconds from the display start is Even if it passes, the display contents do not change. That is, the display when abnormal is simpler than the display when normal. Therefore, it is possible to properly recognize that it is not normal (or abnormal) without giving confusion or extra burden.

  FIG. 139 is an example of a display mode for notifying of an error related to performance display. The display of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (D) described above is displayed even if reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. 117 (A) or even if 5 seconds have passed from the start of display. Even when the content does not change but is abnormal, according to the section shown in FIG. 117 (A), every 5 seconds, for example, as shown in FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (E), The display contents may be changed. The display modes in FIGS. 139A to 139E are different from the display modes in FIGS. 117B to 117F in that the lower two digits are blinking. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 139, since the display content changes according to the section, in addition to being not normal, a section at the time of abnormality occurrence (immediately before the occurrence) (section shown in FIG. The real-time base value at the time of abnormality occurrence (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value can also be recognized.

  When the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the lower two digits indicating the real time base value of FIG. 139 (B) to FIG. 139 (E) or the lower two digits so as not to show the player the real time base value or the previous cumulative total base value The lower two digits indicating the previous accumulated base value in FIG. 139 (D) and FIG. 139 (E) may be, for example, “Er. (Flashing)”. That is, in FIG. 139 (A) to FIG. 139 (E), the lower two digits may be “−− (flashing)” or “Er. (Flashing)”. According to the display mode, it is possible to recognize a section at the time of occurrence of abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (section shown in FIG. 117A) in addition to being not normal.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 137, when the error (abnormality) is eliminated, the display returns to the normal mode display (step S901206), but when the error disappears, the error notification is not made without returning to the normal mode display. The display of the aspect (step S901207) may be continued. In addition, when the error is eliminated, the display may be returned to the normal mode, but notification that there is an error may be continued.

  As the first example, after the error is eliminated, the lowermost (fourth digit) dot is blinked (or lit) in the display of the normal mode (FIGS. 117A to 117F). It is also good. As a second example, a display monitor (for example, one digit) different from the display monitor 901130 is disposed on the main substrate 9011, and after the error is eliminated, the display monitor 901130 returns to the normal mode display. At the same time, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 may continue to notify (for example, “E. (flashing)” or the like) that there is an error.

  In the first example, exactly, when the error is eliminated, it is the same as the display of the normal mode (with the exception of the blinking (lighting) of the lowermost dot notifying that there is an error). In the display mode of the first example, the display of the same mode is performed to provide the information provided (displayed) in the display of the normal mode (with the display of the normal mode other than the lowermost dot). Since it is the same), it was expressed as returning to the display of the normal mode. Also, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 901130) for notifying that there is an error in the second example described above, like the display monitor 901130, is such that the display is not cleared when the power is cut off such as a power failure. Do. That is, the information that there is an error is prevented from being cleared by power interruption such as a power failure.

  In the same manner as in the aspect of displaying the performance ratio, the clear switch is connected to the main substrate 9011 and stored in the RAM 90102 by the operation of the clear switch as in the aspect of displaying the performance ratio. The data used for the performance display may be cleared. The clear switch in the mode of displaying the performance information is operated when the calculation of the performance display can not be reperformed, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the performance information, etc. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main substrate 9011 in addition to the data clear, as in the mode of displaying the ratio and the duty ratio.

  If the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the performance information, an error is displayed as in the case where the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the winning ratio (continuous ratio) or the ratio of displaying the odds (FIGS. 94 and 95) The warning table may be performed in a display mode different from the display mode (display modes shown in FIGS. 138 and 139). Further, when the clear switch is operated when the reception is abnormal, both the error display and the warning display may be performed. For example, the error display and the warning display may be displayed in order. When performance display is performed in the display mode shown in FIG. 139, for example, an error display (real-time base value), an error display (previous cumulative base value), and a warning display may be displayed in order.

  Also, in the same manner as in the aspect of displaying the performance ratio, the main board 9011 is provided with an error indicator separately from the display monitor 90130 as in the aspect of displaying the performance ratio. Good. In the case where an error indicator is provided on the main substrate 9011 separately from the display monitor 90130, the error indicator is preferably disposed at a position away from the display monitor 9029. In the configuration where the display monitor 90130 and the error indicator are provided on the main substrate 9011, when the reception abnormality occurs, the error indicator displays information indicating the reception abnormality, and the display monitor 90130 displays FIG. You may display according to the display mode shown in FIG.

In addition, when there is a reception abnormality, for example, a predetermined error display may be performed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B or the like so that the reception abnormality can be recognized. You may In addition, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 905 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command for specifying that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 909 lights up or blinks in a predetermined pattern. Alternatively, predetermined sounds (including voices) may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R.
In addition, by transmitting information indicating that a reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example, a display unit of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp provided on the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 901) It may be possible to recognize that the reception is abnormal in the device etc.) or the information management device (hole computer etc.).

  In addition, other devices etc. (error display, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, game effect lamp 909, speakers 908L, 908R, information display device, information management device The display may be erased on the display monitor 90130 regardless of whether the reception abnormality can be recognized or not. That is, when reception becomes abnormal, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 90130 are all turned off ("off" means not always being displayed in "flashing" but always being not displayed). Alternatively, any one digit (or two digits or three digits) of all four digits of the display monitor 90130 may be turned off. That is, the display when there is a reception abnormality (display by the processing of step S901207) at least indicates the display when it is normal (display by the processing of step S901206) (display that makes it recognized as reception abnormality) Therefore, what is necessary is to limit the performance display, or to limit the performance display by erasing part or all of the performance display.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by the CPU 90103. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140, the CPU 90103 first executes an error detection process (step S9010), and when an error (abnormality) is detected, an error is notified (step S9011). In the processing of steps S9010 and S9011, the CPU 90103 monitors, for example, the signal output from the out-of-sphere detector 90710, detects an abnormality in reception of the signal output from the out-of-sphere detector 90710 (step S9010), Is detected on the display monitor 901130 or the like (step S9011).

  Following step S9011, the CPU 90103 executes a random number update process (step S9012). In the random number update process of step S9012, the CPU 90103 updates, for example, a game random number (for example, a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot type determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, etc.) used on the main substrate 9011 side. Following step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes special view processing (special symbol process processing) (step S9013). In the special view process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes, for example, various processes illustrated in FIGS. 120 to 127, 134, and the like.

  Following step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a performance information update process (steps S9014A, S9014B). Details of the performance information update process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes a performance information display process (step S9015). In the performance information display process of step S9015, the CPU 90103 displays, for example, the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S9014A and S9014B) on the display monitor 901130 as shown in FIG.

  Following step S9015, the CPU 90103 executes a prize ball process (step S9016). In the prize ball processing of step S9016, the CPU 90103 calculates the number of prize balls based on detection signals of various switches, for example, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of gaming balls is paid out. Following step S9016, the CPU 90103 executes a common drawing process (normal symbol process process) (step S9017). In the common view process of step S9017, for example, the CPU 90103 controls the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9020 and the operation of the movable wing in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Following step S9017, the CPU 90103 executes an information output process (step S9018). In the information output process of step S9018, the CPU 90103 displays, for example, an information display device (for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) It outputs various information such as the big hit information, the start information, the probability fluctuation information, the abnormality information and the like to the information management device (hall computer etc). Then, the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  The processing in steps S9010 to S9018 shown in FIG. 140 is a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 90103 performs steps S9010 to S9018 in the game control timer interrupt processing. Other processing (for example, switch processing for inputting (determining) the state of detection signals input from various switches, processing for transmitting a rendering control command from the main substrate 9011 to the rendering control substrate 9012, etc.) is there.

  In the case of the configuration of FIG. 119, in the above switch processing, the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, and the firing detection A detection signal of the sensor 90700A or the like is output to the CPU 90103. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 130, detection signals of the first emission detection sensor 90701A and the second emission detection sensor 90702A are output to the CPU 90103 instead of the emission detection sensor 90700A. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 133, a detection signal of the out-of-sphere detection sensor 90710A is output to the CPU 90103 instead of the emission detection sensor 90700A.

  In addition, the execution order of steps S9010 to S9018 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 90103 may execute the information output process prior to the random number update process, or may execute the common drawing process immediately after the special view process.

  In addition, a group (unit of each process) of each process such as the error detection process (step S9010) and the error notification process (step S9011) is an example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, the CPU 90103 may execute error notification processing (step S9011) and performance information display processing (step S9015) as one processing. In the error notification process of FIG. 137, the process of step S901206 (a process of controlling the performance display according to the normal mode) is the performance information display process of the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 140 (step S9015). Equivalent to.

  The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 140 and the error notification process of FIG. 137 will be supplemented. Although the error notification process of FIG. 137 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) of FIG. , For convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining the difference in the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 901130 depending on the presence or absence of abnormality), it may be regarded as one united .

  Further, FIG. 140 shows a game control timer interrupt process when displaying performance information, but the same is true for a game control timer interrupt process when displaying a winning combination (continuous ratio) and a winning ratio. In other words, the performance information update process (step S9014A) in FIG. 140 is a process of updating the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio, and the performance information display process (step S9015) is a combination of running (continuous ratio) and the winning ratio. It should be treated as. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 140 and the respective processes shown in FIGS. 94 to 97 is the game of FIG. The relationship between the error notification processing (step S9011) and the performance information display processing (step S9015) in the control timer interrupt processing and the error notification processing in FIG. 137 is the same.

  FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014B) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  The CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 141 in the mode of executing the state control process (step S901101A) of FIG. That is, the performance information update process (S9014A) in FIG. 141 is the firing ball detector 90700 (fire detection sensor 90700A), or the first firing ball detector 90701 (first fire detection sensor 90701A) and the second firing ball detector It carries out in the composition provided with 90702 (the 2nd fire detection sensor 90702A). On the other hand, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 142 in the mode of executing the state control process (step S901101B) of FIG. That is, the performance information update process (S9014B) in FIG. 142 is executed in the configuration provided with the out-of-sphere detector 90710 (out-of-sphere detection sensor 90710A).

  In the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 141, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the probability change flag is on (step S9020). If the definite variation flag is not on at step S9020 (step S9020; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step S9021).

  If the time saving flag is not on in step S9021 (step S9021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether the round game in progress flag is on (step S9022). In the case of the start of the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 128 and FIG. 131, the round playing flag is the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 128, FIG. 131) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 121). Whether the process of step S9022 is after the state change switching wait time (time T2) has elapsed at the start of the big hit gaming state, since the off state changes to the on state in step S902008 after the elapse of time T2) It can be said that the

  If the in-round game flag is not on at step S9022 (step S9022; NO), that is, before the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of balls and the number of balls hit. Addition is performed to calculate a base value which is performance information (step S9023). In the process of step S9023, the CPU 90103 adds, for example, the number of winning balls according to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 116 (B)). The number of inserted balls is added based on the detection result (detection signal) such as 90700A (FIG. 116 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 116 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014A) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on in step S9020 (step S9020; YES), or the time saving flag is on in step S9021 (step S9021; YES), or the round playing flag is on in step S9022 ( Step S9022; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014A) is ended without performing the process of step S9023.

  In the performance information update process (S9014B) in FIG. 142, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the probability change flag is on (step S9030). If the probability change flag is not on in step S9030 (step S9030; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step S9031).

  If the time saving flag is not on in step S9031 (step S9031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round game in progress flag is on (step S9032). When the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 135 is ended, the in-round game flag is set after the state change switching wait time (time T5 in FIG. 135) set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 134) In step S902028 in step S902028, the process in step S9032 also determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed before the end of the big hit gaming state, since the on state changes to the off state in step S902028. I can say that.

  If the round game in progress flag is not on in step S9032 (step S9032; NO), that is, after the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls. Addition is performed to calculate a base value that is performance information (step S9033). In the process of step S9033, the CPU 90103 adds the number of winning balls according to the winning opening specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings, for example (FIG. 116 (B)). The number of inserted balls is added based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 90710A (FIG. 116 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 116 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014B) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on in step S9030 (step S9030; YES), or the time saving flag is on in step S9031 (step S9031; YES), or the round playing flag is on in step S9032 ( Step S9032; YES), the performance information update process (Step S9014B) is ended without performing the process of Step S9033.

  According to the performance information update process of FIG. 141 (step S9014A) and the performance information update process of FIG. 142 (step S9014B), the performance is changed when both the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are off. The number of winning balls and the number of hit balls that are the basis of display are added. As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, both the performance information update process of FIG. 141 (step S9014A) and the performance information update process of FIG. 142 (step S9014B) are a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and a round game in progress. It is the same in that it refers to the state of the flag, adds the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls, and calculates the base value which is the performance information, but both are in the state of the round game flag and waiting for state change switching Since the relationship with time is different (specifically, in the performance information update process of FIG. 141 (step S9014A), the flag during round game is off before the elapse of time T2, and the performance information update process of FIG. 142 (step S9014B) Then, after the elapse of time T5, the in-round flag is in the off state), which has been described by separate drawings.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 140 to FIG. 142, the detection result by the switch processing (output result of various switches of various winning openings, shot detection sensor when neither the probability change flag nor the short time flag nor the round game flag is in the off state) Output result of 90700A etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information, and detection result by switch processing is not reflected as performance information when at least one of the probability change flag, the short time flag and the flag during round game play is on. Processing. That is, although the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, it is a process of determining whether to reflect the detection result as the performance information according to the state of the flag. However, when both the probability change flag, the short time flag and the round game flag are off, the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls are reflected as performance information, and among the probability change flag, the time short flag, and the round game flag Other processes may be used as long as the number of winning balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected as performance information when at least one is on. For example, when both the probability change flag, the short time flag and the round game flag are off, the switch processing related to the number of hit balls (launch detection sensor 90700A, first launch detection sensor 90701A, second launch detection sensor 90702A, out sphere detection) When at least one of the probability change flag, the short time flag, and the round game play flag is in the on state, the switch processing regarding the number of inserted balls may not be executed. That is, it may be a process of determining whether or not to execute the switch process related to the number of inserted balls according to the state of the flag. Note that the switch processing related to the winning ball number (detected by the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, etc.) is actually Since it is necessary for the payout of the game, the switch processing related to the number of winning balls is executed regardless of the state of the flag, and whether the detection result is reflected in the performance information as in the processing shown in FIG. It may be determined according to the state.

  FIG. 143 shows an example of the arrangement position of the out-of-sphere detector. FIG. 143 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame 903 supporting and fixing the gaming board 902 is opened from the outer frame 903A. A main substrate 9011 or the like is mounted on the back side of the game board 902. The main substrate 9011 is provided with a base member 901129, and the base member 901129 is provided with a display monitor 901130. The display monitor 901130 is accommodated in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 901129 and the main substrate 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 143A, the display monitor 901130 (the same as the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143B) has the back surface of the main substrate 9011 located on the center in the left-right direction and on the top in the top-bottom direction. Although arranged, the display monitor 901130 may be arranged at another position on the back side. For example, the rear surface of the main substrate 9011 may be disposed at the center in the horizontal direction and at the lower side in the vertical direction. In the case where the display is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the main substrate 9011, it is convenient for the display contents to be easy to see when the display contents are checked while the store clerk or the like stands. Further, in the case of arranging the lower side of the back surface of the main substrate 9011, it is convenient for the display contents to be easy to see when the store clerk or the like sits or bends to check the display contents. In addition, various wires (signal lines) may exist above the main substrate 9011 of the game board 902. Then, it is also assumed that such a wire may be bent or may be detached from the bundle to cover the main substrate 9011. When the display monitor 901130 is disposed on the lower side of the back surface of the main substrate 9011, it is less likely that the bent wiring will cover the display monitor 901130 as compared to the case where the display monitor 901130 is disposed on the upper side. Although related to the above, the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 143A (and the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143B is the same as the display monitor 90130A shown in FIG. The aspect of arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 901130 and the arrangement of the display monitor 901130 on the main substrate 9011 are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, the display monitor 901130 may have an appearance such as the display monitor 90130B, 90130C, 90130D, 90130E, 90130F, 90130G, 90130H, 90130I shown in FIGS.

  In FIG. 143 (A), the game board 902 (for example, the bottom of the game board, the lower part, etc.) has a winning opening (a first general winning opening 9050A, a second general winning opening 9050B, a third general winning opening 9050C, a fourth). An opening (a hole at the exit of the game ball) for discharging the game ball taken into the game ball entered into the general winning hole 9050D, the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, the large winning hole ) 902A is provided. Passages a, b and c indicated by broken lines are passages (ball recovery passages) through which the game balls entered into the winning opening and the game balls taken into the out port 9052 pass. Whether it is a game ball that has entered the winning opening or a game ball that has been taken into the out-opening 9052, it passes through any of the passages a, b and c, and is eventually discharged from the opening 902A to the outside Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (A), the out-of-ball detector 90710 is provided on the game board 902 side. Specifically, the out-of-ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where the gaming ball discharged from the opening 902A can be detected. That is, as in the case of the opening 902A, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball having entered the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out port 9052.

  The game balls detected by the out ball detector 90710 are collected by the ball receiving member 901700 provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In addition, a signal line 90734 of the out-of-sphere detector 90710 is connected to the main substrate 9011. That is, the game balls discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902 pass through the opening 90721 of the out ball detector 90710, and are collected to the game island by the ball receiving member 901700. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710 A, and a detection signal is output to the main substrate 9011.

  In addition, an opening (hole at the outlet of the game ball) 901701 is provided in the bottom (a portion on which the game ball rides) of the ball receiving member 901700, and although not shown, the bottom is inclined toward the opening 901701. doing. That is, the gaming ball having reached the ball receiving member 901700 from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) passes through the opening 90101 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 901700.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (B), the out-of-sphere detector 90710 may be provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In the example of FIG. 143 (B), the out-of-ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 can be detected. That is, as in the case of the opening 901701, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball entering the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out port 9052, and the opening of the ball receiving member 901700 The game ball discharged from the 901701 is detected. In FIG. 143 (B), the clasp 90740 is not shown.

  FIG. 143A shows an example in which the out-of-ball detector 90710 is installed using the clasp 90740, but the out-ball detector 90710 may be installed using a fixing member other than the clasp 90740. The same applies to the example of FIG. 143 (B).

  Also, although the out-of-ball detector 90710 is an externally attached part in FIGS. 143 (A) and (B), the game board 902 or the like may be provided with the out-of-ball detector 90710 from the beginning. For example, in FIG. 143 (A), the out-of-ball detector 90710 may be provided on the lower side of the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the same position as FIG. 143 (A)). Alternatively, the out-of-ball detection sensor 90710A may be provided in the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the opening 902A of the game board 902 corresponds to the opening 90721 of the main body 90720). The same applies to the example of FIG. 143 (B).

  Although FIG. 143 (A) shows three passages (passages a, b and c), the game ball entered into the winning opening and the game ball taken into the out port 9052 finally reach the opening 902A. If it is a thing, the number and shape of a channel | path are not limited to the example shown to FIG. 143 (A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 143 (B).

  Note that the state change switching wait time (time T5 in FIG. 135) set in the process of step S902024 in FIG. 134 is the time required for the game ball picked up by the special winning opening door to be detected by the count switch 9023, The game ball detected by the count switch 9023 is influenced by the time required for the game to be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. Specifically, as the required time is shorter, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be shortened (it is not necessary to be necessarily shortened).

  Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), in the configuration of FIG. 143A, the time for the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 to be discharged from the opening 902A becomes short. You may do so. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, the passage a etc.) through which the gaming ball detected by the count switch 9023 passes is shortened, or the game ball which has passed the passage is inclined to immediately enter the opening 902A. Or you may provide guidance. In the configuration of FIG. 143 (B), instead of or in addition to the above, the time for the game balls discharged from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) to reach the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is short. It should be made to become. As an example, the slope of the bottom of the ball bearing member 901700 may be increased.

  In addition, the opening 902A of the game board 902 and the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 may be widened so that the game ball flows quickly so that the game ball is not clogged. A plurality of openings may be provided, or a plurality of openings may be provided in the ball receiving member 901700.

  In the case of widening the opening 902A of the game board 902, a plurality of out ball detectors 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710 A) may be provided so that the game balls discharged from the wide opening 902A can be detected without leakage. You may The same applies to the case of widening the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700. Further, in the case where the game board 902 is provided with a plurality of openings, a plurality of out-of-ball detectors 90710 (corresponding to the respective openings) can be detected without leaking the game balls discharged from the respective openings. An out-of-sphere detection sensor 90710 A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where the ball receiving member 901700 is provided with a plurality of openings.

  When a plurality of out-of-ball detectors 90710 (out-ball detecting sensor 90710A) are provided, gaming balls can be detected simultaneously, for example, by shifting the execution timing of processing executed after detection for one detected simultaneously. The respective game balls detected at the same time may be respectively captured as the number of hit balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described in FIGS.
A launch device (eg, a hit ball launch device etc.) for launching game media (eg, a game ball etc.) to a game area (eg, game area 9010 etc) is provided, and advantageous conditions are satisfied (eg, first, second Deriving display of a finalized special symbol to be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol in the special symbol display device 904A, 904B, derived display of a fixed ornament symbol to be a big hit combination in the image display device 905, passing a game ball in a specific area, etc.) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a positive change state, a short time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
Detection means capable of detecting game media discharged to the game area (for example, a launch ball detector provided on a guide rail (FIG. 118), a launch ball detector 90701, 90702 provided on the game area (FIG. 129) Etc) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907 or the like) capable of changing the game medium discharged to the game area to an open state where the game can be won.
The predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which becomes the first start winning opening, the normal variable winning ball device 906B which becomes the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D which becomes the general winning area, and the big winning opening Payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media on the basis of winning on a special variable winning ball device 907
Determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 90103 which determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state etc. Specifically, a state of a probability change flag, a short time flag, and a round game in progress flag all off) For example, predetermined information (such as the number of hit balls) and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls awarded by winning on each winning opening etc.) For example, the information display unit (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143) capable of displaying the performance information in FIG.
The variable winning means is
Change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, FIG. 131, the big winning opening at timing t3 based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at timing t1 The door changes from closed to open, etc.)
The determination means
A predetermined period of time before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIG. 128 and FIG. 131, a time T3 before the timing t3 when the big winning opening door changes from the closed state to the open state) At timing t2, etc., it is determined that the advantageous state is the above (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 121), the round game in progress flag is turned on at timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses. Set to the state etc.).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball (for example, the game ball in FIG. 128) detected by the shot detection sensor 90700A or the first shot ball detector 90701 (the second shot ball detector 90702) at any timing of time T3. An accurate base value can be calculated by not including c) and the like in the calculation of the performance display.

In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
It comprises variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the image display device 905, etc.) that performs variable display and derives and displays the display result,
The state (for example, the state at the timing t2) before a predetermined period before changing to the open state is
Special state after display result of variable display performed in the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state in which fanfare effect is executed in the image display device 905, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 131) It is.

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, predetermined information does not include the game ball (the game ball c shown in FIG. 128, FIG. 131, etc.) which may be fired after the fluctuation stop (after the stop display) and may win the special variable winning ball device 907. (Performance information) can be calculated.

  In the above embodiment (FIG. 121, FIG. 128, FIG. 128, etc.), the flag in the round game is turned on from the off state during execution of the fanfare effect after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The in-round game flag may be switched from the off state to the on state before the execution of (during reach effect execution, etc.). For example, when the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, 2 to 3 seconds, etc.), the game ball which may win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 907 is a shot detection sensor before the start of the fanfare effect. Since there is a possibility of being detected by the 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (the second launch ball detector 90702), the special variable winning ball device 907 may not be included in the performance display for the game balls that may be won. Alternatively, the flag during the round game may be switched from the off state to the on state before the fanfare effect is executed. Specifically, for example, the special game variation time may be referred to, and the round game in progress flag may be set to the on state at a timing prior to the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the round game in progress flag may be switched from the off state to the on state at the start of the execution of the fanfare effect.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 129, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 are the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702). A portion above the broken line P including is detachable or the like).

  This can cope with the case where the detection means is not provided. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is configured as a unit which can be arranged on a game board (for example, game board 902 etc.) forming a game area (for example, for the first shot ball detector 90701 and the second shot ball detector 90702, FIG. 129 The part above the broken line P of is configured as a unit).

  This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
In the game area,
There are a left gaming area (for example, left gaming area 9010A and the like) and a right gaming area (for example, right gaming area 9010A and the like) as areas through which game media ejected by the launcher can pass.
The unit (eg, a portion above the broken line P in FIG. 129, etc.) is
The left side detection means (for example, the 1st firing ball detector 90701 etc.) which detects the game media which passes the left game area, the right side detection means (for example, the 2nd launch) which detects the game medium which passes the right game area And a sphere detector 90702).

  This makes it possible to detect any of the game areas even if they are fired.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is provided on the upstream side in the flow path of the game medium than any winning area provided in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 118, the launch ball detector 90700 is a normal winning ball device 906A, The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning hole 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907 are provided above the first shot ball detector 90701 and the second shot ball, as shown in FIG. The detector 90702 is provided above the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning holes 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907).

  This enables reliable detection.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described in FIGS.
A launch device (eg, a hit ball launch device etc.) for launching game media (eg, a game ball etc.) to a game area (eg, game area 9010 etc) is provided, and advantageous conditions are satisfied (eg, first, second Deriving display of a finalized special symbol to be a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol in the special symbol display device 904A, 904B, derived display of a fixed ornament symbol to be a big hit combination in the image display device 905, passing a game ball in a specific area, etc.) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a positive change state, a short time state, etc.) advantageous to the player based on
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907 or the like) capable of changing the game medium discharged to the game area to an open state where the game can be won.
Variable winning control means (for example, a CPU 90103 for executing special drawing processing shown in FIG. 120) capable of playing a predetermined number of round games for changing the variable winning means to the open state;
The game media (the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, the third general winning opening 9050C, the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning combination) which has passed any winning region provided in the gaming region In order to discharge the game ball etc. which did not pass through any winning area, the second start winning opening, the large winning opening, and the game medium (the game ball etc taken into the out opening 9052) (For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), a position where the game balls discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902A can be detected, or as shown in FIG. 143 (B). A detection unit (e.g., an out-of-ball detector 90710 etc.) which is provided at a position or the like at which the game ball discharged from the opening 901701 can be detected and which can detect game media passing through the flow path;
The predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which becomes the first start winning opening, the normal variable winning ball device 906B which becomes the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D which becomes the general winning area, and the big winning opening Payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media on the basis of winning on a special variable winning ball device 907
Determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 90103 which determines whether or not the gaming state is based on a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc.);
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state etc. Specifically, a state of a probability change flag, a short time flag, and a round game in progress flag all off) For example, predetermined information (such as the number of hit balls) and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls awarded by winning on each winning opening etc.) For example, the information display unit (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143) capable of displaying the performance information in FIG.
The variable winning control means
The round game is started based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, the big winning opening door is controlled from the closed state to the open state, etc. based on the stop display of the big hit symbol),
The determination means
The predetermined number of rounds are over and the variable winning means changes to the closed state, and then until a predetermined period elapses (for example, as shown in FIG. 135, the special winning port door changes from the open state to the closed state) It is determined that the advantageous state is obtained (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 134) from the timing t4 to the timing t5 when the time T5 has elapsed (the timing at which the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses). At t5, the in-round game flag is cleared to the off state, etc.).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out-of-ball detector 90710 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 135, etc.) at any timing of the time T5 is not included in the calculation of the performance display. Base value can be calculated.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The state (for example, the state at the timing t5) when the predetermined period elapses is
The special state after the predetermined number of round games have ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 135, an ending effect is being executed in the image display device 905, etc.).

  Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, even for a game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 during the ending effect, the game ball (such as the game ball d shown in FIG. 135) which may be awarded in the special variable winning ball device 907 Since the information is not included in the calculation of the predetermined information (performance information), the accurate predetermined information can be calculated.

  In the above embodiment (FIG. 134, FIG. 135, etc.), the flag during round game play is changed from the on state to the off state during the execution of the ending effect after the final round, but after the ending effect is performed (time The flag during the round game may be switched from the on state to the off state during the first variable display etc. in the normal big hit). For example, when the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, 2 to 3 seconds, etc.), the game ball which may win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 907 detects the out ball detector 90710 after the ending effect. Because the special variable winning ball device 907 may not be included in the performance display for the game ball that may be won, the flag during round playing is turned off from the on state after the ending effect is performed. May be Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 in FIG. 134 may be made longer than the big hit end rendering waiting time. Note that the round game in progress flag may be switched from the on state to the off state at the end of the end effect execution.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is detachable (for example, the out-of-ball detector 90710 is detachable by a clasp 90740 as shown in FIG. 136B).

  This can cope with the case where the detection means is not provided. In addition, maintenance becomes easy.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is configured as a unit that can be arranged on a game board (for example, game board 902 etc.) that forms a game area (for example, as shown in FIG. The unit is configured as a unit that can be

  This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

In addition, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described in FIGS.
A gaming machine capable of executing a game and capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) advantageous to the player,
A detection unit (for example, an out-of-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 136, FIG. 143 etc.) capable of detecting a game medium (eg, game area 9010 etc.) used in the game;
A signal line (for example, a signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 136) to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main substrate 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate 9011 side, and the like);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 which executes the error notification process of FIG. 137);
The predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which becomes the first start winning opening, the normal variable winning ball device 906B which becomes the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D which becomes the general winning area, and the big winning opening Payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out game media on the basis of winning on a special variable winning ball device 907
The number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state etc. Specifically, a state of a probability change flag, a short time flag, and a round game in progress flag all off) For example, predetermined information (such as the number of hit balls) and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls awarded by winning on each winning opening etc.) For example, the information display unit (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 143) capable of displaying the performance information in FIG.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is limited (for example, an error is notified as shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, a performance display is restricted, etc.).

  This makes it possible to prevent the information display means from performing an incorrect display. In addition, for example, temporarily, if an illegal act such as removing the harness 90730 (connecting portions 90732 and 90733) is performed in order to show the value of the performance display well, at least the performance display by the display monitor 901130 is limited. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a number due to fraudulent acts is displayed as valid.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display mode by the information display means is changed that the abnormality in the reception state is detected (for example, as shown in FIG. 138 or FIG. 139) To notify by changing etc.).

  Thereby, confirmation can be made without providing a new display means.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The abnormality detection unit can detect a break in the signal line (for example, it can be detected by monitoring a signal input from the out-of-ball detector 90710).
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, the game effect lamp 909, the speakers 908L, 908R, the display unit of the card unit, the calling lamp device, the hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected.

  Thereby, it can be recognized without performing the door opening operation.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-of-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit which can be disposed on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 143 (B)).

  This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

  In addition, although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as a gaming machine for performing performance display in FIGS. 116 to 143, medals are inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are displayed according to the operation of the control lever A game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbol is turned according to the operation of the stop button by the player. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that can execute (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of a big bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus, etc.)).

  For example, a slot machine that displays a performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a bonus, etc.) advantageous to the player, and a game medium (eg, medals) used for the game Etc.) and a signal line to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (eg, a detection signal from A signal line etc. output to the main substrate side of the machine, receiving means for receiving the detection signal (eg, main substrate of slot machine, predetermined connection portion provided on the main substrate side, etc.), and the detection signal Abnormality detection means (for example, the CPU of the main board of the slot machine etc.) capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a combination of symbols specific to each reel In a predetermined state different from the above-mentioned advantageous state, and the payout means (for example, a hopper motor for paying out the medal stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet) based on the fact that the game is stopped etc.) Predetermined information calculated based on the number of gaming media detected by the detection means and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of inserted sheets, etc. Information display means (for example, a display unit provided on a main substrate of a slot machine) capable of displaying the information displayed on the information display means when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means. A slot machine may be limited (for example, an error is notified, display of information indicating the above ratio is limited, and the like).

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 effect display 25D right-handed display unit 30 LED for right-handed notification
103 CPU
120 CPU for production control
901 Pachinko gaming machine 902 gaming board 903 frame for gaming machine 903a glass door frame 903A outer frame 904A, 904B special symbol display device 905 image display device 906A ordinary winning ball device 906B ordinary variable winning ball device 907 special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 game effect lamp 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 9014 lamp control board 9015 relay board 9020 normal symbol indicator 9021 gate switch 9022A, 9022B start opening switch 9023 count switch 9029 display monitor 9030 operation button 90100 game control Microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 901000 Movable roles

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game using gaming media and capable of controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Launching means capable of launching a game medium based on the operation of the player;
A first control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing recovery processing of the gaming state when receiving the power supply after stopping the power supply;
A display means capable of displaying a promotion display for promoting firing of the game medium so as to flow down a specific one of the flow paths through which the game medium flows, and a display means capable of displaying a recovery display related to the recovery process.
A means different from the display means, wherein the notification means is capable of promoting notification to promote firing of the game medium so as to flow down the specific path;
Second control means for controlling display on the display means based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
Detection means capable of detecting a game medium used for the game;
A signal line to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted;
Receiving means for receiving the detection signal;
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal;
A payout means for paying out gaming media based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Information capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state, and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state Display means,
Equipped with
Restricting the display by the information display means when an abnormality of the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means;
A game machine characterized in that the second control means can control to display the promotion display together with the recovery display.